Recommendations

 Huawei Learning Website

 http://learning.huawei.com/en

 Huawei e-Learning
https://ilearningx.huawei.com/portal/#/portal/ebg/51

n
tio
c a
Huawei Certification t i fi


e r
C
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_31
&


ng
&lang=en
n i
 Find Training
rai
T

ei
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_trai
a w
Hu
ningsearch&lang=en

More Informationn
it o
i c a
tif
 er
Huawei learning APP
C
&
n g
ini
a
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

版权所有© 2018 华为技术有限公司

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Huawei's NG WDM products provide full coverage from the CWDM/PON at the

Hu


access layer to the DWDM at the large-capacity backbone layer. The NG WDM

n
adopts a unified control plane design that supports hybrid networking and board
o
ti
sharing, this helps reduce the OPEX and CAPEX.

i ca
OptiX OSN 1800/8800/9800 are called next generation wavelength division
if


rt
multiplexing equipment.


C e
OptiX OSN 1800 series include the OSN 1800 I/II/OADM/V chassis. Multiple

&
chassis can be stacked to expand the number of access services. OptiX OSN
g
1800 series are located at the edge layer of the metropolitan area network
(MAN)in
i n and support almost all services of the 1.5Mbit/s~100Gbit/s.
r a OSN 8800 series include the OSN 8800 T16/T32/T64 subrack, OSN

TOptiX

ei 8800 platform subrack, and OSN 8800 UPS. The equipment integrates the

a w WDM large-capacity transmission (single wavelength 10G/40G/100G), multi-

Hu
plane cross-connect capability (ODUk, VC, and PKT), flexible electrical-layer
grooming, PID, ASON, rich OAM management, and optical/electrical layer
protection.

 OptiX OSN 9800 series include OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16, OSN 9800 P18, and
OSN 9800 UPS. OSN 9800 U64/U32 subracks are used at the electrical layer.
OSN 9800 U64/U32 subracks are used together with OptiX OSN 9800
UPS/OSN 8800 platform subrack/OSN 8800 UPS/OSN 8800 T16 to
implement WDM/OTN system applications.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Based on the service access capacity and service grooming granularity, the optical

Hu


transmission network is classified into the following types: Access layer,

n
aggregation layer, and backbone layer Based on the features of NG WDM
o
ti
equipment and the cross-connect grooming capability, different equipment can be

c
applied to different network layers.
i a

t
OptiX OSN 1800 is mainly
r if applied to the metropolitan convergence layer,
e layer, short long haul backbone network, regional
metropolitan access
C
backbone network, and local network. Supports 40/80 wavelength DWDM
& CWDM system specifications and supports hybrid
g
and 8 wavelength
n
i
transmission.

a in OSN 8800 is mainly used in national backbone networks,


r
OptiX
Tregional/provincial
ei
backbone networks, and some metro core sites.

w OptiX OSN 9800 is mainly used at the backbone and metro core layers.
a OptiX OSN 9800 and OSN 1800/8800 can form a complete OTN E2E network for


H u 

unified management
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
NG WDM uses the L0+L1+L2 three-layer architecture. The L0 optical layer

Hu


supports wavelength multiplexing/demultiplexing and DWDM optical signal

n
adding/dropping. The L1 electrical layer supports cross-connection of ODUk/VC
o
ti
services. The L2 layer implements Ethernet/MPLS-TP switching.

i ca
Through the backplane bus, the system control board controls other boards. It
if


t
provides functions such as inter-board communication, service grooming between
r
e
boards, and power supply. The backplane bus includes: Control and
C
communication bus, electrical cross-connect bus, clock bus, etc.
&
ng
The functions of the modules in the figure are as follows:
i


n
ai
 Optical-layer boards are used to process optical-layer services and

T r implements optical-layer grooming based on the λ level.

e i Electrical-layer boards are used to process electrical-layer signals and

w


a perform optical-to-electrical conversion for signals. Grooming granularities at

Hu different levels can flexibly schedule electrical-layer signals through the

centralized cross-connect unit.

 The system control and communication board is the control center of the
equipment. It works with the network management system to manage the
boards of the equipment and realize the communication between the
equipment.

 The auxiliary interface unit provides input and output ports for clock/time
signals, alarm output and cascading ports, and alarm input/output ports.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into

Hu


standard optical signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other

n
procedures. The board also performs the reverse process.
o


ati
Huawei OTN product series support the use of separate tributary and line boards.

i c
Tributary and line boards work with cross-connect boards. A tributary board plus a

t if
line board together performs the functions of an OTU board. Different from an
r
e
OTU board, the tributary and line boards achieve more flexible and fine-grained
C
grooming of electrical services and offers a higher bandwidth utilization by
&
ng
working with a cross-connect board.

ni
Optical multiplexer boards multiplex multiple optical signals into one ITU-T G.694-
ai


r
compliant optical signal. Optical demultiplexer boards demultiplex one multiplexed
T
e i
optical signal into individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals.

wOptical amplifier boards are used to compensate for power loss caused by long
a haul transmission in fiber communication systems. They are classified into erbium-


H u
doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) boards and Raman boards.

 OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC
boards provide high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards
transmit an OSC signal using a wavelength different service wavelengths.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ASON is a new generation of the optical transmission network. The ASON

Hu


software provided by Huawei can be applied to NG WDM equipment to support

n
the evolution from a traditional network to an ASON network. Such evolution
o
ti
complies with the ITU and IETF ASON/GMPLS-related standards. ASON technology

ca
involves signaling switching and a control plane to enhance its network connection
i
rt if
management and recovery capability. ASON technology provides wavelength-level

C e
ASON services at the optical layer and ODUk level ASON services at the electrical
layer. It also supports end-to-end service configuration and SLA.
&
ng
 With ROADM technology, the NG WDM supports flexible optical-layer grooming
i
in one to nine degrees. The ROADM solution realizes reconfiguration of
n
ai
wavelengths by blocking or cross-connecting of wavelengths. This ensures that the
r
T
static distribution of the wavelength resource is flexible and dynamic. ROADM with
i
e
U2000 can remotely and dynamically adjust the status of wavelength

a w adding/dropping and passing through for a maximum of 80 wavelengths, and

Hu support 1-degree to 9-degree optical-layer grooming.

 LPT function applies to scenarios in which WDM equipment receives and transmits
Ethernet services. With the LPT function, lasers of WDM equipment can be
alternately turned on and off. The working status of the lasers enables client
equipment to know the link status. When knowing the link is in an abnormal state,
the client equipment will choose the working or protection link for communication
with the WDM equipment to protect the services transmitted between them.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OSN 9800 U64 supports grooming of ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex) services. The

Hu


IU1~IU64 slots have the same cross-connect capacity. The maximum cross-
connect capacity of a single slot is 400Gbit/s.
o n


ati
OSN 9800 U32 supports grooming of ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex) services and

i c
Packets services. The IU1~IU32 slots have the same cross-connect capacity. The

t if
maximum cross-connect capacity of a single slot is 400Gbit/s. In the current
r
e
version, the maximum packet service grooming capability of a subrack is 3.2Tbit/s.
C

&
OSN 9800 U16 supports grooming of ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex) services. The

ng
IU1~IU14 slots have the same cross-connect capacity. The maximum cross-

n i
connect capacity of a single slot is 400Gbit/s, and the maximum cross-connect

r ai
capacity of a single subrack is 5.6Tbit/s.

i T

e
OSN 9800 P18 and OSN 9800 platform subracks are optical subracks. The main

a w differences between them are as follows:

Hu  The number of slots is different: OSN 9800 P18 subrack has 23 slots. OptiX
OSN 9800 platform subrack has 21 slots.

 The slot distribution is different. The SCC boards in the OSN 9800 P18
subrack are installed in IU17 and IU18. The SCC board of the OSN 9800
platform subrack is inserted in IU1 and IU2.

 Mechanical specifications: The dimensions of the OSN 9800 P18 subrack are
497mm (W) ×295mm (D) ×400mm (H). The dimensions of an OptiX OSN
9800 platform subrack are 442mm (W) ×291mm (D) ×397mm (H).
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ROADM technology works with the U2000 to adjust the wavelength

Hu


adding/dropping and pass-through status to dynamically adjust the wavelength

n
status. It supports a maximum of 80 wavelengths and supports flexible optical-
o
ti
layer grooming from one dimension to 20 dimensions.

i ca
OptiX OSN 9800 supports the 40/80x 100Gbit/s transmission solution. The
if


t
advanced modulation code pattern and coherent detection technology are used to
r
e
overcome the challenges of the 100Gbit/s system in terms of the transmission
C
physical effect, such as OSNR, CD tolerance, PMD tolerance, and non-linear, and
&
ng
achieve long-distance transmission.

ni
The 80*40G without electrical relay transmission 1500km (eDQPSK coding) and the
ai


r
40/80x100Gbit/s (ePDM-QPSK) transmission solution can be implemented through
T
e i
specific coding. The Super WDM coding schemes such as NRZ, DRZ, ODB, and

w eDQPSK can reduce the OSNR requirement of the system.

a The client side supports three types of pluggable optical modules: Enhanced Small
H u 

Form-Factor Pluggable (eSFP), 10 Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable (XFP), and

100 Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable (CFP).
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OSN 8800 T32 and OSN 8800 T64 have two types of subracks: Enhanced subrack

Hu


and general subrack. In addition to the cross-connect capacity, the enhanced

n
subrack and the general subrack have the same appearance and technical
o
ti
specifications.

OSN 8800 T64 subrack:

i ca
if


r t
Enhanced OSN 8800 T64 subrack, supporting 6.4T ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4,
e


flex)
C
&
General OSN 8800 T64 subrack, supporting 2.56T ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)
g


i
OSN 8800 T32 n subrack:
in OSN 8800 T32 subrack, supporting 3.2T ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4,


r a
Enhanced
T


ei General OSN 8800 T32 subrack, supporting 2.56T ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)
flex)

a w 

Hu OSN 8800 T16 subrack:



 Supports 640G ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, and flex).

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ROADM technology works with the U2000 to adjust the wavelength

Hu


adding/dropping and pass-through status to dynamically adjust the wavelength

n
status. It supports a maximum of 80 wavelengths and supports flexible optical-
o
ti
layer grooming from one dimension to 20 dimensions.

i ca
OptiX OSN 8800 supports the 40/80x 100Gbit/s transmission solution. The
if


t
advanced modulation code pattern and coherent detection technology are used to
r
e
overcome the challenges of the 100Gbit/s system in terms of the transmission
C
physical effect, such as OSNR, CD tolerance, PMD tolerance, and non-linear, and
&
ng
achieve long-distance transmission.

ni
The 80*40G without electrical relay transmission 1500km (eDQPSK coding) and the
ai


r
40/80x100Gbit/s (ePDM-QPSK) transmission solution can be implemented through
T
e i
specific coding. The Super WDM coding schemes such as NRZ, DRZ, ODB, and

w eDQPSK can reduce the OSNR requirement of the system.

a The client side supports three types of pluggable optical modules: Enhanced Small
H u 

Form-Factor Pluggable (eSFP), 10 Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable (XFP), and

100 Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable (CFP).

 OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack and the OptiX OSN 8800 UPS do not have the
cross-connect capability. The differences between the OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack and the OptiX OSN 8800 UPS subrack are as follows: Dimensions, number
of slots, weight, management ports, and number of fans.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OSN 1800 I chassis and OSN 1800 II compact chassis supports only the OTN plane.

Hu


OSN 1800 II packet chassis and OSN 1800 V chassis support the OTN&PKT&SDH

n
three planes, which are used together with the existing WDM equipment to
o
ti
implement service expansion.

i ca
In the OptiX OSN 1800 series, only the OSN 1800 I chassis and OSN 1800 II
if


rt
compact chassis support xPON transmission.

C e
A DWDM system supports a maximum of 40 wavelengths.


A CWDM system & supports a maximum of eight wavelengths and the working
g


i n
wavelength range is 1471nm~1611nm.

a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 1800 V chassis uses MS-OTN unified switching. A single subrack

Hu


supports a maximum of 800G OTN capacity and 800G packet capacity.

o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
FE: Fast Ethernet a w
Hu


 GE: Gigabit Ethernet

ESCON: Enterprise systems connection

o n
ti


 FICON: Fiber connection

i ca
 FC: Fiber channel
rt if
HDTV: High Definition e
CTV
& broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface
DVB-ASI: Digital video
g


i n video broadcasting-serial digital interface

n
DVB-SDI: Digital

ai distributed data interface



FDDI: rFiber
T


e i
a w
H u
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Huawei provides two types of cabinets that comply with the ETS 300-119 standard:

Hu


N66B and N63B.

 Standard operating voltage: -48V DC/-60V DC.

o n
Operating voltage range:
ati
c


if i


rt
-48 V DC: -40V to -57.6V


C e
-60V DC: – 48 V to -72V


&
A 400 mm high enclosure frame can be added to the top of the cabinet to ensure

ng
that the cabinet height reaches 2600mm.
i
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The PIU board of the OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32 has a magnetic circuit breaker,

Hu


which can be directly connected to the power distribution cabinet.

o n
In all subracks of the OptiX OSN 1800, OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 9800

ti
U16/P18/UPS subracks, the PDU distributes power from the power distribution
a
cabinet to the PIU.
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The DC power distribution box (PDU) of the N63B/N66B consists of the TN16,

Hu


TN51, PDU (DPD63-8-8), and TN11. (The OSN 9800U32/U64 subrack does not
require a DC power distribution box.)
o n


ati
The functions of TN51PDU and TN16PDU are the same, and their heights are
different.
i c
r t if
When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed in a cabinet, one DCM
e


C
frame can be configured when the TN16PDU is used.

&
The DC power distribution box is installed in the upper part of the cabinet. The
g


terminalsin
in
input ports are divided into two parts: A and B. Each part has four power input
and four power grounding terminals.

The T ra input area of the TN16PDU is classified into the following two types
power
ei


according to the current provided by the power supply equipment in the

a wequipment room:
Hu When eight 63 A current inputs are available, no copper fittings are required.


 When only four 125A inputs are available, a short-circuit copper bar is
required. The current of each 125A is divided into two 63 A currents.

 The PDU (DPD63-8-8) can replace the TN11PDU, TN16PDU, and TN51PDU.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is configured with eight PIU boards and uses the 1+1

Hu


hot backup mode to supply power to the system. OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is

n
configured with four PIU boards, which work in 1+1 hot backup mode to supply
o
ti
power to the system. The other subracks are configured with two PIU boards,

ca
which work in 1+1 hot backup mode to supply power to the system.
i
OptiX OSN 9800 U16 subrack

r t if is configured with four PIU boards. The number of
e configured based on the load to achieve continuous
power inputs can be flexibly
C
power expansion. OptiX OSN 9800 M24 subrack is configured with four PIU boards
and uses the 1+1&
g hot backup mode to supply power to the system.
n versions of the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 9800 are as follows:
i
in and TNG2 (M24).
The functional


r a
TNS1 (U16)

i T
eTN11,
The
 functional versions of the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 8800 are as follows:
w TN15, TN16, TN18, and TN51. Only the TN16PIU supports the intelligent
a electric meter function (detects the power consumption of the entire subrack and
H u
reports the detected value to the main control module).

 The overcurrent protection function of the access power of each subrack is

implemented through the magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 1800I/II/V subrack supports the AC power supply solution. The OSN

Hu


8800/9800 subrack does not support the AC power supply except the UPS.

o n
The APIU board occupies a large number of slots, which is seldom used on the live

ti
network, this section describes only the AC power supply solution of the OSN
a
1800V.
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Slot 17, Slot 18, and Slot 19: When the DC power board PIU is inserted, the value is

Hu


fixed to Slot 17 and Slot 18. When the APIU is inserted, it is fixed to Slot 17 and

n
Slot 19. When the DC power board PIU is inserted, the Slot 19 can be installed with
o
ti
the optical wavelength conversion (OTU) board, optical add/drop multiplexer

ca
(OADM) board, optical amplifier board, multiplexer/demultiplexer board, optical
i
rt if
protection board, optical supervisory channel board, and auxiliary board.


C e
Slot 20 is used to house the FAN board.


&
Note: The Slot 19 board cannot house the packet processing board, tributary

ng
board, or line board because there is no cross-connect service bus in the slot.

n i
ai
 When the board that supports electrical ports is inserted into the OptiX OSN 1800

T r
V chassis, the electrical port is restricted by the chassis. The maximum number of

e i
available electrical ports must meet the following requirements:

a w When an unshielded network cable is used, a single layer of the chassis

Hu


supports a maximum of six network cables. A single layer supports a

maximum of six electrical module interfaces.

 When shielded network cables are used, a single layer of the chassis provides
four network cables. A single layer supports a maximum of four electrical
module interfaces.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Wavelength range: DWDM 1529.16 nm~1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.694.1)

Hu(OTUC4)


Maximum rate of a single channel: 400 Gbit/s



Network topology: Point-to-point, chain,

o n star, ring, ring with chain, tangent ring,
ti


a
intersecting ring, and mesh networking
ic 1+1 protection , ODUk SNCP, OLP , Intra-board
t i f
Network-level protection: Client a a

1+1 protection , Tributaryr SNCP, and LPT.


a

C e
Synchronization :
&
 b

n g
IEEE 1588v2
i


in or 2 MHz external clock access source (with the SSM function),

2 Mbit/s
a
r


T meeting the ITU-T G.703 standard

ei External time access source: (1PPS+TOD)

wDevice running environment:


a
Hu


 Temperature: Long-term: 5°C~40°C, short-term: -5°C~45°C

 Humidity of the subrack: Long-term: 5%~85%, short-term: 5%~90%

 Note:

 a: This feature must be used together with OSN 9800 P18/OSN 8800
platform subrack/OSN 8800 T16/OSN 8800 UPS.

 b: This feature requires the support of the OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 9800 U64 equipment has integrated the OptiX OSN 9800 U64 subrack

Hu


in a cabinet and provides board slots on both the front and rear sides. Boards

n
need to be installed in the designated slots. The equipment runs on -48 V DC or -
o
ti
60 V DC and is divided into different areas in which boards are powered by

ca
designated PIU boards in different slots.
i
t
PIU boards are located in the

r if power and interface area. If an area has the same
background color as a PIU
C e board, then the PIU board powers the boards located in
this area.
& are used to ventilate the equipment.
g
The fan tray assemblies
n connecting to boards are routed to the left or right side of the
i



a in
Fiber patch cords

T r through the upper- and lower-side fiber troughs.

equipment

ei boards need to be configured based on the service plan and all of them
Service
ware installed in the two service board areas.


a
Hu Cross-connect boards are configured in M:N backup mode to implement cross-


connections for services boards on the front and rear sides.

 The system control boards are configured in 1+1 backup mode. The active system
control board manages and provides a clock to all other boards in the equipment.
It also provides for inter-NE communication.

 When a U64 subrack is used as a pure regeneration subrack, no cross-connect

board is required.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 9800 U64 provides various management interfaces.

Hu


 EFI:

o n
SubRACK_ID: the LED on the front panel that displays the subrack ID. By
ti


i ca
observing the subrack ID displayed on this LED, the user can determine

if
whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack in a multi-subrack
rt
configuration. This function is reserved.
e
C alarm output/cascading interface.
LAMP: subrack
&



g
ALMI/ALMO1/ALMO2: housekeeping alarm input/output interfaces.
n management serial interface.
n i
a i
 SERIAL:

r CLK1-CLK2/ TOD1-TOD2 : clock/time signal input and output interfaces.

iT


e CTU:
w


a
Hu
 GE1/GE2: Connects to the GE1/GE2 interface in another OptiX OSN
9800 U64/U32/U16 subrack though a network cable to implement
multi-subrack communication.

 NM: Connects to the network interface on the NMS computer through a

network cable, so that the NMS can manage OptiX OSN 9800. Connects
to the NM interface on another NE through a network cable to
implement inter-NE communication. This NE can be OptiX OSN 9800,
OptiX OSN 8800.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Wavelength range: DWDM 1529.16 nm~1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.694.1)

Hu(OTUC4)


Maximum rate of a single channel: 400 Gbit/s



Network topology: Point-to-point, chain,

o n star, ring, ring with chain, tangent ring,
ti


a
intersecting ring, and mesh networking
ic 1+1 protection , ODUk SNCP, OLP , Intra-board
t i f
Network-level protection: Client a a

1+1 protection , Tributaryr SNCP, and LPT.


a

C e
Synchronization :
&
 b

n g
IEEE 1588v2
i


in or 2 MHz external clock access source (with the SSM function),

2 Mbit/s
a
r


T meeting the ITU-T G.703 standard

ei External time access source: (1PPS+TOD)

wDevice running environment:


a
Hu


 Temperature: Long-term: 5°C~40°C, short-term: -5°C~45°C

 Humidity of the subrack: Long-term: 5%~85%, short-term: 5%~90%

 Note:

 a: This feature must be used together with OSN 9800 P18/OSN 8800
platform subrack/OSN 8800 T16/OSN 8800 UPS.

 b: This feature requires the support of the OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Boards need to be installed in the designated slots in the subrack. The subrack

Hu


runs on -48 V DC or -60 V DC .9800 U32 subracks are classified into two types,

n
namely 9800 U32 Standard and 9800 U32 Enhanced.
o


ati
PIU boards are located in the power and interface area. If an area has the same

i c
background color as a PIU board, then the PIU board powers the boards located in

t if
this area. The PIU boards are in mutual backup. Therefore, the failure of any power
r
e
input to the equipment does not affect the normal operation of the equipment.
C

&
The fan tray assemblies are used to ventilate the equipment.
g
n the upper- and lower-side fiber troughs.
i
Fiber patch cords connecting to boards are routed to the left or right side of the


equipment
a in through

T r boards need to be configured based on the service plan and all of them
Service
ei installed in the two service board areas.


are

a wCross-connect boards are configured in M:N backup mode to implement cross-

Hu connections for services boards on the front and rear sides.


 The system control boards are configured in 1+1 backup mode. The active system
control board manages and provides a clock to all other boards in the equipment.
It also provides for inter-NE communication.

 When a U32 subrack is used as a pure regeneration subrack, no cross-connect

board is required.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Wavelength range: DWDM 1529.16 nm~1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.694.1)

Hu(OTUC4)


Maximum rate of a single channel: 400 Gbit/s



Network topology: Point-to-point, chain,

o n star, ring, ring with chain, tangent ring,
ti


a
intersecting ring, and mesh networking
ic 1+1 protection , ODUk SNCP, OLP , Intra-board
t i f
Network-level protection: Client a a

1+1 protection , Tributaryr SNCP, and LPT.


a

C e
Synchronization :
&
 b

n g
IEEE 1588v2
i


in or 2 MHz external clock access source (with the SSM function),

2 Mbit/s
a
r


T meeting the ITU-T G.703 standard

ei External time access source: (1PPS+TOD)

wDevice running environment:


a
Hu


 Temperature: Long-term: 5°C~40°C, short-term: -5°C~45°C

 Humidity of the subrack: Long-term: 5%~85%, short-term: 5%~90%

 Note:

 a: This feature must be used together with OSN 9800 P18/OSN 8800
platform subrack/OSN 8800 T16/OSN 8800 UPS.

 b: This feature requires the support of the OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Boards need to be installed in the designated slots in a subrack. The subrack runs

Hu


on -48 V DC or -60 V DC and is divided into multiple areas in which boards are

n
powered by designated PIU boards in different slots. The subrack can be installed
o
ti
in an ETSI cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet.

ic a
The PIU boards in slots IU68 and IU80, and the PIU boards in slots IU69 and IU81
if


rt
are in mutual backup. Therefore, the failure of any power input to the subrack
e
does not affect the normal operation of the subrack.
C
&
The EFI board provides maintenance and management interfaces.


g
n communication. Two CTU boards are configured for mutual
i
The CTU boards manage the subrack, provide clock for service boards, and


implement
a ininter-NE

T r
backup.

ei cross-connect boards groom services between service boards. Cross-connect

The
wboards are configured in M:N backup mode. When a U16 subrack is used as a pure


a
Hu regeneration subrack, no cross-connect board is required.
 Fan tray assemblies are used to ventilate the equipment.

 Fiber patch cords connecting to boards are routed to the left or right side of the
equipment through the upper- and lower-side fiber troughs.

 Service boards need to be configured based on the service plan and all of them
are installed in the service board area.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The PIU boards are in mutual backup. Therefore, the failure of any power input to

Hu


the equipment does not affect the normal operation of the equipment. The EFI

n
board provides maintenance and management interfaces. The EFI board is
o
ti
powered by the CXP board.

ic a
Fan area: Two fan assemblies provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the
if


rt
subrack.

C e
Fiber trough: Two fiber routing troughs. The pigtails led out from the optical port


&
of the board are routed into the fiber spool on the side of the cabinet through the
fiber trough. g
i narea: One service board area. There are 24 service board slots in
n
ai
Service board


total. r
T Configure service boards according to the service planning. All service
i need to be inserted into this area. The ejector lever is on the left. Two small
eslots
boards
w can be combined into one large slot. One small slot has a high 5.5U, and one
a large slot has a high 11U. A maximum of 12 slots are supported.
H u
 Two CXP boards work in 1+1 backup mode to provide system control and
communication functions. They manage and provide clock signals for all other
boards in the subrack, implement inter-NE communication, and provide cross-
connections and service grooming between service boards.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack are the same

Hu


as those of the OptiX OSN 9800 universal platform subrack.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When inserting a board into a subrack, comply with the slot assignment

Hu


requirements. Subracks are classified into the following types: Interface area, board
area, fiber trough, and fan area.
o n


ati
Interface area: The EFI provides maintenance and management interfaces.

ic


r if
Board area: Slots IU1 to IU16 can be used to house service boards. When a
t
universal platform subrack is used as the master subrack, it is recommended that

Ce
you configure two SCC boards or one SCC board.

&
When two SCC boards are configured, the two SCC boards back up each
g


i n
other and are inserted in slots IU1 and IU2.

a
Whenin only one SCC board is configured, it can be installed in slot IU1 or IU2.
r the SCC board is inserted in slot IU1, slot IU2 can house service boards.


i TWhen
e When the SCC board is installed in slot IU2, the service board cannot be

a w inserted in slot IU1.

Hu When a universal platform subrack is used as a slave subrack, the SCC board


cannot be configured. In this case, the IU1 and IU2 slots can house service boards.

 Fiber trough: The fiber jumper led out from the optical port on the front panel of
the board passes through the fiber routing area and fiber spool and then enters
the side panel of the cabinet.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Structure: a w
Hinu this area. 93 slots are available.


Board area: All the boards are installed

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpersn



i o from the ports on the front panel of each

board are routed to the fibert cabling area before being routed on a side of
ic a
the open rack.
r t if
Ce contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat
Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack.
Each fan tray assembly
dissipation for& the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four
n g
i
indicators that indicate fan status and related information.
n It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic
Air ifilter:


r a
i Tcleaning.
e
a w  Fiber spool: Rotable fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers

Hu
are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to
another subrack.

 Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.

 Note: A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64

subrack, and the one that is not identified by "Enhanced" is a universal OptiX OSN
8800 T64 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed as OSN8800 T64
Enhanced and OSN8800 T64 Standard respectively on the U2000.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 are reserved for service boards.

Hufor the EFI1.



IU71 is reserved for the EFI2. IU76 is reserved



IU87 is reserved for the ATE.

o n
i


a tIU88,

ic
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, and IU89 are reserved for the PIU.

IU72, IU83, IU73 and IU84:tif



e r
OptiX OSN 8800CT64 General subrack: IU72 and IU83 are used to house AUX


boards, and & IU73 and IU84 are reserved for future use.

i
OptiX OSNng 8800 T64 Enhanced subrack: IU72 and IU83 are used to house the
in AUX boards, IU73 and IU84 are used to house the standby AUX boards.


active
a
r IU86 are reserved for the STG. IU82 is reserved for the STI.
IU75Tand
ei and IU85 are reserved for the SCC.


a wIU74


Hu
IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board.


 Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2UXCT or TNK4XCT.

 General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4XCT or TNK2XCT.

 IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the cross-connect board.

 Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2USXH, TNK4SXH or TNK4SXM.

 General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM, or

TNK2SXM.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Structure: a w
Hinu this area. 50 slots are available.


Board area: All the boards are installed

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpersn



i o from the ports on the front panel of each

board are routed to the fibert cabling area before being routed on a side of
ic a
the open rack.
r t if
Ce dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide
ventilation and heat
tray assembly &has four indicators that indicate subrack status.
g
n It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic
i
Air filter:
in


a
cleaning.
r
i TFiber spool: Rotable fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers
e


a w are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to

Hu
another subrack.

 Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.

 Note: A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32

subrack, and the one that is not identified by "Enhanced" is an universal OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed as OSN8800
T32 Enhanced and OSN8800 T32 Standard.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 are reserved for service boards.

Hufor the EFI1.



IU37 is reserved for the EFI2. IU38 is reserved



IU48 is reserved for the ATE.

o n
ti


a
ficreserved for the PIU.
IU47 is reserved for the STI.



r i
IU39, IU40, IU45 and IU46 tare

IU41 and IU43:


C e
OptiX 8800 T32& General subrack: IU41is reserved for the AUX, IU43 is
g


i
reserved n for future use.
a in 8800 T32 Enhanced subrack: IU41 is reserved for active AUX, IU43 is
r
OptiX


i Treserved for standby AUX.

e and IU44 are reserved for the STG.
wIU42
a IU28 is reserved for the active SCC.


H u 

 IU11 is available for the standby SCC or the other boards.

 IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the cross-connect board.

 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 General subrack: XCH or XCM.

 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Enhanced subrack: UXCH, UXCM, XCH or XCM.

 IU50 and IU51 are reserved for the fans.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Structure: a w
Hinu this area. 24 slots are available.


Board area: All the boards are installed

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpersn



i o from the ports on the front panel of each

board are routed to the fibert cabling area before being routed on a side of
ic a
the open rack.
r t if
Ce dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide
ventilation and heat
tray assembly &has four indicators that indicate fan status and related
n g
i
information.
n It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic
Air ifilter:


r a
i Tcleaning.
e
a w  Fiber spool: Rotable fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers

Hu
are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to
another subrack.

 Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
IU1-IU8, and IU11-IU18 are reserved for service boards.

Hu


 IU19 is reserved for the EFI.

o n
IU20 and IU23 are reserved for the PIU.
ti



c a
IU21 and IU22 are reserved for the AUX.
i
r tif
IU24 is reserved for the ATE.


Cefans.
IU25 is reserved for the


IU9 and IU10 are & reserved for the XCH or for the other service boards.
g


i n
inIU9 and IU10 can be used to house other service boards only when the
Note:


r a
Slots
T


ei Each of slots IU9 and IU10 must be filled with a filler panel when they are
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as a slave subrack.

a w 

Hu
used to house service boards.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The functional versions of the ATE board are as follows: TN16 and TN51.

Huaccording to the board version. The



The number of ports on the ATE board varies



n
specifications vary according to the board version. The TN16ATE and TN51ATE

t io
boards cannot substitute for each other.

ic a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The functional versions of the EFI board are as follows: TN15, TN16, and TN18.
u


The number of interfaces on the EFI board H

 varies according to the board version.
The specifications vary according to the n board version. Boards of different versions
cannot substitute for each other. io
a t
Note: LAMP interface provides
i f ica 5V power supply and can be used only to connect
t cabinet. The RJ45 network cables of the NM_ETH, ETH,


to the alarm indicator of r

the

C e
ALMO, and CLK interfaces cannot be inserted into the LAMP interface. Otherwise,

&
the EFI board or the customer's meters and devices may be damaged.

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32 (TNV3EFI), OSN 9800 U16 (TNS2EFI), and OSN 9800M24

Hu


(TNG1EFI) provide various management interfaces.

n
SubRACK_ID: Displays the master/slave relationship of each subrack during
o
ti


subrack cascading. 0 indicates that the subrack where the board resides is

ic a
the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID cannot be read. Other

rt if
values indicate that the subrack where the board resides is a slave subrack.

Ce
LAMP: subrack alarm output/cascading interface


&
ALMI/ALMO1/ALMO2: housekeeping alarm input/output interfaces
g


SERIAL:i nmanagement serial interface

in clock signal input and output interfaces


r a
CLK1-CLK2:
T


e i TOD1-TOD2: time signal input and output interface



a w Door Alarm: cabinet door access control alarm interface

Hu


 CE_CLK1/CE_CLK2: clock extended port of the cluster

 NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2: network management interfaces

 The EFI board has a DIP switch that controls the subrack ID. The default value is
00000.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port

Hu


on the EFI2 board.

o n
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the

ti
master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack
a
ic
is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by

t if
using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-
r
e
ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1.
C
Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from
&
ng
high to low are ID5- ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is
i
00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave
n
ai
subracks.
r
i T
When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
eAs shown in Figure, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in


w
a decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.


H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OSN 1800 OADM frame cannot be used independently. It can be used only as an

Hu


extended chassis of the OSN 1800 I or OSN 1800 II compact chassis to increase

n
the number of wavelengths accessed by a single NE and achieve low-cost
o
ti
networking. Use a straight-through cable to connect the OCTL port on the SCC

c a
board to the OCTL port on the CTL board.
i
The extended OADM frameiuses
t f the same chassis as the OSN 1800 I. It can house
r


only the OADM, FIU, and

C e SCS boards.
&
There is no main control board, fan module, or power board. The positions of the


original fan and

n g power board are CTL.
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OSN 1800 II packet chassis does not support the OADM frame. It has a large

Hu


service access capacity and can groom the convergence nodes of the electrical

n
signals at the electrical layer, thus enhancing the network flexibility.
o
 OTN:
ati
ic


rt if
Optical layer: Supports the insertion and demultiplexing of any 2/4/8
adjacent wavelengths on the OTM and OADM boards.

C e
Electrical-layer: Supports intra-board cross-connections of
&


ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex/ODU2/ODU4.
g
n The following figure shows the access capacity of each slot.
i
Packet: 60Gbit/s.
in


r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 SDH: 20Gbit/s higher order cross-connect capacity, 5Gbit/s lower order cross-
connect capacity The following figure shows the access capacity of each slot.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OptiX OSN1800V has a large service access capacity. It can groom the

Hu


convergence nodes of the electrical signals at the electrical layer, thus enhancing
the network flexibility.
o n


ati
Slot 17, Slot 18, and Slot 19: When the DC power board PIU is inserted, the value

ic
of this parameter is fixed to Slot 17 and Slot 18. When the APIU is inserted into the

t if
AC power board, it is fixed to Slot 17 and Slot 19. When the DC power board PIU is
r
e
inserted, the Slot 19 can be installed with the optical wavelength conversion (OTU)
C
board, optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) board, optical amplifier board,
&
ng
multiplexer/demultiplexer board, optical protection board, and auxiliary board.

ni
The Slot 19 board cannot house the packet processing board, tributary board, or
ai


r
line board because there is no cross-connect service bus in the slot.
T

e i
OptiX OSN 1800 V uses MS-OTN unified switching. A single subrack supports a

a w maximum of 800G OTN capacity, 800G packet capacity, 280G SDH higher order

Hu
capacity, and 20G SDH lower order capacity.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The DCM frame is used to house the Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM).

Hu distance on the line, the pulse of



When an optical signal is transmitted in a certain



the optical signal is broadened due tonthe accumulation of the positive dispersion,

t
which seriously affects the transmissionio performance of the system. The DCM uses
the passive compensation method
ic a to cancel the positive dispersion of the
transmission fiber by using ithe
t f negative dispersion of the dispersion
compensation fiber. In this r
e way, the signal pulse is compressed.
C
&on the DCF (dispersion compensation fiber) and DCM based on
According to different implementation principles, the DCM is classified into two


types: DCM based g

nbragg grating).
i
in
the FBG (fiber

r a

T
The insertion loss of the DCM (DCF) increases with the distance.

ei insertion loss of the FBG (DCM) is not related to the distance. The insertion
The
wloss is always 4 dB.


a
Hu The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight types of DCM optical modules: 5km, 10 km, 20


km, 40 km, 60km, 80 km, 100 km, and 120km.

 The DCM module has three important parameters: Compensate the fiber type,
compensation distance, and attenuation.

 Each DCM frame can house a maximum of two DCM modules. The DCM frame is
fixed on the column of the cabinet through mounting ears and screws.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu T32 subrack is set on the EFI1 board.
 Reference answer:

The subrack ID of the OSN8800 T64 or OSN8800

n
The subrack ID of the OSN8800 T16 subrack or OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform

t
subrack is set on the EFI board. Theiosubrack ID of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack
is set on the AUX board.
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OTU realizes the O-E-O conversion between client side signals and WDM side

Hu


standard signals.

o n
At the client side, no special requirement for the service, while the service should

ti
be in compliance with some standards such as ITU-T or IEEE. eSFP for less than
a
ic
2.5Gbps and XFP for 10Gbps can be configured based on customer requirement.

r tif
At the WDM side, output signals are in compliance with some standards such as
e


C
G.694 for wavelength allocation, G.709 for OTN and G.975 for FEC.

&
As most of Huawei OTUs support OTN, GCC0/1 byte in the overheads can be used
g


i n
for ESC transmission to save the cost of OSC.

a
ePDM-QPSK in is short for polarization-multiplexed quadrature phase-shift keying
isrdeveloped based on the differential quadrature phase shift keying (DQPSK)


and T
ei
technology. ePDM-QPSK is a preferred solution for 100G WDM transmission.

a wePDM-BPSK is short for polarization-multiplexed binary phase shift keying and is

Hu developed based on ePDM-QPSK. ePDM-BPSK is intended for 40G ultra long-haul


transmission.

 During the intermediate processing, alarm and performance will be reported to the
system. Because of O-E-O, it provides Retiming, Re-shaping and Regenerating
functions.
 ALS means Automatic Laser Shutdown function, WDM ALS could transparent SDH
ALS indication.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: "-"indicates that there is no letter, that is, there may be a board that does

Hu


not have a fourth letter.

o n
The OSN 9800U32/U64/U16 does not support this type of boards.

ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
LSX: 10Gbit/s wavelength conversion board a w
Hu


LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit



LSXL: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversionn

it o
 board

c a
LSQ: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
fi



r i
LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelengthtconversion board

LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/sC


e Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion
Service
Board &
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

Hu OTU1 wavelength conversion



LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)



board
o n
a
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing ti & optical wavelength conversion board
c


i f iwavelength
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2

t
runit
conversion board.

C
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet
 e
LEM24: 22 x GE +&
 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

i
LEX4: 4 x 10GE ngand 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
in


r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: The LQM2/LQM/LDGF2/LDGF board can access GE services at optical ports

Hu


or GE services at electrical ports.

o n
ELOM: enhanced 8-channel any rate service convergence wavelength conversion

ti
board (supported only by the OptiX OSN 1800)
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
xPON: x Passive Optical Network a w
Hu


GPON: gigabit-capable passive optical network



Note: The RX1/TX1~RX4/TX4 port on n


i o
GPON services and STM-16/OTU1tservices.
the LQPL/LQPU board is used to access

ic a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
TX/RX indicates the client side and IN/OUT indicates the WDM side.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Basic function: LSC convert signal as follows:1x 100GE/OTU4<->1x OTU4
u


100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125HGbit/s.



OTU4: OTN service at a rate of 111.71n

it o
 Gbit/s.

OTN function: Supports the OTNaframe format and overhead processing compliant
ic of client-side service signals into OTU4 signals.


with ITU-T G.709. Maps oneif

rt for OTU4 and ODU4. Supports TCM functions and
channel

C e
Supports SM and PM functions
TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4.
&

g
PRBS function: Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
n 100 GE pluggable optical modules on the client side.
i


a in
CFP2: Supports

T r Support inloop and outloop in both client and WDM side.

Loopback:


ei TN18LSC support WDM-side pluggable optical module.

The
wNOTE: To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use


a
Hu G.657A2 fibers.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (100GE/OTU4 services)
u


Parameter H
Unit Value

Optical Module Type t i on -

(100G BASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-

ic a 4×28G)-10 km-CFP2

Line Code Format

r tif - NRZ

CeType
Optical Source - SLM
&
n g
Target Transmission Distance - 10 km (6.2 mi.)
i
a inAverage
Total Launch Power 100GE: 1.7

Tr
dBm
(Min) OTU4: 3.5

ei Total Average Launch Power

dBm
100GE: 10.5

a w (Max) OTU4: 8.9

Hu
Average Launch Power per Lane 100GE: -4.3
dBm
(Min) OTU4: -2.5
Average Launch Power per Lane 100GE: 4.5
dBm
(Max) OTU4: 2.9

Transmit OMA per Lane (Min) dBm -1.3 (Only for 100GE)

Transmit OMA per Lane (Max) dBm 4.5 (Only for 100GE)
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The main functions and features supported by the ELOM board are wavelength conversion,
u


service convergence, and ALS.

H
G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications. n
WDM specifications: Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications and ITU-T


tio board and port working modes:

F2ELOM (STND) boards support theafollowing
ic


1*AP8 general mode, theifboard supports the following port working modes:
rt mode


C e
ODU0 non-convergence


&
ODU1 convergence mode


n g
i
ODU1 non-convergence mode


a inODUflex non-convergence mode

r


T
ei (4.9 Gbit/s to 10.5 Gbit/s)/InfiniBand 5G <-> 1 x OTU2/OTU2e
1*AP1 ODU2 mode, the board supports the following port working mode: 1 x Any


a w 1*AP1 ODUflex mode, the board supports the following port working mode: 1 x CPRI
Hu


option6/FC800/FICON 8G/InfiniBand 5G <-> 1 x OTU2

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Basic function: a w
u two channels of 10GE WAN/10GE


Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services

 Hand
LAN services received directly onnthe client side into two channels of
standard WDM wavelength OTU2
t io signals and performs the reverse process.
ic a GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE
tif
Converges multiple flat-rate


service. r
Ce
QoS (Quality of Service)


&

g
Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).
n IEEE802.1p.
i


a in
Supports

T r
Supports DSCP.

ei (Link Aggregation Group)



LAG
w Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk


a
Hu


ports.

 Supports manual and static LAGs.

 Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.

 Flow control: Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and

flow control termination.

 Maximum transmission unit (MTU): Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A OTN tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion,

Hu


maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical

n
signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection.
o


ati
A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals cross-connected from

ic
cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and
standard wavelengths.
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Tributary unit only has client side. The port name is TX/RX.

Huis IN/OUT.


Line unit only has WDM side. The port name



o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The N401 board uses coherent detection technology and is targeted for coherent

Hu


communications.

o n
When the N401 board works in relay mode and ESC is used for communication,

ti
you are advised to install the N401 boards in adjacent paired slots. If they are not
a
ic
installed in adjacent paired slots, you must manually establish the MAC connection
of DCN.
rt if
C e
OptiX OSN 9800 U64 Standard subrack: You are advised to install a pair of


&
N401 boards in relay mode in any of the following slot pairs: IU1/IU2,
g
IU3/IU4, ..., IU61/IU62, and IU63/IU64.
n 9800 U32 Standard subrack: You are advised to install a pair of
i


a in
OptiX OSN

T r boards in relay mode in any of the following slot pairs: IU1/IU2,

N401

e i IU3/IU4, ..., IU29/IU30, and IU31/IU32.

a w OptiX OSN 9800 U16 subrack: You are advised to install a pair of N401

Hu


boards in relay mode in any of the following slot pairs: IU1/IU2, IU3/IU4, ......,
IU11/IU12, and IU13/IU14.

 OptiX OSN 9800 M24 subrack: You are advised to install a pair of N401
boards in relay mode in any of the following slot pairs: (IU1, IU13)/(IU2, IU14),
(IU3, IU15)/(IU4, IU16), ..., (IU9, IU21)/(IU10, IU22), and (IU11, IU23)/(IU12,
IU24).
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
NS4 converts signals as follows: a w
Hu


80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2(e)/2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4.


Supports mixed transmission of ODU0,

o nODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3
ti


signals.
a
ic board
Functional block diagram ofifthe
rt


C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As a type of line board, the ND2 board converts 16 x ODU0, 8 x ODU1, 4 x

Hu


ODUflex, or 2 x ODU2 signals into 2 x ITU-T G.694.1-compliant OTU2 signals or

n
converts 2 x ODU2e signals into 2 x ITU-T G.694.1-compliant OTU2e signals. The
o
ti
board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, and ODUflex
signals.
ic a
t if dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant

r
specifications.
C e
& signal output on the WDM side within the range of 80
Supports the optical tunable transponder. Equipped with this module, the board


g
can tune the optical
wavelengthsin
i n in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
r athe ITU-T G.709-compliant frame format and overhead processing.


i T
Adopts

e Provides path monitoring (PM) for ODU2, ODUflex, ODU1, and ODU0.
w Provides section monitoring (SM) for OTU2.


a
Hu


 Provides tandem connection monitoring (TCM) for ODU2, ODU1, and ODU0.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As an OTN tributary board, the V3T210/V3T220/V3T230 board can support a mix

Hu


of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2(e), and ODUflex signals.

o n
As an OTN tributary board, the T130 board can accept a maximum of 80 Gbit/s

ti
client services. The board supports a mix of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Basic function: a w
Hu


ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)



o n
ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)
ti (OTU2/Any->ODU2)


ODU2 non-convergence mode a

ic mode (Any->ODUflex)
f


rt i
ODUflex non-convergence
e


ODU1_ODU0 mode

C (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
& mode (n*Any->ODU1)
ODU1 convergence
g


Signal Flow:in
in direction: The client-side optical module receives optical signals


r a
Transmit
T


ei and sends the electrical signals to the signal processing module. Then it
through the RX1-RXn optical interfaces, converts them into electrical signals,

a w performs operations such as signal mapping and OTN framing. Then the
Hu module produces and sends ODUk signals to the backplane for grooming.

 Receive direction: The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical

signals from the cross-connect board through the backplane. Then the
module performs operations, such as ODUk framing and demapping. Lastly,
the module produces and sends signals to the client-side optical module.
When the client-side optical module receives the signals, it performs E/O
conversion. Then the module produces and sends the optical signals to the
client equipment through the TX1-TXn optical interfaces.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
u


FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s H



o
Note: When receiving OTU1 services, then TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE
ti


1588v2 clock signals.

a
ic board
Functional block diagram ofifthe
rt


Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The TSC consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module,

Hu


control and communication module, and power supply module.

o n
Transmit direction: The client-side optical module receives one channel of

ti
100GE/OTU4 service signals through the RX interface, and performs the O/E
a
ic
conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal

t if
processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and
r
e
mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module sends
C
out one channel of ODU4 or n channel ODUflex (n = 1-80) electrical signals to the
&
ng
backplane for grooming.

n i
Receive direction: The signal processing module receives one channel of ODU4 or
ai


r
n channel ODUflex (n = 1-80) electrical signals from the cross-connection board
T
i
through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU4/ODUflex
e
a w framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out

Hu
one channel of 100GE/OTU4 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-
side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE/OTU4
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX
optical interface.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A universal line board supports hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH and packet

Hu


services. Compared to an OTN line board, a universal line board additionally

n
supports packet services and SDH services. In other words, a universal line board
o
ti
grooms a wider range of electrical signals and offers higher bandwidth utilization.

ic a
A universal line board receives and processes ODUk signals, VC-4 signals, or
if


t
packets signals from the cross-connect board. When receiving packets signalsor
r
e
VC-4 signals, the board processes the services, then maps them into ODUk signals,
C
performs multiplexing and E/O conversion, and sends out an OTUk optical signal
&
ng
carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength.

ni
The difference between the functions of the universal line boards lies in the service
ai


r
rate, number of channels, and types and quantity of services that can be processed
T
i
on the WDM side.
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
HUNQ2 application scenario: a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
g
n scenario:
i
in
HUNS3 application

r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Each port on a general service processing board can be used as a tributary port or

Hu


a line port. Therefore, the general service processing board provides the functions
of both OTN tributary and line boards.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
G210: 10 x 10 Gbit/s General Service Processing Board

Hu Board


G220: 20 x 10 Gbit/s General Service Processing



o n
G402: 2 x 100 Gbit/s General Service Processing Board
it



c a
G404: 4 x 100 Gbit/s General Service Processing Board
i is a general service processing board. Each port
t i fboard
The G210/G220/G402/G404


e r as a tributary port , a line port (line mode) or a line port

C
on the board can be used
(relay mode).
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 8800 also supports universal service processing board. The board name

Hu


is GS4.

o n
The GS4 board is a general service processing board (for gray optical signals) that

ti
converts the 80xODU0, 40xODU1, 10xODU2, 10xODU2e, 2xODU3, 1xODU4, or
a
ic
80xODUflex into one OTU4 signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the

t if
ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODU3 service and the ODUflex
r
service.
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Packet service boards are classified into two types: boards that process Ethernet

Hu


services and boards that process TDM services. The packet boards that process

n
Ethernet services provide a resilient LSP transport pipe to receive and transmit
o
ti
data packets and perform MPLS switching for the packets. They use MPLS-TP APS

c a
and MPLS-TP PW FPS to provide carrier-class protection for data services, offer a
i
rt if
variety of OAM methods such as MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and implement

Ce
bandwidth management using QoS. The boards that process TDM services, also
called CES/CEP boards, use the PWE3 mechanism to simulate the basic behaviors
&
and characteristics of TDM services on PSNs, enabling the PSNs to carry TDM
services.
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As a packet service board, the E124/E208/E212/E302/E401 board receives and

Hu


transmits FE/GE/10GE/40GE/100GE services, processes packet services, and

n
transmits packets to the cross-connect board for centralized cross-connections.
o


ati
EC116/EC404 are applicable to the time division multiplexing (TDM) pseudo wire

ic
emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) scenario. In this scenario, the PWE3 mechanism is

t if
used to simulate TDM services and connect the traditional TDM network to the
r
e
packet switched network (PSN).
C
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a
EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board w
u


EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch boardH



o
EX8: 8 x 10GE ethernet packet switch boardn
ti


ic a
PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board


i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A TDM board receives and transmits SDH signals. It converts the received optical

Hu


signals into VC signals and sends them to the cross-connect side. Then, the

n
universal line board converts the VC signals into OTUk optical signals that comply
o
ti
with WDM system requirements for the transmission in a WDM network.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on

Hu


service boards inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by collaborating with
the service boards.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
XCS: Centralized Cross-Connect Board a w
Hu


UXCS: Enhanced Universal Cross Connect Board



SXCL: 80G VC3/VC12 Low Order Universal

o n Cross-Connect Board
ti Board


ic a
UCXCS: Universal Cluster Cross Connect


i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 1800 supports only X40/EX40/FIU/DFIU/DSFIU.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
TN11/TN12M40V01: Multiplexes 40 channels of C_EVEN signals into one main

Hu


optical signal.

o n
TN11/TN12M40V02: Multiplexes 40 channels of C_ODD signals into one main
optical signal.
ati
ic


rt if
The attenuation adjustment range of M40V is 0dB to15dB.

Ce
The MON port power is 10/90 of the OUT port power, that is, the MON power is
10 dB lower than the OUT port power.
&
ng
 The insertion loss of M40V is 8dB.

ni
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Basic function a w
Hu a maximum of 40 channels of ITU-T


 In the two-fiber bidirectional system, multiplexes

noptical signals.
G.694.1-compliant standard-wavelength optical signals with a channel spacing of 100
o
ti
GHz into one channel of multiplexed

In the two-fiber bidirectional a



i f ic of 40 channels of ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard

system, demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed

rt signals with a channel spacing of 100 GHz.

optical signals into a maximum

e
single-wavelength optical

In the single-fiberC
&
 bidirectional system, multiplexes a maximum of 18 channels of

nginto one channel of multiplexed optical signals and demultiplexes one

ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard-wavelength optical signals with a channel spacing

i
of 100 GHz
n of multiplexed optical signals into a maximum of 18 channels of ITU-T
i
channel
a
Tr
G.694.1-compliant standard single-wavelength optical signals with a channel spacing
i
eOnline
of 100 GHz at the same time.

a w  optical performance monitoring

Hu Provides an online monitoring optical interface to which a spectrum analyzer can be



connected to monitor the spectrum the main optical path without interrupting
services.

 Insertion loss: < 6.5 dB

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The ratio of MON port to OUT port: 1/99 (20dB).

Hu(normal optical power):



Position of the FIU board in the WDM system



o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Supports multiplexing /demultiplexing optical signals between the ones with the

Hu


channel spacing of 100 GHz and the other ones with the channel spacing of 50
GHz.
o n


ati
Position of the ITL board in the WDM system:

ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a
All Reconfigurable OADM units provide four indicators. w
Hu


on
Indicator Name Color

t i
a
STAT Board hardware status indicator Red, green

fic
rti
ACT Service active status indicator Green

PROG
Ce
Board software status indicator Red, green

&Service alarm indicator

ng
SRV Red, green, yellow

n i
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the

Hu


multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power
of each adding channel.
o n


ati
Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board
to achieve expansion.
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9

Hu


board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the
nodes in the DWDM network.
o n


ati
Basic function: Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring

ic
or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any

t if
interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation.
r
 TN16WSM9
Ce
&
Supports signals with a 50 GHz channel spacing.
g


Supportsi n flexible grid wavelength signals. The signals have continuous n x

slicein


r a GHz spectrums (one slice is equal to 50 GHz, and n is an integer ranging

iT
from 1 to 8) to meet the bandwidth requirements of high-rate services. When
e multi-rate services are transmitted together, Gridless flexibly allocates

a w bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization efficiency.

Hu TN96WSM9


 Supports extended C-band wavelengths

 Supports flexible grid wavelength signals. The signals have continuous n x

slice GHz spectrums (one slice is equal to 12.5 GHz, and n = 3 to 32) to meet
the bandwidth requirements of high-rate services.Gridless flexibly allocates
bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization efficiency.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9

Hu


board is used with the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the
nodes in the DWDM network.
o n


ati
Basic function: Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine
directions at the same time.
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable

Hu


multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast

n
the signals received from the main optical path as nine channels of the same
o
ti
signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port.

Application:
ic a
if


rt
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As a type of wavelength selective switching board, the DWSS20 board is used with

Hu


the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop

n
multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
o
ti
network.

ic a
Wavelength adding: adds any wavelengths from any directions through ports AM1
if


rt
to AM20 and outputs the wavelengths through the OUT port.

Ce
Wavelength dropping: receives optical signals from the main path through the IN


&
port, drops wavelengths to any directions, and outputs them through ports DM1
to DM20.
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
MCS0816: Dual Multicast Switching Board (Extended C-band, 8D, 16 add/drop

Hu


multiplexing paired ports)

 Note:
o n
The AMx or DMx optical porttiof the TN51MCS0816 board can be connected


ic a and a protection board such as OLP, DCP, QCP.

r t if
only to a coherent OTU board

Ce to an any OUT optical port, and the same wavelength

 The wavelength services that are added from the same AM optical port can
be transmitted only
& be added to the same OUT optical port.
services cannot
g
n signals of the same wavelength can be dropped from different
i
The optical
DMin


r a optical ports, but one DM optical port can receive services of only one IN
Toptical port.
ei
a

w Wavelength adding: Adds 16 any coherent wavelength signals to any optical port

Hu
among AM1 to AM16 and outputs them from any optical port among OUT1 to
OUT8. The wavelength services that are added from the same AM optical port can
be transmitted only to an any OUT optical port, and the same wavelength services
cannot be added to the same OUT optical port.

 Wavelength dropping: Receives at most 16 coherent wavelength signals from 8

line-side optical ports and grooms the received signals to any DM optical port for
wavelength dropping. The optical signals of the same wavelength can be dropped
from different DM optical ports, but one DM optical port can receive services of
only one IN optical port.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals

Hu


to extend the transmission distance.

o n
Positions of EDFA and Raman boards in a WDM system

ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from

Hu


1529 nm to 1561 nm.

o n
Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without
electrical regeneration.
ati
ic


power: if
The OAU1 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the input optical
rt
OAU100: 16dB to
e
C 25.5dB
&



g
OAU101/OAU102: 20dB to 31dB
n 24dB to 36dB
i


a in
OAU103:

T r
OAU105: 23dB to 34dB
i


e OAU106: 16dB to 23dB

w


a
Hu
 OAU107: 19dB to 27dB, and supports adjustment of maximum total output
optical power.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The RAU2 board integrates with a backward Raman module, an EDFA module and

Hu


a VOA. Compared with an EDFA, the RAU2 board improves system performance in

n
addition to amplifying C-band optical signals at the receive end.
o


ati
Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OTM site)

ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The CTU board consists of an overhead processing module, clock module,

Hu


monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power
supply module.
o n


ati
Clock module: The clock module consists of the clock source selection sub-

ic
module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby

t if
CTU board switching control sub-module. Locks the external clock source,
r
e
service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the CTU board and the
C
system with the synchronization clock source. Updates the clock signals
&
ng
periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

n i
CPU and control module: Controls, monitors, and manages each functional
ai


T r module on the CTU board.

ei Power
 supply module: Powers the CTU board and supplies 3.3 V power for

a w the EFI, FAN, and PIU board.

Hu  Monitoring module: Detects whether boards in the subrack are in place and
reports associated alarms to the U2000.

 Overhead processing module: Receives and processes overhead signals from

service boards. Sends the processed overhead signals to the service boards.

 Communication module: Communicates with other boards in the subrack

through the Ethernet channel and reports their data to the U2000.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module,

Hu


monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power
supply module.
o n


ati
CPU and control module implements the control, monitoring and management of

ic
each functional module on the board.

rt if
Overhead processing module sends the overhead signals to the service board.
e


C whether the boards are in position and reports alarms

Monitoring module detects


to the U2000. &

g
nprovides the clock source for the system.
Clock module i
in module communicates with each board, and reports the data of


a
rboards to the U2000.
Communication
T


eThei power supply module for the OptiX OSN 8800 provides the entire system with
other

a w

Hu
3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in
the system. In addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total
power consumption is less than 60W.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC

Hu


boards provide high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards

n
transmit an OSC signal using a wavelength different service wavelengths.
o


ati
Positions of OSC boards in a WDM system

ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The AST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not properly installed,

Hu


the AST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical
interfaces and monitor other stations.
o n


ati
When the AST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal wavelengths of

ic
supervisory channel for TM1 is 1511 nm, and the signal wavelengths of supervisory

rt if
channel for TM2 is 1491 nm.

Ce
When the AST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory channel signal


&
wavelength is 1511 nm.

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection or 1:1 optical line protection for

Hu


services using their dual-fed and selective receiving or selective feeding and
selective receiving function.
o n


ati
Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals

ic
without impacting the signal performance.

rt if
Dispersion compensation boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during
e


C
fiber transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated

&
optical signals. This enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the

ng
output end.

ni
ai
 The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and

T r
provides clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply

e i
with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823. The STG board can apply to the optical-layer

a w and electrical-layer scenarios.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OPM8 board provides eight ports, and each port supports optical power

Hu


monitoring.

o n
Detects optical power of each wavelength and reports to the SCC board.
i
TN12OPM8/TN15OPM8 supportstdetection

a of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100
c detection for Flexible Grid wavelengths is not
Gbit/s and 200 Gbit/s signals.iOSNR
i f
e rt
supported.The TN12OPM8/TN15OPM8 board can interoperate with the Optical

C
Doctor management system license.

& range:1529-1561nm
Operating wavelength
g


i n for optical power:±1.5dB

Detected accuracy
in


r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Reference answer: a w
u


1. The boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 are Hclassified into the following types:
n
optical transponder unit, OTN tributary/line unit, cross-connect unit,

t io
demultiplexer/multiplexer, fixed/reconfigurable optical add/drop unit, optical

i
amplifier unit, system controlc aand communication unit, optical supervisory
t if unit, optical spectrum analyzer unit, and optical
channel unit, optical protection
r
variable attenuation eunit.
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM can be applied to the access layer, metro aggregation layer, metro core

Hu


layer, and backbone core layer.

o n
At the backbone layer, NG WDM equipment can be interconnected with metro

ti
DWDM equipment, SDH equipment, and datacom equipment to provide a large-
a
ic
capacity transmission channel for various services. The OptiX OSN 8800 is

t if
applicable to the national backbone network and provincial backbone network for
r
e
long-distance large-capacity transmission. The OptiX OSN 8800 can meet the
C
requirements of ultra-large capacity and ultra-long distance transmission, and
&
ng
provides a stable platform for multi-service operation and future network upgrade
i
and expansion.
n
i
a OSN 8800 uses the dense wavelength division multiplexing technology


T r
The OptiX

e i
to implement multi-service, large-capacity, and transparent transmission. It

wprovides flexible service grooming functions. It not only implements wavelength-

a granularity ROADM grooming at the optical layer, but also implements grooming
u
H of sub-wavelength services at the ODUk-granularity (k=0/1/2/2e/3/4/flex) within
each wavelength. This greatly improves the flexibility of service grooming and
bandwidth utilization.

 The OptiX OSN 8800 can form an end-to-end OTN network with the OptiX OSN
9800 and OptiX OSN 1800. The typical application of the OptiX OSN 8800 is to
form an OTN network. In addition, in the OCS network, it can also be networked
with the NG-SDH/PTN/datacom equipment to implement a complete transmission
solution.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM uses the L0+L1+L2 three-layer architecture. The L0 optical layer

Hu


supports wavelength multiplexing/demultiplexing and DWDM optical signal

n
adding/dropping. The L1 electrical layer supports cross-connection of ODUk/VC
o
ti
services. The L2 layer implements Ethernet/MPLS-TP switching.

ic a
Through the backplane bus, the system control board controls other boards. It
if


t
provides functions such as inter-board communication, service grooming between
r
e
boards, and power supply. The backplane bus includes: Control and
C
communication bus, electrical cross-connect bus, clock bus, etc.
&
ng
The functions of the modules in the figure are as follows:
i


n
ai
 Optical-layer boards are used to process optical-layer services and

T r implements optical-layer grooming based on the λ level.

e i Electrical-layer boards are used to process electrical-layer signals and

w


a perform optical-to-electrical conversion for signals. Grooming granularities at

Hu different levels can flexibly schedule electrical-layer signals through the

centralized cross-connect unit.

 The system control and communication board is the control center of the
equipment. It works with the network management system to manage the
boards of the equipment and realize the communication between the
equipment.

 The auxiliary interface unit provides input and output ports for clock/time
signals, alarm output and cascading ports, and alarm input/output ports.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM supports point-to-point, chain, ring, and mesh networking modes. It can

Hu


work with other NG WDM equipment to implement a complete transport network

solution.
o n


ati
Different networking modes have different application scenarios. Different

ic
networking modes can be selected based on service requirements.

rt
Point-to-point networking if
e


C
Point-to-point networking is the simplest networking mode and is used for
end-to-end &


service transmission. Point-to-point networking is the most basic

g
ndata private line services and storage services.
i
networking. Point-to-point networking is generally used for common voice
in
services,
a
T
Chain rnetworking
ei When some wavelengths need to be added or dropped locally and other


a w wavelengths continue to be transmitted, a chain network consisting of optical



Hu add/drop multiplexing devices is required. The service type of a chain

network is similar to that of a point-to-point network. It is more flexible and
can be used for point-to-point services. It can also be used for convergence
and broadcast services in simple networking.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Ring networking a w
Hu are important to the network


The security and reliability of the network



n
service quality. To improve the protection capability of the transmission

t
network, most of the metropolitanio DWDM networks adopt the ring topology.
ic a to the most widely used services, such as
The ring topology is applicable

t
point-to-point services,
r ifconvergence services, and broadcast services. A ring
e various complex network structures. For example:
network can also derive
C
Two tangent rings, two intersecting rings, and ring with chain.
&
Ring with chaingtopology
i n


a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
Tangent ring networking


 Intersecting ring networking

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Mesh networking a w
u


In a mesh network, a large number ofH

 nodes are connected through direct
routes. Therefore, the mesh network n has no node bottleneck. In addition, it
provides the function of routing
t io bypass to ensure service continuity when a
ic a multiple routes are available between two
device fails. In a mesh network,

t if
nodes, and service transmission
r
reliability is high. This is one of the main
networking modeseof an intelligent optical network. This networking mode is
flexible and easyCto expand. It is widely used in ASON networks.
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Principles for configuring optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards:

Hu is used for adding/dropping



For an 80-channel OTM site, if M40V/D40



wavelengths, ITL boards must benconfigured.

t io boards:


ic a
Principles for configuring optical amplifier

t
According to the opticali f power budget principle, the optical amplifier board
r according to the actual scenario.


e
needs to be configured
C
&
Principles for configuring optical supervisory channel boards:


n
The SC1 andg ST2 boards control the receiving and transmitting of optical
i


in
supervisory signals, and transmit and extract the overhead information of the
a
T r
system.

ei To  implement the IEEE 1588v2 synchronous clock processing function,

a w transparent transmission of two FE signals, and line fiber quality monitoring,

Hu
you need to use the ST2 board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OTM equipment is applied to the terminal station.

Hureceived from the west are separated



In the receive direction: The line signals



from the optical supervisory signalsn and the main channel optical signals. The
optical supervisory signals areio
t sent to the optical supervisory unit for
a optical signals are amplified and then sent to
processing. The main channel
ic
t
the optical demultiplexing
r if unit, after being separated, all wavelengths are
transmitted to theecorresponding wavelength conversion unit and then sent
Cequipment.
to the local client
&
The signal
n gflow in the transmit direction is the reverse process in the receive
i


n
direction.
ai site, the optical power in the transmit direction of the OTU board is flat.
At an rOTM


i T the M40V board is used.

e
Therefore,
w
a WDM side of the OTU board, and adjust the optical power between the receiver
In addition, reinforce the FOA at the receive end of the OTU client side and the
u


H sensitivity and the overload.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Optical and electrical layers are separated. It is recommended that configure

Hu


optical-layer boards on OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subracks and configure

n
electrical-layer boards on OSN 8800 T32 enhanced subracks.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OLA equipment is used in the optical amplifier station to amplify the optical

Hu


signals transmitted in the two directions.

n
The optical supervisory signals and main channel optical signals are
o
ti


separated from the received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are

ic a
sent to the optical supervisory unit for processing. The main channel optical

t if
signals are amplified by the optical amplifier unit and then multiplexed with
r
e
the processed optical supervisory signals, it is sent to the optical line for
C
transmission.
&
ng
The optical fiber connection at the OLA site is simple. The OAU1 board is used as
i


n
the optical amplifier board.

r ai


i T
The optical supervisory channel (OSC) board at the OLA site uses the ST2 board.

e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
OptiX OSN 8800 UPS: a w
Hu Each site needs to be configured


Configuration principle of the SCC board:



with the SCC board. By default, the n control board is configured with 1+1
protection.
t io
ic a
tif
Configuration principle of
 the monitoring channel board: The monitoring

e r
channel board is preferentially configured on the IU16 board, and one ST2

C
board can be configured.

&principle of the amplifier: According to the optical power

Configuration
g


i n to the actual scenario. The optical amplifier is installed on both

budget principle, the optical amplifier board needs to be configured
in
according
a
T r of the subrack.
sides

ei The FIU boards are installed on both sides of the subrack, as shown in figure
w


a IU3 and IU15. Then, the optical amplifiers are inserted in sequence.

Hu  Configuration principle of optical protection boards: OLP boards must be

configured when optical line protection is configured.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
FOADM sites can be classified into the following types:

Hu


 Parallel FOADM (or referred to as back-to-back OTM) adopts M40V/D40.

o n
Serial FOADM uses the MR2/MR4/MR8/MR8V.
ti


ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Parallel FOADM sites (back-to-back OTM sites) are generally used at intermediate

Hu


sites.

n
In the receive direction, the optical supervisory signals and main channel
o
ti


optical signals are separated from the line signals received from the west. The

ic a
optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for

rt if
processing. The main channel optical signals are amplified and then sent to
e
the optical demultiplexing unit.
C

&
Some wavelengths are separated into the wavelength conversion unit and
then sentgto the local client equipment. Other wavelengths are not
i n to the local. After passing through, the wavelengths are
in with the locally inserted wavelengths through the optical
demultiplexed

r a
multiplexed

i Tmultiplexing unit, and then amplified. Finally, the signals are multiplexed with
e
a w the processed optical supervisory signals and transmitted to the line for

Hu
transmission. That is, when the service needs to pass through, the west to
east pass-through service is used as an example. Directly connect the west
D40 to the east M40V fiber patch cord. If there are multiple directions, use
the ODF patch cord. When services need to be added or dropped, the
M40V/D40 is connected to the OTU board.

 The signal flow in the transmit direction is the reverse process in the receive
direction.

 When the service needs to be regenerated, the OTU board with the regeneration
function can be connected between D40 and M40V.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can also use the OSN 8800T32 general/enhanced subrack or OSN 8800T64

Hu


subrack.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The FOADM site that uses the MR2/MR4/MR8/MR8V series TTF boards is called

Hu


the serial FOADM. The serial FOADM equipment processes the optical signals in

n
the two transmission directions respectively.
o


ati
The MR2/MR4/MR8/MR8V board can add/drop 2/4/8 wavelengths, which can be

ic
cascaded. A maximum of eight MR2 boards can be cascaded. That is, a maximum

rt if
of 16 wavelengths can be added or dropped. If the number of wavelengths is
e
greater than 16, you are advised to use the parallel FOADM(M40V/D40).
C
&
If a FOADM site consists of two MR4 boards:


g
nand the main channel optical signals from the received line signals,
i
In the receive direction, the FIU board separates the optical supervisory


in
signals
a
T r sends the optical supervisory signals to the optical supervisory unit for
and

ei processing.
a w The optical signals of the main channel are amplified by the optical amplifier
Hu


and then sent to the MR4. Some wavelengths are separated into the optical
transponder unit and then sent to the local client equipment.

 After passing through, the wavelengths are multiplexed with the locally
inserted wavelengths, then amplified, multiplexed with the processed optical
supervisory signals, and then transmitted to the line for transmission.

 The signal flow in the transmit direction is the reverse process in the receive
direction.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As shown in the figure, the OSN 8800 T32 enhanced subrack is powered by a

Hu


separate PIU board based on the UXCH symmetry of the IU9 and IU10 boards. In

n
this case, the east and west directions do not need to be configured with two
o
ti
subracks. You can insert the boards that are added and dropped in the west

c a
direction into the left area of the UXCH, and insert the boards that are added and
i
rt if
dropped in the east direction into the right area of the UXCH.


Ce
The configuration principles of other boards are the same as those of the parallel
FOADM (M40V/D40).
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
ROADM site model a w
u


 ROADM sites consisting of RDU9 andH WSM9 boards (40/80 wavelengths)

ROADM sites consisting of WSD9

o nand WSM9 boards (40/80 wavelengths)
ti


c a
ROADM site consisting of WSMD2/WSMD4/WSMD9 boards
fi


r t i
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD9

Hu


board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add

n
and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the
o
ti
DWDM network.

ic a
Optical interfaces AM1-AM8, DM1-DM8, EXPI, and EXPO on the WSMD9 board
if


rt
also can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions.

C e
When coherent OTU or line boards are used, the M40V and D40 boards can be


& the coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection.

removed. The WSMD9 boards can be directly connected to the coherent OTU or
g
line boards because
n to 50GHz signal interval)
(Applicable ionly
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As shown in the figure, the optical-layer and electrical-layer subracks are separated.

Hu


In this case, electrical-layer boards are installed in the OSN 8800 T32 enhanced
subrack for electrical-layer grooming.
o n


ati
The WSM9 and RDU9 boards can be replaced with WSMD9 boards.

ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u
 Reference answer:

 The 80-channel signal flow at the OLA site H

is the same as the 40-channel signal flow. For
details, see page 17.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM system supports the 40/80×10Gbit/s transmission solution, which is

Hu


widely used on the live network. Generally, the optical layer and electrical layer
grooming are used together.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For the 10G wavelengths that need to pass through the local station, use the

Hu


following methods:

n
When the service signal quality is good, that is, the OSNR value is high, the
o
ti


optical-layer grooming can be directly used, and the optical-layer pass-

ic a
through of the service can be configured directly by using the ROADM.

rt if
When the service signal quality is poor, that is, the OSNR value is low, the
e


C
signal can be electrically regenerated. Two 10Gbit/s line units need to be

&
configured to use the ODU2 or 4×ODU1 electrical cross-connection at the

ng
electrical layer to configure the regeneration service signal.

n i
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The newly added and upgraded 40G wavelengths can be accessed to the

Hu


multiplexer unit at the same time with the 10G wavelengths on the live network.

n
This does not affect the existing and new services. During system design, pay
o
ti
attention to dispersion management and OSNR calculation.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For the 40G wavelengths that need to pass through the local station, use the

Hu


following methods:

n
When the service signal quality is good, that is, the OSNR value is high, the
o
ti


optical-layer grooming can be directly used, and the optical-layer pass-

ic a
through of the service can be configured directly by using the ROADM.

rt if
When the service signal quality is poor, that is, the OSNR value is low, the
e


C
signal can be electrically regenerated. In this case, two 40Gbit/s line units

&
need to be configured to use the ODU3 or 4×ODU2 electrical cross-

ng
connection to configure the regeneration service signal.

n i
ai
 For 40G electrical-layer grooming, NG WDM equipment supports ODU3

T r
granularity electrical-layer grooming, and 40G OTU3 services can be divided into

e i
four ODU2 services for grooming. For 40G service regeneration boards, four ODU2

a w signals are concatenated to the transmit side and then integrated into OTU3 for

Hu
transmission.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
With the development of mobile networks to LTE, the popularity of intelligent

Hu


terminals, and the development of new services, especially video services, the

n
transmission capability of the transmission network needs to be further improved.
o
ti
Advanced technologies such as ePDM-QPSK, ePDM-BPSK, and coherent reception

c a
provide large-capacity and ultra-high-bandwidth 100G and 40G coherent
i
rt if
transmission systems for transmission networks.


Ce
The coherent transmission system has the following features:


&
Large capacity

n g

i
Long distance

Lowin


r a dispersion
i TLow latency
e Supports hybrid transmission of 10G/40G/100G signals


a w 

u
H The current 40G WDM transmission system is gradually upgraded to a 100G


transmission system as service requirements expand. 40G and 100G hybrid

transmission and coherent hybrid transmission are essential. NG WDM supports
40G and 100G hybrid transmission and coherent hybrid transmission, the smooth
upgrade of the system is ensured. Because of the advanced coherent detection
technology, no DCM or DCU board is required for CD and PMD compensation.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
100G direct encapsulation technology, which maps 100G services to OTU4 services

Hu


for transmission. 100G services can be transmitted over a single wavelength. The

n
100G reverse encapsulation technology can also be used to transmit 100G services
o
ti
on a 10G or 40G DWDM network.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In general, the NG WDM equipment adapts to the grooming of high-rate services,

Hu


and adapts to the perfect combination of the backbone layer and gigabit router.

n
This feature provides a good support for the all-IP network.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
To better adapt to the future multidimensional structure of the NG WDM and

Hu


better integrate with the IP/MPLS, the NG WDM provides more protection
schemes than the traditional WDM.
o n


ati
The OptiX NG WDM provides protection for different service layers, effectively

ic
supporting the application of the DWDM system in the OTN network.

rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Compared with a traditional WDM network, an ASON-empowered WDM network

Hu


has advantages in service configuration, bandwidth utilization, and protection. In

n
the traditional transmission network, the WDM transmission equipment functions
o
ti
as fibers. Currently, the WDM transmission equipment also carries services, posing

c a
more requirements on the operability of the WDM equipment. The traditional
i
rt if
network faces the following challenges:

Ce
Service configurations are complex, and it is time-consuming to expand
system capacity and provision services.
&
ng
Bandwidth utilization is low and inefficient. For example, on a ring network,
i


n
half of the bandwidth is always vacant.

r ai

TLimited protection modes are applicable, among which the self-healing
i protection has poor performance.
e
w
a capabilities by introducing signaling to the traditional transmission network and
ASON enhances the network connection management and fault recovery
u


H providing a control plane. It supports end-to-end service configurations and

different service level agreement (SLA) levels. It supports Diamond ASON Trail,
Silver ASON Trail and Copper ASON Trail.

 Huawei ASON applies LMP as the link management protocol, OSPF-TE as the
routing protocol, and RSVP-TE as the signaling protocol.

 WDM ASON includes electrical-layer ASON and optical-layer ASON. The use of
ROADM is a prerequisite for implementing optical-layer ASON.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The optical power budget is used to determine the regeneration section distance.

Hu


The process of optical power budget is actually the process of configuring

n
amplifiers. The optical power at the transmit end meets the incident optical power
o
ti
requirement, and the optical power at the receive end meets the working range of

c a
the receiver. In a DWDM system, power loss introduced by line fibers, optical
i
rt if
modules, and optical components needs to be compensated by using optical

Ce
amplifiers (EDFA or Raman amplifiers). When designing a network, you need to
calculate the fiber loss of the entire link and consider the system margin (3 dB
&
margin is considered when there is no special requirement for the project). Then,

i ng
you need to configure the amplifier first and then adjust the attenuation according
n
ai
to the configuration of the dispersion compensation module.

T r
The fiber attenuation coefficient is subject to the actual test value in the project.
i


ethe attenuation coefficient is accurate, the line power redundancy is generally 3

wIf


a dB. In this case, the insertion loss of the FIU board is included.
H u
 During network design, if the actual attenuation value of each optical cable line is
known, add the system engineering margin based on the actual test value.
Generally, the actual attenuation value is 3 dB. If the OSC mode is used, the extra
power loss of the FIU needs to be considered. Generally, the optical power is 1 dB
(FIU loss at both ends). If only the ESC board is used, the power budget of FIU
does not need to be considered.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the case of no dispersion compensation, each regeneration section should be

Hu


less than the dispersion-limited distance. If the regenerator section is greater than

n
the dispersion limited distance, dispersion compensation should be performed.
o


ati
Dispersion limited distance (km) = Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) / Dispersion

ic
coefficient (ps/nm.km). The dispersion tolerance depends on the laser (light

rt if
source). Different rates and different quality of light sources have different
e
dispersion tolerance values. The dispersion coefficient depends on the fiber.
C

&
Currently, two types of DCM modules are used on the live network: G.652 (SMF)
fibers and G.655g (LEAF/TRUEWAVE) fibers.
n typical dispersion coefficient of a single-mode fiber (SMF) is
i


a in
G.652: The

T r
17ps/nm.km. However, when converting the dispersion tolerance of an OTU

ei to a dispersion limited distance, you need to obtain the dispersion value of

a w the fiber (20ps/nm.km).

H u G.655: The typical dispersion coefficient of a single-mode fiber is

4.5ps/nm.km. However, when converting the dispersion tolerance of an OTU
to a dispersion limited distance, you need to obtain the dispersion value of
the fiber (6ps/nm.km).
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) is the most important indicator for

Hu


measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The optical signal-to-noise ratio

n
refers to a ratio of a signal optical power to a noise optical power in a transmission
o
ti
link.

ic a
OSNR (dB) =10 x lg (P signal (mW) /P noise (mW)) =P signal (dBm) -P noise (dBm)
if


rt
When the OSNR decreases to a certain extent, the performance of the system is
e


C
seriously endangered. For a DWDM system with multiple cascaded line optical

&
amplifiers, when optical amplifiers are used to compensate for the line loss, the

ng
radiation noise of the amplifier is introduced. The optical power of the noise is

n i
mainly caused by the accumulated spontaneous emission noise of the amplifier. As

rai
a result, the optical signal-to-noise ratio decreases, the transmission performance

i T
deteriorates.
e
wAccording to the definition of ITU-T: The signal power used for calculating the
a optical signal-to-noise ratio is the total signal power (40-channel system) in the


H u
0.8nm bandwidth, and the noise power is the total noise power in the 0.1nm
bandwidth.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the DWDM system, the decrease of the optical signal-to-noise ratio is mainly

Hu


caused by the introduction of ASE noise by each OA unit. The noise introduced on
the line can be ignored during planning.
o n


ati
On the optical line, the optical power of the signal and noise decreases with the
attenuation of the optical fiber.
ic
rt if
As shown in the figure, the noise introduced by each OA board is the same, but
e


C
the OSNR decreases after the first OA board is used.

&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The non-linear effect refers to the effect caused by the nonlinear polarization of

Hu


the medium, including the optical harmonic, frequency multiplication, stimulated

n
Raman scattering, dual-photon absorption, saturation absorption, self-focusing,
o
ti
and self-distracting. In essence, all media are non-linear. In general, the nonlinear

c a
characteristics are small and cannot be demonstrated. When the incident optical
i
r t if
power of the optical fiber is small, the fiber is linear. When the optical amplifier

Ce
and high-power laser are used in the optical fiber communication system, the
nonlinear characteristics of the optical fiber become more and more obvious. The
&
main reason is that the optical signals in the single-mode optical fiber are

ng
ni
restricted in the mode field, and the valid area of the single-mode optical fiber is

i
very small (for example, the effective area of the G.652 fiber is about 80μm2).
a the optical power density is very high and the high optical power can
r
Therefore,
T a long distance.
e i
maintain

w
a the non-linear effect, the total optical power on the optical fiber should be less
Therefore, the nonlinear effect is closely related to the optical power. To prevent
u


H than 20 dBm (the single-wavelength optical power is less than 4dBm).

 The Super WDM technology can suppress the non-linear effect in the transmission
system.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u
 Reference answer:

1. ASE noise is introduced because of the use H of EDFA.

o n tolerance.
ti
2. Coherent boards have a large dispersion

ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
FOADM can be divided into two modes: Serial and parallel.

HuM40V+D40, which is also called the



The parallel FOADM mainly includes the

back-to-back OTM solution.
o n
a
The serial FOADM mainly includesti the MR2+MR2, MR4+MR4 and MR8+MR8
ic not consider the CWDM and single-fiber


i f
solutions. This course does
t
bidirectional CWDMrsolutions.

C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The FOADM that is constructed in back-to-back OTM mode uses the DMUX to

Hu


demultiplex all wavelengths to the local end. Then, certain wavelengths can be

n
directly passed through according to the wavelength planning. Some wavelengths
o
ti
can be dropped to the local end, and some wavelengths can pass through
electrical regeneration.
ic a
t
The back-to-back OTM networking

r if mode is flexible and allows each wavelength to
e Therefore, during the expansion of the local
be independently configured.
C
add/drop wavelengths, services of other wavelengths are not interrupted.
&in back-to-back OTM mode is applied in the ring network, it can
When the FOADM g
n noise generated by the EDFA, thus avoiding the ring network self-
i


incaused by the ring of the EDFA noise.

block the extra

r a
excitation

i T
ewhen
The
 FOADM in back-to-back OTM mode has many disadvantages. For example,
w there are few services at the early stage of network construction, the MUX
a and DMUX need to be configured. The cost is high and the power budget is large.
H u
Therefore, the OADM in this mode is suitable for the central node with a large
number of initial add/drop wavelengths.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
MR2 is the most common serial FOADM board. In the typical application scenario,

Hu


the east and west MR2 respectively complete the upstream and downstream

n
directions of the east and west directions. The MR2 consists of two dielectric thin
o
ti
film filters (TFF) corresponding to different wavelengths, after the optical multiplex

c a
section signal passes through the TFF, the wavelength channel corresponding to
i
r t if
the center wavelength of the TFF is filtered and dropped, and other wavelengths

Ce
are reflected by the TFF and continue to be transmitted downwards. The two east
and west MR2 boards are symmetrically placed to ensure that the east and west
&
services are processed in the upstream and downstream directions. The advantage

ng
ni
of the MR2 solution is that the initial configuration cost is low and the

i
configuration is simple. The TFF combination can be used for the wavelengths to
a
r
be dropped.
Tboards similar to MR2 are MR4, MR8, and MR8V. If there are many initial
e
Thei
w


ua MR8, or MR8V is used. If there are not many initial wavelengths, MR2 can be used.
wavelengths, for example, more than two wavelengths are added or dropped, MR4,

H In the future, MR2 needs to be extended, the MR2 can be connected in series.
however, it is obvious that the insertion loss caused by serial MR2 changes the
power budget of the site. in addition, pass-through services are interrupted during
system expansion.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Principles for configuring optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards:

Hu is used for adding/dropping



For an 80-channel OTM site, if M40V/D40



wavelengths, ITL boards must benconfigured.

t io boards:


ic a
Principles for configuring optical amplifier

t
According to the opticali f power budget principle, the optical amplifier board
r according to the actual scenario.


e
needs to be configured
C
&
Principles for configuring optical supervisory channel boards:


n
The SC1 andg ST2 boards control the receiving and transmitting of optical
i


in
supervisory signals, and transmit and extract the overhead information of the
a
T r
system.

ei To  implement the IEEE 1588v2 synchronous clock processing function,

a w transparent transmission of two FE signals, and line fiber quality monitoring,

Hu
you need to use the ST2 board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Making use of the ROADM technology, the U2000 and Web LCT software adjusts

Hu


the status of wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and

n
dynamic adjustment of wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80
o
ti
wavelengths is supported.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Wavelength selective switching means that any wavelength received by the input

Hu


port can be arbitrarily exchanged to an output port.

o n
In the WSS, a wavelength is demultiplexed first after being input through the input

ti
port, and each wavelength channel is transmitted to a wavelength routing device.
a
ic
The implementation mechanism of the wavelength routing device is as follows:

t if
Based on the MEMS or based on the liquid crystal technology, the wavelength
r
e
routing device cross-connects the wavelength to the multiplexer corresponding to
C
the designated egress according to the wavelength routing information, and
&
ng
multiplexes the wavelengths that are cross-connected to the port into one output
i
through a multiplexer, complete the wavelength selection and cross-connection
n
ai
process.
r
i T
Each wavelength path of the WSS has a VOA, which controls the optical signal
e


a w power. Therefore, the wavelength optical power control function can also be

Hu
implemented.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single

Hu


or multi-wavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to

n
any port in any order, achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple
o
ti
directions. These boards apply to DWDM systems.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The ROADM site consisting of the RDU9 board and the WSM9 board can add/drop

Hu


all dynamic wavelengths in the ring and support inter-ring expansion. A maximum

n
of eight dimensions can be extended. The RDU9 board is mainly used to
o
ti
implement the demultiplexing function. Each wavelength dropping port can be

c a
connected to the demultiplexing unit. The broadcast signals are demultiplexed by
i
r t if
the demultiplexing unit and then output to the OTU board. The WSM9 board is

Ce
mainly used to implement the dynamic and configurable multiplexing function
from any wavelength to any port. Any node on the ring or chain network can be
&
configured with any wavelength. Any wavelength can be input to any port,

ng
ni
complete dynamic allocation is achieved in wavelength allocation. The ROADM

i
equipment consisting of the RDU9 and WSM9 boards can be applied to the central
a edge site. The advantage is that the capacity expansion is flexible and
site orrthe
i T without interrupting services and the operation cost is low. In this case,
e NMS software can be used to adjust the wavelength adding/dropping and
convenient

wthe
a pass-through status. In this way, the wavelength status can be dynamically
u
H adjusted dynamically.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NG WDM supports the function of adding and dropping all dynamic

Hu


wavelengths in the ring through the multi-dimension ROADM function of the WSS.

n
In addition, the NG WDM supports the inter-ring expansion and realizes the
o
ti
wavelength grooming in a maximum of eight dimensions. The WSD9 board is

c a
mainly used to realize the dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any
i
rt if
wavelength to any port. Any node on the ring or chain network can output any

Ce
wavelength and allocate any wavelength to any port, complete dynamic allocation
is achieved in wavelength allocation. The WSM9 board is mainly used to
&
implement the dynamic and configurable multiplexing function from any

ng
ni
wavelength to any port. Any node on the ring or chain network can be configured

i
with any wavelength. Any wavelength can be input to any port, complete dynamic
a is achieved in wavelength allocation. The ROADM site consisting of the
r
allocation
T and WSM9 boards can be applied to the central site or the edge site. The
e i
WSD9

wadvantage is that the capacity expansion is flexible and convenient without

a interrupting services and the operation cost is low. In this case, the NMS software
u
H can be used to adjust the wavelength adding/dropping and pass-through status.
In this way, the wavelength status can be dynamically adjusted dynamically.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NG WDM supports the function of adding and dropping all wavelengths in a

Hu


ring through the multi-dimension ROADM function based on the WSMD4 board.

n
In addition, the NG WDM equipment supports inter-ring expansion and supports a
o
ti
maximum of four dimensions of optical wavelength grooming. The WSMD4 board

c a
is mainly used to realize the dynamic and configurable multiplexing and
i
r t if
demultiplexing of any wavelength to any port. Any node on the ring or chain

Ce
network can input any wavelength from any port, in addition, any wavelength is
allocated to any port, and the wavelength allocation is fully dynamically allocated.
&
The ROADM equipment works with the WSMD4 board to add or drop all channels

ng
ni
of the C-band even wavelengths and odd wavelengths. The ROADM configured

i
with the WSMD4 board can be used at the central site or at the edge site. The
a is that the capacity expansion is flexible and convenient without
r
advantage
T
i
ecan be used to adjust the wavelength adding/dropping and pass-through status.
interrupting services and the operation cost is low. In this case, the NMS software

a wIn this way, the wavelength status can be dynamically adjusted dynamically.
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In a directioned scenario, the current path cannot be adjusted flexibly. If the

Hu


current path must be adjusted, a site visit is required to adjust the fiber
connections for the network.
o n


ati
A directioned scenario applies to non-ASON networks.

ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
On a non-ASON network, the current path cannot be automatically adjusted in the

Hu


directionless scenario. When services are adjusted or the protection path is used in

n
case of a faulty working path, manually configure optical cross-connections to
o
ti
achieve flexible service grooming.

ic a
On an ASON network, the rerouting function automatically finds a path and
if


t
automatically creates an optical cross-connection.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Colored add/drop ports(fixed wavelength) have the advantages of lower insertion

Hu


loss and lower cost. If new wavelengths need to replace the existing wavelengths,

n
a site visit is necessary to connect the line card/OTU colored port to the matching
o
ti
add/drop port.

ic a
On an ASON network, the services can be rerouted only on the same wavelength,
if


t
so the wavelengths may be blocked.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Colorless add/drop ports(tunable) allow remotely provisioned reconfigurability of

Hu


the ROADM. However, the OTU/line boards must be installed in the subrack in

n
order to automatically provision new services. If the OTU/line boards are not
o
ti
physically present in the subrack, a site visit is necessary to install the required
boards for the new services.
ic a

r t if
On an ASON network, if a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in the
e wavelengths can be flexibly converted during rerouting
colorless scenario, service
C
to avoid a wavelength congestion.
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The flexible grid technique is compatible with existing fixed spectra. For a 40-

Hu


wavelength system, the channel spacing is 100 GHz and each channel occupies 8

n
slices. For a 80-wavelength system and 96-wavelength system, the channel spacing
o
ti
is 50 GHz and each channel occupies 4 slices.

ic a
Compared with the current technique using fixed spectra, the flexible grid
if


t
technique improves spectrum utilization. A 400 Gbit/s signal requires 75 GHz
r
e
bandwidth. When fixed grid is used, 100 GHz (50 GHz x 2) spectral width is used.
C
After the flexible grid technique with a 12.5 GHz slice spacing is used, only 75 GHz
&
ng
spectral width (12.5 GHz x 6) is required, saving 25 GHz bandwidth.

ni
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM ROADM includes intra-ring and inter-ring scheduling. WSS+RMU/RDU

Hu


and WSS+WSS can be upgraded from 2-degrees nodes to 20-degrees ROADM

n
nodes, that is, inter-ring grooming. It also supports optical-layer grooming based
o
ti
on C-band 80 wavelength.

ic a
The ROADM realizes the reconfigurable wavelength by blocking or cross-
if


t
connecting the wavelength. In this way, the static wavelength resource allocation
r
e
becomes flexible and dynamic allocation. The ROADM technology works with the
C
U2000 to adjust the wavelength adding/dropping and pass-through status to
&
ng
dynamically adjust the wavelength status. It supports a maximum of 80
i
wavelengths and supports flexible optical-layer grooming from 1 to 20 degrees.
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
This configuration generally applies to a terminal node. Services are not

Hu


interrupted during expansion.

o n
The WSMD4 in the figure can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9,
WSMD2 or WSMD9.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
This section uses the west service as an example to describe the signal flow.

Hu board through the AM1 port



Local services are added to the west WSMD4

and then transmitted to the westnthrough the OUT port. Services from the
east pass through the AM4 port
t io on the west WSMD4 board and head west.
ic ascenario, to ensure that local services of NE1 can
tif directions west and east, one group of M40V+D40
In a colored & directioned
r
be transmitted in optical
e for each optical direction. In each optical directions, the
C
must be configured

&
WSMD4 board connects to one M40V board and one D40 board.

n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west or east.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,



protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the


automatically createsr if optical cross-connection to ensure proper service

tan
C e In the colored scenario, only the same wavelength can
transmission on NE1.

&
be used for service rerouting.
g
n of M40V+D40 is required.


n i
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west or east,
only oneigroup
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The WSMD4 in the figure can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9,

Hu


or WSMD9.

o n
Local services are added to the WSMD4 through the AM4 port and then

ti
transmitted to the south through the OUT port. Services from the west and east
a
ic
pass through the AM1 and AM3 ports on the WSMD4 and head south.

rt if
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, south, and
e


C
east, three groups of M40V+D40 must be configured. In each optical directions,

&
the WSMD4 board connects to one M40V board and one D40 board.

i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,

protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the
automatically createsr if optical cross-connection to ensure proper service
tan
C e In the colored scenario, only the same wavelength can
transmission on NE1.

&
be used for service rerouting.
g


east, onlyin
in
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north, or
one group of M40V+D40 is required.
r a
i T
e
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,



protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the


r
automatically creates if optical cross-connection to ensure proper service
tan
C e If a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in
transmission on NE1.

&
the colorless scenario, service wavelengths can be flexibly converted during
reroutinggto avoid a wavelength congestion.
i n combination can be used for colorless scenarios in a non-

a in
A WSM9+WSD9

T r system.
coherent

ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As for the colorless scenario in a coherent system, when the WSMD4, WSMD9,

Hu


RDU9 or TD20 board is used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a

n
DEMUX board. The coherent OTU board uses the coherent receiver technology
o
ti
and therefore can correctly select the wavelength to be dropped at the local end

c a
among the multiplexed signals. The above uses the TM20+TD20 combination to
i
rt if
describe the colorless scenario.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Local services are added to the WSMD4 board through the AM4 port and then

Hu


transmitted to the south through the OUT port. Services from the west, north, and

n
east pass through the AM1, AM2, and AM3 ports on the WSMD4 board, heading
o
ti
for the south.

ic a
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, north, east,
if


t
and south, four groups of M40V+D40 must be configured. In each direction, a
r
e
M40V+D40 combination must be configured.
C
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or

Hu


south.

n
To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the
o
ti


protection path is used in case of a faulty working path), manually configure

ic a
optical cross-connections to achieve flexible service grooming.

rt if
On an ASON network, the rerouting function automatically finds a path and
e


C
automatically creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service

&
transmission on NE1. In the colored scenario, only the same wavelength can

ng
be used for service rerouting.

n i
ai
 In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north,

T r
east, or south, only one group of M40V+D40 is required.

e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or

Hu


south.

n
To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the
o
ti


protection path is used in case of a faulty working path), manually configure

ic a
optical cross-connections to achieve flexible service grooming.

rt if
On an ASON network, the rerouting function automatically finds a path and
e


C
automatically creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service

&
transmission on NE1. If a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in

ng
the colorless scenario, service wavelengths can be flexibly converted during

n i
rerouting to avoid a wavelength congestion.

r ai


i T
A WSM9+WSD9 combination can be used for colorless scenarios in a non-

e
coherent system.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As for the colorless scenario in a coherent system, when the WSMD4, WSMD9,

Hu


RDU9 or TD20 board is used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a

n
DEMUX board. The coherent OTU board uses the coherent receiver technology
o
ti
and therefore can correctly select the wavelength to be dropped at the local end

c a
among the multiplexed signals. The above uses the TM20+TD20 combination to
i
rt if
describe the colorless scenario.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,



protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the


automatically createsr if optical cross-connection to ensure correct service

tan
C e In the colored scenario, only the same wavelength can
transmission on NE1.

&
be used for service rerouting.
g
n of M40V+D40 is required.


n i
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction 1 to direction 9,
only oneigroup
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,



protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the


r
automatically creates if optical cross-connection to ensure correct service
tan
C e If a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in
transmission on NE1.

&
the colorless scenario, service wavelengths can be flexibly converted during
reroutinggto avoid a wavelength congestion.
i n combination can be used for colorless scenarios in a non-

a in
A WSM9+WSD9

T r system.
coherent

ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As for the colorless scenario in a coherent system, when the WSMD4, WSMD9,

Hu


RDU9 or TD20 board is used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a

n
DEMUX board. The coherent OTU board uses the coherent receiver technology
o
ti
and therefore can correctly select the wavelength to be dropped at the local end

c a
among the multiplexed signals. The above uses the TM20+TD20 combination to
i
rt if
describe the colorless scenario.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in twenty directions.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,



protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the


automatically createsr if optical cross-connection to ensure correct service

tan
C
transmission on NE1.e In the colored scenario, only the same wavelength can
&
be used for service rerouting.
g
ngroup of M40V+D40 is required.
i
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction 1 to direction


in
20, only one
a
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in twenty directions.

Huwhen services are adjusted or the



To adjust the current path (for example,



protection path is used in case ofna faulty working path), manually configure

t io flexible service grooming.

optical cross-connections to achieve

ic arerouting function automatically finds a path and

On an ASON network, the


r
automatically creates if optical cross-connection to ensure correct service
tan
C e If a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in
transmission on NE1.

&
the colorless scenario, service wavelengths can be flexibly converted during
reroutinggto avoid a wavelength congestion.
i n combination can be used for colorless scenarios in a non-

a in
A WSM9+WSD9

T r system.
coherent

ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As for the colorless scenario in a coherent system, when the WSMD4, WSMD9,

Hu


RDU9 or TD20 board is used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a

n
DEMUX board. The coherent OTU board uses the coherent receiver technology
o
ti
and therefore can correctly select the wavelength to be dropped at the local end

c a
among the multiplexed signals. The above uses the TM20+TD20 combination to
i
rt if
describe the colorless scenario.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Take 2-degree flexible ROADM as example. Flexible grid wavelengths are received,

Hu


and the bandwidth of the wavelengths is not fixed to 50 or 100 GHz but can be

n
configured. Flexible ROADM allocates different bandwidths for different signals
o
ti
and grooms the signals to the specified direction based on network configurations.

ic a
if
NE1

NE2
r t
Ce W
OA
ROADM ROADM
OA
E

& OA OA

g
E

i n NE1

in
NE3
r a AM1 DM1 AMxDMx

i T ROADM

e
W IN OUT

a w Flexible Grid Wavelength

Hu
50GHz 37.5GHz 75GHz
200G

400G

NE4
100G
100G

Wavelength

West add&drop signal flow East add&drop signal flow

Local wavelength add&drop to/from any direction

 The following boards support flexible grid wavelength signals: TN13TM20,

TN15TM20, TN97TM20, TN16WSD9, TN96WSD9, TN16WSM9, TN96WSM9,
TN12WSMD4, TN13WSMD4, TN12WSMD9, TN15WSMD9, and DWSS20.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu (ROADM) boards add/drop any
 Reference answer:

 Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

single or multi-wavelength signalsn to/from a multiplexed signal, and route
o achieving flexible wavelength grooming
the signals to any port in any iorder,
in multiple directions. Theca
t
i main boards are RDU9, RMU9, ROAM, TD20, TM20,
WSD9, WSM9, WSMD2/4/9
r tif and DWSS20.
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example,

Hu


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port

n
number and -1 indicates the channel number.
o


ati
ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example,

ic
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port

rt if
number and -2 indicates the channel number.


C e
RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example,

&
RX2/TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel
number.
n g
i

a in
n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in

T r mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. The service
standard
i
eAssign
mapping paths are different in the following ODU timeslot configuration modes:

a w consecutive and Assign random.

H u In the Assign consecutive mode, level-by-level service mapping is performed

from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1->ODU2. In this
example, the logical port is represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-
ODU1:2-ODU0:1, which means the first ODU0 in the second ODU1 of the first
ODU2 on optical port 1.

 In the Assign random mode, cross-level service mapping is performed from a

low rate to a high rate, for example, ODU0->ODU2. In this example, the
logical port is represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1, which
 means the first ODU0 in the second ODU2 on optical port 1.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As for the same ODUk service granularity, tributary boards (standard/compatible)

Hu


can interconnect with line boards (standard/compatible).

o n
As for the same ODUk service granularity and line rate, line boards

ti
(standard/compatible) can interconnect with each other.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: On the U2000, the subrack layout diagram displays different names of the

Hu


board in different modes (standard and compatible). For example, the name of the

n
TN52ND2 board in standard mode is displayed as TN52ND2(STND), and the name
o
ti
of the TN52ND2 board in compatible mode is displayed as TN52ND2.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Working mode of the port on the TOA board:a w
Hu


ODU0 non-convergence mode(Any->ODU0)



o
ODU1 non-convergence mode(Any->ODU1) n
ti


ic a
ODU1 convergence mode(n*Any->ODU1)
f


rt i
ODU1_ODU0 mode(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
e



C
ODUflex non-convergence mode(Any->ODUflex)
& as follows:
TOA converts signals
g


i n
in
8x(125Mbit/s～1.25Gbit/s信号)<->8xODU0


r a
8x(1.49Gbit/s～2.67Gbit/s信号)<->8xODU1
T


ei 8x(125Mbit/s～2.5Gbit/s信号)<->(1～8)xODU1


a w 8xOTU1<->16xODU0
Hu


5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR<->5xODUflex


 4xFC400/FICON4G<->4xODUflex
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
TDX converts signals as follows: a w
Hu


 2x10GE LAN<->2xODU2e

o n
TN52TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->2xODU2
ti


c a
2x10GE LAN/OTU2e<->2xODU2e
i
if LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-


TN53TDX/TN57TDX: t2x10GE
r
Ce


192/OTU2/FC800<->2xODU2


&
2x10GE LAN/OTU2e/FC1200<->2xODU2e

n g
i
2xFC800<->2xODUflex
in


r a
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
TEM28 board supports electrical-layer cross-connection, Layer 2 switching and

Hu


QinQ.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
ND2 board converts signals as follows: a w
Hu


TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN52ND201M01：

o
16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2n x OTU2
it


2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e
ic a
tif


r
TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2/TN57ND2:

Cex ODU1/2 x ODU2/4 x ODUflex<->2 x OTU2



 16 x ODU0/8
&
2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e
g


i n hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals , ODUflex

in and the ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Supports

r a
signals

i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
NS4 converts signals as follows: a w
Hu


80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4<-
>1xOTU4
o n
Supports mixed transmissiontiof ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and


ic a
tif
ODU3 signals.
r
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
TN54NS4/TN57NS4/TN58NS4: a w
Hu subrack and OptiX OSN 8800 T16


In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32



n
subrack, the board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the
board works in line mode, theio
t enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must
a boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800
use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT
ic
f TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN
T32 subrack must use ithe
8800 T16 subrack e r t
must use the TN16UXCM board.
C
&OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the board can work only in relay mode.
In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 UPS and


g
general OptiX
n
i
TN56NS4:

a in
T r the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 subrack, general OptiX OSN 8800
In
ei T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the board can work either in line


a w mode or relay mode. When the board works in line mode, the enhanced
Hu OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards
and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and general OptiX OSN 8800
T32 must use the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800
T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board.

 In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and OptiX OSN 8800 UPS, the
board can work only in relay mode.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform

Hu


subrack only supports relay mode.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Any service cross-connection can be configured only on the inter-board cross-

Hu


connection. The XCS board is not required.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For the GE/Any services passing through, perform the following configurations:
u


First, add a cross-connection from theHservice source OP port to the LP port.



For the OTU board that is fixedlynconnected to the OP port and LP port (the

t o
OTU board with tributary-lineiboards), skip this step.
c
Add a cross-connection ifrom
a the LP port to the LP port of another OTU
tif


board. r
Ce
Finally, add a cross-connection from the LP port of another OTU board to the
service sink &


OP port. Similarly, for the OTU board with fixed connection

n g
n i
between the LP port and the OP port (the wavelength conversion board of
theitributary-line board), this step can be omitted.
a
r for GE services, the equipment supports centralized cross-connections
T
Similarly,
ei cross-connections in paired slots. However, for services at the Any level, the


and

a wequipment supports cross-connections only in paired slots.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM equipments support centralized and distributed cross-connections and

Hu


tributary and line separation features. Therefore, you can configure optical

n
channels and tributary ports on demand to flexibly construct networks. With the
o
ti
combination of different NG WDM equipment, a large-granularity service bearer

c a
network covering the backbone core network to the access layer can be provided.
i
t
Signal flows of any granularity

r if can be converged into ODUk channels, and multiple
ecan be mixed in the same ODUk, implementing flexible
services of multiple sites
C
service grooming and high bandwidth utilization.
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
With the OTN+FOADM/ROADM feature, any client-side service can be groomed to

Hu


any direction to improve bandwidth utilization and effectively transmit client-side

services, as shown in the above figure.
o n


ati
Client-side services at any rate are accessed through tributary boards. After

ic
OTN encapsulation, ODUk granularities are flexibly scheduled at the electrical
if
rt
layer, and the bandwidth is shared. Then, different wavelengths are output
e
through the line board.
C

&
Through the physical fiber patch cord of the FOADM board or the optical-

n g
layer cross-connection of the ROADM board, signals of different wavelengths
can bei transmitted in different directions.
a in

Tr
If signals in different directions do not need to be added or dropped locally,

ei the optical cross-connections of the FOADM or ROADM board can be

a w directly transmitted to other directions.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Huare configured between boards to
 Reference answer:

Inter-board electrical cross-connections

groom ODUk and GE services inside n a subrack. They are configured on the
U2000.
t io
ic a refer to the cross-connections configured
tif on the same board.
Intra-board cross-connections
r
between different ports

Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Precautions Hu
o n
If the subrack is connected in master/slave mode, the NMS computer
ti


must be connected to the master subrack.

ic a

if
The IP address of the Gateway NE is in the same address segment as the
rt
e
IP address of the computer.
C cable. One end should be connected to the network
Step 1: Check the network
port of the NMS&


g computer. The other end should be connected to the

n on the board.
i
specified port

a inthe OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, connect the other end to the NM_ETH1


T r port on the EFI2 or the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1.

For

i
eStep
a w
 2: Turn on the power switch of the computer and check whether the

Hu
indicator of the network adapter port on the computer is steady on.

 Step 3: Check the indicators on the board. The green LINK indicator should be
steady on, and the orange ACT indicator should blink.

 For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, observe the indicators on the
NM_ETH1 interface of the EFI2 or the NM_ETH2 interface of the EFI1.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Precautions a w
Hu mode, the NMS computer must


If the subrack is connected in master/slave



be connected to the master subrack. n The IP address of the NE must be in the

same network segment as theio
t IP address of the LAN.
a the NE to the hub, router, or Ethernet switch.
ic


r t if
The network cable connects

C e
Step 1: Connect the NMS computer to the LAN.

&
Step 2: Check the network cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN


g
through a network cable. The equipment is connected to the LAN through the
n corresponding board.
interface of ithe
n OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end is connected to the
ithe
r
Fora
T


i
eStep
NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 or the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1.

a w 3: Turn on the power switch of the computer and check whether the green


Hu
indicator of the network adapter port on the computer is steady on.

 Step 4: Check the indicators on the board. The green LINK indicator should be
steady on, and the orange ACT indicator should blink.

 For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, observe the indicators on the NM_ETH1
interface of the EFI2 or the NM_ETH2 interface of the EFI1.

 Note: The following procedures are the same as Method 1: Directly connecting to
the NMS computer.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The user name and password are required for starting the System Monitor and

Hu


Client of the U2000.

o n
On the live network, you are advised to change the default user name and

ti
password as soon as possible according to security management requirements.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When multiple subracks are required to form an NE, the master/slave subrack

Hu


mode is required for unified management. In master/slave subrack mode, multiple

n
subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000 and Web LCT, and the slave
o
ti
subrack does not need to be assigned an independent NE ID and IP address.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can manage the NE through the NMS only after the NE is created. Creating a

Hu

single NE is not as convenient and accurate as creating NEs in batches. However,
the method of creating a single NE can be used regardless of whether the data is
n
configured on the NE side. The method of creating a single NE can be used
o
ati
regardless of the communication mode of the NE. The NE that uses the serial port
communication does not support the equipment search function and must be
ic
if
created one by one. On the U2000, NG WDM equipment does not support pre-
configuration.
r t
C e
Step 1: Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > NE (E) from the


& Type navigation tree, select the equipment type of the NE to

shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed.

be created. in

g
Step 2: In the Object

Step 3:a in the ID, extended ID, name, and remarks of the NE.

r Enter
StepT4: To create a gateway NE, select Step 5. To create a non-gateway NE, select
ei 6.

Step
a wStep 5: Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list and set IP Address.
Hu Step 6: Set Gateway Type to Non-Gateway and select the gateway to which the NE



belongs.
 Step 7: In the Optical NE area, select the optical NE to which the WDM NE belongs.
When creating an OptiX OSN 1800/8800/9800 NE, you do not need to select the
optical NE to which the NE belongs. In this case, the NE is directly created in the
Main Topology.
 Step 8: Enter the NE user name and password. The default NE user name is: root,
the default password is: password or Changeme_123.
 Step 9: Click OK. The cursor is displayed as +. In the Main Topology, select the NE
location and click OK. The NE is successfully created.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The U2000 can directly search for NEs that are connected through the TCP/IP or

Hu


ECC and create them in batches. This method of creating NEs is faster and more

n
reliable than that of creating NEs manually. Therefore, you are advised to create
o
ti
NEs in batches.

ic a
Step 1: Choose File > Search > NE from the main menu. The NE Search window is
if


rt
displayed.

C e
Step 2: Click the Transport NE Search tab.


& Type area, select the type to be searched for.

Step 3: In the Search
g


i
Set Searchn Type to Search NE.
inIn the Search Domain dialog box, click Add. The Search Domain Input


a
r dialog box is displayed.
T


ei
a w Set Address Type to Gateway NE IP Network Segment, Gateway NE IP


Hu
Address, or NSAP Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and
Password. And click OK.

 In the Search NEs area, perform the following operations: Select Create
NE after search, and enter NE User and NE Password. The default NE
users are as follows: The default password of user root is: password or
Changeme_123. If you select Upload immediately after creating an NE,
the NE data is uploaded to the NMS after the NE is created.

 Set Search Type to IP Auto Discovery. If you cannot enter the correct network
segment, you can start automatic IP address discovery. By using the
automatic IP address discovery function, you can obtain the IP address of the
gateway NE and all the NEs under the gateway NE.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The U2000 defines four types of optical NEs: WDM_OTM, WDM_OLA,

Hu


WDM_OADM, and WDM_OEQ. OEQ is an OLA NE that implements optical power

n
equalization and dispersion equalization. If a board with dispersion compensation
o
ti
and power compensation exists on an OLA NE, the NE should be changed to an
OEQ NE.
ic a

r tif three types of optical NEs are usually used.
In NG WDM products, the first

Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Optical NEs are different WDM sites. a w
Huchoose New > NE from the shortcut


Step 1: Right-click in the Main Topology and



menu.
o n
Step 2: In the Create NE dialog box,
a ti click corresponding to Optical NE in the left
icoptical NE to be created.


i
pane and select the type of the
f
e rt and enter the basic attributes such as the optical NE
Step 3: Click Basic Attributes,


name according to the C customer plan.

&

g
Step 4: Click Resource Division, select an NE or board from the idle resource
n click the double arrow on the right to move the NE or board. To re-
i
optical NE, and

a in
allocate resources for the created optical NEs, right-click the optical NE and
r
T Properties from the shortcut menu. Click the Resource Division tab, select
choose
i
e NE or board to be added to the optical NE in the left pane, and click to add the
the

a wNE or board to the optical NE.

Hu Step 5: Click OK.


 Step 6: Click in the Main Topology to create an optical NE icon.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NE is still in the unconfigured state after being created. The NMS can manage

Hu


and operate the NE only after the NE data is configured.

o n
Initialize and Manually Configure NE Data

You can manually configure tNE i board slot information by manually



ic a
configuring NE data.
i f
Copy NE Data

e rt
C
&
By copying NE data, you can copy the NE data of the same NE type and NE


g
version to the new NE.
n
i
Upload


a in
T r
Upload is the most common way to configure NE data. By uploading NE data,

ei you


can directly upload the current NE configuration data, such as NE

a w configuration data, alarm data, and performance data to the U2000. You are
Hu
advised to use the upload mode to configure NE data.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Step 1: In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE that contains an

Hu


unconfigured NE. Double-click an NE that is not configured in the left pane. The

n
NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.
o


ati
Step 2: Select Initialize and Manually Configure NE Data and click Next. The

ic
Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration will clear NE
data.
rt if
C e
Step 3: Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual


&
configuration interrupts NE services.

n g
i
Step 4: Click OK. The Set NE Attributes dialog box is displayed.


a in To modify NE attributes, set NE Name, Type, NE Remarks,

Step 5: Optional:
r Type, Service Type, and Service Capacity.


T
Subrack
ei 6: Click Next. The NE slot page is displayed.
a wStep


Hu
Step 7: Optional: Click Query Logic Information to query the logical board of the


NE. That is, query the original board configuration information recorded on the
SCC board.

 Step 8: Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical board of
the NE. That is, query the information about the current hardware online board.
Logical information and physical information cannot be queried for preconfigured
NEs.

 Step 9: Optional: Right-click an NE slot and add a board as required.

 Step 10: Click Next. The Deliver Configuration page is displayed.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NE type and NE version of the source NE must be the same as those of the

Hu


copied NE.

o n
Step 1: In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE that contains an

ti
unconfigured NE. Double-click an NE that is not configured in the left pane. The
a
ic
NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.

rt if
Step 2: Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Copy dialog box is displayed.
e


C NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm

Step 3: Select the source


& indicating that all data of the source NE will be copied.

dialog box is displayed,

n g
i
Copying NE data changes only the data on the U2000 but does not change the

a in
data on the NE.
r Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the original
StepT4:
ei of the NE will be lost.


data

a wStep 5: Click OK. The replication process is displayed. Wait for several seconds. The
Hu Operation Result dialog box is displayed.


 Step 6: Click Close.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
Hu an optical NE that contains an


Step 1: In the Main Topology, double-click



unconfigured NE. Double-click an nNE that is not configured in the left pane.
o box is displayed.
The NE Configuration Wizard idialog
a t
ic
Step 2: Select Upload and


r t if click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Ce succeeded dialog box is displayed.

Step 3: Click OK. The uploading process is displayed. After the upload is


complete, the Operation

&


n g
Step 4: Click Close.
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
Hu


Step 1: Choose Configuration > NE Configuration

 Data Management from
the main menu.
o n
Step 2: Select the created NEtifrom the topology tree on the left, click the


ic aand select the NE whose NE status is

tifConfiguration Data Management list.
double arrow on the right,
Unconfigured from rthe

Ce The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The

Step 3: Click Upload.
& is displayed.


uploading process

Step 4:in
g
After the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is
in Click Close.


a
displayed.
r
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
By adding a slave subrack, multiple subracks can communicate with the U2000 or

Hu


Web LCT through the same master subrack. In this way, the service grooming

n
capability of the equipment is enhanced. After creating an NE manually, you must
o
ti
add a logical slave subrack.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Pay attention to the following items for OTU boards:
u


Laser status. When the board is used H

 or during the commissioning, the laser
status should be Enabled.
o n
During the commissioning oftithe ALS status, the ALS function must be


ic a
disabled forcibly.
r t if
Ce different parameters, but the configuration procedures
Set interface parameters for WDM boards based on project requirements.


Different boards support

are the same. You& can also query all interface parameters.
g
nNE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM
i
Step 1: In the
n the Function Tree.
Interfaceifrom


r a
StepT2: Select By Board/Port (Channel), and then select Channel from the drop-
ei list. When you select By Function, you can query and set board and channel


a wparameters from the function perspective.

down

Hu  Step 3: In the Basic Attributes and Advanced Attributes tabs, double-click the
parameter field to modify or set the attributes of each optical port or board.

 Step 4: Click Apply.

 Step 5: Click Query. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
The parameters of the board attributes are the same as the configured values.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Note: a w
ustatus and FEC type of the transmit-



H
For the FEC, ensure that the FEC working
end board are the same as those of the receive-end board.
n
For the wavelength of the OTUoboard, the U2000 provides two parameters:
ti Wavelength. The actual wavelength is the


a
Configure Wavelength and Actual
wavelength that is beingic
f used
used to configure thetiOTU
by the board, and the configure wavelength is

e r wavelengths, set the Wavelength parameter to change

that supports tunable
board with the tunable wavelength. For a board

C of the OTU board. For a board with fixed wavelengths,

the actual wavelength
you need to& manually set the wavelength to be the same as the actual
g
wavelength.
n
i

in board is different from the configured receive wavelength, services are
Set the receive wavelength of the board. If the actual receive wavelength of the IN
port onathe
T r In this case, change the receive wavelength of the board to be the
unavailable.
ei as the actually received wavelength.
same

a w Step 1: In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board and choose

Hu


Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

 Step 2: Select By Board/Port (Channel), and then select Channel from the
drop-down list.
 Step 3: In the Advanced Attributes tab, double-click the Receive Band Type
field and select C.
 Step 4: Double-click the Receive Wavelength field to set the required
wavelength.
 Step 5: Click Apply.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Before creating a fiber, you are advised to set Wavelength No. / Wavelength (nm) /

Hu


Frequency (THz) of the port of the tunable OTU to the planned wavelength.

 Fiber Creation Mode

o n
i
Create fibers in synchronoustmode.

a
iccommissioning is complete, the fiber connection
i f
rt exist on the NE. You can synchronize the fiber
After the equipment

e
information may
connectionCinformation on the U2000 to the NMS.
&

g
Manually Creating Fibers in Graphic Mode
n fiber connections in graphic mode is performed in the main
i
a inview or signal flow diagram, which is more intuitive. This mode is
Creating

T r applicable to the scenario where a large number of fibers need to be

e i
a w created one by one.

Hu
 Manually Creating Fibers in List Mode

 In the Fiber/Cable Management window, you can manage all NEs and
fibers inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with creating fibers in
graphics, creating fibers in lists is not intuitive. It is applicable to the
scenario where a small number of fibers need to be created.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure (Single NE): a w
u


Step 1: In the NE Explorer, select an NE

Synchronization from the Function Tree.
H and choose Configuration > Fiber

Step 2: Click Synchronize. The o

n
ti
 internal fiber connections on the U2000 and
NEs are displayed.
a
c Fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NEs
ifiber":
"Consistent optical
i f
rt information.


and have the same

 No fiber isC
e
created on the U2000. Indicates the fiber that exists only on
&
the NE side.
No g
in
 fiber is created for the NE. Only fibers that exist on the NMS side.
Stepn3: For different situations, you can perform the following operations:


a i
T r If there are fibers that are not created on the NMS or the fibers that are
i


e not created on the NE, select all the fibers and click Create Fiber/Cable.

a w In the dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The synchronized fibers
are displayed in the Consistent Fiber list.

Hu  If there are conflicting fibers, you cannot create them. You need to click
Delete Fiber/Cable to delete the conflicting fibers or do not create fibers
for the NEs. Then, click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining
fibers. A conflict fiber refers to a fiber that is configured on the NE side
and is inconsistent with that configured on the NMS side. After you click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, the fiber is not created on the
U2000 and the fiber is not created on the NE. The fibers that conflict
with each other are displayed in. Conflicting fibers cannot be
synchronized between the U2000 and NEs. In this case, you need to
delete the incorrect fibers according to the networking design. The
remaining fibers can be created by creating fibers.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Create an internal fiber connection for the NE. a w
Hu the optical NE icon and click the


Step 1: In the Main Topology, double-click

Signal Flow Diagram tab.
o n
a
Step 2: Right-click in the blankti area of the Signal Flow Diagram and choose
ic menu. The cursor is displayed as a plus sign (+).


i f
New Fiber from the shortcut

e rt board and source port, and click OK. The cursor is

Step 3: Select the source
C sign “+”.


displayed as a plus
&

g
Step 4: Select the sink board and sink port, and click OK. If the sink/source
n port is incorrect, you can right-click the sink/source board or port
board ior
andin
r a choose from the shortcut menu to exit the object selection.
e i TStep 5: In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the attributes of the fiber.


a w  Step 6: Click OK to complete the creation. To delete a fiber, right-click the

Hu
fiber and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

 Create fiber connections between NEs. The creation of fiber connections between
NEs is completed in the Main Topology. The purpose is to complete the FIU fiber
connections between sites.

 Step 1: In the Main Topology, select the shortcut icon. The cursor is displayed
as "+".

 Step 2: In the Main Topology, click the source NE of the fiber/cable.

 Step 3: In the Select Fiber Source dialog box, select the source board and
source port.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Step 1: Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > Fiber/Cable/Microwave

Hu


Link Management from the main menu.

o n
Step 2: Click Create. The Create Fiber/Cable dialog box is displayed.

a ti displayed Select NE Object dialog box, select

Step 3: Click Object Selection. In the
c be created.


all the NEs whose fibers needito

i f
Step 4: Click OK.

e rt
C
&
Step 5: In the Batch Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, click Create.


n g
Step 6: Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE, and Sink Port.
i



a in Apply. In step 6, you can create multiple fibers/cables and set related
Step 7: Click

T r Then, click Apply.

parameters.

ei 8: The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
Step
wis successful.


a
Hu Step 9: Optional: Repeat step 6~8 to create the next fiber connection.


 Step 10: After creating all fibers, click Cancel to exit the Batch Create Fiber/Cable
dialog box. All created fibers are displayed in the Fiber/Cable Information list.

 Step 11: When you place the cursor on the created fiber, the information about
the fiber is displayed. Check whether the fiber is correctly created.

 Note: A two-fiber bidirectional fiber can be used to implement bidirectional

transmission between transport equipment. When a single-fiber unidirectional
fiber is created, you need to create a reverse fiber.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For an NE that is not configured with the NTP service, to ensure that the NMS can

Hu

accurately record the alarm generation time, you need to periodically check
whether the time on the NE is consistent with that on the NMS during routine
n
maintenance. If they are inconsistent, manually synchronize the time between the
o
NE and the NMS.
ati
ic
Synchronizing NE time does not affect the normal running of services. Before
if


r t
synchronizing NE time, ensure that the system time of the U2000 server computer
is correct. To change the system time of the server computer, log out of the U2000,
Ce
reset the system time of the computer, and then restart the U2000.

&
Step 1: In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Time

ng
Synchronization from the Function Tree. In the Operation Result dialog box, click
Close.
n i
Step 2:a i


T r
shortcut
Right-click an NE and choose Synchronize with NMS Time from the
menu. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes.
ei 3: In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
Step
wBatch operation


a
Hu Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization



from the main menu.
 Step 2 Select an NE from the Object Tree on the left and click the double arrow on
the right.
 Step 3 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
 Step 4 Set Synchronization Mode to NMS and click Apply.
 Step 5 Set the synchronization start time and automatic synchronization period
(day), and click Apply.
 Note: The synchronization start time cannot be earlier than the current time.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can set the performance monitoring parameters of an NE and start the

Hu


performance monitoring of the NE to obtain the detailed performance records of

n
the NE during the running of the NE. In this way, the maintenance personnel can
o
ti
monitor and analyze the running status of the NE.

ic a
Step 1: Choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the main
if


rt
menu.

Ce
Step 2: Select a subnet or NE from the navigation tree in the left pane, and then


&
click the double arrow on the right.

n g
i
Step 3: Select the NE whose performance monitoring function is to be enabled.


a in the 15 minutes or 24 hours check box as required. In the Set 15-

Step 4: Select
r Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring dialog box, click Open.


T
Minute
ei 5: Click …., and set the monitoring start time and end time as required.
a wStep


Hu
The start time must be later than the current time of the U2000 and NEs. If
you need to start monitoring immediately, set Start Time to a time later than
the current time of the U2000 and NEs.

 To set the end time, select the End time check box, and the end time must be
later than the start time. If you do not select the End Time check box, the
monitoring function is always enabled.

 Step 6: Click Apply. The Set Monitoring Time dialog box is displayed, showing the
progress. The progress is automatically closed after the progress is 100%.

 Step 7: In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During routine maintenance, you need to back up the NE database to ensure that

Hu


the data on the SCC board of the NE is automatically restored after the equipment

n
is powered off. Back up the NE database to the SCC board is used to back up the
o
ti
NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the flash database. After the

c a
NE is powered off and restarted, the SCC board automatically reads the
i
rt if
configuration from the flash memory and delivers the configuration to the board.


Ce
By default, the U2000 automatically backs up the NE database to the flash memory
every 30 minutes.
&
ng
Step 1: Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the
i


main menu.
n
rai


i T
Step 2: Select an NE from the function tree on the left and click the double arrow

e on the right.
w
a whose databases need to be backed up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up
Step 3: In the Configuration Data Management List area, select one or more NEs
u


H Database to SCC. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

 Step 4: In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During routine maintenance, you need to back up the NE database. When the SCC

Hu


board is configured with a CF card, you can manually back up the NE data in the

n
DRDB database on the SCC board to the CF card. This ensures that the NE
o
ti
automatically recovers when the data in the DRDB database on the SCC board is

c a
lost or after a power failure happens.
i
Step 1: Choose Configuration

r t if > NE Configuration Data Management from the
main menu.
Ce
&
Step 2: Select an NE from the Object Tree on the left and click the double arrow on


the right. g
none or more NEs from the Configuration Data Management List.
i

a in
Step 3: Select
r Click Back Up NE Data and select Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.
StepT4:
ei 5: In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.


a wStep


Hu
Step 6: In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. The backup operation may


take several minutes. Please wait.

 Note:

 Restoring the NE database obtains data from the CF card.

 The CF card is installed on the SCC board and can be removed and inserted.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The U2000 supports two modes: Local FTP server and third-party FTP server. If the

Hu


number of managed NEs exceeds 5000, you are advised to use a third-party FTP

n
server to transfer files between NEs and the NMS server.
o


ati
Local FTP service mode: That is, the U2000 server functions as the FTP server.

ic
During U2000 installation, a FTP/SFTP user is created and created by default. This

rt if
user is used to transfer files between the client, NE, and U2000 server.

C e
Third-party FTP service mode: That is, configure another computer as the FTP


& user. Then, you can transfer files between the client, NE, and
server. In this mode, you need to install the FTP/SFTP service on the computer and
g
create the FTP/SFTP
n server.
i
in
third-party FTP

r a

T
The FTP service used by the U2000 can transfer files in two modes: FTP and SFTP.

ei is more secure than FTP. To ensure system security, SFTP is recommended.

SFTP

a wAfter the U2000 is installed, the FTP service application has a default FTP account,
Hu and the default FTP account is bound to a default FTP user. If an application wants


to use an independent FTP account to use the FTP service, you need to create an
FTP user, create an FTP account for the FTP user, and add the new FTP account to
the application. You are advised to use the default FTP account without adding an
FTP user.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Prerequisites a w
u


Ensure that the FTP service is enabledH

 on the FTP server.

Ensure that the FTP user used bynthe application has been created on the FTP
t io has been configured.


ic a
server and the FTP user information

Operation Procedure


r tif
Choose System > e

C Settings > FTP Account Information Management

&
(traditional style), or double-click System Management in Application Center

g
and choose Settings > FTP Account Information Management (application
style). in
in
Inathe FTP Account Information Management dialog box, click the FTP
T r

ei On the FTP Account Configuration tab page, right-click an FTP account to be

Account Configuration tab.

a w 

Hu
tested and choose Test from the shortcut menu.

 In the displayed dialog box, click Test FTP or Test SFTP to test the availability
of the FTP or SFTP function of the FTP server.

 If the test is successful, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

 If the test fails, check whether the FTP user exists in the background, whether
the FTP user name and password are correct, whether the FTP service is
started, and whether the user directory permission is correct. Perform the
test again after the confirmation is complete.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu Management > NE Data


Step 1: Choose Administration > NE Software



Backup/Restoration from the main n menu.

io list. A shortcut menu is displayed. When
Step 2: Right-click in the NE tView


c a the Backup Information tab is unavailable.

multiple equipment are iselected,
r t if


C e
Step 3: Click Backup. The Backup dialog box is displayed.

&
Step 4: Select the NM Server option button or NM Client to back up the


g
selected equipment information.
ndefault, the NM Server option button is selected.
i
a inBy


T r If you select the NM Server option button, the file will be backed up on
i


e the NMS server.

a w Step 5: Optional: If you select the NM Client option button, click to select the

Hu


path for backing up the equipment data.

 Step 6: Click Start. The NE View tab page displays the backup progress.

 Step 7: After the backup is successful, the U2000 creates the following
directories in the specified path: NE-Name/NE-
Name_yymmdd_hhmmss/dbf.pkg. In the preceding information, NE-Name
indicates the NE name, yyyymmdd indicates the year, month, and day, and
hhmmss indicates the backup time.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: Back up the NE database to the SCC board or CF card and back up NE

Hu


data to the NMS server or client.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by

Hu


optical cross connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing

n
the services at the optical layer. Products provide flexible optical grooming. When
o
ti
there are changes in the services, users need only to make configuration
accordingly on the U2000.
ic a
t
Notes: To ROADM station, we

r if must creating optical cross-connection, but to
FOADM and OLA station,
Ce it is unnecessary.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Default Edge Port: The optical interface on a board that can serve as the source or

Hu


sink port of an optical cross-connection by default.

o n
Available Edge Port: Before being set as an optical cross-connection source or sink

ti
port, the Available Edge Port must be set to Selected Edge Port. After an Available
a
ic
Edge Port is set as the source or sink port of an optical cross-connection, the port

rt if
is not displayed as an Available Edge Port that can be used by other optical cross-
connections.
C e


ports and can g

&
Selected Edge Port: The board interfaces that is selected from the available edge
serve as the source or sink port of an optical cross-connection.
i n an optical cross-connection, select board optical interfaces as the
in sink ports of the cross-connection based on the network design. In this
When creating
source a
r and
way,Tthe route for the cross-connection is created and the optical signal grooming
ei
a wbetween the source and sink ports is achieved.

H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Prerequisite: a w
Hu for the WDM equipment.


Fiber connection must be correctly created

o n
When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that
i
the optical cross-connectiontof a board in this single station does not occupy


c a cross-connection of the single station uses.

the wavelength that the ioptical
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Before configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow,

Hu


complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of

creating a network.
o n


ati
If configuring the single-station cross-connection, you can create the logical fiber

ic
connection between NEs and between boards that are inside the NEs on the

t if
U2000. Or create the logical fiber connection between NEs on the U2000 and the
r
e
logical fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs on the Web LCT.
C
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Before creating a single-station optical cross-connection, configure the

Hu


corresponding port on the board as a edge port.

n
For ports on the FIU unit and OTU unit line side, the edge port is not required
o
ti


and the system defaults to "fixed edge port". If a port has already added a

ic a
fiber connection between the NEs, it automatically becomes the edge port of
the NE. if
rt

C e
The port is no longer able to add fiber connections between single boards
within the NE.
&
g
nelement, then it can no longer be configured as a edge port for the

i
If a port has already added a fiber connection between a single board in the
in
network
a
T r
network element.

e i
If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from
w


ua Ports.
the Selected Edge Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge

H
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-

Hu


Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection tab.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
U2000 Operation procedure: a w
u


 In the NE Explorer, select the NE iconH and choose Configuration > Optical
Cross-Connection Management n from the Function Tree. In the right pane,
click the Single-Station Optical
t ioCross-Connection tab.
ic a Cross-Connection Service dialog box is
tif and sink ports of the optical cross-connection
 Click New. The Create Optical
displayed. Enter thersource
service and select e
C the corresponding wavelength number.
&
The default optical-layer service configuration is positive optical cross-
g


i n
connection, you can select “Create Reverse Optical Cross-connection”.

a inApply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is

Click
r


Tsuccessful. Click Close. The created single-site optical cross-connection is

ei displayed in the window.

a wWhen creating a single-station optical cross-connection, you can set the optical
Hu power adjustment mode to automatic or manual. If Mode is set to Automatic, the


optical add/drop multiplexing unit can be used to automatically adjust the optical
power. If Manual is selected, you can only manually adjust the optical power.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NE B is an OLA site and does not need to be configured with single-station optical

Hu


cross-connections. NE C is an OTM station and needs to be configured with single-

n
station optical cross-connections. The configuration process is the same as that of
o
ti
NE A.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
To manage WDM trails, you need to search for cross-connections and fiber

Hu


connection data on the network to form end-to-end WDM trails at the network
layer of the U2000.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the pass-through station is OLA or FOADM, the single-station optical cross-

Hu


connection does not need to be configured. If the pass-through station is ROADM,

n
the single-station optical cross-connection needs to be configured.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board that performs

Hu


grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through

n
the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
o
 Procedure:
ati
ic


r if
Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
t
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical

Ce
Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.

&
Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
g


n source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the
Select ithe
in on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the


a
button
r
Twavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the
ei wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.

a w
Hu
 Click OK.

 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close. The created board optical cross-connection is displayed in the
window.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Similar to the single-station method, to manage WDM trails, you need to search

Hu


for cross-connections and fiber connection data on the network to form end-to-

n
end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The U2000 provides the functions of creating, browsing, merging, separating, and

Hu


deleting E2E WDM trails. In addition, it provides the signal flow diagram of trails,

n
which intuitively shows the signal flow of trails and improves the operation and
o
ti
maintenance efficiency.

ic a
Currently, the U2000 provides OTN trail models in compliance with ITU-T G.872.
if


t
OTN trails include the following types:
r
 Client trails
Ce
ODUk trails &
ng


OTUk itrails
intrails


a
Tr
 OCh

ei OMS trails

a w OTS trails

Hu


 OSC trails

 For an ROADM network, OCh trails can be created. If the optical cross-connections
of all sites that the optical-layer service traverses have been created, the OCh trail
can be automatically searched out.

 For FOADM networks, OCh trails can be automatically searched and generated.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
HuService > WDM Trail > Create WDM


 On the main menu of the U2000, choose

Trail.
o n
i to OCh.
In the displayed window, settLevel

a
icside of the Source field. In the displayed dialog box,
i f
rt and specify a port on the NE as the source port of the
 Click Browse on the right

e
select the required NE
C the same procedure to specify the sink port.
E2E trail. Then use
&

g
Optional: If the routes that are automatically computed are different from the
nones, you must specify route constraints.
plannedi
a inthe trail computation is complete, the server-layer route information of

r to-be-created trail and the port attribute list are displayed at the bottom
After
Tthe
ei
a w of the topology view.

Hu
 Click the Server Layer Route Details tab to view the server-layer route
information of the working and protection trails.

 Click the Port Attributes Settings tab to view and modify the port
attributes of the to-be-created trail and its server-layer trails.

 Click Apply to complete the trail settings. The Create Trail dialog box is
displayed, which shows the trail creation progress. Wait until the Operation
Result dialog box displays the message operation succeeded.

 Click Close to close the dialog box.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the automatically calculated route is different from the planned route, you need

Hu


to set route constraints.

o n
Click the Explicit Node tab, right-click, and then choose Add NE Constraint or Add

ti
Board/Port Constraint. In the dialog box that is displayed, you can set an NE,
a
ic
board, or port as the explicit node of the trail to be created.

rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After a trail is created, an alarm is generated on the trail because of the abnormal

Hu


power. In this case, you need to commission the optical power.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
Hu creation. (In this mode, the


No. 1 can support optical cross-connection



system can work normally without n configuring optical cross-connection)

t io

a
No. 2 can support optical cross-connection creation too. (In this mode, the
ic with optical cross-connection)
i f
system must be configured

e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Intra-board cross-connection: After being processed by the cross-connect unit, the

Hu


service signals are still inside the board. As shown in the following figure, the

n
cross-connect board connects to channel 1 of client-side port 5 (RX3/TX3) on the
o
ti
same board and channel 1 of port 201 (LP1/LP1) on the WDM side.

ic a
rt if
C e
Inter-board cross-connection:
 After being processed by the cross-connect unit, the
service signals are&
sent to the cross-connect unit of the other board through the

n g
i
backplane. As shown in the following figure.

a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 When a cross-connect board is configured, cross-connections can be configured
between two universal slots, that is, centralized cross-connections.

 When no cross-connect board is configured, cross-connections can be configured

between adjacent slots, that is, distributed cross-connections.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For WDM equipment, the OTU board, tributary board, and line board work

Hu

together to complete service grooming. Client services are transmitted from the
client side of the WDM equipment, and then modulated to the WDM system for
n
transmission after service grooming and convergence. The figure considers the
o
ati
OTU board with the GE/Any and ODUk cross-connection function as a module to
describe the signal flow of the electrical cross-connections.
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
  The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both
external ports and internal ports. These ports are classified into the following types:
 TX/RX port: client-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits
signals.
 IP port: internal port that corresponds to the RX/TX port. It can be regarded
as a RX/TX port.
 AP port: convergence port that represents the internal port of the L2 module.
In this case, the corresponding IP port is an external port.
n
 LP: logical port that functions as the connection point of cross-connections.
it o
OP port: internal port that corresponds to the IN/OUT port. It can be
ic a
f


regarded as an IN/OUT port.

rt i
Ce
 IN/OUT port: line-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits
signals.
The signals are cross-connected in the following process: &
g


i
The optical signals are transmitted to the OTU board through n the RX/TX port
in


and become electrical signals. After the possible L2 processing, the electrical
signals are transmitted to the GE/Any cross-connect a
T r from the backplane, to
module through the AP

ei
port and work with the possible cross-connect signals
implement the GE/Any cross-connections.

a
The electrical signals are transmitted to the wODUk cross-connect module
u


H
through the LP port and work with the possible ODUk signals from the
backplane, to implement the ODUk cross-connections. Then, the signals are
transmitted to the optical module
WDM line for transmission. io
n through an OP port and added to the

a t
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
NE A, NE B, and NE C: OptiX NG WDM Device. a w
Hudrop services.


NE A and NE C use TOA+HUNQ2 to add and



Prerequisites:
o n
ti have been correctly connected.


a
fic
Physical fibers and logical fibers


i
OCh trails have beentcreated.
r
e


C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:
ube set to Client Side Color Optical


 Configure the port type: Port Type must H

Port when colored optical signals are received on the client side.

o n mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration

tiboard that is interconnected with the TOA
 Configure the timeslot configuration
Mode must be set for the line
ic a
board.
t i
When the portrworking
f mode of the TOA board is ODUflex, ODU
e


board thatC
Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the line
is interconnected with the TOA board.
&
ngline board to the same as the value that is set on the interconnected
 In other port working modes, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for
i
the

a inline board. The recommended value is Assign random.

r
TConfigure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode

ei


must be set to OTN Mode first.

a w  Configure the ODUflex tolerance(ppm): For the line board which is

Hu
interconnected with the TOA board, configure this parameter when the port
of the TOA board works in ODUflex mode. This parameter is reserved and
optional in configuring service types which are currently supported.
 Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP ports:
 Compatible Mode: This action is required only for the ODU0 non-
convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.
 Standard Mode: This action is required only for the ODU1 convergence
mode.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configuration Procedure: a w
Hu board. Set Port Working Mode to


Configure the working mode for the TOA



n
ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).
o
Click Apply.
a ti
ic board:


i f
rt mode: 8 x (125Mbit/s~1.25Gbit/s signal) < -> 8 x
The port working mode of TOA


C e
ODU0 non-convergence


ODU0
&
n g
ODU1 non-convergence mode: 8 x (1.49Gbit/s~2.67Gbit/s signal) < -> 8 x
i


ODU1
a in
T r convergence mode: 8 x (125Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s signal) < -> (1~8) x
ODU1

ei ODU1


a w ODU1_ODU0 mode: 8 x OTU1 < – > 16 x ODU0

Hu


ODUflex non-convergence mode:



 5 x 3G-SDI <—> 5 x ODUflex

 4 x FC400/4 x FICON 4G <—> 4 x ODUflex

 In this case, we use ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) as example.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Configure the service type of client-side ports (NE A and NE C).
u


In the NE Explorer of NE A and NE C, H select the TOA board and choose
“Configuration > WDM Interface” n from the Function Tree.

t iothe service type of the client-side port.



ic a
On the Basic Attributes tab, set

Click Apply.
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The value of Rate can be Standard mode or Speed-up mode. When the WDM-side

Hu


signal is OTU2e or 10GE LAN services are received on the client side and the

n
service mapping path of the client-side port is set to Bit Transparent Mapping
o
ti
(11.1G), this parameter must be set to the speed-up mode. Otherwise, the
standard mode is used.
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the NE Explorer of NE A, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM
u

Service Management from the Function Tree.
H
Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.
n


Create intra-board cross-connections.


ti o
c a
Click New. The Create Cross-Connect
i
Service dialog box is displayed.
if level and service type, and then enter other


r t
Select the corresponding
e
parameters of the service.
C
Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is&


successful. Click Close to complete the creation.

g
n Configuration
i
Click Query. The created cross-connections are displayed in the WDM Cross-
in


Connection window.
a
r inter-board cross-connections.
T
Creating

ei Click New. The Create Cross-Connect Service dialog box is displayed.



w Select the corresponding level and service type, and then enter other


a
Hu


parameters of the service.

 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close to complete the creation.
 Click Query. The created cross-connections are displayed in the WDM Cross-
Connection Configuration window.
 NE C uses the same configuration.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Search from the main menu.
u


In the Advanced Settings area, set various H

 processing policies.

In the lower right corner of the window,

o n click Next to start searching for trails. Wait
until the progress bar is updated. ti


ic a
t
Click Next to view the searchedi f trails.
r services on the network.


C e
Click Next to view all discrete


After the search is&

 complete, click Finish.

In the dialognboxg that is displayed, click OK.

i
inProcedure:


r
Follow-up

a
T
ei On the Basic Settings tab page, select the desired service level from the
Choose
 Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the main menu.

a w 

Hu
Service Level drop-down list.

 Click Filter All. In the WDM Trail Management window, ensure that the trail of
the subnet to be queried is consistent with the network design.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The port working mode of TOA board: a w
Hu


 ODU0 non-convergence mode: 8 x (125Mbit/s~1.25Gbit/s signal) < -> 8 x

ODU0
o n
ODU1 non-convergence mode:
a ti 8 x (1.49Gbit/s~2.67Gbit/s signal) < -> 8 x
ic


ODU1
t i f
ODU1 convergence rmode: 8 x (125Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s signal) < -> (1~8) x


ODU1 Ce
&

g
ODU1_ODU0 mode: 8 x OTU1 < – > 16 x ODU0
nnon-convergence mode:
i


a in
ODUflex

Tr 5 x 3G-SDI <—> 5 x ODUflex

ei


4 x FC400/4 x FICON 4G <—> 4 x ODUflex

wIn this case, we use ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) as example.


a
Hu

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configuration Procedure: a w
Hu board. Set Port Working Mode to


Configure the working mode for the TOA



ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).

o n
Click Apply.
a ti
ic


i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM

Hu


Interface from the Function Tree.

o n
Select By Board/Port (Channel), and then select Channel from the drop-down list.
i the optical port for which you want to set
On the Basic Attributes tab page, tselect

a
c Service Type field, and select the required service
the service type, double-click ithe
i f
type.
e rt
Click Apply.
 C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

Hu parameters:


In the Create WDM Trail window, set the following



Level: Client.
o n
ti


Direction: Bidirectional.
ic a
f


Rate: GE(GFP-T).
rt i
e


Set source port.


C
& View, double-click NE A. In the Board Port Selection -Source
In the Physical
g


window,
i nselect the TOA board in the corresponding slot as the service access
in
board.
a
T r the port and channel for service access, and then click OK.
ei Set the sink port in the same way.
Select


a w 

Hu
Click Apply. The client trail is created. The Operation Result dialog box is


displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

 To view the created trail, choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management
from the main menu. In the WDM Trail Management window, set filter criteria to
view the created trail.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NE batch configuration，this mode helps you configure service packages for all

Hu


involved boards in batches on the NMS.

n
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Service Package
o
ti


Configuration from the main menu.

ic a

if
In the Service Package Configuration window, click the Board Type drop-
rt
down list to select the required board type.
e
C window, select the name of the service package that
In the Service Package
you want to&


configure and click Apply To.... In the Select Board dialog box
g
n boards where you want to configure the service package and click
i
that is displayed, all subnets containing the selected board type are displayed.

a in
Select the

Tr
OK.

ei Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed asking you "Board
w


a services will be interrupted if you configure a service package. Are you sure

Hu you want to continue?" The Confirm dialog box will be displayed again for
confirmation. Click OK.

 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show
the operation progress. After the operation is completed, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Separate board configuration，this mode helps you to configure a service package

Hu


for a separate board.

n
In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Service Package from the
o
ti


Function Tree.

ic a


r t if
Select Service Package, and Apply.

Ce
Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed asking you "Board
services will be interrupted if you configure a service package. Are you sure
&
you want to continue?" The Confirm dialog box will be displayed again for

n g
i
confirmation. Click OK.

Thein
r

a Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show

iT
the operation progress. After the operation is completed, the Operation
e Result dialog box is displayed.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and

Hu


choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Check whether the

n
service type of the port corresponding to the board is configured according to the
o
ti
specifications of the selected service package.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and

Hu


choose Configuration > Working Mode from the Function Tree. Check whether the

n
board working mode and port working mode are configured according to the
o
ti
specifications of the selected service package.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Configure the ODU1 service cross-connection between the TOA board 1 (Rx1/Tx1)

Hu


and the HUNQ2 board 1 (IN1/OUT1).

n
In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration >WDM Service
o
ti


Management from the Function Tree.

ic a

if
Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and then click Create.
rt
The Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
e
C and set other parameters for the service.
Set Level to ODU1
&



g
Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
n is successful. Click Close to complete the creation.
i
operation

a inQuery. The created cross-connections are displayed in the WDM Cross-


r
Click
TConnection
ei
Configuration window.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After searching the WDM Trails, verify that the WDM services are successfully

Hu


configured.

n
In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM
o
ti


Trail from the Main Menu.

ic a


Level. if
On the Basic Settings tab, select the level of the service being queried for
rt
e
Click Filter All. InCManage WDM Trail, Check whether the trails on the subnet
&are consistent with the network design.


being queried

n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Only TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA can support service package.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
Reference answer: a w
Hu service trail creation. After a


E2E service configuration supports cross-layer



n
client service trail is created, an electrical-layer server trail is automatically
generated. This reduces the number
t io of trail creation times.
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Other related test instruments: a w
Hu to test the GE/10GE/100GE service


 GE/10GE/100GE tester: This meter is used

indicators.
o n
OTN tester: This meter is used
a ti to test OTN service indicators.
ic to test Ethernet service indicators.


i f
rt
 SmartBits: This meter is used

ESCON tester: Thisemeter is used to test the ESCON service indicators.


C

& This meter is used to test the FICON/FC service indicators.
FICON/FC tester:

Phillipsn g
i screwdriver: Used to remove screws from the board.
in



r a
Compressed gas dedusting agent: Used to clean the optical interface of the

i Tboard.
e optical power of single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be test
wThe
a with an optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning method is more accurate


u
H and does not need to consider the influence of noise.
 Align the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to test the optical power. The
method to verify the alignment is as follows.

 Test the optical power of the OUT optical interface on the OTU with an
optical spectrum analyzer and compare the value with the value tested by an
optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5dB, the alignment is
acceptable. If not, align the optical spectrum analyzer again.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can use the iManager U2000 or OptiX iManager U2000 Web LCT for

Hu


deployment commissioning and configuration. All the operations supported by the

n
Web LCT can be performed on the U2000. However, the Web LCT has a relatively
o
ti
low requirement on the computer hardware and is started quickly.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Checking the Cabinet Reinforcement a w
Huinstalled with required bolts/screws.


Cabinet fixing components are correctly



o n
All associated bolts are safely tightened
ti


Checking the Board Installation a

ic scratches, holes, or damage.


i f
Board connectors have


e rt no

C seated in the appropriate slots and locked in the slots

All boards are fully


& levers on their front panels.

with the ejector
g Routing
Checking thenCable


n i
Thei bending radius of cables is larger than or equal to 60 mm, and they
a
r be bound at the bend.


T
ei The power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables for a cabinet are routed in
should

a w different bundles, with an interval of more than 30 mm between each bundle.



Hu  Checking the Cabinet Doors and Side Panels

 The front and rear doors and the side panels have been installed correctly.

 The front and rear doors are easy to open and close.

 Minimum bending radius for G.652 fiber is 30mm. Minimum bending radius for
G.657A2 fiber is 10mm. When fibers are connected to CRPC boards, the bending
radius of the fibers must be greater than or equal to 50 mm.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: The indicators on the top of the NG WDM equipment cabinet are driven by

Hu


the LAMP port in the subrack. Therefore, only after the subrack is powered on are
the indicators on.
o n
 Checking the subrack power on
ati
ic


rt if
Powering on the subrack (The green indicator stays on.)

C e
Checking the fan (FAN indicator is always green.)


&
Checking fiber attenuation

n g
Fiber connection between OTU (client-side) and the ODF
i


in FIU (line-side) and the ODF

Between
a
r


i T
Between two subracks
e
a w
Checking the fan procedure

H u When the subrack is powered on, the fan starts to run. Check the air
ventilation at the top and the bottom of the subrack.

 Observe the FAN indicator on the front panel of the fan. Normally, it is
always green. If the FAN indicator is constantly red, it indicates that two or
more fans are faulty. If the FAN indicator is constantly yellow, it indicates that
one fan is faulty. Clear the fault before continue with the commissioning.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The principles for configuring the FOA for the OSC board are as follows:

Huon the ST2/AST2 board or the TX



Configure the FOA at the TM1/TM2 port



port on the DAS1 board.

o n
Configure the FOA at the TMtiport on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2 port on


ic a
the SC2 board.
r t if
Ce board. Configure the 10 dB FOA at the RM port on the
Configure the 10 dB FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2/AST2 board or the


TX port on the DAS1

FIU board &

i ng supervisory channel(OSC) commissioning is complete, the

After the optical
in between NEs is normal. You can use the U2000 to complete basic


a
communication
r network configurations and prepare for commissioning optical power.
T
NE and
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Connecting to the NMS computer a w
Hu


Check the network cable. One end is connected

 to the network port of the
NMS computer, and the other end n is connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2

t
port (OSN 8800/universal platformio subrack) of the equipment. If the OSN
1800/9800 is used, connect
ic athe other end to the NM port on the device.
Changing the NE ID and IP r if
tAddress
Ceuses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. The U2000


The ECC protocol

uses the NE &


ID as the search keyword when identifying different NEs in the

g
n to each NE. If NE IDs conflict, ECC routes conflict and some NEs
i
GUI and database. During network planning, a unique NE ID must be
in
assigned
a
T r be managed. During commissioning or capacity expansion, you need
cannot

ei to modify the original planning and change the NE ID on the U2000.

a wSetting the manual extended ECC communication
Hu


When no optical path is available between two or more NEs, you can use the


Ethernet port of the NE to implement extended ECC communication.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Basic requirements of optical power commissioning are as follows:

Hushould be between the allowable



The optical power under commissioning



maximum and minimum values. n

t iothat the power fluctuation within a range



c a
Allowance is required to ensure
brings no impact on theiservices.
r t if
expansion fromC

e
Optical power commissioning should meet the requirement of system
the customer.
&

g
Consider the power compensation value: Offset
n of CWDM Commissioning:
i


a in
Requirements

T r CWDM network does not support the OA. Only the optical power
The

ei commissioning


is needed in CWDM commissioning. The OSNR and flatness

a w commissioning are not needed.

Hu Only the received optical power of the OTU is needed in optical power


commissioning. The specific commissioning requirements, procedures are

similar to these of the DWDM system.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
General consequence of optical power commissioning

Hu the optical power values of



Optical power commissioning is to commission



NEs and boards one by one according n to the optical signal flow, and to
remove the abnormal attenuation
t io of lines or boards according to the
ic
requirements on optical power, a gain and insertion loss of the board. The
t
commissioning is performed
r if according to the requirements of optical power
commissioning forethe optical amplifier unit, OTU, OSC boards.
C
&
Optical power commissioning procedures


g
nsegment. One network segment has two signal flow directions of
i
Generally, the sites between the two OTMs in the NG WDM system form one


in
network
a
T r
transmit direction and receive direction.

ei The NG WDM system commissions the optical power of each NE one by one
w according to the signal flow in each network segment.


a
Hu Firstly, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in transmit


direction. Then commissions the optical power of each downstream NE one

by one and complete the optical power commissioning of destination OTM in
receive direction. Finally, complete the optical power commissioning of the
other signal flow in the reverse direction of the previous signal flow.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: When the input optical interface on the WDM side of the line board is

Hu


connected to the optical fiber, the input optical interface must be falsely inserted.

n
Otherwise, the input optical power may exceed the overload point and the receive
o
ti
optical module may be burnt. The overload optical power of the APD receiver laser

c a
is only -9dBm. Therefore, exercise caution when performing this operation to
i
if
prevent the optical module from being burnt due to high power.
rt

C e
Commissioning Requirements

&side optical interface (IN) of the line board to the optimal

Before entering the corresponding line board, adjust the input optical power


of the WDMg
receivein
i n range. (Sensitivity +3) dBm~ (overload point – 5) dBm
r a
TGenerally,
 the output optical power on the WDM side of the line board does
i not need to be commissioned. In the case of the OADM site or wavelength
e
a w protection, you need to adjust the VOA at the output optical interface on the

Hu
WDM side of the line board so that the gain flatness of each wavelength that
passes through the optical amplifier board is ≤2dB.

 The optical amplifier board at the front end of the line board at the receive
end has output the standard per-channel optical power. Therefore, you can
determine whether to add, change, or remove the fixed optical attenuator at
the input end of the line board according to the actual input optical power.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Some boards of the NG WDM equipment provide the MON port. In the main

Hu


signal, a few monitoring signals are transmitted through the MON port, which is

n
used to monitor the performance of the optical signals online.
o


ati
The MON port power of the M40V/D40 and ITL boards is 10/90 of the OUT

ic
port power. That is, the MON power is 10 dB lower than the OUT port power.

rt if
The MON port power of the FIU board is 1/99 of the OUT port power. That is,
e


C
the MON port power is 20 dB lower than the OUT port power.

&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The preset value is calculated based on the nominal single wavelength output

Hu


optical power of the receive end amplifier, nominal single wavelength input power

n
of the transmit end amplifier, and internal insertion loss of the pass-through
o
ti
ROADM board.

ic a
When creating a single-station optical cross-connection, you are advised to select
if


t
the automatic optical power adjustment mode (OPA mode). For application
r
e
scenarios that do not support automatic adjustment, select the manual adjustment
C
mode.
&
ng
When the automatic optical power adjustment mode is selected, the optical power
i


n
at the OUT port on the optical amplifier board at the receive end and the rated

r ai
optical power at the IN port on the transmit optical amplifier board have default

i T
values.
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Adjusting the input optical power of OA board a w
Huof the IN interface of the OA and


Adjust the average single λ input power



make it close to the typical inputnpower of single λ. Ensure that the number

t
of λs whose power is larger than io the typical value is extremely close to the
number of λs whose power
ic ais smaller than the typical value.
f
λiinput power before the input end of the OA is added
If the average singlert
e than the typical input power of single λ, adjust the VOA


C
with a VOA is higher

& no VOA is needed.

before the OA to make the average single λ input power reach the typical
g
value. Otherwise,

Adjustingin
in
the gains of OA
a the OAU1, set the gain to ensure that the mean output power equals the


T r
For
i


e maximum output power of single λ, which is 4 dBm. Gain = Maximum output

a w power of single λ – Mean input power of single λ.
Hu After setting the gain, use the OSA to check whether the mean output power


of single λ is within the range from 3.5 dBm to 4.5 dBm. If it exceeds this
range, finely tune the gain value.

 If the mean output power of single λ is more than 4.5 dBm, decrease the gain
value to adjust the mean output power of single λ to 4 dBm. If it is less than
3.5 dBm, increase the gain value to adjust the mean output power of single
wavelength to 4 dBm. The allowable deviation is within ±0.5 dBm.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Typical input power of single wavelength of the OBU101 is –23 dBm (80λ system).
u OBU103 is –22 dBm (80λ system).


Typical input power of single wavelength of

 Hthe
Typical input power of single wavelength
o n of the OBU104 is –20 dBm (80λ system l).
ti of the OBU205 is –19 dBm (80λ system).


c a
Typical input power of single wavelength

iwavelength
t i f

r
Typical input power of single of the OAU101 is –19 dBm (80λ system).
e wavelength of the OAU103 is –23 dBm (80λ system).
Typical input power of

Csingle
Typical input power& of single wavelength of the OAU105 is –19 dBm (80λ system).
g


i npower of single wavelength of the OAU105 is –15 dBm (80λ system).

in
Typical input


r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: In this case, the maximum signal gain that can be set by the OAU1 is as

Hu


follows: 31dB-5dB=26dB.

o n
Gain= 4dBm – (–20dBm) = 24dB<26dB, which meets the requirements.

ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The pump output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. The higher the

Hu


optical power is, the higher the requirement for the tail fiber is, which may cause

n
damage to the equipment and human body. Therefore, the pump light of the
o
ti
RAMAN should be as low as possible when the switch gain ≥10dB is ensured, the

c a
maximum optical power should be ≤29dBm.
i
The reverse or forward output

r t if optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches
27dBm. Before using the
C e Raman board, shut down the laser of the Raman board.
&
The connector of the optical fiber connector must use a dedicated APC fiber


connector. If the g PC fiber connector is used, a large reflection will be generated

nconnector will be burnt.
i
in
and the fiber

r a

T
For the Raman optical amplifier board of the backward pump, the strong pump
i enters the optical fiber instead of the output end (SYS) from the input end
e(LINE).
light
w Do not add non-fiber devices such as attenuators and jumpers before the
a input end.
H u
 The bending radius of the fiber jumper must meet the requirements. Otherwise,
the tail fiber may be burnt.

 Before turning on the laser of the Raman board, you must connect the jumper of
the input end and the jumper of the corresponding customer ODF cabinet. When
removing and inserting the optical fiber, ensure that the fiber connector is clean. If
the connector is dirty, the optical connector may be damaged.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
System commissioning is based on OCh. Therefore, you need to create an end-to-

Hu


end OCh trail first. When creating an OCh trail, set the OPA mode to manual.

o n
The signal flow varies according to the type of sites. The above figure takes the

ti
add signal flow at the OTM site as an example.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Wavelength expansion will reduce the power of adjacent wavelengths. Therefore,

Hu


you need to fine-tune the existing wavelengths to ensure flatness. If the

n
performance of adjacent channels deteriorates to the threshold, the expansion
o
ti
may interrupt services. Therefore, you need to check the performance of all

c a
existing wavelengths before expansion and perform the operations in the period
i
rt if
that has the minimum impact on services.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If there is no pass-through wavelength, you do not need to adjust the flatness in

Hu


the wavelength dropping direction. This ensures that the gain of the optical

n
amplifier at the receive end of the local station can compensate for the
o
ti
attenuation of the fiber between the upstream stations.

ic a
For the 80λ system, the ITL board is configured before the demultiplexer. If the
if


t
input optical power is low after the wavelength passes the ITL and demultiplexer,
r
e
adjust the output optical power of the OA board at the receive end. If the input
C
optical power of the optical amplifier at the receive end is too low, check the
&
ng
optical fiber onsite.

n i
After the wavelength dropping commissioning is complete, check whether the
ai


r
input optical power of the OTU board is within the required range and whether the
T
e i
FEC BER of the OTU board is within the required range.

wAfter the commissioning is complete, use the same method to adjust the reverse
a direction to ensure that the bidirectional performance meets the requirements.


H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
mW and dBm are the absolute value for optical power.

Hu we describe the values of gain and



dB is the relative value for optical power. When



attenuation, it is used.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: The formula is based on the condition the optical power of each single

Hu


wavelength is same, that means flat.

o n
Ptotal means total wavelength power. P1/P2 means single wavelength power.

ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The typical input/output power of OBU103 for single channel -19/+4dBm, the gain

Hu


is 23dB.

 Commissioning steps:
o n
1. Adjust the VOA① to maketsure i the optical power or each channel at


ic a
OBU103 is -19dBm.
i f
e rt spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OBU103 or
2. Use the OSA (optical
C flatness of the spectrums.


M40 to check the

&


n g
3. The gain flatness of each wavelength should be <6.0dB.
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The typical input/output power of OAU101 for single channel is -16/+4dBm.

Hu power(-16+10lgN) , we should


When the input power is higher than the typical



adjust the VOA.

o n
When the input power is lower than
a ti the typical power (-16+10lgN) , we should
c gain (20~31) to satisfy the output power is


remove the VOA, and changeithe

i f
typical (+4+10lgN).
e rt
Commissioning steps:C


&
10lgN)in

g
1. Adjust the VOA① to make sure the total power at OAU1 is close to (-16 +
dBm
in
2.aUse the OSA (optical spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OAU1 to
T r


ei 3.Change the gain of OAU1 to make sure the output power is close to (+4 +
check the flatness of the spectrums.

a w 

Hu
10lgN) dBm
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The typical input/output power of OBU103 for single channel is -19/+4dBm, the

Hu


gain is 23dB.

 Commissioning steps:
o n
1. Adjust the VOA① to maketsure i the total power at OAU101 is as closer as (-


ic a
16 +10lgN)dBm
i f
e rt spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OAU101 to
2. Use the OSA (optical
C of the spectrums.


check the flatness

&

g
3. The maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is as
npossible.
i
small as
in
4.aChange the gain of OAU101 to make sure the output power is close to
T

r
ei (+4+10lgN)dBm

a w  5. Add fixed attenuator② to the fiber which will be inserted to the IN port of

Hu
OTU

 6. Adjust VOA③ to make sure the power of passing-through channels at

OBU103 is typical (-19+10lgN).

 7. Adjust VOA on MR8V to make sure the power of added channels at

OBU103 is typical (-19+10lgN).

 8. Use the OSA (optical spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OBU103 to
check the flatness of the spectrums
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Commissioning steps: a w
u


1. Adjust the VOA① to make sure theH

 total power at OAU101 is as closer as (-
16+10lgN)dBm
o n
a ti analyzer) linked to MON port of OAU101 to
2. Use the OSA (optical spectrum
check the flatness of theic


i f spectrums.

e rt of optical power among all the channels is as

3. The maximum difference
C


small as possible.
&


n g
4. Change the gain of OAU101 to make sure the output power is close to
i
(+4+10lgN)dBm
in
5.aAdd fixedattenuator② to the fiber which will be inserted to the IN port of
T

r
ei OTU

a w  6. Adjust VOA③ to make sure the power of passing-through channels at

Hu
OBU103 is typical (-19+10lgN).

 7. Adjust VOA on M40V to make sure the power of added channels at

OBU103 is typical (-19+10lgN).

 8. Use the OSA (optical spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OBU103 to
check the flatness of the spectrums.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Commissioning steps: a w
u


1. Adjust the VOA① to make sure theH

 total power at OAU101 is as closer as (-
16+10lgN)dBm
o n
a ti analyzer) linked to MON port of OAU101 to
2. Use the OSA (optical spectrum
check the flatness of theic


i f spectrums.

e rt of optical power among all the channels is as

3. The maximum difference
C


small as possible.
&


n g
4. Change the gain of OAU101 to make sure the output power is close to
i
(+4+10lgN)dBm
in
5.aAdd fixed VOA② to the fiber which will be inserted to the IN port of OTU
T r


ei 6. Adjust VOAs in WSMD4③ to make sure the power of added and passing-


a w through channels at OBU103 is typical (-19+10lgN).

Hu  7. Use the OSA (optical spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OBU103 to
check the flatness of the spectrums.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The typical input/output power of OAU1 for single channel is -16/+4dBm.

Hu


 The insertion loss of D40 is about 6.5dB.

o n
When the input power is higher than the typical power(-16+10lgN) , we should
ti


adjust the VOA.

ic a

t if
When the input power is lower than the typical power (-16+10lgN) , we should
r
typical (+4+10lgN). Ce
remove the VOA, and change the gain (20~31) to satisfy the output power is

&
ng
 Commissioning steps:

n i
ai
 1. Adjust the VOA① to make sure the total power at OAU1 is close to (-16 +

T r 10lgN) dBm.

e i 2. Use the OSA (optical spectrum analyzer) linked to MON port of OAU1 to


a w check the flatness of the spectrums.

Hu  3. The maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is as

small as possible.

 4. Change the gain of OAU1 to make sure the output power is as closer as
(+4 + 10lgN) dBm.

 5. Add fixed attenuator to the fiber which will be inserted to the IN port of
OTU.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The commissioning of the 40G/100G coherent system is similar to that of the

Hu


10G/40G non-coherent system. However, some specific boards are added to the

n
coherent system, and the requirements for the incident optical power are different.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system, comply with the rules for

Hu


commissioning non-coherent signals with precedence.

o n
In an optical transmission system, after the optical power of the transmit-end OA

ti
board is adjusted to the nominal output optical power, the incident optical power
a
ic
needs to be determined and commissioned. (Fiber access scenarios include the

t if
mainstream fiber access scenario and special fiber access scenario).
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every

Hu


wavelength is higher than the design OSNR tolerance. OSNR tolerance refers to

n
the tolerance at which the boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free
o
ti
carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specified threshold. In certain special

c a
situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certain OSNR margin
i
rt if
must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR for the wavelengths

Ce
that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths
that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR
&
value may be incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4,

i ng
or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be
n
ai
performed only when there is no parallel OADM station on the link.

T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Commissioning of incident optical power must comply with the following rules:

Hu based on the network design.



Incident optical power counters are adjusted

o n to the mainstream incident optical

Incident optical power counters refer
ti


a
power of each fiber by default.
ic power and low special incident optical power are
i f
rt scenarios. They must be adjusted based on the
High special incident optical

e
used in special network
network design.C
&

g
When adjusting incident optical power counters and optical power of the
n OA board, ensure that the incident optical power counters meet
i
downstream

a in
requirements.
T r If the output optical power of the downstream OA board meets the
e i 

a w requirement in case of the minimum gain, the upstream incident optical

Hu
power can be less than the incident optical power counters.

 If the output optical power of the downstream OA board does not meet
the requirement in case of the minimum gain, preferentially reduce the
upstream EVOA attenuation to a value within the range required by
incident optical power counters.

 If the output optical power of the downstream OA board still does not
meet the requirement, increase the gain of the downstream OA board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
EDFA Specification: a w
Hu EDFA is 14–23 dB, different from


RAU106: The gain range of the integrated

that of the OAU106 board.
o n
RAU201: The integrated EDFA
a ti is the OAU101 board, so specifications of EDFA
are the same as those ofic


t i f the OAU101.

RAMAN Specifications: r


C e
Raman Specification of
&
Item Unit
RAU106/RAU201
g
n wavelength range nm 5–10. Raman
i
Operating 1528.5–1561.5

a in G.652 dB
gain mode can be set
r
T gain
to the maximum gain mode.

e iEffective
range
LEAF dB
5–12. Raman gain mode can be set
to the maximum gain mode.

a w 5–12. Raman gain mode can be set

Hu
G.653 dB
to the maximum gain mode.
Input optical power range ≤1
Maximum total output optical
dBm 6
power in gain lock mode
Single-wavelength input optical
dBm –40–1
power range
Total input optical power range
when a system is fully configured dBm –24–1
with wavelengths
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Check whether line quality is good, whether end faces of connectors are clean, and

Hu


whether ports are connected properly.

o n
Select an appropriate gain mode for Raman based on application scenarios and
optical fiber types.
ati
ic


rt if
Gain lock mode: applies to multi-span systems and scenarios where types of
supported optical fibers are defined.
e
C applies to single-span systems and scenarios where
Maximum gain mode:
& optical fibers are defined.


types of supported
g
n mode: applies to scenarios where types of supported optical
Powerilock
inare not defined or CRPC is replaced with Raman.


a
fibers
r gain based on optical fiber types and gain modes.
T
ei RAU106: Adjust Raman gain (within a permitted range) based on the input
Set Raman


a w 

Hu
optical power reported by the integrated OA to control the input optical
power of downstream integrated OA, which is similar to adjusting the input
optical power of OAs using EVOAs.

 RAU201: The EVOA on the RAU201 board can control the input optical power
of the integrated OA. Therefore, you can set Raman gain to the maximum
gain of supported optical fibers.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Raman amplifier optical module supports the gain locking, maximum gain,

Hu


and power locking modes.

n
In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or single-short-span
o
ti


systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-

ic a
C/TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In addition, the

rt if
gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the
Raman unit.
C e
&
The maximum gain mode applies to ultra-long-single-span systems that use


g
G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-
n
n i
C/TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this mode,
i
a Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump power to ensure
r
the

ei Tthat its gain reaches the maximum value. In addition, users can query the
a w actual gain of the Raman amplifier module.

Hu
 In the pump power mode. This mode applies to systems that use any fibers
but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-
C/TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to situations
in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier module must be adjusted
manually.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following table provides prohibited configurations and connections of RAU

Hu


boards.

Prohibited
o n Reason
Configuration
ati
ic
if
DCM/DCU is This configuration affects system OSNR and causes
configured
t
inappropriate Raman gain control.
r
between Raman
and EDFA. Ce
OLP 1+1 & When a fiber that is far from Raman or an upstream

i ng
protection fiber is broken, the noise power is amplified by
n
ai
Raman. As a result, the optical power difference

T r detected by OLP is within the threshold range and no

protection switching will be performed.
e i Single-site RAU RAU cascading does not meet requirements of
a w cascading Raman amplification. The second Raman does not

Hu
have gain medium, so the second Raman cannot
amplify the optical power.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
Specifications of OAU106 a w
Hu Specification


Item Unit
Operating wavelength range nm
o n 1528.5-1561.5
Nominal gain ti
a
dB 16 19 23
ic
tif dBm
Total input optical power
r -24 to 4 -24 to 1 -24 to -3

Per-channel
range
40 C
e
channels dBm -24 to -12 -24 to -15 -24 to -19
input optical &
power range
n g 80 channels dBm -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -24 to -22

n i 40 channels dBm
a i
Nominal -12 -15 -19

T rsingle-

ei inputpower
wavelength
optical 80 channels dBm -15 -18 -22

a w
Hu Noise figure (NF) dB ≤7 ≤6 ≤5
Channel gain dB 16-23
Gain flatness dB ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0
Fixed insertion loss dB ≤1.5
VI-
VO Dynamic attenuation
dB 20
range
Split ratio of the MON port dB 20±1.5
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Precautions for fiber connections: a w
u


TN12TD201 boards apply to coherentH 40-channel/80-channel systems only.

n
DMx ports can be connected to coherent OTU boards only.
o 20 wavelengths. The IN port on the
t ireceive
A TN12TD201 board can only
ic abe connected to the DMx port on the
tif board to prevent excessively high optical power of
TN12TD201 board cannot
RDU9/WSMD4/WSMD9 r
Ce dropped at the DMx ports on the TN12TD201.
multiplexed wavelengths

&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Before starting the deployment commissioning, check the design documents to

Hu


ensure that the designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation

n
method, OSNR, ITL configuration, and channel allocation for mixed transmission of
o
ti
10G, 40G, and 100G signals, meet the requirements for setting up the coherent
transmission system.
ic a
To ensure security of the NEifdata, you can back up the commission result after


optimize performance e
t
ofreach wavelength.
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
IPA is one of automatic power management techniques, to prevent the light from

Hu


causing bodily injury, the product provides the IPA function to shut down the laser

n
on the affected OA as early as possible when a fiber breaks.
o


ati
When the RAU1 or RAU2 board is configured in the system to implement the IPA

ic
function, two methods are available for configuring IPA:

r t if
Set the RAU1 or RAU2 board as the Raman amplifier, the TN14FIU and OSC
e


C
boards as the Auxiliary Detection Board, and leave Detection Board

&
blank(Recommended) .
g
nas the Detection Board, and the regeneration boards or OSC boards

i
Set the RAU1 or RAU2 board as the Raman amplifier, the OA, RAU1 or RAU2
in
boards
a
T r Auxiliary Detection Board.
as the

e i
The APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end, which
w


ua APE function is started. When the flatness of the optical power for each channel at
ensures the signal-to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to determine if the

H the receive end differs significantly from that configured in deployment

commissioning, the APE function can automatically adjust the optical power of
each channel at the transmit end. This ensures that the flatness of the optical
power at the receive end is closer to that configured in deployment commissioning.
Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexer boards and optical multiplexer
boards supporting APE function are the M40V, WSM9, WSMD2, WSMD4, WSMD9,
ROAM and RMU9 boards.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Operation procedure: a w
Hu Management > NE Data


Step 1: Choose Administration > NE Software



Backup/Restoration from the main n menu.

io list. A shortcut menu is displayed.
Step 2: Right-click in the NE tView


ic a
t
Step 3: Click Backup. Thei f Backup dialog box is displayed.
r


Step 4: Select the e


C NM Server option button or NM Client to back up the

&
selected device information.

n g
Step 5: (Optional) If you select the NM Client option button, click to
i


in
select the path for backing up the device data.
a
T r 6: Click Start. The NE View tab page displays the backup progress.
Step
i


e Step 7: After the backup is successful, the U2000 creates the following
w


a directories and files in the specified path:

Hu NEName/yyyymmddhhmmss/dbf.pkg. In the preceding information, NEName

indicates the NE name, yyyymmdd indicates the year, month, and day, and
hhmmss indicates the backup time.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hupower is as follows: (Sensitivity +3) to
 Reference answer:

1. The optimal receive range of the input optical

(overload –5) dBm
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NG WDM equipment supports the following equipment-level protection

Hu


schemes: Power backup, fan redundancy, cross-connect board backup, system

n
control communication board backup, and clock board backup.
o


ati
The Optix OSN 1800 subrack, Optix OSN 8800 T16, 8800 platform subrack,

ic
universal platform subrack, Optix OSN 9800 P18, and OSN 9800 universal platform

t if
subrack use two PIU boards to supply power to the entire system in hot backup
r
e
mode. When one PIU board is faulty, the system can still work properly. The Optix
C
OSN 1800 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, and OptiX OSN
&
ng
9800 universal platform subrack support AC power supply. When the AC power
i
supply is used, the corresponding power board is APIU.
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Optix OSN 8800 T32, T64, and Optix OSN 9800 U16, U32, and U64 subracks

Hu


use the partitioned power supply mode. Each subrack is configured with PIU
boards to back up each other.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The power supply voltage of the OptiX OSN 9800 U32 subrack is -48V/-60V DC

Hu


power. The current can be flexibly configured. In this example, the areas with the

n
same background color are the same partition. A1 and B1, A2 and B2, A3 and B3,
o
ti
A4 and B4, A5 and B5 back up each other to supply power to the subrack. If any

c a
external input -48V/-60V power supply is faulty, the normal operation of the
i
equipment is not affected.
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OSN 1800V system control, cross-connect, and timing board supports 1+1

Hu


active/standby protection. The active and standby cross-connect boards back up

n
each other. The active cross-connect board and the standby cross-connect board
o
ti
are connected to the service cross-connect slots through the backplane bus to
protect the services.
ic a
f of the OptiX OSN 8800 support 1+1
The SCC and cross-connect iboards
t
r


Ce
active/standby protection.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OSN 9800 U16, U32, and U64 control boards support 1+1 active/standby

Hu


protection, and the cross-connect board uses M:N backup.

o n
The system control and cross-connect board area of the OSN 9800 U64 consists of

ti
14 cross-connect boards (XCS) and two SCC boards (CTU). The cross-connect
a
ic
board adopts the 2:12 backup mode, which provides cross-connections for the

rt if
service boards on the front and rear sides.


C e
The OSN 9800 U32 and U16 control boards and cross-connect boards have seven

adopts the 2:5g

&
cross-connect boards (XCS) and two SCC boards (CTU). The cross-connect board
backup mode to provide cross-connections for the service board.
i n When any fan in the fan tray is faulty, the system can run for 96
n
aithe ambient temperature of 0°C~45°C.
Fan redundancy:
hoursrat
i T
e
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The WDM equipment provides two types of optical line protection: 1+1 and 1:1.

Hu


The 1+1 optical line protection is implemented by the dual fed and selective

n
receiving function of the OLP board. According to the position of the OLP board
o
ti
on the network, the protection segments are different, including 1+1 OMS trail

c a
protection and 1+1 OTS trail protection.
i
t
The 1:1 optical line protection

r if is implemented by the OLSP/OLSPA/OLSPB board.
The OLSP/OLSPA/OLSPB
C e board provides two channels of optical channels. In
normal cases, the service signals are transmitted on the main optical channel.
When the optical &
g fiber of the active optical line is faulty, the standby optical path
n light source of the board for fiber line detection. If the standby
i
uses the auxiliary

a in is normal, the service is switched to the standby optical channel

optical path

T r the optical switch inside the OLSP/OLSPA/OLSPB board.

through
ei protection uses auxiliary light sources instead of optical signals to split optical
a wsignals into two channels. Therefore, the insertion loss introduced in 1:1 protection
1:1


Hu is smaller than that in 1+1 protection.

 1+1 optical line protection: The switching time is ≤50ms, excluding the detection
time.

 The following devices can support 1:1 OLP:

 OSN 6800/OSN 8800T16/T32/T64/OSN 8800 UPS/OSN 9800.

 OSN 1800 cannot support OLSP board.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
There are two application modes for optical line protection:
u


 Application mode one: 1+1 OTS pathH protection

o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n mode two: 1+1 OMS parth protection
i
in
 Application

a
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Optical line protection range: Line fiber, that is, the fiber between the source OLP

Hu


board and the sink OLP board.

o n
Optical line protection is used to protect the optical fibers between adjacent sites

ti
by using the separated route. Therefore, the optical line protection is meaningful
a
ic
only in the chain network. In the ring topology, services between sites can be

rt if
protected by using different routes of the ring network. Therefore, optical line
e
protection is not used.
C
&only OLP switching between A and B is triggered, and OLP
Optical line protection is performed by segment. For example, if fibers between A


and B are broken,g

n downstream BC and CD sites is not triggered.
i
in
switching between
a
r line protection, OLP is generally configured before the outbound fiber
T
In optical


ebei configured
(1+1 OTS path protection), that is, after FIU (OSC) or OA (ESC). Theoretically, it can
w between the amplifier and the multiplexer/demultiplexer board
a (1+1 OMS path protection). In this case, two sets of OA boards are required, which
H u
is not recommended. If both B and C are pure OA sites, OLP boards can be used
only at sites A and D, and OLP boards are not used on sites B and C. However,
there are two problems: 1. B and C need to use two sets of OLA. 2. This
configuration depends on the automatic shutdown function of the OA board.
However, this function has a certain delay, which prolongs the switching time.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The switching modes include revertive and non-revertive. Revertive indicates that

Hu

services are automatically switched back to the working channel after the working
channel recovers, and non-revertive indicates that services are not automatically
n
switched back to the working channel after the working channel recovers. By
o
ti
default, the optical line protection is non-revertive.
a
ic
In the case of the 1+1 optical line protection, the switching mode can be set to
if


r t
single-ended switching or dual-ended switching. When the switching mode is set
to single-ended switching, the APS protocol is not required. And when the
Ce
switching mode is set to dual-ended switching, the APS protocol is required.

&
For 1+1 single-ended switching, both POWER_DIFF_OVER and MUT_LOS are SF

ng
conditions. For 1+1 dual-ended switching, MUT_LOS is used as the SF condition,
i
and POWER_DIFF_OVER is used as the SD condition.
n
i
a are asforfollows:


T r
The conditions
protection
triggering the automatic switching of the 1+1 optical line

i
e MUT_LOS: the input optical power is lost. When the OLP board fails to detect
w the optical power, the protection switching is triggered. The threshold can be


a
Hu
set. The default value is -35dBm.
 POWER_DIFF_OVER: the difference between the input optical power of the
working channel and that of the protection channel crosses the threshold.
The difference threshold of the working and protection channels can be set.
The value range is 3~8dB, and the default value is 5 dB. The initial difference
between the working and protection channels needs to be manually set.
Range: -10dB~10dB.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The “active and standby channel difference" refers to the received power

Hu


difference between the active and standby optical channels. The “active and

n
standby channel difference threshold” refers to the threshold of the received
o
ti
power difference range between the active and standby optical channels.

ic a
On the engineering site, the quality and situation of the active and standby optical
if


t
channels cannot be guaranteed to be totally the same. Some difference is allowed
r
e
and reasonable. Hence, the NG-WDM provides the initial difference of the active
C
and standby channels that can be set to eliminate the difference of the
&
ng
engineering design. This difference is called “active and standby channel
i
difference threshold”, which can be set using the NM system.
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configuration procedure: a w
Hu Configuration > Port Protection


In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose



from the Function Tree.

o n
a
In the Port Protection window, ti click New. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.
ic dialog box is displayed. Select a protection type.


i f
The Create Protection Group
rt types are optical line protection, intra-board 1+1
The available protection
e
C
protection, and client-side 1+1 protection.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
By receiving and transmitting signals on both the working channel and protection

Hu


channel, OLSP provides protection for services on the working channel. In normal

n
situations, protected service signals are transmitted and received using the
o
ti
working channel, and the auxiliary light source transmits C-band auxiliary optical

c a
signals to the protection channel to monitor the status of the protection channel.
i
rt if
When a fault occurs on the working channel, both the transmit and receive

Ce
switches undergo a switchover, the protected service signals are switched to the
protection channel, and C-band auxiliary optical signals are switched to the
&
working channel so that the status of the working channel can be monitored.

i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
signal fail (SF): If 1:1 optical line protection is configured, the OLSP/OLSPA/OLSPB

Hu


board reports MUT_LOS.

 1:1 OLP only supports OTS.

o n
The APS protocol and overhead bytes
a ti need to be forwarded between the
ic through the system control board. All nodes


OLSP/OLSPA/OLSPB and ST2/AST2

i f
t control boards.
must be configured with rsystem

When 1:1 protection C


e
is configured, the OLSP/OLSPA/OLSPB, ST2/AST2, SCC, and
STG boards must & be configured in the same subrack.

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The range of intra-board 1+1 protection is as follows: Fiber on the OCh trail, that is,

Hu


the fiber between the source OTU board and the sink OTU board.

o n
OTU dual fed and selective receiving: support revertive mode/non-revertive mode.

ti
The default mode is non-revertive mode.
a
ic


rt if
OTU+OLP dual fed and selective receiving: only support non-revertive mode.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Intra-board 1+1 protection applies to chain and ring topologies:

Hu 1+1 protection is similar to



 In the case of chain networking, intra-board

optical line protection. Therefore,nseparate routes need to be provided
between adjacent sites.
t io
ic a intra-board 1+1 protection uses the separated
tif to protect services. That is, services are transmitted
 In the case of a ring network,
r
path on the ring network
e
C
clockwise and counterclockwise on the ring and finally reach the destination
node.
&
g


trail, thatin
in
The range of intra-board 1+1 protection is as follows: The optical fiber on the OCh
is, the fiber between the source OTU board and the sink OTU board,
r aprotect the OTU board.
T
cannot
i
e
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
R_LOS triggers protection switching. Set the R_LOS alarm threshold on the U2000

Hu


based on the engineering requirements. The default value is -35dBm.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OTU+OLP Mode: The optical power difference cannot be used as the switching

Hu


condition.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
u


In the NE Explorer, select the NE and H

 choose Configuration > Port Protection
from the Function Tree.
o n
a ti click New. In the Confirm dialog box, click
In the Port Protection user window,
ic Group dialog box is displayed. Select Intra-Board


i f
Yes. The Create Protection
1+1 Protection fromrtProtection Type. Enter the other parameters of the

Ce by one.
protection group one

For the&unidirectional switching of intra-board 1+1 protection that uses

g


i n
OLP/DCP/QCP, select the two WDM-side optical ports of the

a inOLP/DCP/QCP as Working Channel and Protection Channel respectively.

T r For the bidirectional switching of intra-board 1+1 protection that uses

i


e OLP/DCP/QCP and LDX, select the two WDM-side optical ports of the

a w OLP/DCP/QCP as Working Channel and Protection Channel respectively.

Hu  Click OK. In the displayed dialog box, click Close. The created protection
group is displayed in the window.

 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Repeat the preceding steps.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The client-side 1+1 protection of the OTU uses the dual fed and the selective

Hu


receiving function of the OLP/SCS board to protect the OTU board and units after
it.
o n


ati
The client-side 1+1 protection performs the switching based on the client-side

ic
ports. And it has the larger extent of protection that other protection types.

r tif
We can see from this figure that the client-side 1+1 protection of the OTU actually
e


C
has two configurations. One does not require using the centralize cross-

&
connection and the other requires using it.
g
nfault. When the line fiber is damaged, the switching is performed for


n
effect of ithe
i
the software can perform the switching at different granularities based on the

a
r board. In this case, it is the same with that of the OTU intra-board 1+1
T
the entire
i
eperform
protection in effect. When the certain channel of client-side fiber is broken,
w the switching on the client-side optical port that is affected.
a In the master/slave mode, when the active and standby OTUs are in the same
H u 

subrack, the OLP and SCS can be used; when the active and standby OTUs are not
in the same subrack or in the same NE, only the OLP can be used. When the active
and standby OTUs are not in the same subrack, the NE software cannot judge the
subrack power-off and communication failure between subracks. The former one
requires the switching and the latter one does not. Hence, when the OTU is
applied in the subrack, it is necessary to use the OLP because this can have the
OLP switching triggered when there is no optical signal due to the power-off.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Client 1+1 protection scenarios: a w
u


Intra-subrack protection: The workingH and protection OTUs are located in the
same subrack.
o n
Inter-subrack protection: Thetiworking and protection OTUs are located in


ic a
r t if
different subracks of one NE.

different NEs. C
e
Inter-NE protection: The working and protection OTUs are located in

&

g
Multi-vendor protection: The working and protection OTUs are from Huawei
n party respectively.
and a ithird

a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Trigger conditions: Board offline, signal fail (SF), signal degrade (SD).

Hu


 The board offline

o n
Removing and re-inserting the board.
ti


c a
Cold resetting the board.
i
if caused by a board fault or subrack power outage.


Power outage on thetboard

r
Ce


Signal fail


Alarms on OTU& boards: R_LOF, R_LOS, R_LOC, HARD_BAD, OTUk_LOF,

g


i
OTUk_LOM, n OTUk_AIS, OTUk_TIM, ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI,
a in
ODUk_PM_LCK, ODUk_PM_TIM, ODUk_LOFLOM, ODUk_TCMn_AIS,

T r
ODUk_TCMn_OCI, ODUk_TCMn_LCK, ODUk_TCMn_TIM, OPUk_CSF,

ei OPUk_MSIM, OPUk_PLM, and REM_SF.

a w Alarms on OLP/DCP/QCP boards: R_LOS, POWER_DIFF_OVER.
Hu Signal degrade


 Alarms on OTU boards: B1_EXC, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC,

ODUk_TCMn_DEG, ODUk_TCMn_EXC, and REM_SD.

 Alarms on the LWXS board: IN_PWR_HIGH, IN_PWR_LOW.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The board offline a w
u


Removing and re-inserting the board.H



Cold resetting the board.

o n
ti


Power outage on the board

ic acaused by a board fault or subrack power outage.
f


Signal fail

rt i
Alarms on OTU C

e
boards: R_LOF, R_LOS, R_LOC, HARD_BAD, OTUk_LOF,
OTUk_LOM,& OTUk_AIS, OTUk_TIM, ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI,

n g ODUk_PM_TIM, ODUk_LOFLOM, ODUk_TCMn_AIS,

ODUk_PM_LCK,
i
in
ODUk_TCMn_OCI, ODUk_TCMn_LCK, ODUk_TCMn_TIM, OPUk_CSF,
a
r
OPUk_MSIM, OPUk_PLM, and REM_SF.
TAlarms on OLP/DCP/QCP boards: R_LOS, POWER_DIFF_OVER.
e i 

a wSignal degrade

Hu


Alarms on OTU boards: B1_EXC, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC,



ODUk_TCMn_DEG, ODUk_TCMn_EXC, and REM_SD.

 Alarms on the LWXS board: IN_PWR_HIGH, IN_PWR_LOW.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
u


In the NE Explorer, select the NE and H

 choose Configuration > Port Protection
from the Function Tree.
o n
a ti
In the Port Protection user interface, click New. In the Confirm dialog box,
ic Group dialog box is displayed. Select Client


i f
click OK. The Create Protection
1+1 Protection fromrtProtection Type, and set other parameters of this
protection group. e
C
& click Close in the dialog box that is displayed. The created
Click OK. Then
g


i n
protection group is displayed in the window.

a inthe NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Refer to Steps 1 through 3 to create

Start
r client 1+1 protection for the opposite NE.


i Tthe
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
ODUk SNCP can be used in various forms of networking.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the line board or the line fiber is faulty, the fault detection point at the

Hu


receive end reports the event. The system control board controls the cross-
connect board to perform the switching.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In this example, ODU1 services are transmitted from site A to site I. Sites A and I

Hu


can provide the dual transmitting and receiving function and are both configured

n
with the SNC/N protection. The protection switching is implemented according to
o
ti
SM and PM states. The TCM is not activated. (The TCM is normally used to monitor

c a
a certain path between the service transmitting and receiving nodes, such as a
i
if
path between nodes D and H. The source and destination nodes of the services do
rt
e
no require TCM termination.)
C area. The TCM1 is activated to monitor the transmitting
The DEGH is a separate
&The area provides the dual transmitting and receiving function.


Sites D and iH
g
quality in this area.
nare configured with SNC/S protection that performs switching
a
according into the SM and TCM states.
r
TwoTpaths exist between sites B and F. Site C is an optical repeater station and
ei not terminate the overheads. The protection switching is implemented


a waccording to the SM states. Similar to the intra-OTU board protection, this area
does

Hu provides the dual transmitting and receiving function. (Site C is an optical repeater
station. Therefore, the TCM is not required in this area.)
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Table 1 Alarms of SF a w
u


Alarms in
Alarms in the H Alarms in the TCM
ODUk SNCP the SM
PM Section n Section
Other Alarms
Section
t io
SNC/I
c a Unsupported
OTUk_LOF, fi
ODUk_PM_AIS,
SNC/S
OTUk_LOM, t i ODUk_PM_LCK, ODUk_TCMn_AIS,
r ODUk_PM_OCI, ODUk_TCMn_LCK, HARD_BAD,
R_LOF, R_LOS,

OTUk_AIS,e
C ODUk_PM_TIM, ODUk_TCMn_OCI, EXT_MODULE
SNC/N
&
OTUk_TIM
ODUk_LOFLOM ODUk_TCMn_TIM,
_OFFLINE

n g ODUk_TCMn_LTC
i
in
Table r2aAlarms of SD
T


i
e SNCP Alarms
ODUk in the SM Alarms in the PM Alarms in the TCM

a w Section Section Section

H u SNC/I
OTUk_DEG,
OTUk_EXC
ODUk_PM_EXC,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Unsupported

ODUk_TCMn_EXC,
SNC/S Unsupported Unsupported
ODUk_TCMn_DEG
ODUk_PM_EXC, ODUk_TCMn_EXC,
SNC/N Unsupported
ODUk_PM_DEG ODUk_TCMn_DEG

 ODUflex alarms are supported only in the PM section of the SNC/N protection
sub-type.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
Hu Configuration > WDM Service


In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose



Management from the Function n Tree.

t ioConfiguration tab, click Create SNCP Service.

On the WDM Cross-Connection
The Create SNCP Serviceic

a
tif list, and then select the corresponding service
dialog box is displayed. Select ODUK SNCP from the
r
Protection Type drop-down

Ce
type and other parameters.

Click OK. The &operation result shows that the operation is successful.
g


i n
Click Close.
in


r a
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The SW SNCP protection protects inter-subnet services and requires no protocol.

Hu


The SW SNCP protection provides protection for topologies such as ring with

n
chain, tangent rings, intersecting rings. This ensures high flexibility in application.
o
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The switching process is similar to that of ODUk SNCP protection.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
There is a signal fail (SF) condition. SF includes the following:

Hu


The optical module is offline (PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE).



o
The board is offline: including the nremoving or cold resetting the board.
ti


Board-side alarms: R_LOF, a

ic ODUk_PM_LCK, ODUk_PM_TIM, OTUk_AIS,
R_LOS, REM_SF, OTUk_TIM, OTUk_LOM,
f


rt i
ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI,
and OTUk_LOF.
C e
&
There is a signal degraded (SD) condition. SD includes the following board-side


g
alarms: B1_EXC, B1_SD, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC, OTUk_DEG, and OTUk_EXC.
n
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Tributary SNCP protects client services accessed by tributary boards on an OTN

Hu


network. Tributary SNCP is implemented by using the dual fed and selective
receiving function.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The tributary SNCP is similar to the ODUk SNCP, but the protection range is

Hu


different. Tributary SNCP services are dually fed and selectively received from two

n
tributary boards to one line board, thus protecting the equipment on the tributary
o
ti
side.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If you do not need to configure end-to-end protection for the ODU and do not

Hu


need to configure TCM subnet applications, select SNC/I.

o n
When the end-to-end protection of the ODU is not required but the TCM subnet

ti
application needs to be configured, select SNC/S.
a
ic


r t if
When the end-to-end protection of the ODU is required, select SNC/N.

tributary board: Ce
The supported protection types vary with the type of the services accessed by the

&
ng
 When the tributary board accesses the OTN services, the SNC/I, SNC/N, and
i
SNC/S are supported.
n
i
a the tributary board accesses the STM-16 or OC-48 SDH service or SDH
r
When

i Tor SONET services of a higher level, only the SNC/I is supported.



e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Alarm indicating SF and SD conditions a w
Hu


on
Triggering Alarms in the Alarms in the Alarms in the TCM Other
Condition SM Section
a ti
PM Section Section Alarms
SF OTUk_LOF
icODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_TCMn_AIS R_LOF
OTUk_LOMOTU
r tif ODUk_PM_LCK ODUk_TCMn_LCK R_LOS
k_AIS
OTUk_TIMCe ODUk_PM_OCI
ODUk_PM_TIM
ODUk_TCMn_OCI
ODUk_TCMn_TIM
R_LOC
HARD_B
& ODUk_LOFLOM ODUk_TCMn_LTC AD
SD
ng OTUk_DEG ODUk_PM_EXC ODUk_TCMn_EXC B1_EXC

i ni OTUk_EXC ODUk_PM_DEG ODUk_TCMn_DEG

r a
T
•SNC/I: Support SM section alarm

e i
•SNC/S: Support SM section alarm and TCM section alarm.

a w •SNC/N(TCM): Support SM section alarm and TCM section alarm.

Hu
•SNC/N(PM): Support SM section alarm and PM section alarm.

 The triggering conditions of tributary SNCP protection are the same as those of
ODUk SNCP protection. When configuring tributary SNCP protection on the
U2000, set Protection Type to ODUK SNCP.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
u


 Select the NE in the NE Explorer, and Hchoose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the function tree.
o n
a
In the lower portion of the WDMti Cross-Connection Configuration window,
icThe Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.


i f
click Create SNCP Service.
Select ODUk SNCP from
e rt the Protection Type drop-down list. Then, configure
C
the Service Type parameter.

Click OK. The&created protection groups are displayed on the interface.

g


i n
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
ODUk SPRing protection mainly applies to a ring network with distributed services

Hu


(for example, the services exist between neighboring sites). This protection uses

n
two different ODUk channels to achieve the protection of the distributed services.
o


ati
The ODUk SPRing protection applies to ring networks and thus requires the

ic
support of a network protection protocol. The protection adopts dual-ended

t if
switching mode, namely, when the receive end of the working channel fails, both
r
e
the receive and transmit ends of the working channel are switched to the
C
protection channels.
&
ng
Note: ODUk SPRing Protection is supported by OSN 6800/OSN 8800 T16/T32/T64.
i


n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OptiX OSN 8800 supports two types of ODUk SPRing: Common style and

Hu


Enhanced style.

n
For the common ODUk SPRing protection, if all protection channels of the
o
ti


ring network are pass-through cross-connections, their performance cannot

ic a
be accurately detected. In this case, the protection fails. Hence, a

rt if
management node must be specified.

C e
For the enhanced ODUk SPRing protection, management nodes are not


&
essential to services.

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Each service is bound with a block ID to ensure service uniqueness.
u


The management node must be bound with

 Hservices.
Only one node can be configured as the
o n management node on the entire ring
ti


network.
a
icuniquely identify services on the ring network. The
Block ID: Block IDs are usedifto
rt value 0 indicates the removal of binding relations. The


ODUk SP supports atC

e
IDs range from 1 to 31. The
most 32 sites. When the ring network is configured with 32
sites, services are &
added or dropped on two adjacent nodes and the pass-through

n g
i
nodes are not involved.

a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the transmit direction: The client services to be protected are input through the

Hu


tributary board, cross-connected to the east working line board, and then dually

n
fed to the east and west protection line boards. In this way, the working signals
o
ti
and protection signals are separated. After that, the working signals and

c a
protection signals are respectively transmitted over the working and protection
i
channels.
rt if

Ce
In the receive direction, when the operating is normal, only the cross-connection
of the working channel is enabled; that of the protection channel is disabled. When
&
ng
the working channel is faulty, disconnect the cross-connection of the working
i
channel at the receive end. Hence, the cross-connection of the protection channel
n
ai
that corresponds to the west line board is available, and the services are operating
r
T
in the protection channel.
i
e the working channel is restored, because the protection is revertive, the
wWhen


a service signals are switched back the cross-connection that corresponds to the
u
H originally specified line board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The protection switching takes the common ODUk ring protection as an example.

Hu

As shown in the figure, project K is a ring network consisting of six sites: A, B, C, D,
E, and F, each station has one service with the adjacent station. station A is set as
n
the management node to transmit three services (west working, west protection,
o
ati
and east protection). The following takes the ODU1 service between station A and
station C, and between station E and station F as an example.
ic

t if
In normal cases, the services of A<->C are as follows:
r


Ce
The working route of A and C is the west (A–B–C), and the ODU1 of the west
line board of station A is the working channel. The protection route between
&
A and C is the east (A–F–E–D–C), occupying the ODU1 of the east line board

ng
at station A as the protection channel.

n i
ai
 The working route of NE C and NE A is the east (C–B–A), and the ODU1 of the

T r
east line board at station C is the working channel. The protection route
between C and A is the west (C–D–E–F–A). The ODU1 of the west line board
e i at station C is the protection channel.

a wIn normal cases, E<->F services are as follows:

u


H The working route of E and F is the west (E–F), and the ODU1 of the west line


board of station E is the working channel. The protection route between E

and F is the east (E–D–C–B–A–F), occupying the ODU1 of the east line board
at station E as the protection channel.
 The working route of F and E is the east (F–E), and the ODU1 of the east line
board at station F is the working channel. The protection route between F
and E is the west (F–A–B–C–D–E), occupying the ODU1 of the west line board
at station F as the protection channel.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When station A detects that its west route is faulty,
u protection channel. The channel


A<->C services need to be switched to Hthe

n
usage between station A and station C is as follows: The service from station

t io east protection route (A–F–E–D–C),

A to station C is switched to the
a ODU1. The services from station C to
occupying the protectioncchannel
i
station A are switchedito
t f the west protection route (C–D–E–F–A), occupying
r
e ODU1. In this case, station A is the west local end,
the protection channel
C
station C is the west remote end, and stations F, E, and D are in the pass-
&
g
through state.
n services between site E and site F are not affected and are still
i
in on the original working route.
Bidirectional

r a
transmitted

i T
e After the west route of station A recovers, the ODUk SPRing protection

a w performs the same operations as the preceding process. Then, the ODUk

Hu
SPRing protection switching is performed again and the channel is restored
to the normal state.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a
When station F detects that its east route is faulty, w
u protection channel. The channel


E<->F services need to be switched to Hthe

usage between site E and site F is n as follows: The service from station E to
station F is switched to the east
t ioprotection route (E–D–C–B–A–F), occupying
the protection channel ODU1.
ic a The services from station F to station E are
t if
switched to the west protection
r
route (F–A–B–C–D–E), occupying the
protection channeleODU1. In this case, station E is the west end, and station F
is the west end. C Stations A, B, C, and D are in the pass-through state.
&
n g
The bidirectional services between station A and station C are not affected

ni still transmitted on the original working route.



and are
i
a the west route of station F recovers, the ODUk SPRing protection
r
i Tperforms the same operations as the preceding process. Then, the ODUk
After

e
a w SPRing protection switching is performed again and the channel is restored

Hu
to the normal state.

 Services on the working channel can be switched to the protection channel

regardless of whether any route on the ring network is faulty. Therefore, ODUk
SPRing protection has the following features: The protection channel is shared by
the working channels of each section on the ring.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the ODUK SP, an NE may be in one of the following four states:

Huno optical alarms or external



I: The entire network is in idle state, and



commands trigger the protectionnswitching. Normally, the ODUK SP ring is in

idle state.
t io
S: If switching conditionsic
a
tif sides of the protection ring change to the switch
 such as broken fibers exist in the ODUK SP ring, the
states of the NEs at rboth

C e connection switching is performed. The NEs switch

state, that is, the bridge

&units.
services from the working channel to the protection channel by using the
g
cross-connect
n the switching conditions no long exist in the protection ring, for
i
WTR:


a inWhen

T r
example after fiber restoration, the states of the NEs at both sides of the

e i protection ring change to the WTR state, and the current service conditions
a w are the same as the those in the switch state. If no switching conditions occur

Hu
during the whole WTR duration, the entire network enters into idle state. The
use of WTR duration can avoid frequent protection switching caused by
unstable lines. The WTR duration ranges from 5 minutes to 12 minutes, and
the default WTR duration is 10 minutes.

 P: When the site does not process services, services are directly passed
through.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Trigger Condition: a w
Huboard is powered off or offline.


The board is fault, for example, the line

o n
Signal fail (SF): R_LOS、R_LOC、HARD_BAD、OTU2_LOF、OTU2_LOM、
ti


a
OTU2_AIS、OTU2_TIM、OTU3_LOF、OTU3_LOM、OTU3_AIS、OTU3_TIM、
ic
i f
ODU2_PM_AIS、ODU2_PM_LCK、ODU2_PM_OCI、ODU2_PM_TIM、
rt
ODU3_PM_AIS、ODU3_PM_LCK、ODU3_PM_OCI、ODU3_PM_TIM、
e
C
ODU0_LOFLOM、ODU1_LOFLOM、ODU2_LOFLOM、ODUk_TCM6_AIS、

&
ODUk_TCM6_OCI、ODUk_TCM6_LCK、ODUk_TCM6_TIM.

n g

i
Signal degrade: ODUk_TCM6_DEG、ODUk_TCM6_EXC.

a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The SDH/PDH Analyzer are mainly used to test the indicators such as the jitter and

Hu


bit error characteristics of the OTU board. In addition, they can be used as test

n
signal sources to provide test signals for the OTU board. The common SDH
o
ti
analyzers include ANT-20SE, HP37718A, MP1570A, and ANT-10G.

ic a
The spectrum analyzer is used to test the spectral characteristics of the WDM
if


rt
system, such as the central wavelength, SMSR, and OSNR. The common models
e
are MS9710C and HP86145B.
C


meter used in g
&
The optical power meter is mainly used to test the signal optical power. The power
the WDM system must be a large-range power meter, such as OLP-
i nthe most commonly used meter in the index test.
in
18B, which is
a
r some tools, such as fixed optical attenuators, fiber jumpers, fiber
T
In addition,


ei
adapters, and fiber cleaning tools, must be prepared during the test.

a wThe fixed optical attenuator can be classified according to the attenuation and
Hu interface. The NG WDM system adopts the direct insertion fixed attenuator. The


attenuation can be 15, 10, 7, 5, 3 or 1 dB.

 Pigtails are classified based on the length and interface. In the NG WDM system,
the LC interfaces are mainly used. Therefore, some pigtails with different lengths,
such as LC/LC, LC/FC, and FC/FC, need to be prepared.

 The FC port is mainly used to connect the signal to the optical port of the
instrument or the related port of the ODF.

 The flange requires several LC/LC, SC/FC, and SC/SC connectors.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM uses the L0+L1+L2 three-layer architecture. The L0 optical layer

Hu


supports wavelength multiplexing/demultiplexing and DWDM optical signal

n
adding/dropping. The L1 electrical layer supports cross-connection of ODUk/VC
o
ti
services. The L2 layer implements Ethernet/MPLS-TP switching.

ic a
Through the backplane bus, the system control board controls other boards. It
if


t
provides functions such as inter-board communication, service grooming between
r
e
boards, and power supply. The backplane bus includes: Control and
C
communication bus, electrical cross-connect bus, clock bus, etc.
&
ng
The functions of the modules in the figure are as follows:
i


n
ai
 Optical-layer boards are used to process optical-layer services and

T r implements optical-layer grooming based on the λ level.

e i Electrical-layer boards are used to process electrical-layer signals and

w


a perform optical-to-electrical conversion for signals. Grooming granularities at

Hu different levels can flexibly schedule electrical-layer signals through the

centralized cross-connect unit.

 The system control and communication board is the control center of the
equipment. It works with the network management system to manage the
boards of the equipment and realize the communication between the
equipment.

 The auxiliary interface unit provides input and output ports for clock/time
signals, alarm output and cascading ports, and alarm input/output ports.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OTU unit specifications described in this course mainly refer to the

Hu


specifications of the optical interfaces on the WDM side.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The test meter sends the test signal light that matches the rate of the tested board.

Hu


The test signal is connected to the Rx optical interface of the OTU through a fixed

n
optical attenuator. After the OTU completes wavelength conversion, the signal
o
ti
light sent from the OUT port is connected to the power meter or the optical

c a
spectrum analyzer, perform the test.
i
The test method for the OTU

r t if board with the FEC function is the same as that for
the OTU board withoute the FEC function. The only difference is that the average
C
transmit optical power of the OTU board with the FEC function is higher than that
of the OTU board&
n g with the FEC function.
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Take note to test the central wavelength as the peak power decreases by 3dB,

Hu


rather than the wavelength at the peak point.

o n
In case the sender is a laser of Single Longitudinal Mode (SLM), central wavelength

ti
means the wavelength of the main mode peak value.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the actual test, the center wavelength is defined as the average value of the -

Hu


3dB bandwidth of the optical signals sent by the WDM-side laser of the OTU.

o n
The instrument used for testing the center wavelength is usually a multi-

ti
wavelength meter or an optical spectrum analyzer.
a
ic


rt if
The nominal central frequency and central wavelength of C-band even:

NCF NCW
Ce
NCF NCW NCF NCW NCF NCW
196.00 1529.55 & 194.00 1545.32 195.00 1537.40 193.00 1553.33
195.90
i ng
1530.33 193.90 1546.12 194.90 1538.19 192.90 1554.13
n
195.80
r ai1531.12 193.80 1546.92 194.80 1538.98 192.80 1554.94

i T
195.70 1531.90 193.70 1547.72 194.70 1539.77 192.70 1555.75
e
w195.60
a 195.50
1532.68 193.60 1548.51 194.60 1540.56 192.60 1556.55

H u 1533.47 193.50 1549.32 194.50 1541.35 192.50 1557.36

195.40 1534.25 193.40 1550.12 194.40 1542.14 192.40 1558.17
195.30 1535.04 193.30 1550.92 194.30 1542.94 192.30 1558.98
195.20 1535.82 193.20 1551.72 194.20 1543.73 192.20 1559.79
195.10 1536.61 193.10 1552.52 194.10 1544.53 192.10 1560.61

 NCF: nominal central frequency

 NCW: nominal central wavelength

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
It is used to measure the spectral width of the optical pulse sent by the laser.

Hu


Because the channel spacing of the WDM system is very small, and the optical

n
pulse spectrum width of the laser is too large, crosstalk between different optical
o
ti
channels is easily generated. Therefore, the -20dB spectral width must not be
greater than the standard.
ic a
t if rates, the requirements for different light source
For the OTU boards of different

r
Ce
types are different.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The test method is the same as that of the central wavelength test.

Hu tolerance value is bigger.



The -20dB spectral width is smaller , the dispersion



o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the definition, the value of SMSR is the ratio of the power. In the test, the unit of

Hu


the optical power is dBm. Therefore, the value of SMSR is the difference between

n
the peak optical power of the main longitudinal mode and the peak optical power
o
ti
of the most prominent side mode.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Here we emphasize the specifications of the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Hu acceptable value of the average



The receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum



receive power required for reaching the n BER of 1×10 at the receive point R.
-12

t ioas the maximum acceptable value of the

The receive overload point is defined


ic aby the 1×10 BER at the receive point R.

average receive power required
if
-12

r t

e
Currently, there are two types of receiving modules: Pin and APD. Generally, the
PIN receiving range isC-18~0 dBm. The receive range of the APD is -27~-9 dBm,
and the values of &the specific OTU boards may be different.
g
n connect the optical power according to the following figure.
i
During the test,
Graduallyin


r a increase and decrease the attenuation of the VOA to adjust the power.
When
i T the tester detects that the BER ranges from 10 to 12, record the minimum
e of the optical power meter as the receiver sensitivity, the maximum value is
value

a wthe overload point.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The multiplexer and demultiplexer are passive optical components. Therefore, the

Hu


optical signals have a certain loss after passing through the multiplexer or

n
demultiplexer. We need to understand the loss of each channel, that is, the
o
ti
insertion loss of the channel.

ic a
If the optical components of the multiplexer and demultiplexer are different, the
if


t
requirements for insertion loss of each channel are different.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The test methods for the multiplexer and demultiplexer are the same. Connect the

Hu


tunable light source to the receive optical port of the tested board. Use an optical

n
power meter to test the input optical power of the current tunable optical source
o
ti
and the output port optical power of the corresponding wavelength, the difference

c a
between the measured input value and the output value is the loss of the
i
rt if
wavelength channel, the unit is in dB.


Ce
If there is no tunable light source on site, you can use the OTU board instead of
the tunable light source to test the insertion loss of a specific wavelength channel.
&
ng
How to test the insertion loss of the FIU board?
i


n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Isolation is just for de-multiplexer. a w
u


According to the definition of isolation, theHabove figure shows the connection of



n
the isolation test. The tunable light source sends the optical signals of a specific

t io
wavelength to the IN port of the demultiplexer. The signals passing through the
demultiplexer are sent out from
ic athe specific output port, in this case, the actual
output optical power of theif
r t current output port may be obtained by using a meter.
Then, when the accessed
C e tunable light source remains unchanged, the current
power values of the two adjacent ports of the output port are tested to obtain the
&optical signal of the specific wavelength falling into the
g
power of the input
n the isolation of the adjacent channel is the logarithmic
i
adjacent channel,

a inbetween the actual output power of the current specific wavelength and
difference

T r of the adjacent channel. Similarly, the isolation of non-adjacent

the power
ei
channels can be obtained.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During the test, adjust the VOA before the amplifier to ensure that the input

Hu


optical power of the OA board is within the normal range. Otherwise, the amplifier
may be overloaded or even burnt.
o n


ati
During the test, use the optical spectrum analyzer to test the input and output

ic
optical power of the optical amplifier. The difference between the output power

rt if
and the input power is the gain. The gain varies according to the optical amplifier
e
type. For example, the gain of the OAU, OBU, and OPU is different.
C
&
The flatness of the gain must be less than 6 dB.


n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The noise of the amplifier is mainly measured by the noise figure.

Hurefers to the degraded value of the



The noise figure of the optical amplifier board



output optical signal-to-noise ratio caused n by the spontaneous emission (ASE) of

the EDFA amplifier after the opticalio
is, a ratio of the signal-to-noiseca
t signal is amplified by the EDFA amplifier. That

i ratio of the input optical signal of the optical

if ratio of the output optical signal. We usually use
NF to denote the noisee r t
amplifier to the signal-to-noise
figure.
C


less than 6 dB.g

&
The requirement for the noise figure is that the PA is less than 5.5dB and the BA is

i n
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Reference answer:

1. C

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the NG WDM system, the central wavelength of the supervisory channel is

Hu


preferably 1510nm, and the normal wavelength range is 1510±10nm.

o n
The average transmit optical power of the NG WDM system is within the range of -

ti
4~0dBm. The receive range of the receive module is -48~-3dBm, that is, the
a
ic
receiver sensitivity is -48dBm, and the overload point is -3dBm. Generally, the

t if
receive optical power of the OSC is about -30dBm.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
We introduce the signals in two directions: Signal sending and receiving.

Huof each channel needs to be tested,



Transmit direction: The output optical power

but the test points are MPI-S and S '. n
o
The MPI-S point refers to thetioutput port of the multiplexer and optical


c a S 'indicates the OUT port of the optical

amplifier at the transmitisite.
r tif OA station.
amplifier at the intermediate

In addition, the C
e
maximum output optical power at points MPI-S and S 'must
& than 20 dBm. In other words, the optical power of combined


not be greater

n g
i
signals cannot exceed 20 dBm when the system is fully configured.

a in
Receive direction: We need to test the total optical power of the combined signals.
r


The T
test points are MPI-R points and R 'points.
i
e The MPI-R point refers to the input port of the optical amplifier and
a w 

H u demultiplexer at the receive site. R 'indicates the IN port of the optical

amplifier at the intermediate OA site.

 In addition to the optical power of combined signals, we also need to test the
input optical power, OSNR, and maximum path difference of each channel.
The test points are MPI-R and R '.

 The SNR of each channel must be greater than 20 dB, preferably greater than
22dB. The maximum path difference should be less than 3 dB.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Another important test in the system test is the 24-hour loopback performance

Hu


test without bit errors. The test is performed on each channel. Multiple channels
can be used for the test.
o n


ati
Pay attention to the following points during the test:

ic


r if
The test lasts for 24 hours. Generally, the test is performed after the system
t
commissioning is complete. In this case, the optical power of each channel

Ce
should be the optimal value.

&
The number of cascaded channels cannot exceed 16, and the types of
g


i n
services carried on the channels must be the same.

a in the optical power range of the meter and the board. During the self-
Adjust
r of the time port, you need to reinforce the fixed optical attenuator to


i Tloop
e prevent the optical power from being overloaded.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Reference answer:

1. 16

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Laser transceivers are used in optical transmission systems and associated test

Hu


tools. A bare optical fiber can produce a laser beam, which has high power density

n
but is invisible. Eyes will be injured when a beam of light enters eyes.
o


ati
Generally, looking at an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber

ic
without eye protection at a distance of greater than 150 mm does not cause eye

t if
injury. However, eyes may be hurt if an optical aid such as a microscope,
r
e
magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to look at an un-terminated optical fiber
C
even though the distance is greater than 150 mm.
&
ng
The Raman amplifier board launches high optical power. Before you operate or
i


n
maintain the board, turn off the laser for safety.

rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The output optical power of OA boards (including EDFA and Raman boards) is

Hu


high. To avoid equipment damage, note the following:

n
During the removal and insertion of optical fibers, optical connectors must be
o
ti


clean. Ensure that fiber end faces and board optical ports are free of

ic a
contamination before removing and inserting optical fibers. If a connector is

t if
contaminated, the optical fiber will be easily damaged.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When you are following ESD procedures, take the following precautions:
u


Check the validity and functionality ofH the wrist strap.

o n
Do not touch a board with your clothing.
i
tplace


Wear an ESD wrist strap and

c a the board on an ESD pad when you
fi


t
replace boards or chips. i
r other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags.

C
Keep the boards ande
Wear an ESD& wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they

ng
are also ESD-sensitive.
i
Keep
a inpacking materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the
r


i Tequipment room for packing boards in the future.

e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Notice: When installing a board, use proper force to prevent the pins on the

Hu


backplane from being leaned.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Notice: a w
u


When a loopback test is performed atH an optical port using a fiber jumper,
n
the optical attenuation must be increased to avoid damage to the equipment
due to the extremely high optical
t io power of the laser. For a board which
caters for an attenuator to
ic abe added, the attenuator must be added to the
receive optical port. if
e rt

C
Laser is dangerous. The light is not visible to the eyes with or without laser

&
protective glasses. Do not look into optical connectors or ports. Failure to
follow this gwarning can cause damage to the eyes, or even blindness.
namplifier emits strong light. Do not insert or remove the fiber
i
Raman
a in
T r
connector when the laser is working, to avoid damage to human body.

e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Proper temperature and humidity should be maintained inside the equipment

Hu


room for the transmission equipment to work well constantly, as shown in the
Table.
o n


ati
Too high or low temperature or humidity will harm the transmission quality and
service life of the equipment:
ic
r t if
Too high relative humidity in the equipment room for a long period will
e


C
greatly jeopardize the equipment. It will cause poor insulation or even

&
electrical leakage in certain insulation materials.

n g

i
When the relative humidity is too low, the captive screws will become loose

a in
as the insulation washer may get dry and shrink. Meanwhile the static
r
Telectricity generated in the dry climate may damage the circuits of the

ei equipment.

a w Too high indoor temperature will greatly reduce the reliability of the

Hu


equipment. If the equipment runs in such a high temperature environment

for a long period, its life will be shortened because the over high temperature
will accelerate aging of the insulation materials.

 The temperature and humidity values are obtained 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4
m in front of the equipment.

 Short-term operation means the consecutive working time of the equipment does
not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not
exceed 15 days.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure (Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner): a w
uDisconnect both ends of the fiber to


Turn off the lasers before the inspection.



be inspected.
H
n
Use a power meter to measureoand ensure that there is no laser light on the
ti


optical connector.
a
iclever of the cassette cleaner, and the shutter slides
Press down and hold the
back and exposes a rnew

i f
t cleaning area.
Place the fiber tip

e
C lightly against the cleaning area so that the end face is flat
&
on the cleaning area.
Drag the g
once. in
 fiber tip lightly on one cleaning area in the direction of the arrow

a in(Using lens tissue):



T r
Procedure

ei be inspected.
Turn
 off the lasers before the inspection. Disconnect both ends of the fiber to

a w Use a power meter to measure and ensure that there is no laser light on the
Hu


optical connector.
 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
 Clean the fiber tip on the lens tissue.
 Use the compressed air to blow off the fiber tip.
 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt.
 Do not touch the fiber connector after you clean it. Connect it to the optical
port board at once. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap
on it.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
HuDisconnect both ends of the fiber to


Turn off the lasers before the inspection.



be inspected.
o n
Test the optical power usingtai power meter. Ensure that the laser is turned


ic a
off.
r t if
Ce
Select the cleaning stick with a proper diameter for a certain type of the


adapter.
&

g
Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick.
n optical cleaning stick lightly on the optical adapters so that cleaning
i


a in is against the fiber tip. Hold the stick straight out from the adapter
Place the

T r
solvent

ei and turn the stick clockwise one circuit. Make sure that there is direct contact

a w between the stick tip and fiber tip.

Hu
 Use the compressed air to blow off the fiber tip.

 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt.

 Connect the fiber to the board, or put a protective cap on the port.

 Turn on the lasers after you connect the fiber to the board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure: a w
Hu


 Draw out the air filter.

o n
Clean the filter with water. Then wipe it with a cloth, and dry it with an air
ti


blower.
ic a
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Warm reset of the SCC board: a w
u


After a warm reset on the SCC board,H

 FPGA on the board is not updated, and
the configuration data in the memoryn of the board remains the same.

t ioin any of the following methods:

A warm reset can be performed


ic a
t i f button on the SCC board.
By pressing the RESET
r


C e
Cold reset of the SCC board:


When the SCC


& board is faulty, perform a warm reset of the SCC board. If the

ng after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.

fault persists
i
Theinmethods of performing a cold reset of the SCC board are as follows:
a
r Perform a cold reset by removing and then inserting the SCC board.


T
ei reset of the other boards:


a wCold


Hu
When the board is faulty, perform a warm reset of the board. If the fault


persists after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.

 A cold reset can be performed as follows :

 By removing and then inserting the board.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Don’t forget to add fix attenuator before Rx port or IN port to prevent overload

Hu


damage laser. Usually, the 10dB attenuator is used for hardware loopback.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
MON interface: online monitoring interface a w
Hu or troubleshooting. A small


It is very useful and helpful to do maintenance

n
amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum

t io so as to monitor the spectrum and optical

analyzer unit through the interface

ic a signal without interrupting the services.

performance of the multi-channel

r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The MON port is useful for maintaining and troubleshooting the services on the

Hu


primary channel.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The mechanical optical attenuator is of high sensitivity. You should rotate the

Hu


adjusting lever with proper speed and exertion. Otherwise, the optical power will

n
change abruptly, which may affect service and damage the attenuator.
o


ati
It is strongly recommended to practice before maintenance.

ic


rt if
Please confirm the attenuator, which you will adjust, is correct.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
To replace a board, make sure that the board to be inserted and the board to be

Hu


removed are the same type and characteristics.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Follow the steps below to remove the board: a w
u of the board, if there are screws


Loosen the captive screws on the front

 Hpanel
on the front panel.
o n
a
Grip the ejector levers and applyti an outward force until the ejector levers
ic connector of the board leave the backplane.


become horizontal and the

i f
e rt to pull out the board completely.
Apply force gently outward
C


&
Follow the steps below to insert a new board:


Open thegejector levers of the board using two hands and align the board


i nguide rail of the slot.

in
with the
a
T r the board along the guide rail into the slot slowly until it cannot move
Slide

ei forward.


a w Close the ejector levers to hold the beam of the subrack.

Hu


Tighten the two captive screws on the panel of the board.


 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Perform an active/standby switching on the NMS.a w
Hu Map and the NE Panel tab is


Double click the ONE icon on the Physical



displayed.
o n
a ti NE Explorer.
Right-click the NE icon and select
c 1+1 Protection.


Choose Configuration i> f iBoard

rt select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection. Select


C e
In Board 1+1 Protection,


&
Working/Protection Switching from the short-cut menu. Click OK on the

g
window displayed.
n If the Active Board is the standby board, the switching succeeds.
i


a in
Click Query.

T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a
Follow the steps below to cancel the switching. w
Hu in the Function Tree.


Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection

o n
In Board 1+1 Protection, select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection. Select
i
Restore Working/Protection tfrom the short-cut menu and click OK on the


ic a
tif
window displayed.
r
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The replacement of EFI1 a w
Hu


The ID of the master subrack is 0 by default.



ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of

o nSW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1-4 of
ti


SW1.
a
c ID1-ID6 are valid, and ID7 and ID8 are reserved.
ionly
i f
rtlow are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can
Among these ID values,


be set. C e
The bits from high to

&


n
set to i0.
g
When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is

a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the SCC has 1+1 protection and when the switching is normal, replacement

Hu


of the SCC does not break the communication between the NE and the T2000.

o n
When implement the changing SCC on site , need the second line engineer to
work together.
ati
ic


rt if
When SCC is 1+1 protection, all of the data in the SCC will synchronize between
the working and standby SCC, including ID , IP , gateway etc.
e
C step6, step8 need on-site operation. The others are done
Normally just the step1,


by U2000 remotely. &

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The battery on the SCC is to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power

Hu


failure of the SCC.

n
When the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to
o
ti


make a short circuit, and thus the battery supplies power normally.

ic a


jumper. r if
When the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery
t
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Replacing the SCC without protection. a w
u


When standby board is vacant, it is toH

 realize 1+1 protection. The method is
the same as upon SCC 1+1 Protection. n Just need to install one new SCC to
configure SCC 1+1 Protectionio
a t then you can follow the methods and steps
before we discussed.
ic
When standby board r tisifnot vacant, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured.
e SCC breaks the communication between the NE and the


C
Replacement of the

&
U2000. Here we just consider this situation.

n g
i
If ASON is using, the node ID also need to be changed.


a in board.
Replace the
r


T
ei card is correctly installed on a new SCC board before you insert the new SCC
If the CF card is needed to recovery the original database, ensure that the CF


a w board.
Hu  Connect the Web LCT/U2000 to the NE.

 The new board is initiated at factory, hence, the default IP subnet segment of
the one is 129.9.X.X.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.
u OK. The current alarm viewing


Hclick
In the Filter dialog box, set filter criteria and


window is displayed.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the Main Menu.
u OK. The history alarm viewing


Hclick
In the Filter dialog box, set filter criteria and


window is displayed.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu. Click the

Hu


Current Performance Data tab.

o n
In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs or boards, and click.

Complete the following information:

a ti Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor
icType.


Period and Performance Event

i f
e rt group box, check the Current Value or
Optional: In the Display Options


Maximum/Minimum C Value check box.

&


n g
Click Query to query the data from the NE.
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service >Tunnel>Tunnel Management from the main menu.
u


In the Filter Condition dialog box, set filterH

 criteria and click OK.

In the Tunnel Management window, click

o n Running Status to sort all tunnels by
ti


running status.
a
icof each tunnel is Up. Otherwise, rectify the MPLS
i f
rt
Ensure that the running status


tunnel fault.
C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

Hu


the Main Menu.

on
 In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .

ti


ic a
Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

r tif
Select one or more NEs in the list, right-click and choose Synchronize with NM

e
Time from the shortcut menu.
C
&
Click Yes in the Time Synchronization Operation prompt box. Click Close in the


g
Operation Result dialog box.
n
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
This slide describes how to periodically view the DCN communication status of NEs

Hu


to ensure DCN connectivity.

n
Choose System > DCN Management from the main menu. The Filter NE
o
ti


dialog box is displayed.

ic a


rt if
In the Filter NE dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK.

C e
On the NE tab of the DCN Management window, click Refresh.


&
Ensure that the communication status of the NE is Normal. If the value of

g
Communication Status is Disconnected, rectify the DCN fault.
n
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
On the U2000, choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main

Hu


Menu. Click the Current Performance Data option button.

o n
Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour for the Monitor Period field.

a
In the left pane, select one or more ti NEs and boards, and click .
ic Working Temperature for the performance event


i f
rt Value in the Display Options pane.
Click the Gauge tab, and choose


e
type. Choose Display Current
C
&
Click Query and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Confirm that


g
the temperature is within the normal range.
n
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data

Hu


Backup/Restoration from the main menu.

o n
In the NE View, select one or more NEs of the same type and click Backup.

In the Backup to dialog box, selecttithe location of the data to be backed up.


ic a
Items
r tif Description
NMS Server Back upeNE data to the root directory of the U2000 server.
C
NMS Client & NE data to the corresponding path on the U2000 client.
Back up
g up the database.
Click Start tonback
i
in


r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy

Hu


Management from the main menu. In the NE Backup Policy Management window,
click New Policy.
o n


ati
In the NE navigation tree, select NE Type and NE Version. The resource name, IP

ic
address, and version of the selected device type are displayed in the NE list.

rt if
Click Next. The Set Policy dialog box is displayed.
e


Set the backup policy.C

&

g
Click OK to complete the automatic backup of the selected NE. If you need to set
n backup of other NEs, select the corresponding NE in NE Backup
the automatic i
a in
Policy Management and right-click to enable the backup policy.
T r
e i
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Administration > Back Up/Restore NMS Data > Back Up Database from

Hu


the main menu.

o n
Set the backup path on the server and click Backup. The U2000 starts to back up

ti
the database and displays a dialog box indicating the operation progress.
a
ic


named by time: rt if
The database files are backed up to the default directory and backed up in a folder

e
C Linux, back up the file to NMS installation
On Solaris and SUSE
&


path/server/var/backup.

On thein
g
Windows platform, back up the file to the NMS installation path
in


r a
\server\var\backup directory.

e iT
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Protection Group from the main menu.

Hufor the exercise switching.



Click Filter, and choose the protection group



o n
Right click, choose Switch > Exercise Switching in the protection group.
it


The Operation Result dialog boxais displayed. Click Close.

ic Status. Then, check whether the service is


i f


e rt
Right click, choose Query Switching
switched normally.
C

&
Optional: If the protection group is configured as revertive, the service is switched

n
from the protectiong tunnel to the working tunnel after the working tunnel is
i
in Status and check whether Active Tunnel is Working Tunnel.
restored and the WTR time expires. After the WTR time expires, right click, choose
a
r
Query Switching
T
i
eSwitch
Optional:
 If the protection group is configured as non-revertive, right click, choose

a w > Clear. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed to indicate that the

Hu
operation is successful. Click Close.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After the manual switching is performed by using the U2000, the service should be

Hu


switched from the working tunnel to the protection tunnel. After the manual

n
switching is released, the service should be switched from the protection tunnel to
o
ti
the working tunnel.

ic a
In the Main Topology, select the source NE of an MPLS tunnel. Right-click the NE
if


rt
and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

C e
In the Function Tree, choose Configuration >Packet Configuration>Ethernet


&
Service Management>E-line Service.

n g
i
Select an Ethernet service, and choose the protection group.


a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can check the real-time statistics about an Ethernet port by browsing the

Hu


statistics group performance of the Ethernet port.

n
In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet board and choose Performance >
o
ti


RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

ic a


r tif
Click the Statistics Group tab.

Ce
Select the object from the drop-down list of Object. Set the range of
performance to be browsed, Query Conditions, and Display Mode.
&
ng
 Click Start. The information about the statistics group performance of the
i
Ethernet port is queried and then displayed.
n
i
a Click Print or Save As to output the Performance data.

r
Optional:
T During the routine maintenance, among the numerous performance events,

e i
Note:

a wthe following performance events should get our attention.

H u Received bytes and transmit bytes ( byte/s )

 Received packets and transmit packets ( pkt/s )

 ETHCOL: Collisions detected, this could be aroused by the inconsistent

working mode at two ends.

 ETHCRCALI: FCS and alignment error packets, this could be aroused by the
hardware fault of the Ethernet cable, Ethernet port, or even the hardware
fault from the remote end.
  TXBBAD: Total number of bytes in the transmitted bad packets, this could
be aroused by the hardware fault.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The history group performance includes the statistics about the Ethernet

Hu


performance of a certain period in the past. You can learn about the Ethernet

n
performance data of an Ethernet port by browsing the history group performance.
o


a ti
Select the corresponding Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose

ic
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

rt if
Click the History Group tab.
e


Select the objectCfrom the drop-down list of Object. Set the range of the
performance&


to be browsed, Ended From, To, History Table Type, and Display

n g
Mode.
i
a
ClickinQuery, and the information about the history group performance of the
r


i TEthernet port is displayed.

e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can determine the method for obtaining and saving the history data by

Hu


configuring an RMON history control group.

n
Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose REMON Performance > RMON
o
ti


Setting from the Function Tree.

ic a


and Custom Period 2. if

Set parameters that are related to 30-Second, 30-Minute, Custom Period 1,
rt
e
C box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
Click Apply. A dialog
successful. &


i ng
Click Close.
in


a
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The equipment supports the RMON performance monitoring for the physical port

Hu


and the service object. The Ethernet service performance is also called VUNI

n
performance which is used to monitor one specific piece of Ethernet service.
o


ati
In the NE Explorer, select Configuration >Packet Configuration>Ethernet
Service Management.
ic
rt if
Choose the Ethernet service that needs to be monitored, right click and select
e


C
Browse Performance from the drop-down list.

&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Set the items of performance to be monitored, Query Conditions, and Display

Hu


Mode.

o n
Click Start. The information about the statistics group performance of the Ethernet

ti
service is queried and then displayed.
a
ic


r t if
Optional: Click Print or Save As to output the Performance data.

Ce
In this Performance Management, you can check the real time performance,
history records through the Statistic Group and History Group tabs.
&
ng
 The specific monitor items can be selected through the RMON Setting tab
i
depends on the actual requirement.
n
i
a operation of History Group and RMON Setting is similar to that of

r
Note: The
T port RMON performance. During the routine maintenance, the following
i
Ethernet
e
a wperformance events should get our attention.

H u Received bytes and transmit bytes (byte/s).

 Received packets and transmit packets (pkt/s).

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Through the RMON Performance of MPLS Tunnel operation, you can check the

Hu


real time performance, history records of the MPLS Tunnel.

n
In the NE Explorer, select MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management
o
ti


> Static Tunnel.

ic a


r if
Choose the MPLS Tunnel that needs to be monitored, right click and select
t
Browse Performance from the drop-down list.

Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Set the items of performance to be monitored, Query Conditions, and Display

Hu


Mode.

o n
Click Start. The information about the statistics group performance of the MPLS

ti
Tunnel is real-timely monitored and the result is displayed at the window below.
a
ic


r t if
Optional: Click Print or Save As to output the Performance data.

Ce
In this Performance Management, you can check the real time performance,
history records through the Statistic Group and History Group tabs.
&
ng
 The specific monitor items can be selected through the RMON Setting tab
i
depends on the actual requirement.
n
i
a operation of History Group and RMON Setting is similar to that of

r
Note: The
T port RMON performance. During the routine maintenance, the following
i
Ethernet
e
a wperformance events should get our attention.

H u Received bytes and transmit bytes ( byte/s )

 Received packets and transmit packets ( pkt/s )

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Through the RMON Performance of PW operation, you can check the real time

Hu


performance, history records of the PW.

o n
In the NE Explorer, select MPLS Management > PW Management

a ti
Choose the PW that needs to be monitored, right click and select Browse
ic list.


i f
Performance from the drop-down

e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Set the items of performance to be monitored, Query Conditions, and Display

Hu


Mode.

o n
Click Start. The information about the statistics group performance of the PW is

ti
real-timely monitored and the result is displayed at the window below.
a
ic


r t if
Optional: Click Print or Save As to output the Performance data.

Ce
In this Performance Management, you can check the real time performance,
history records through the Statistic Group and History Group tabs.
&
ng
 The specific monitor items can be selected through the RMON Setting tab
i
depends on the actual requirement.
n
i
a operation of History Group and RMON Setting is similar to that of

r
Note: The
T port RMON performance. During the routine maintenance, the following
i
Ethernet
e
a wperformance events should get our attention.

H u Received bytes and transmit bytes (byte/s).

 Received packets and transmit packets (pkt/s).

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For normal services, the WDM-side and client-side lasers must be enabled.

Huof the U2000 and choose NE Explorer



Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology



from the shortcut menu. Select a board n and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. io
a t
c to view the laser status. Normally, the laser
Click Query in the lower right icorner
f


status is enabled. rt i
C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When handling a fault, you can set Loopback as required. There are three types of

Hu


loopback: Inloop, Outloop, and non-loopback.

o n
Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology of the U2000 and choose NE Explorer

ti
from the shortcut menu. Select a board and choose Configuration > WDM
a
Interface from the Function Tree.
ic
rt if
Click Query in the lower right corner to check the current loopback status. In
e


C
normal cases, the loopback status is Non-Loopback. You can perform the loopback

&
operation as required.

i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer 1: D a w
Hu


 Answer 2: BCD

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 OTN network layers are divided into the following two layers: Optical layer and
electrical layer. The electrical layer consists of the OPUk, ODUkP, ODUkT, and

n
OTUk layers. The optical layer consists of the OChr (OCh), OMSn, OTSn (OPSn),
o
ti
and OSC.

ic a
Full functionality: OCh contains complete optical-layer overheads (OOS).
if


rt
Reduced functionality: OChr has no OOS.
e


C
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Frame alignment overhead a w
Hu


 FAS: Frame alignment signal

 MFAS: Multiframe alignment signal
o n
 OTUk overhead
ati
ic
if
 SM: Section monitoring


e rt
GCC0: General communication channel 0
 RES: ReservedC
ODUk overhead&
ng TCM activation/deactivation coordination protocol


i
TCMACT:
in Tandem connection monitoring


aTCMi:
r FTFL: Fault type and fault location reporting


T
ei PM: Path monitoring


a w 

Hu
 EXP: Experimental channel
 GCC1/2: General communication channel 1/2
 APS/PCC: Automatic protection switching channel/Protection
communication channel
 OPUk overhead
 PSI: Payload structure identifier
 JC: Justification control bytes
 NJO: Negative justification opportunity bytes
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 The source and sink of the OCh client trail are client-side ports of the OTU. For
example, the LSX board corresponds to the path of a 10GE service on the client
side.
o n
The source and sink of the OCh ttraili are WDM-side ports of the OTU.
a


The source and sink of an OMS

i f ic trail is the start port of multiplexed signals,
rt path of a multiplexed signal.


which corresponds to the

e
C fiber connection between two adjacent OM/OD/OA
An OTS trail is a physical
& optical path.


boards on the main

OTS, OMS,in
g
n
and OCh trails are optical-layer trails. OTUk, ODUk, and Client trails

ai


are electrical-layer trails.

T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Client trail：Optical Channel (OCh) client trail.

 ODUk trail: Optical channel Data Unit-k trail.

OTUk trail: Optical channel TransportnUnit-k trail.



t io

c
OCh trail： Optical channel trail.
i a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 The OPUk performs client signal mapping, frequency adjustment, and rate
adaptation in the transmit direction.

The ODUk layer writes ODUk overheads:

o n
ti to PM at the ODUkP layer.


ic a
Write TTL, BDI, STAT, and BIP-8

i f
rt you need to write TTL, BIAE, BDI, STAT, and BIP-8 to
 Write GCC1/2.


C e
If the TCM is enable,
TCMi.
&
n
Generate g ODUk frame structure.
i


a in function of OTUk layer:

The source
r Write the overhead byte to OTUk layer.


T
ei Caculate BIP-8.


a w 

Hu
 Write SM, GCC, FAS, MFAS.

 Generate the complete OTUk frame structure.

 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The sink function of electrical-layer overheads is used to monitor the overhead

Hu

of the receive end, report the defect information, insert or insert back signals,
and suppress alarms and report performance events.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Monitor the overheads of the TCM sublayer and report the defect information:

 If a TTI mismatch occurs, dTIM is reported.

o n rate exceeds the threshold, the dDEG is

ti
 Monitor the BIP-8. If the bit error
reported.
a
icIf the value is 1011, the dBIAE alarm is reported.
Monitor the BIAE byte.
t i f
rbyte.


 Monitor the STAT

C e If the value is 000, the dLTC is reported. If the

&
value is 111, the dAIS is reported. If the value is 110, the dOCI is reported.

g
If the value is 101, the dLCK is reported. If the value is 010, the dIAE is
n
i
in
reported.

r a
Monitor BDI bytes. If the value is 1, dBDI is reported.
T



ei
Bit error reporting: Reports bit error performance events at the remote end

a w and local end according to the monitoring of BIP-8 and BEI.

Hu
 n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Monitor the overhead and report the defective information:

 Compare the expected TTI with the H received TTI and report the dTIM.

o n rate exceeds the threshold, the dDEG

ti
 Monitor the BIP-8. If the bit error
alarm is reported.
a
icIf the value is 111, dAIS is reported. If the value is
i f
rt If the value is 101, dLCK is reported.
 Monitor the STAT byte.

e
110, dOCI is reported.
C

&
Monitor BDI bytes. If the value is 1, dBDI is reported.

n g
Insert or insert back signal based on the defective information:
i


a in
According to the signal failure conditions transmitted from the service
r layer and the dTIM, dAIS, dOCI, and dLCK of the current layer, the


T
ei corresponding source function is notified to insert the BDI.
a w Notify the corresponding source function to insert back BEI according to

Hu


the BIP-8.

 According to the signal failure conditions transmitted from the service

layer and the dTIM, dAIS, dOCI, and dLCK of the current layer, the path
signal failure information is generated and transmitted to the next
function

 It is transmitted to the subsequent functions according to the DEG

situation.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 OTUk_LOF: The OTUk_LOF is an alarm indicating that the frame alignment
signal (FAS) is abnormal. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment

n
processing is out of frame (OOF) in three consecutive milliseconds.
o
 OTUk_AIS: OTUk alarm indication.
a ti An AIS signal travels downstream, which
indicates that a signal failurecis detected in the upstream direction.
t i fi is an alarm indicating that the multiframe
 OTUk_LOM: The OTUk_LOM
e r
C is abnormal. This alarm occurs when the multiframe
alignment signal (MFAS)
locating is out of&multiframe (OOM) in three consecutive milliseconds.
OTUk_TIM:n g trail trace identifier (TTI) mismatch. This alarm is generated

i OTUk
n control process when the TTI at the peer end mismatches that at the
during ithe
a
localr end if the TIM detection is enabled.
i T
eOTUk_DEG: OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that the OTUk signal is degraded.
w


a When the BIP8 detection is in burst mode, this alarm is generated if the signal

Hu degradation or bit error count exceeds the threshold. When the BIP8 detection
in poisson mode, this alarm is generated if the signal degradation exceeds the
threshold.

 OTUk_EXC: OTUk bit error count crossing the threshold. This alarm is generated
when the BIP8 detection is in poisson mode and bit error count exceeds the
threshold.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 For a WDM product, the detection and transmission of alarms vary according
to the type of the signals that are accessed into the OTU. The OTU is classified
into the following types:
o n
 Non-convergent OTU:
ati
ic

if
It refers to an OTU that converts one channel of client service signals.
rt
 Convergent OTU:
C e

&
It refers to an OTU that converges and converts multiple channels of

g
client service signals.
n
ni


ai
Regenerating OTU:

T r It refers to an OTU that regenerates the corresponding service

ei


signals at an intermediate station.

a w According to the type of the OTU and the type of the signals accessed by the

Hu


OTU, there are 7 situations defined.

 According to the type of the accessed service, this course focuses on the alarm
detection and transmission mechanism of the OTU board for processing SDH
standard signals and OTN standard signals.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 This section describes the alarm signal flow by analyzing how the OTU
processes the R_LOS alarm and PM BIP8 errors. The alarm signal flows of other
alarms are similar.
o n
 R_LOS
ati
ic


r if
The client side of the OTU at station A detects the R_LOS alarm. The
t
R_LOS signals are processed on the WDM side of the OTU and then
Ce
are sent to station B. The client side of the OTU at station B detects
&
the REM_SF alarm. The alarm is then sent to the downstream client

i ng
device of station B, and the OTU reports the R_LOF alarm to the

i n client device.

r aPM BIP8 errors

T
ei


The OTU at station B detects PM BIP 8 errors on the WDM side.

w


a When the PM BIP 8 errors exceed the threshold, the ODUk_PM_DEG

Hu or ODUk_PM_EXC alarm is generated. The number of errors

determines which alarm is generated. In addition, the performance
events indicting ODUk PM remote bit errors are sent to the WDM
side of upstream station A. The bit errors are then sent to the client
device (The bit errors cannot be sent to the downstream station
except that the PM BIP 8 errors are from the data inside). The alarms
related to bit errors are detected in the client device.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 This section describes the alarm signal flow by analyzing how the OTU
processes the OTUk_LOF alarm. The alarm signal flows of other alarms are
similar.
o n
The WDM side of the OTU tat i station B detects the OTUk_LOF alarm. Then,
a


ic
the OTU sends the ODUk_PM_BDI
f
and OTUk_BDI alarms to the WDM side
of upstream stationtA.
r i In addition, the alarm is then sent to the client side
e the alarm is processed on the client side, the R_LOF
of station B. After
C
alarm is detected in the client device.
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
This section describes the alarm signal flow by analyzing how the OTU unit

Hu

processes the R_LOS and OTUk_LOF alarms.
R_LOS
n



ti o
The client side of the OTU at station A receives R_LOS signals. The R_LOS

ic a
signals are processed on the WDM side of the OTU and then are sent to

if
station B. The WDM side of the OTU at station B detects the

r t
ODUk_PM_AIS alarm, and then an SF event is generated. The event

Ce
triggers a protection switching. The alarm is then sent to the downstream
client equipment of station B, and the OTU reports the ODUk_PM_AIS
&
alarm to the client equipment.

n g
 OTUk_LOF
i
a inOTUk_LOF
The alarm is detected on the WDM side of the OTU board at
r the OTU at the upstream


station B, and station B sends the OTUk_BDI alarm to the WDM side of
i T station A. At the same time, the alarm is then
e sent to the downstream station of station B, where it is processed on the
a w client side of the OTU. In this case, the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in

Hu
the client equipment. An SF event is generated on the WDM side of the
OTU at station B, and a service channel protection switching is triggered.
 The client side of the OTU at station A receives OTUk_LOF signals. The
OTU sends the OTUk_BDI alarm to the upstream client equipment of
station A. In addition, the LOF alarm is processed on the WDM side of the
OTU and then is sent to station B. The WDM side of the OTU at station B
detects the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm, and then an SF event is generated. The
event triggers a protection switching. The alarm is then sent to the
downstream client equipment of station B, and the OTU reports the
ODUk_PM_AIS alarm to the client equipment.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
OTUk_TIM a w
uOTUk_TIM alarm on the client side,


After the OTU at station A receives theH

it sends the OTUk_BDI alarm to the upstream station, but it does not send
o n
the OTUk_TIM alarm to the downstream station. If the TIM is enabled in
the subsequent action, an SF it event is generated and the WDM side of the
OTU at station B reportscthe
i a ODUk_PM_AIS alarm. The ODUk_PM_AIS
t if
alarm is sent to the downstream
r
and the client device reports this alarm.
After the OTU atestation B receives the OTUk_TIM alarm on the WDM side,
C sent to the downstream if the TIM is not enabled in the


this alarm is not

subsequent & action. If the TIM is enabled in the subsequent action, an SF
event isggenerated. After the client side of station B processes the event,
i n device reports the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm.
the client

a in


T rThe client side of the OTU at station A receives ODUk_PM_AIS,

ODUk_PM_TIM/ODUk_PM_BDI

ei ODUk_PM_LCK, or ODUk_PM_OCI signals. The signals are not processed



a w and reported at the local station. After the signals are sent to station B,

Hu
the WDM side of the OTU at station B detects the ODUk_PM_AIS,
ODUk_PM_LCK, or ODUk_PM_OCI alarm. Then, an SF event is generated.
The event triggers a protection switching. The alarm is then sent to the
downstream client equipment of station B, and the OTU reports the
ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_LCK, or ODUk_PM_OCI alarm to the client
equipment.
 An SF event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at station B, and a
protection switching is triggered.
 n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
This section describes the alarm signal flow through an example in which four
u


H
client-side services are accessed on the convergent OTU.
Four channels of R_LOS signals are accessed on the client side.
n four channels of R_LOS signals on the


 The OTU at station A accesseso

tiprocessed in the middle part of the OTU at
a
client side. After being
iconsignals
i f
station A, the alarm are then sent to station B. The REM_SF

rt client equipment.side of station B. The R_LOF alarm is

alarm is generated
detected inethe
the client

C

&
One channel of R_LOS signals are accessed on the client side.

g
The OTU at station A accesses one channel of R_LOS signals on the
nclient side, for example, channel 1 at optical port 3. After being
i


a in processed in the middle part and on the WDM side of the OTU at

T r station A and the WDM side of station B, the alarm signals are then

ei sent to the downstream station. The REM_SF alarm of channel 1 at

optical port 3 is generated on the client side of station B. The R_LOF
a w alarm is detected in the client equipment.

Hu  Non-R_LOS signals are accessed on the client side.

 The signal flow of the R_LOF or the LOC is similar to that of the
R_LOS.
 When any other alarms are accessed, the same alarm is reported at each
detection point in the system.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
This section describes the alarm signal flow through an example in which four
u


H
client-side services are accessed on the convergent OTU.
There is R_LOS, OTUk_LOF, OTUk_AIS, ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI, or
n


ODUk_PM_LCK on the WDM side.

i o
The WDM side of the tOTU at station B accesses and processes the


alarm signals. Theic

a
i f OTU sends the ODUk_PM_BDI and OTUk_BDI

rtthe client
alarm to the WDM
is then senteto
side of upstream station A. In addition, the alarm
side of station B. After the alarm is
processed Con the client side, the R_LOF alarm is detected in the client
&
equipment.

nAng

i SF event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at station B,

a in are bit error alarms on the WDM side.

and a protection switching is triggered.

T

r There

ei  The OTU at station B accesses and processes bit error alarm signals

a w on the WDM side, and then sends remote bit error performance

Hu
events to the WDM side of upstream station A. The bit error alarm is
then sent to the client side of the downstream station B, and the bit
error alarm is detected in the client equipment.
 An SD event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at station B.
In this case, users can determine whether the SD event triggers a
service channel protection switching through proper configuration.
 n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Four channels of R_LOS signals are accessed on the client side.
u


 The OTU at station A accesses four H channels of R_LOS signals on the

client side. After being processed in the middle part and on the WDM
side of the OTU at station A, the
o n alarm signals are then sent to station B.
The ODUk_PM_AIS alarm of
a tithe corresponding channel is generated in
the middle part of station
ic B. The ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the
client device.
r t if

e
An SF event is generated in each channel of the OTU at station B, and a
C is triggered.
protection switching
One channel of &
client side. g
 R_LOS, OTUk_LOM or OTUk_LOF signals is accessed on the

i n
a inOTU atsignals
The station A accesses one channel of R_LOS, OTUk_LOM or
r port 3. After beingonprocessed


OTUk_LOF the client side, for example, channel 1 at optical

i T in the middle part and on the WDM side of
e the OTU at station A and the WDM side of station B, the alarm signals are
a w then sent to the downstream station. The ODUk_PM_AIS alarm of channel

Hu
3 at optical port 1 is generated in the middle part of station B. The
ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the client device.
 An SF event is generated in each channel of the OTU at station B, and a
protection switching is triggered.
 The alarm signals except for the signals of the R_LOS, OTUk_LOM, and
OTUk_LOF alarms are accessed on the client side.
 When any of other alarm signals is accessed, the corresponding alarm is
reported at each detection point in the system.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 This section describes the alarm signal flow through an example in which four
client-side services are accessed on the convergent OTU.

n
There is R_LOS, OTUk_LOF, OTUk_AIS, ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI or
o
ti


ODUk_PM_LCK on the WDM side.

ic a


r if
The WDM side of the OTU at station B accesses and processes the
t
alarm signals. The OTU sends the ODUk_PM_BDI or OTUk_BDI alarm
Ce
to the WDM side of upstream station A. In addition, the alarm is
&
then sent to the client side of station B. After the alarm is processed

i ng
on the client side, the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the client

i n device.

r a
T An SF event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at station B,

ei


and a protection switching is triggered.

a w There are bit error alarms on the WDM side.

Hu


 The WDM side of the OTU at station B accesses and processes the
bit error alarm signals. The OTU sends the remote bit error
performance events to the WDM side of upstream station A. The
alarm is then sent to the client side of the downstream station B. The
error-dependent alarm is detected in the client device.

 An SD event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at station B,

and a protection switching is triggered.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 In the case of the regenerating OTU, all alarms in the SM section are
terminated at the local station and are not sent to the downstream station

n
(except that the OTUk_LOF alarm is inserted with an ODUk_PM_AIS alarm to
o
ti
the downstream station). Other alarms are then sent to the downstream station,

c a
and are reported on the WDM side of the OTU (except that the R_LOS alarm is
i
t if
inserted with an ODUk_PM_AIS alarm to the downstream station).
r
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
OTU with the cross-connect function in the straight-through mode

 The four channels of optical signals H accessed from RX1-RX4 on unit A at

the upstream station are sent to
o n channels 3-6 that correspond to the OUT
port in the straight-through
a timode. One channel of optical signals that are
input from the IN port on
f ic unit B at the downstream station is
i channels of optical signals, which are then
demultiplexed into tfour
r
Ce
directly sent to TX1-TX4.


&
In the straight-through mode, the REM_SF and REM_SD alarms at the

n g station indicate that the signals at the corresponding port on

downstream
i
in
the client side at the upstream station fail or bit errors at this port exceed
a
T r the threshold. For example, when the services in channel 1 at optical port

ei 3 on unit A at the upstream station fail, channel 1 at optical port 3 on unit

a w B at the downstream station reports the REM_SF alarm.

Hu
 n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
R_LOS a w
uA and station B work in the non-


 The client sides of the OTUs at station H

auto-negotiation mode. The R_LOS alarm signal is received on the client
o
side of the OTU at station A. The n alarm signal is sent to station B after it is
processed on the WDM side
generated on the clientcsidea ti ofof the
the OTU. In this case, the REM_SF alarm is

i OTU at station B, and the client

equipment at stationifB reports the LINK_ERR alarm.
t OTUs at station A and station B work in the auto-
rthe
 The client sides of
negotiation mode.
e
C The R_LOS alarm signal is received on the client side of
the OTU at& station A. The alarm signal is sent to station B after it is
processed
n g on the WDM side of the OTU. In this case, the REM_SF and

nithe client
LINK_ERR alarms are generated on the client side of the OTU at station B,

a i
and equipment at station B reports the LINK_ERR alarm.

T r
LINK_ERR
ei The client sides of the OTUs at station A and station B work in the non-


w


a auto-negotiation mode. The client signals at station A contain LINK_ERR

Hu
alarms, and the client signals are transmitted transparently from station A
to the WDM side of the OTU at station B.
 The client sides of the OTUs at station A and station B work in the auto-
negotiation mode. In the case of the Ethernet board that supports the LPT
function, when the LPT enabling status is set to Disable, the LINK_ERR
alarm is not generated on the client side of the OTU at station B; when
the LPT enabling status is set to Enable, the LINK_ERR alarm is generated
on the client side of the OTU at station B.
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Answer 1:
u
Hboard
 The client-side port on the local OTU reports the R_LOS alarm, and
the opposite OTU board reports
o n the REM_SF alarm.
Answer 2:
a ti
ic


The client side of theiftransmit-end



r t TQS board reports RS_BBE bit error

Ce The client-side equipment reports bit error

performance events, and the receive-end TQS board reports bit error
performance events.
performance& events.
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
HuBEI.
 Maintenance signals at electrical-layer including:

 AIS, PMI, OCI, LCK, IAE, BIAE, BDI, and

o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 The NS2 board is a typical convergence OTU board.

 LCK signal frame structure:

o n

i
The LCK signal is transmitted downstream, indicating that the upstream
signal connection is lockedtand no signal pass.
a
ic area is filled with 01010101. The insertion area is
i f
rt except FA OH and OTUk OH.
 The ODUk-LCK insertion

e
the entire ODUk signal
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu for the upstream service link
 OCI alarm:

 If no optical cross-connection is configured

n between the OTU and the
or no fiber connection is configured
o
ti service link inserts an OCI signal to the
multiplexer board, the upstream
a
ic
downstream NE. After receiving
f
the OCI signal, the downstream NE
reports this alarm. ti
e r
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 If SM TTI mismatch from A to B, station B reports ODU2_PM_TIM, station A
reports ODU2_PM_BDI.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 SAPI$DAPI (Source Access Point Identifiers & Destination Access Point
Identifiers):

n
Checks whether the source flag and sink flag of TTI to be Received are
o
ti


consistent with the source flag and sink flag of TTI Received respectively.

ic a


r t if
ALS: Automatic Level Shutdown.

Ce
IPA: Intelligent Power Adjustment.

&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Functions of point-to-point ODU2 nodes:

o n
ODU2P
Source
OTU2
Source
ati OCh
Source
ic
if
function function function

e rt A,C节点功能

CSink
ODU2P OTU2 OCh
Sink Sink
function
& functio functio

OChin
g n n

in OTU2 OTU2 OCh

Sink
a
rn
functio Sink Source Source

T function functio function

ei n B节点功能

a w OCh OTU2 OTU2

OCh
Sink

Hu
Source Source Sink functio
function function function n
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Station A inserts the ODU2_LCK signal. At this time, station C reports the
ODU2_PM_LCK minor alarm and reports the ODU2_PM_BDI minor alarm to the

n
upstream. ‘a’ in ODU2_PM_aBDI indicates the action of reporting the alarm,
o
ti
and the ODU2_PM_BDI alarm is reported at station A.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 When the fiber cut occurs in the transmit direction from station A to station B,
the WDM side of the OTU regeneration board at station B reports a R_LOS

n
critical alarm reports OTU2_BDI minor alarm to the WDM side of station A.
o
 At the same time, the alarm is still
a ti transmitted to the downstream station of
ic
station B. After the alarm is handled
f
at station C, the WDM side of the OTU

r
board at station C reports tithe ODU2_PM_AIS minor alarm and sends the
ODU2_PM_BDI minore alarm to the WDM side of station A.
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 When the fiber in the transmit direction from station A to station B degrades,
the WDM side of the OTU regeneration board at station B detects bit errors

n
and reports a OTU2_DEG minor alarm. In this case, the WDM side of station A
o
ti
will receive the OTU2_BEI.

ic a
At the same time, the alarm is still transmitted to the downstream station of
if


rt
station B. After the alarm is handled at station C, the WDM side of the OTU
e
board at station C reports the ODU2_PM_AIS minor alarm and sends the
C
ODU2_PM_BDI minor alarm to the WDM side of station A.
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 ABCD

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Optical-layer overhead alarm detection is implemented by OOS at the optical
layer. Alarms such as R_LOS and MUT_LOS are optical-layer alarms but are not

n
reported based on OOS detection. Instead, they are reported based on optical
o
ti
power detection.

ic a
OOS overheads are non-associated overheads. OTS, OMS, and OCh
if


r t
overheads are transmitted through timeslots 21, 22, and 23 in the optical
e
supervisory channel (OSC) signal frame structure.
C

&
If the optical supervisory channel is not enabled in the WDM system or the

ng
optical supervisory channel does not carry the OOS overhead (that is, the
i
n
ai management cannot be implemented.
optical layer overhead is not enabled), the optical-layer overhead alarm and

r
performance
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 This section describes how an OTU board processes optical-layer alarm signals
and how the alarm signals flow.

n
Certain alarms are specific to the OCh, OMS, or OTS optical layer. This section
o
ti


mainly describes the association relations between the optical-layer alarms

generated by each NE.
ic a
rt if
In this scenario, there are two stations. Station A and station B are OTM
e


stations. C
&
In this scenario, the OTS, OMS, and OCh trails are between adjacent nodes.
ng


ni
ai
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 In this scenario, there are three stations. Station A and station C are OTM
stations, and station B is an OLA station.

n
In this scenario, station OLA only amplifies signals and terminates the OTS layer.
o
ti


The OMS and OCh trails are between station A and station C.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 In this scenario, there are three stations. Station A and station C are OTM
stations, and station B is an ROADM station.

n
In this scenario, station ROADM adds and drops certain wavelengths. That is,
o
ti


certain wavelengths are between stations A and B, or stations B and C, and the

ic a
other wavelengths are between stations A and C. Hence, certain OCh trails are

rt if
between stations A and B, or B and C, and the other OCh trails are between
stations A and C.
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 This example shows the alarm signal flow at the OCh layer. The OCh overhead
is generated and terminated on the OTU board. Therefore, when an optical-

n
layer alarm is generated at the OCh layer, the OTU board at the downstream
o
ti
site reports the corresponding alarm.

ic a
When the OTU board at the receive end generates OTU2_SSF and
if


rt
ODU2_PM_SSF due to R_LOS, the transmit end reports OTU2_BD and
ODU2_PM.
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 When the OMS trail that a wavelength traverses is interrupted, the
corresponding OTS reports the MUT_LOS alarm and each OCh trail of the OMS

n
section reports the corresponding R_LOS alarm.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 When the M40 and D40 boards are configured in the system, the system
supports the reporting of the MUT_LOS alarm and the downstream OTU board
reports the R_LOS alarm.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 This example shows the alarm signal flow at the OSC layer. The OOS overhead
is generated and terminated on the OSC board. Therefore, when an optical-

n
layer alarm is generated at the OSC layer, the OSC board at the downstream
o
ti
site reports the corresponding alarm.

ic a
When the OSC board at the receive end generates a OSC_LOS critical alarm,
if


rt
the OSC board at the transmit end reports a OSC_RDI minor alarm.

Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Here fiber is broken between two FIUs, optical layer OTS lost, so receive side
OTS will generate MUT_LOS.

n
In OSC generates LOS so here receive side OSC layer generates OSC_LOS and
o
ti


sends a OSC_BDI to transmit side.

ic a


rt if
In OCh layer receive side generate R_LOS.

Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Here fiber is broken between OA and FIU, optical layer OTS payload is lost, so
receive side OTS will generate MUT_LOS .

n
In OCh layer receive side generates R_LOS.
o
ti


ic a
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 A

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
To quickly and accurately locate and resolve a fault in the optical transport system,

Hu


maintenance personnel must have sufficient background knowledge and service

n
skills and be familiar with the network and the equipment used.
o


ati
Commonly needed transmission system test instruments include optical power

ic
meter, SDH/SONET tester, SmartBits tester, optical spectrum analyzer, OTDR and

t if
communication signal analyzer. Refer to the respective operator guide for more
r
information.
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The relevant engineering files and documents (which need to be updated

Hu


periodically).

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
External First, Followed by Internal a w
u


When you locate a fault, first confirmH

 that external conditions are normal. For
n
example, confirm that no faults occur to fiber, accessing client-side
equipment or power supply. io
a t
Network First, Followed by NEic


r t if
Ce might report alarms. At this moment, analyze the fault
When a fault occurs to the transmission equipment, multiple stations, rather


than a single station,

to determine &the area in which the fault occurs. Based on the analysis, you
n g
i
can quickly and accurately locate the station in which the fault occurs.

a in Alarms First, Followed by Low-Severity Alarms

High-Severity
r


T
ei major alarms. After that, analyze low-severity alarms, such as minor alarms
High-severity alarms should be analyzed first, such as critical alarms and


a w and warnings.
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The common methods to locate hardware faults can be briefed as "Analyze first,

Hu


then perform loopback, and finally replace the board."

o n
When a fault occurs, first analyze the signal flow, alarms, and performance event

ti
data to determine the possible faulty station or optical section. Then measure the
a
ic
optical power section by section and analyze the optical spectrum to locate the

t if
fault to a board. Finally, if the fault persists, replace the board or fiber.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The key point of Service Signal Flow Analysis is that; the maintainer should familiar

Hu


to not only the signal flow of one single station which he is maintaining ,but also

n
the service allocations in whole network. maintainer should at least know about
o
ti
the service signal flow of a OMS.

ic a
Firstly maintainer should separate whole network into many OMS parts, and
if


rt
determine the fault OMS of them.

C e
Secondly ,when the fault OMS is located ,by analysis on service signal flow station


&
after station, troubles can be locate very conveniently.

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The U2000 fault isolation capabilities can be affected by system faults, and are

Hu


classified as follows:

n
Comprehensive: You are able to obtain fault information for the entire
o
ti


network.

ic a


r if
Accurate: You are able to obtain the current alarms, alarm generation time,
t
and historical alarms of the equipment. In addition, you are able to obtain

Ce
the specific values of the performance events.

&
Complex: In some cases, a significantly high number of alarms and
g


i n
performance events can make analysis very difficult.

a in Fault isolation is entirely dependent on the normal operations of

Dependent:
r computer, software, and communication equipment. If any of these are


i Tthe
e faulty, fault isolation capabilities may be limited or entirely lost.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During troubleshooting, the maintenance personnel either in the NOC or on site

Hu


should work jointly to restore the system to normal state.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The most commonly used test instruments for the WDM system include the optical

Hu


power meter, optical spectrum analyzer, SDH/SONET tester, SmartBits tester,

n
communication signal analyzer and multimeter. Among these tools, the optical
o
ti
power meter and optical spectrum analyzer are most often used.

Optical power meter

ic a
if


r t
The optical power of each point can be obtained from the U2000
e


C
performance data. However, to get a precise reading for a specific point, you

&
must measure the optical power at that point using an optical power meter.

n g
i
Optical spectrum analyzer


Usein
r

a an optical spectrum analyzer to test the optical spectrum of the output

i Tsignal on the MON port of the board. Read from the spectrum analyzer the
e optical power, OSNR, central wavelength and analyze the gain flatness of the
a w OA.
Hu SDH/SONET tester, SmartBits tester, and communication signal analyzer


 If it is suspected that the poor interconnection is caused by signal error, use

these analyzers to check whether the frame signals and overhead bytes are
normal, and check whether there are any abnormal alarms.

 Multimeter

 If it is suspected that the power supply is too high or too low, use a
multimeter to measure the input voltage.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
There are software loopbacks and hardware loopbacks, which have the following

Hu


advantages and disadvantages:

n
A hardware loopback is performed on a physical port (optical port) using an
o
ti


optical fiber. Compared with the software loopback, the hardware loopback

ic a
is more reliable. The hardware loopback, however, requires on-site

rt if
operations. In addition, a receive optical power overload must be avoided
e
when performing a hardware loopback.
C

&a fault as accurately. For example, during a single station test, if
Compared with the hardware loopback, the software loopback is simpler but
g
cannot locate
n inloop is performed on an optical port and the service is normal,
i
n board may not necessarily be normal. However, if a selfloop is
a software
a iline
r
the
Tperformed
ei
on the same optical port using a pigtail and the service is normal,

a w line board is normal.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In-loop was applied to locate faults of OTU, out-loop was applied to locate

Hu


external faults.

o n
A proper attenuator must be used to prevent over high optical power from

ti
damaging the optical receiving module when performing hardware loopback.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The replacement method is used to resolve problems on external equipment, such

Hu


as optical fibers, flanges, client equipment, and power supply equipment. It is also

n
used to handle faults on boards or modules at a single station.
o


ati
The advantage of the replacement method is that the fault can be located within a

ic
small range, and is a relatively simple procedure for maintenance personnel to

t if
perform. This method requires that spare components be available. In addition, the
r
e
operator must exercise caution when performing operations. For example, when a
C
board is being inserted or removed, careless operations that could damage board
&
ng
components should be avoided.

ni
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer 1: a w
u


The key to fault locating is to pinpointHa fault to a single station.



Answer 2:
o n
i


a tAlarm
Service Signal Flow Analysis,

c and Performance Analysis, Fault Analysis
fiLoopback, Replacement.
Using Test Instruments,
r t i
C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Handling Abnormity of Fibers a w
HuCheck whether connectors are


Check whether optical fibers are broken.



loosened.
o n
Check whether the bending radius
a ti of the optical fiber is within the allowable
ic


range: 40 mm.

i f
e
Handling Abnormal Environment
 rt
C
&
If the service interruption occurs regularly, analyze the environmental


g
conditions upon fault occurs. For example, external interference, abnormal
n or bad weather may cause service interruption.
i
temperature

a inLine Fault


T r
Handling

ei Both
 loopback section by section and meter test can be helpful for

a w determining a line fault.

Hu If it is a line fault, switch the important services from the active route to the


standby route so as to resume service as soon as possible.

 Handling Hardware Fault

 Service interruption is usually caused by such hardware faults as board

performance deterioration or failure.

 Board performance deterioration or failure is involved in: OTU, OA, OM/OD.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The interruption of all services of an NE is classified into three situations:

Huamplifier board reports a MUT_LOS



The system provides an OSC, the optical



alarm, and the optical supervisory n board reports an R_LOS alarm. In this case,
ocut off.
suspect that the optical cable iis
t
a the optical amplifier board reports a MUT_LOS
c
The system provides an iOSC,
tif reports no alarm. Suspect that the optical power is


alarm, and the OSC rboard

abnormal.
Ce
&
The system provides no OSC, and the optical amplifier board reports a
g


i n
MUT_LOS alarm. Suspect that the optical amplifier board or the optical cable
in
is faulty.
a
The T r causes of Single-Channel Service Interruption on the Client Side are:
possible
ei The output optical power of the board, interconnected to the OTU, in the


a w client equipment is abnormal.



Hu  The fiber jumper between the OTU and client equipment is faulty.

 The OTU is faulty.

 If the OTUs in both the local and downstream stations transiently report the
R_OOF and R_LOF alarms at the same time, suspect that the client equipment
is faulty.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For Single-Channel Service Interruption on the WDM Side:

Hu or the fiber jumper is dirty, check



 If the OTU in the opposite station is faulty

whether the input optical power n on the client side and the output optical
power on the WDM side of the
t ioOTU in the opposite station are normal or not.
ic athe DEMUX and OTU is dirty or faulty, Check
tif power of the corresponding channel of the
 If the fiber jumper between
whether the output roptical
DEMUX is normal e
C or not. If not, clean or replace the fiber jumper between the

&
DEMUX and OTU. Then check whether the input optical power of the OTU is
normal orgnot. If not, clean or replace the fiber jumper between the DEMUX
i n
in
and OTU.
a

Tr OTU in the local station is faulty, Check whether the input optical power
If the

ei of the OTU is normal or not. If yes, the OTU in the local station is faulty, then

a w replace the OTU.

Hu  If The loopback testing on the OTU in the local station and the optical power
of OTU is normal. the FEC mode of the OTU in the local station and the
opposite station might be inconsistent.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Too-High Fiber Attenuation a w
u flange and optical interface


board are firmly connected.

H
Whether the interfaces of the ODF, attenuator,

o n attenuator, flange and optical interface

ti
Whether the interfaces of the ODF,


board are clean.

a
icfiber connector is clean.
Whether the interface of
i f
rt



e
Whether fibers are squeezed.
C radius of fibers is too small and whether fibers are
Whether the bending
&


folded.
g
n fibers are bundled too tightly.
Whether
i
in



r a
For line performance deterioration

i TReplacing optical fiber ( Best method ).

e Increasing the optical power at the transmitting end properly (Just for


a w 

temporary resolution because increasing optical power may result in non-

Hu linearity and non flatness of signals. ).

 Adjusting the VOA placed before the receiving end to restore the received
optical power.
 Equipment faults
 Replace the faulty unit.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Possible Causes a w
Hudegrades or is physically damaged.


Any fiber jumper in the multiplexing part



The gain of the optical amplifier n



t i o board in the opposite station or local station

declines.
a
ic and attenuation problems, note the following
t i f
Caution: To avoid fiber connection
points in installation and rmaintenance.


C e
&
When fibers are coiled, the bending radius cannot be less than 4 cm. Fibers


g
cannot be folded or bent at 90.
n
Fibers ishould be bundled with binding tapes. Note that the fibers cannot be


a in too tightly.
T r
bundled

ei The fibers led out of the equipment should be covered with corrugated pipe.


a w The fiber connector should be kept clean. Special cleaning tissue or alcohol
Hu


above 98% can be used.

 Methods of fault locating:

 Alarm and performance analysis

 Section-by-section loopback

 Replacement

 Instrument test
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Bit errors refer to the errors that occur during the transmission. Bit errors are

Hu

usually represented by bits. On the WDM equipment, the client side of the OTU
board usually monitors only the B1 and B2 bytes of the SDH service.
Optical power:
o n
ti affects the OSNR at the receiving end. If OSNR


The decrease of optical power

c a
redundancy is not large ienough,


t i f the decrease of optical power may directly

the receiving end.er

lead to the deterioration of OSNR, and thus generating bit error in OTU at

Dispersion: C
&



g
The dispersion tolerance of a 2.5 Gbit/s optical transmit module is large,
n no compensation. But the dispersion tolerance of a 10 Gbit/s
which ineeds
i n transmit module is small (hundreds of ps/nm). As a result, the signal
optical
a
r dispersion compensation after being transmitted for a certain distance.
needs
T
ei transmitted for a distance of 30 km. On G.655 fiber, the signal needs
On G.652 fiber, the signal needs dispersion compensation after being

a w dispersion compensation after being transmitted for a distance of 100km.

Hu Non-Linearity of Optical Fiber


 The non-linear effects of fiber are related to the input optical power to a
large degree. If the input optical power is very high and the transmission
distance is long, non-linearity of fibers may seriously affect the performance
of the system. This results in performance decline at the receive end and bit
errors. As a result, in the 40-wavelength DWDM system, the input optical
power should be limited within 20 dBm.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Possible cause for single channel bit errors: a w
u


The input optical power of the OTU isH abnormal.

The fiber jumper between the DEMUX

o n and OTU, or that between the OTU
ti the attenuation of the fiber jumper is too


and ODF is aged or bent. Hence,

ic a
large.
i f
e rt
The equipment temperature is too high.
C



&
The OTU is faulty.

n g
The FEC modes of the two interconnected OTUs might be different.
i


TheinAuto-negotiation modes of the two interconnected OTUs might be

r a


i Tdifferent.

e
Possible cause for multi-channel bit errors:
w


a
Hu
 The attenuation of the optical cable or that of the fiber jumper in the
multiplexing part is too large.

 The configuration of the dispersion compensation module (DCM) is improper.

 The equipment temperature is too high.

 The optical amplifier board, MUX or DEMUX is faulty.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Possible causes for one NE offline problem: a w
u


The NE is out of power supply, or SCCHis faulty.



The network cable between the NE

o n and the HUB is disconnected or the
ti cable is connected, of the HUB, is damaged.


a
interface, to which this network
ic NE is changed by mistake, and there is no two
The IP address or ID ofifthe
rt


e
happens to be the same.
C
&
The network cable between the NE and the WEB-LCT is disconnected or the


g
interface, to which this network cable is connected, is damaged.
n is faulty.
i


a in
The AUX

T r causes for all NEs in a subnet offline problem:

Possible


ei The gateway NE is faulty.

w The network cable between the gateway NE and the HUB is disconnected or


a
Hu


the interface, to which this network cable is connected, of the HUB, is

damaged.

 The IP address or ID of the disconnected NE is changed by mistake.

 The optical cable is faulty.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During deployment commissioning, the fiber jumper might be incorrectly

Hu


connected because the FIU board and the OSC board have many interfaces

n
marked with similar names. To prevent incorrect connection when you perform
o
ti
commissioning in one direction of the OSC board, you can connect an optical

c a
attenuator between the currently unused RM and TM optical interfaces in the
i
rt if
other direction of the OSC board to form a self-loop.


Ce
The equipment networkwide must trace the same clock source. In the case of
WDM equipment, the priority of the internal clock source of a certain NE should be
&
ng
set to the highest, and the other NEs trace the internal clock source of this NE. (In
i
the case of chain networking, the internal clock source of a terminal NE rather than
n
ai
an intermediate NE should be set as the clock source to be traced networkwide.)
r
i T
When multiple pieces of equipment are connected by using a HUB or are cascaded
e


a w inter subracks, the extended ECC function of the network interfaces of the

Hu
equipment is used for communication. If not more than four pieces of equipment
are connected by using one HUB, the automatic extended ECC function can be
enabled. If more than four pieces of equipment are connected by using one HUB,
the manual extended ECC function is recommended for communication to prevent
ECC storms.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Generally, you can troubleshoot protection faults by checking parameter settings

Hu


and alarm analysis methods.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
Hu


 Service Interruption

Optical Power Abnormity

o n
ti


Bit Errors
ic a
tif


r
Communication Abnormity

Ce


 Protection Problems
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Conclusion and Suggestion a w
Hu heat dissipation of the equipment.


Clean air filters regularly and ensure good



If the TEMP_OVER alarm is reported,

o n rectify the fault immediately. Check if
the fan speed is set correctlytor i the air intake vents are blocked.


c a
inetwork
Clear alarms on the live
t i f in a timely manner.
r


C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OA board detects the input and output optical power. If a fault occurs, the

Hu


affected services are not only one wavelength. Therefore, the possibility that the
OA board is faulty is low.
o n


ati
The method of analyzing the signal flow of site B is similar to that of analyzing the
signal flow of site A.
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the case of WDM equipment service interruption, the common troubleshooting

Hu


method is to check boards one by one from the faulty point to the upstream
section.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The fault is caused by degradation of the receive optical power of the BD-2

Hu


TN11NS2 board at site B. Still, the cause of the degraded receive optical power
needs to be identified.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Transient interruption occurs on the main optical path from site C to site B. An

Hu


optical cable fault can be identified because the input optical power received by
the OA and the OSC decreases.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The hardware required by the OD system includes the following boards installed

Hu


on the NE:

n
Spectrum analysis boards and optical amplifier (OA) boards: They are used to
o
ti


obtain optical-layer performance data, monitor all optical signals in a

ic a
centralized way without interrupting services, and report the monitored

rt if
optical-layer performance data to the OD system.


Ce
Gain-adjustable OA boards: They are used to adjust optical signal

&
performance parameters.
g
n monitoring configuration commands using the U2000. After
i
Software: The OD system is integrated in the U2000. Users can deliver network-


in
wide performance
a
T r the optical-layer performance data reported by each NE, the OD system
obtaining

eoni the configuration

analyzes the performance data and graphically displays the analysis result. Based
w policy, the OD system instructs the OA boards to perform
a adjustments and optimize optical-layer performance.
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Operation process: a w
u


The user configures the OD function. H



o
The OD system delivers configuration n commands to the equipment.
ti


The OD system accurately a

ic between hardware and software.
detects OSNR and other performance data
f


i
rt abnormal events and performance data to the OD
through the interoperation

C e
The equipment reports


system.
&
n g
The OD system obtains optical performance data from the equipment and
i


in
graphically displays it.
a
T r user checks for abnormal events and performance data.
The
i


e Optimization is started.
w


a
Hu
 The OD system triggers optimization of channels with abnormal performance.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OD can detect and report the single-wavelength optical power and OSNR at

Hu


each site of a 10G and 100G network, and enable users to view the receive- and

n
transmit-end single-wavelength optical power and OSNR on the OPM8 board at
o
ti
the receive or transmit end.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The centralized configuration includes setting monitoring parameters and

Hu


configuring automatic monitoring of network changes and historical data backup.

n
The OD enables users to set monitoring parameters in a centralized way.
o
ti


Users do not need to concern for configuration details and the configuration

ic a
data is automatically delivered. This feature greatly saves labor costs and

rt if
improves configuration efficiency.

Ce
The OD automatically monitors network changes and periodically delivers the


&
configured monitoring parameters to new services.

n g
i
The OD periodically backs up historical data.


a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OD visually displays OCh signal flows, and the optical power and OSNR of the

Hu


current E2E OCh trails.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OD considers abnormal OCh trails as to-be-optimized OCh trails and records

Hu


the abnormal alarm information. Users can manually start optimization and
commissioning on the OCh trails.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following describes the process of monitoring main optical path performance

Hu


online:

n
Using the OD system, a user sends a task of monitoring main optical path
o
ti


performance.

ic a


rt if
The performance monitoring points on the functional boards over the main
optical path start monitoring the specific performance.

Ce
Line loss monitoring: The receive-end OA board detects the line loss
& an alarm when the line loss exceeds the design EOL value.


and reports

n g
n i
Monitoring of the optical power of the transmit-end OA board: The OD
i system compares the current input optical power of the transmit-end


a
r OA board in an OMS with the nominal optical power, and reports an
i T
e alarm if the difference between the current input optical power and

a w nominal optical power exceeds the threshold.

Hu  Line loss compensation monitoring: The receive-end OA board detects

the line loss and reports an alarm when the difference between the line
loss and the gain value of the OA board exceeds the threshold. Fiber cut
on the main optical path: The OD system checks for the alarm to
determine whether a fiber cut occurs.

 The monitoring information is reported to the OD system on the U2000.

 The OD system processes the monitored performance data and displays it on

GUIs.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following describes the process of monitoring optical performance flatness:

Huof monitoring optical performance



Using the OD system, a user sends a task

flatness.
o n
The functional boards on thetimain optical path start monitoring the specific


performance. The OPM8ic

a
tif OMS section, calculate the average optical power
board is used to scan the optical power of all single
wavelengths on thercurrent

C e in the maintenance state, and determine the

of all OCh wavelengths

&
difference between the single-wavelength optical power and average optical
power. Theg OD system considers that the optical power is flat when the
n between the single-wavelength optical power and average optical
i
in does not exceed the alarm threshold.
difference

r a
power

i T
e The monitoring information is reported to the OD system on the U2000.

a w The OD system processes the monitored performance data and displays it on

Hu


GUIs.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following describes the optimization process in case of abnormal line loss

Hu


compensation:

n
Fibers are aging and the line loss is increasing.
o
ti unit, that is, the optical amplifier (OA)


 The downstream power detection

ic a
i f
board, detects that the difference between the line loss and OA gain exceeds

e rt
the threshold, and therefore reports an alarm to the SCC board on the
downstream NE.
C
The SCC board & on the downstream NE reports a alarm to the SCC board on
g


i n receiving the alarm, the SCC board on the source node reports
the source node in data communication network (DCN) communication

a in
mode. After

Tr alarm to the OD system.

the

ei After receiving the alarm, the OD system locates the OCh trail where the
w


a alarm occurs and adds it to the to-be-optimized trail list.

Hu  Based on the adjustment command delivered by users, the OD system

adjusts the line loss of the OCh trail until the output optical power of the
downstream OA board is within the permitted range.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OD system calculates the average optical power based on the optical power of

Hu


the transmit-end OA IN port, compares the average optical power with the

n
nominal optical power, and determines whether the optical power of each
o
ti
wavelength is proper based on the flatness of the single-wavelength optical power

c a
detected by the OPM board. The following describes the optical power
i
equalization process:
rt if


Ce
When the optical power of the transmit-end OA board, the optical power
flatness, or the OTU receive optical power is out of the permitted range, an
&
ng
alarm is reported to the OD system.

n i
After detecting the alarm, the OD system locates the OCh trail where the
ai


T r alarm occurs, adds it to the to-be-optimized trail list, and records the alarm

e i information. Then the OD system starts link optimization commissioning on

a w the OCh trail.

Hu
 The OD system adjusts the optical power of the transmit-end OA board at
the transmit site of the OMS section so that the optical power reaches the
nominal value.

 The OD system adjusts the optical power of the intermediate and receive-end
OA boards so that the average optical power is the same as the nominal
optical power and is within the permitted flatness range.

 The OD system adjusts the optical power of the receive-end OTU board so
that the optical power is within the permitted range.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: ABCD a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After the monitoring parameters of the Optical Doctor (OD) system are set for a

Hu


network in centralized mode, the OD system can be used to monitor the network

n
in real time, report abnormalities, and start optimization commissioning.
o


ati
When the U2000 is upgraded by migrating database data using the upgrade tool

ic
UExpert, all U2000 data can be smoothly migrated to the upgraded U2000, and

t if
OD parameters do not need to be set again. If the U2000 is upgraded in another
r
e
mode, database data cannot be smoothly migrated to the U2000, and therefore
C
OD parameters need to be set again after the upgrade is completed.
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
HuManagement > Parameter


Choose Configuration > WDM Optical



Configuration from the main menu.

o n
Click the Synchronize Data on
a ti the U2000 tab.
icsynchronized from the Root navigation tree and


Choose the subnet to ibef

rt dialog box is displayed. Note: When the installed


WDM commissioning
e
click Start. A confirmation
C component is used to synchronize data for the first
time, you must& select Root to perform network-wide synchronization. In
n g
i
other scenarios, you can select a subnet to synchronize the subnet data.

a inYes. Data synchronization starts. Note: If data share conflicts during

Click
r synchronization on the U2000, maybe another user is deleting,


i Tdata
e uploading, copying or checking data consistency on the NE. When this occurs,

a w perform data synchronization again after another user completes the

Hu operations on the NE. During synchronization, do not perform other

commissioning operations on the NE.

 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed after the synchronization.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configuration Principles a w
Hu (OA) board is equipped with a


If the IN port on the receive optical amplifier



dispersion compensation module n(DCM), calculate the EOL value for the fiber

t
between the local NE and upstream io NE using the following formula: EOL =
Design fiber loss + Maximum
ic a insertion loss of the DCM. If an OLP board is
installed in front of theifreceive OA board, the EOL value for the fiber between
e rt NE is equal to the fiber loss between the upstream
the local NE and upstream
OLP board and the C local OLP board.
&
Ensure thatg the inter-site fiber type and fiber type are the same as those in
n fiber configurations.
i


in
the practical

r a
T
Procedure


ei Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link >

w Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management from the main menu.


a
Hu In the Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management window, click Filter. Clear


the Include internal fibers check box, and click Filter in the Set Fiber/Cable
Browse Filter Criteria dialog box.

 Select one or multiple fibers/cables in the list and click Modify Fiber/Cable.

 In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the Length (km), Designed
Loss(EOL)(dB), and Medium Type of the fibers/cables as required, and click
Apply. Note: To perform batch setting, select multiple lines, right-click the
parameter column, and choose Modify in Batchs.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configuration Guidelines a w
Humaximum number of wavelengths


 Set System Wavelengths based on the

o n
supported by the system. If System Wavelengths is not set, the optical
power target value cannot beicalculated.
t If the parameter is incorrectly set,
a will be incorrect. You can set the value of
ic
the optical power adjustment
f on the frequency allocation table in the
System Wavelengthsibased
r t
marketing telecomedesign documents or based on the actual product
C example:
configurations. For
&
g
If the WDM subnet is configured with the DWSS9 and EX40 boards, the
n Wavelengths value is 80wave.
i


in
System
a
Tr If the WDM subnet is configured with only the EX40 board, the System


ei Wavelengths value is 40wave.

a w For the scenario that signals of different rates traverse the same OA, for

Hu


example, when 100 Gbit/s signals are received in a 100G system and the
signals traverse the same OA, set the Rate and Code Type of the OA based
on 100 Gbit/s signals.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
On the U2000, an OCh trail can be in the Unset, Commission, or Maintenance

Hu


state. The OD only monitors the trails in the Maintenance state. For an OCh trail

n
whose deployment commissioning is successful, the OCh trail status is
o
ti
automatically set to Maintenance Status when the advanced option Set the trail

c a
maintenance state is selected. If the advanced option is not selected, the OCh trail
i
r t if
needs to be manually set to Maintenance Status. For the OCh trail whose

Maintenance Status. Ce
expansion commissioning is successful, the OCh trail status is automatically set to

&
ng
 Setting the State of OCh Trails in the Manage WDM Trail Window

n i
Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
ai


T r the displayed Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, select OCh in the
In


e i Service Level.
a w Click Filter All, and all OCh trails on the live network are displayed.

Hu


 Select and right-click a desired OCh trail. Choose Details from the shortcut
menu.

 Set Optical Commission Status in the dialog box that is displayed.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu Configuration > WDM Optical


 From the main menu of the U2000, choose

n
Management > Optical Doctor. The Optical Doctor window is displayed.
o
Click Parameter Configuration.
t i In the Network Parameter Configuration
a select the desired subnet.


ic
dialog box that is displayed,

r
Note: Subnet A containing tif A1, A2, and A3 is used as an example. Subnet A is
Ce only when A1, A2, and A3 are selected.
automatically monitored

&A contains NEs B1 and B2 in addition to subnet A1, A2, and A3,
If subnet
g


i n and then select the desired subnet for monitoring. If subnet A4 is

you are advised to create subnet A4, classify NEs B1 and B2 into subnet

a innot created, NEs B1 and B2 will be automatically monitored and the

A4,

T r
ei monitoring cannot be canceled after subnets A1, A2, and A3 are

a w selected for monitoring.

Hu  If subnet A has a new subnet A4, A4 is monitored only when subnet A is

monitored. The monitoring policy of A4 is the same as that of subnet A.

 Only one monitoring policy is allowed on a network.

 Set the adjustment mode and monitoring parameters, such as the main
optical power, flatness, and OTU input optical power, based on the network
plan.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu window, click Manage Backup.


In the Network Parameter Configuration



In the Manage Performance Data

o n Backup dialog box that is displayed,
ti


a
configure the data backup policies.
ic
i f
rtUp Now. The OD will immediately back up the data of
Click Save.


C e
Optional: Click Back


&
the selected subnet.

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Right-click a subnet, NE or fiber connection in abnormal state in the OD view and

Hu


choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu. Then the alarms

n
generated in the subnet, NE or fiber connection are displayed in Alarm Info.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
You can query the to-be-optimized trails of an NE, a fiber connection, or the entire

Hu


network in the OD View.

o n
Querying the to-be-optimized trails of an NE or a fiber connection

a ti
Right-click an NE or fiber connection in abnormal state in the OD view and
ic Trail from the shortcut menu. The to-be-


i f
choose View to-Be-Optimized
rt selected NE or fiber connection are displayed in the
optimized trails of the
e
C
Online Optimization Management window. Note: View To-Be-Optimized

&
Trail is unavailable on the displayed shortcut menu after you right-click the

n g
SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL, R_LOS, or MUT_LOS alarm record. Optimization

n i
commissioning cannot clear any of the preceding alarms. Instead, the alarms
i
a be cleared manually.
T r
must


ei
Querying the to-be-optimized trails of the entire network

a w If the Optimize Management button is marked red, trails to be optimized

Hu


are present. Click Optimize Management. In the Online Optimization

Management window that is displayed, you can view networkwide trails to
be optimized, including the trails to be optimized after an abnormality, trails
being optimized, and trails failing to be optimized.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the OD view, select an NE or fiber connection. The activated OCh trails

Hu


associated with the NE or fiber connection are displayed in the Trail Info. Note:

n
When associated OCh trails of an NE or fiber connection change, right-click the NE
o
ti
or fiber connection and choose Browse Relevant Trials from the shortcut menu to
refresh the Trail Info.
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
u The design loss and actual loss


 Click Operate and choose Query Fiber HLoss.

n
of all fiber connections are displayed in the OD view. If the current

t io exceeds the design attenuation, the fiber

attenuation of a fiber connection
a corresponding to a major alarm.
connection is marked in accolor
i
r
Optional: Click Operatetif and choose Compare With History Data. Choose
the historical datae


C to be imported in the Compare With History Data dialog

&
box that is displayed. Then the historical fiber loss of the entire network is
displayedgin the window.
i n
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu Configuration > WDM Optical


From the main menu of the U2000, choose



Management > Optical Doctor.n The Optical Doctor window is displayed.

On the Alarm Info tab, viewtall iofault information at the optical layer of the


ic a
monitored network.
r t if

e alarm severity and the alarm name.
Optional: Click Filter to filter and display the alarm information on the alarm
Cthe
info according to
&

g
On the Alarm Info tab, select an abnormal message. In the trail list, all
n OCh trails are displayed. Note: The displayed OCh trails are
i
associated

a in trails. In the trail list, right-click one or more OCh trails and choose
activated
T r Performance Analysis from the shortcut menu. The Trail Performance
Trail
ei Analysis window is displayed.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
u


On the Alarm Info tab, right-click an H

 alarm record and choose View To-Be-
Optimized Trail from the shortcut n menu. The Online Optimization
Management window is displayed
t io and the trails related to the alarm are
ic a
displayed. Note: View To-Be-Optimized Trail is unavailable on the displayed
shortcut menu after you
r t if right-click the SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL, R_LOS, or
e Optimization commissioning cannot clear any of the
MUT_LOS alarm record.
C
preceding alarms. Instead, the alarms must be cleared manually.
&
n g
Select trails to be optimized and click Optimize.

ni


a i
r
eiT
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu Configuration > WDM Optical


 From the main menu of the U2000, choose

Management > Optical Doctor.n The Optical Doctor window is displayed.

Enter the Trail PerformancetAnalysis io window.

ca or fiber in OD VIEW. All activated OCh trails


Method 1: Selectia if site

rt or fiber are displayed in the Trail Info window.


e
related to the site
C

&
Method 2: On the Alarm Info tab, right-click one or more alarm records

g
and choose View Associated Trail from the shortcut menu. In the trail
n all associated OCh trails are displayed.
i
list,

a iInnthe trail list, right-click one or more OCh trails and choose Trail
T r
iPerformance Analysis from the shortcut menu. The Trail Performance
e Analysis window is displayed. In the Trail Performance Analysis window, the
a w
Hu
Optical Doctor (OD) system visually displays the multiplexed-wavelength optical
power, single-wavelength optical power, single-wavelength optical signal-to-
noise ratio (OSNR), and bit error rate (BER) of the monitored end-to-end (E2E)
trails.

 Select the desired OCh trail and click Analysis. The current performance data
of the trail is displayed.

 Click the Single-Wavelength Power tab. On the tab, query the single-
wavelength optical power of all nodes on the trail.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Click the Single-Wavelength OSNR tab. On the tab, query the single-wavelength

Hu


OSNR of all nodes on the trail.

o n
The following describes the histograms on the Single-Wavelength OSNR tab:

a ti
The current and historical single-wavelength OSNRs of the OA boards on the
ic


i f
trail are displayed in histograms. The sequence for OSNR bars of all boards
must be the same asrtthat for the boards in the signal flow diagram.

Ce
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following describes the histograms on the Multiplexed-Wavelength Power

Hu


tab:

n
The current and historical multiplexed-wavelength input and output power of
o
ti


the OA boards and multiplexer/demultiplexer boards on the trail are

ic a
displayed in histograms. The sequence for optical power bars of all boards

rt if
must be the same as that for the boards in the signal flow diagram.

C e
The histograms displays the number of wavelengths that are in the


&
maintenance state and traverse the boards.
g
n optical power of all OA boards except the local wavelength

i
indicates the current upper and lower limits for the multiplexed-
in
wavelength
a
T r
dropping OA board. When the current input optical power of an OA board is

ei not within the permitted range, a minor alarm is displayed in the bar for the
a w OA board. In addition, a minor alarm is displayed for the OA board in the

Hu
signal flow diagram.

 If no optical power is obtained for a board, the corresponding bar for the
board is not displayed and the board is marked abnormal in the signal flow
diagram. For the boards that do not support the query of input or output
optical power, no input or output optical power will be displayed for the
boards in the histograms. The multiplexed power cannot be queried on the
TN11WSD9 and TN11WSM9 boards.

 Right-click any area on the Multiplexed-Wavelength Power tab and choose

Display OA Only from the shortcut menu. The histograms only for OA
boards are displayed on the tab.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
On a trail for which the OD route is not configured, the Trail Performance

Hu


Analysis window will display the single-wavelength optical power and OSNR of OA

n
boards according to the values scanned by the MCA/OPM8 board. If no
o
ti
MCA/OPM8 board is configured for the OA boards, no single-wavelength optical

c a
power or OSNR will be displayed for the OA boards.
i
t
Trail performance analysis can

r if be performed only 10 minutes after an OD route is
configured in the Network
C e Parameter Configuration window.
&is not real-time data.
The OD obtains device data at an interval of 10 minutes. Therefore, the


performance data
n g
i
Procedure

a in
T r the Trail Performance Analysis window, select the desired OCh trail and
In
ei click Analysis. The current performance data of the trail is displayed.


a w Optional: The Import the historical data of trail performance window

Hu


displays the historical performance of the trail.

 In the signal flow diagram, double-click the desired OA board. The OA Info
dialog box is displayed.

 Click the Single-Wavelength Power tab to view the optical power of all
wavelengths on the OA board.

 Click the Single-Wavelength OSNR tab to view the OSNR of each

wavelength on the OA board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu select one or more trails and click


In the Trail Performance Analysis window,



Back Up Historical Data.

o n
Set Data Range in the Back tUp i Historical Data dialog box.

a
ic in Remarks. Note: If you add remarks in
t i f
Add remarks for this backup
Remarks, the namerof the backup data will be in the format of


Date_Remarks. C
e
&
Click OK.


n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu select one or more trails. Click


In the Trail Performance Analysis window,



Operate and choose Compare With n Historical Data.

t io in the Compare With Historical Data dialog



ic a data or trail backup data can be imported.

Select the desired historical data

r t if
box. Note: The subnet backup

Ce
Click OK.


&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Optimization is necessary for networks that have been in service for extended

Hu


periods of time if the optical power of the existing multiplexed wavelengths

n
significantly deviates from the nominal values due to aging fibers, malfunctioning
o
ti
boards, or human errors. The deviation causes the optical power of single

c a
wavelengths to deviate, which in turn hinders expansion commissioning.
i
 Prerequisites
rtif

C e
Physical and logical fiber connections for to-be-optimized trails must be

&
correct and consistent.

n g

i
BER for OTU boards in the subnet can be queried.

Thein


r a BEFFEC_EXC alarm does not exist in the OMS sections of to-be-optimized

Ttrail.
ei
a w  The trails to be commissioned are complete.

Hu
 On a to-be-commissioned trail, the difference between the maximum and
minimum single-wavelength optical power of the original wavelength
scanned by OPM8 cannot exceed 10 dB; otherwise, commissioning cannot be
performed.

 There are OPM8 boards in each OMS section of the to-be-optimized trail and
light is scanned using OPM8 boards. Otherwise, the OMS sections without
OPM8 boards and their upstream OMS sections cannot be optimized.

 OSNR detection has been configured for a commissioning trail, and OSNR
Status of the commissioning trail is set to Enable.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Optical Doctor (OD) will automatically optimize abnormal trails in automatic

Hu


optimization mode.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
HuManagement > Online


Choose Configuration > WDM Optical



Optimization Management from n the main menu.

o box, set the optimization trail type and
t idialog
In the Set Trail Filter Criteria


c
specify the filter criteria ito
afilter trails.
r t if
Ce
Click OK. Trails that meet the filter criteria are displayed in the Online


Optimization Management window.

&

g
Select a trail that fails to be optimized and click View Optimization Records.
n Optimization Records dialog box that is displayed, view the
In the iView

a in information about the trail optimization.

detailed
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
u Report.


In OD View, click Operate and choose

 HExport
In the Export Report dialog box,nset Data Type and Data Range and specify
the save path for the report.ti

o
ic a
Click Generate.


r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
Hu select one or more OCh trails and


In the Trail Performance Analysis window,



click Export Report.

o n
i set Data type and Data range and specify
In the Export Report dialog tbox,


ic a
i f
the save path for the report.

Click Generate.
e rt
C


&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
Hu


 Set basic parameters.

Set OCh trail status.

o n
ti


c a
Configure the OD monitoring function.
i
if route for a trail.


(Optional) Configure tOD

r
Ce OSNR detection for a trail.


(Optional) Configure


&
(Optional) Configure the OD optimization function for a trail.
g


i n
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Fiber performance testing is classified into acceptance testing and maintenance

Hu


testing based on the test implementation phase. Acceptance testing is performed

n
when links are offline. With the wide application of fibers, maintenance testing has
o
ti
become a vital and usual part of the process. Regularly performed maintenance

c a
testing helps detect the fiber performance in a network in a timely manner.
i
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
FD: Fiber Doctor System a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Specific boards include: TN12RAU1, TN12RAU2, TN11SRAU, TN51RPC, etc.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Hardware a w
Hu


 The
n
TN12RAU1/TN12RAU2/TN11SRAU/TN51RPC/TN97RPC/TN12ST2/TN11AST2/
o
ti
TNF1AST4 boards support the line fiber quality monitoring function. They
a
ic
emit probe light to obtain fiber performance data, receive detection results,

tif
and report the obtained fiber performance data to the FD system.
r
 Software
Ce
&
The FD system is integrated on the U2000. After users issue detection
g


i n by equipment and graphically displays the data.

commands on the U2000, the FD system receives the performance data
in
reported
a
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Working process: A user starts fiber quality monitoring -> The FD system delivers

Hu


configuration commands to equipment -> The FD system accurately monitor the

n
fiber performance using the hardware and software -> The hardware reports
o
ti
monitoring results to the FD system -> The FD system graphically displays the

c a
obtained performance data -> The user queries the monitoring results.
i
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Specific boards: TN12RAU1, TN12RAU2, TN11SRAU, TN51RPC, TN12ST2,

Hu


TN11AST2 or TNF1AST4.

o n
The fiber quality detection light and OSC channel of the

ti
TN12ST2/TN11AST2/TNF1AST4 board share the same optical source.
a
ic


r if
If TN12ST2/TN11AST2/TNF1AST4 uses Offline mode in Advanced parameter
t
mode for detection, OSC communication will be interrupted. When this

Ce
occurs, only fiber quality detection signals are sent and the dynamic

&
detection range is large. When Online mode in Advanced parameter mode or

ng
Typical mode is used for detection, OSC communication is normal. In this

n i
scenario, the fiber quality detection function works together with the OSC

r ai
communication function, and the dynamic detection range is small.

i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following describes the performance parameters that can be set in Advanced

Hu


parameter mode modes:

n
Pulse width: width of probe optical pulses. When the pulse width increases,
o
ti


the light emitting time increases and consequently a larger energy is

ic a
obtained. This means that a larger dynamic range can be acquired but also
if
rt
larger dead zones will result.


C e
Measurement Range: maximum distance for the line fiber quality monitoring

&
function to sample data. The distance determines the sampling resolution.
NOTE: The g total fiber loss will affect the detection distance and the dynamic
range iisnfixed for the same detection mode. Therefore, a larger total fiber loss
a in a smaller detection distance. To maximize the detection capability,
T r
indicates

e i the value of Measurement Range is generally greater than the actual

a w detection capability. When the fault point is beyond the permitted distance

Hu
range of a detection mode and cannot be located, select a detection mode
that provides a larger pulse width to locate the fault point.

 Detection time: Measurement is performed multiple times within the

detection time. The average value is obtained based on the measurement
results to improve the measurement precision. The actual duration from the
time when a detection event starts to the time when the detection results are
returned will be longer than the Detection time.

 The pulse width of emitted optical pulses varies according to monitoring modes,
and affects the detection distance and measurement precision. A greater pulse
width provides a larger dynamic range and longer detection distance but poorer
measurement precision.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
Procedure a w
HuConfiguration > WDM Optical


 On the main menu of the U2000, choose

Management > Fiber Doctor. n

t iodisplayed, set filter criteria so that the desired



ic amain window.
In the Filter dialog box that is

r t if
fibers are displayed on the

Ce is displayed.
 Select and right-click one or more fibers, and choose Enable OTDR from the
shortcut menu that
&

g
Select one or more fibers and click Start Detection and select the desired
n mode.
i
detection
in
Inathe Parameter Settings dialog box that is displayed, set monitoring

r
Tparameters.
ei
Click OK to start the detection, The Progress column displays

a w the detection progress.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Set State of the desired fiber to Enable. a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Here, we use the detection results in typical mode/Advanced parameter mode as

Hu


an example.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The large reflection peak at about 9 km from the Raman board indicates that a

Hu


PC/UPC fiber is cut. In this scenario, the reflection value is generally greater than -
20 dB.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
An APC fiber cut event occurs at about 5.2 km from the Raman board. In this

Hu


scenario, the reflective value is generally less than -45 dB but the attenuation is
greater than 5 dB.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The large reflection peak at about 0.2 km from the Raman board indicates that the

Hu


fiber end face is contaminated. In this scenario, the reflection value is generally
greater than -43 dB.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The large reflection peak at about 0.45 km indicates that the fiber end face is burnt.

Hu


In this scenario, the reflection value is generally greater than -40 dB.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The above figure is the schematic diagram for an event indicating a large insertion

Hu


loss on a connector at about 1.2 km from the Raman board. The insertion loss
shown in the blue circle is close to 3 dB.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following figure is the schematic diagram for an interconnection event

Hu


between G.652 and G.653 fibers. The interconnection point is at about 0.25 km

n
from the Raman board. In this scenario, a negative insertion loss will be reported.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: A user starts fiber quality monitoring. -> The FD system delivers

Hu


configuration commands to the equipment -> The FD system accurately monitor

n
the fiber performance using the hardware and software. -> The hardware reports
o
ti
monitoring results to the FD system. -> The FD system graphically displays the

c a
obtained performance data. -> The user queries the monitoring results.
i
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
OSI (Open System Interconnection): A framework of the International Organization

Hu


for Standardization (ISO) standards. It is used for communication between systems

n
manufactured by different vendors. The communication process consists of seven
o
ti
layers arranged based on user relationships. Each layer uses the environment

c a
provided by the lower layer and provides services for the upper layer. The seventh
i
r tif
layer to the fourth layer process the end-to-end communication between the

Ce
message source and the message destination, and the third layer to the first layer
process the network function. OSI can be said to be the authority of the network
&
world! All data communication protocols can correspond to the OSI model.

Functions ofin
g
each layer of the OSI RM (Open System Interconnection Reference
Model): in


r a
i TPhysical Layer: Transmits raw bit streams on communication channels to
e implement the mechanical, electrical, and functional features and processes


a w
H u required for data transmission. The physical layer involves definitions of
voltage, cable, data transmission rate, and interface. The main network
devices at the physical layer are repeaters and hubs.

 Data Link Layer: The main task is to control the physical layer, detect and
correct the errors that may occur, enable the network layer to display an
error-free line, and perform traffic control (optional). Traffic control can be
implemented at the data link layer or at the transport layer. The data link
layer is related to the physical address, network topology, cable planning,
error check, and traffic control. The main devices at the data link layer are
Ethernet switches.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The TCP/IP protocol stack is similar to the OSI reference model. The physical layer

Hu


and data link layer involve the original bit stream transmitted on the

n
communication channel. It implements the mechanical, electrical, and functional
o
ti
features and processes required for data transmission, and provides measures

c a
such as error detection, error correction, and synchronization, make the network
i
r t if
layer display an error-free line. In addition, traffic control is performed.


Ce
The network layer checks the network topology to determine the optimal route for
transmitting packets and forward data. The key problem is how to select a route
&
ng
from the source to the destination. The main protocols at the network layer
i
include Internet protocol (IP), Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Internet
n
ai
Group Management Protocol (IGMP), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), and
r
T
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP).
i
e basic function of the transport layer is to provide end-to-end communication
wThe


a between two hosts. The transport layer receives data from the application layer
u
H and divides the data into smaller units when necessary, and transmits them to the
network layer and ensures that the information of each segment is correct. The
main protocols at the transport layer include Transfer Control Protocol (TCP) and
User Datagram Protocol (UDP).

 The application layer processes specific application details. The application layer
displays the received information, sends the user data to the lower layer, and
provides network interfaces for the application software. The application layer
contains a large number of common applications, such as Hypertext Transfer
Protocol (HTTP), remote login (Telnet), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), and Trivial File
Transfer Protocol (TFTP).
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Version: 4 bits. Indicates the IP version. The current version is IP version 4. The next

Hu


generation IP version is version 6.

o n
Header Length: 4 bits. Indicates the length of the IP header.

a ti used as QoS. This field can be divided into

Type of Service: 8 bits, which is usually
two parts: Precedence (3 bits)ic


i f and TOS (5 bits).

e
Total Length: 16 bits. Total
 rtlength of IP packets, including the IP header.
C
&
Identifier (16 bits) / Flags (3 bits)/Fragment Offset (13 bits): These three parts are


g
used for IP packet fragmentation.
n
Time to Livei (TTL): 8 bits. When an IP packet is generated, an initial value is set.


a inIP packet is forwarded from a router to another router, the TTL value
When an
T r by 1. When the TTL value is 0, the IP packet is discarded.
i
decreases
eProtocol:
a w 8 bits. Indicates the protocol type to which the IP payload belongs. For

Hu
example, if the value is 6, it indicates that the TCP segment is encapsulated by IP.

 Header Checksum: 16 bits, which is used for error detection.

 Source/Destination IP Addresses: Indicates the source and destination IP addresses

of IP packets.

 Options: Variable length. This parameter is optional.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
An important part of the IP protocol is that each computer and other devices on

Hu


the Internet have a unique address, that is, an IP address. With this unique address,

n
the user can efficiently and conveniently select the required objects from millions
o
ti
of computers when performing operations on the computer connected to the
network.
ic a
The IP address has 32 binary

r t ifbits. Theoretically, 2 IP addresses can be used, that
32

e On the Internet, if each Layer 3 network device, such as

is, 4.3 billion IP addresses.
C
a router, stores the IP address of each node to communicate with each other, you
can imagine how &
g large a routing table is on the router, which is impossible for the
n the number of routing tables on the router, make more effective
i
router. To reduce

a in clearly distinguish each network segment, you need to adopt a

routing, and

T r hierarchical solution for IP addresses.

structured
ei IP address structure is divided into the network part and the host part. The IP
a waddress hierarchical solution is similar to the commonly used telephone number.
The


Hu The phone number is globally unique. For example, for the phone number 010-
82882484, the 010 field indicates the area code of Beijing, and the 82882484 field
indicates a phone number in Beijing. The IP addresses are the same. The previous
network part represents a network segment, and the subsequent host part
represents a device on the network segment.

 IP addresses are designed in a hierarchical manner. In this way, each layer 3

network device does not need to store the IP address of each host, but stores the
network address of each network segment (the network address represents all
hosts in the network segment), the routing table entries are greatly reduced, and
the routing flexibility is increased.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The IP address is usually identified in dotted decimal notation. That is, the IP

Hu


address of 32 bits is divided into four segments, each segment is 8 bits, and each
segment is represented by decimal.
o n


ati
For each segment, the minimum value is 0 (8 bits are 0) and the maximum value is
255 (8 bits are 1).
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The network part of an IP address is called a network address. The network

Hu


address is used to uniquely identify a network segment or aggregation of several

n
network segments. Network devices in the same network segment have the same
o
ti
network address. The host part of the IP address is called the host address, and the

c a
host address is used to uniquely identify the network device in the same network
i
rt if
segment. For example, IP address (class A): 10.110.192.111/8, the network part is

Ce
10, that is, the network address is 10.0.0.0/8, and the host part is 110.192.111, that
is, the host address is 10.110.192.111/32.
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Class A, class B, and class C addresses are often used. The IP address is allocated

Hu


by the International Network Information Center (InterNIC) according to the size

n
of the company. In the past, class-A addresses are reserved for government
o
ti
agencies, class B addresses are allocated to medium-sized companies, and class C

c a
addresses are allocated to small companies. However, with the rapid development
i
rt if
of the Internet and the waste of IP addresses, IP address resources are very tight.


Ce
The private IP address is reserved by the InterNIC and is freely controlled by each
enterprise intranet. Using private IP addresses cannot access the Internet directly
&
ng
because the private IP address cannot be used on the public network, and no
i
route to the private IP address is available on the public network. As a result,
n
ai
address conflict occurs. When accessing the Internet, NAT technology are used to
r
T
translate private IP addresses into public IP addresses that can be identified by the
i
e
Internet.

a w
Hu
 NAT: Network Address Translation (NAT) is a standard of the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF). It allows an organization with an IP address far
less than its internal network node to enter the Internet. The network address
translation technology converts a private IP address (such as an address in a
192.168.0.0 range) of a router, a firewall, or a personal computer on an
internal private network into one or more public IP addresses of the Internet.
It converts the packet header into a new address and monitors them through
its internal platform. When the information packet is fed back from the
Internet, the network address translation uses these platforms to reverse the
IP address of the user host.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The IP address is divided into the network part and the host part. How to identify

Hu


these two parts?

o n
To identify the network part and host part of an IP address, you need to combine

ti
the IP address with the address mask. The mask is the same as the IP address with
a
ic
32 bits length. The masks corresponding to the IP address network part are all "1"

t if
and the masks corresponding to the IP address host part are all "0". By default, the
r
e
subnet mask of class A network is 255.0.0.0, the subnet mask of class B network is
C
255.255.0.0, and the subnet mask of class C network is 255.255.255.0.
&
ng
With the address mask, the method of identifying the IP address is as follows:
i


n
ai
 Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0 or 192.168.1.1/24 (number of consecutive 1s

T r
in the mask).

e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
According to the preceding description, we know IP address is divided into two

Hu


parts. The network part is used to uniquely identify a data link, and the host part is

n
used to identify different hosts connected to the same data link. To construct a
o
ti
network, you must plan a network address for each link on the network. If classes

c a
A, B, and C are assigned to different links, about 17, 000, 000 links can be
i
r t if
identified by all three types of addresses. That is, there are about 224 hosts with

Ce
class A addresses connected to one link, 216 for class B addresses, and 28 for class
C addresses. It is meaningless to allocate IP addresses in this mode.
&
ng
 To use IP addresses more efficiently, a large class A, B, or C addresses can be
i
divided into smaller subnets, that is, some host bits are used as network bits. After
n
ai
a subnet is divided, an IP address can be divided into three parts: Network part,
r
T
subnet part, and host part. The masks of the network part and subnet part are all
i
e “1”. With the subnet, the use of network addresses is more effective. Externally,

a w it is still a network. Internally, it is divided into different subnets.

u
H For example: If a class C address 192.168.1.17 is in the default state (no subnet


division), that is, a natural mask is used, the network part is 192.168.1.0/24 and can
be allocated to only one data link. In the case of subnet division, for example, the
first four bits of the host part are used as subnet part. In this way, for the address:
The network bit is 24 bits, the subnet bit is 4 bits, and the host bit is 4 bits. A class
C network segment is divided into 24=16 subnets to identify 16 data links. A
maximum of 24-2=14 hosts can be connected to each data link. 192.168.1.17/28
belongs to subnet 192.168.1.16/28.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For a point-to-point link, two IP addresses can meet the requirements. A 30-bit

Hu


mask is used. That is: 255.255.255.252.

o n
For a broadcast link, the mask length depends on the number of hosts on the

ti
broadcast network. If there are 60 hosts on the network and the mask can be 26
a
ic
bits, the number of host addresses is 232-26=26=64﹥60. If there are 120 hosts on

rt if
the network and the mask can be 25 bits, the number of host addresses is 232-
e
25=27=128﹥120. For example: 192.168.1.0/26, 172.16.1.0/25, and so on.

C
&
The IP address can be used to identify the device.


n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: NE1: Eth 1: (192.168.1.1/30), Eth 2: (192.168.1.5/30)

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
At first, MPLS is a protocol used to improve the forwarding speed of routers.

Hu

However, MPLS has become an important standard for expanding the scale of IP
networks because MPLS has outstanding performance in the current IP network in
terms of Traffic Engineering and VPN.
o n

a ti
MPLS is a standard routing and switching platform that supports various upper-

ic is usuallymeans
layer protocols and services. Multiprotocol
network layer protocols, andfMPLS
that MPLS can carry multiple
i
network model. A label israt short, easy-to-handle information content that does
between Layer 2 and Layer 3 of the

Ce
not contain topology information and has only local significance.

&routerisonbased
MPLS packet forwarding on labels. When an IP packet enters an MPLS

ng a proper label for the IP packet. Then, all nodes on the MPLS
network, the edge the MPLS ingress analyzes the content of the IP
packet and iselects
n this short label as the forwarding decision basis. When the IP packet
network iuse
a MPLS network, the label is stripped from the egress edge router.
leavesrthe
i TMPLS adopts the dual-plane structure, which consists of the Control Plane and
e
The


a wForwarding Plane. The control plane is based on connectionless services and

u provides powerful and flexible routing functions to meet the network

H requirements of various new applications. The control plane is responsible for label
distribution, label forwarding table establishment, and label switching path
establishment and removal. The forwarding plane is also called Data Plane. It is
connection-oriented and supports Layer 2 networks such as ATM and Ethernet.
The forwarding plane adds and deletes labels for IP packets, and forwards received
packets based on the label forwarding table.
 In the packet transport field, the MPLS technology is mainly used to construct
tunnels to carry various types of services transmitted by PWE3 (for example, TDM,
ATM, and Ethernet), to implement end-to-end transmission of services on packet
networks. Therefore, MPLS is not a service or an application. It is actually a tunnel
technology. This technology not only supports multiple upper-layer protocols and
services, but also ensures the security of information transmission to some extent.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The above figure shows the typical structure of a MPLS network. The basic unit of

Hu


a MPLS network is Label Switching Router (LSR). The network area formed by LSRs

n
is called MPLS Domain. A LSR located at the edge of a MPLS domain and
o
ti
connected to other networks is called an Label Edge Router (LER). A LSR inside the

c a
Domain is called a Core LSR. If a LSR has one or more adjacent nodes that do not
i
if
run MPLS, the LSR is the LER. If all the adjacent nodes of an LSR run MPLS, the LSR
rt
is the core LSR.
e
CRouter (LSR) is a network device that can exchange MPLS
LSR: A Label Switching
&packets. It is also called a MPLS node. All LSRs support the


g
labels and forward
n
i
MPLS protocol.
n is responsible for classifying the packets entering the MPLS domain
a iLER
intoT

r
LER: The

ei leaves the MPLS domain, a label is displayed and the packet is restored to
FEC and pressing the labels for the FEC to forward the MPLS packets. When a

a wthe original packet. Then, the packet is forwarded.

packet

Hu  FEC (Forwarding Equivalence Class): A group of data packets that are processed in
an equivalent manner during forwarding, for example, data packets with the same
destination address prefix. Generally, a same label is allocated to one FEC.

 LSP: After IP packets enter the MPLS domain, different nodes are assigned with
specified labels. Data is forwarded according to these labels, the path that data
flow pass through in the MPLS network is called LSP (Label Switch Path). An LSP is
a unidirectional path, which is the same as the data flow direction.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A Label Switched Path (LSP), also called a tunnel, is a unidirectional path. LSRs on

Hu


an LSP can be classified into the following types:

Ingress
o n
ti a label onto the packet for MPLS packet


c a
An LSP ingress node pushes
encapsulation and iforwarding.
i f One LSP has only one ingress node.

Transit
e rt
C



&
An LSP transit node swaps labels and forwards MPLS packets according

g
to the label forwarding table. One LSP may have one or more transits
n
i
nodes.

a in
T

r
Egress

e i  An LSP egress node pops the label and recovers the packet for

a w forwarding. One LSP has only one egress node.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Next Hop Label Forwarding Entry (NHLFE): Indicates the next hop label forwarding

Hu

entry. NHLFE is the core of the LSR forwarding packets. Each NHLFE contains the
next hop address, interface address, label operation type, and link layer protocol of
n
the interface. Label operation types include Push (adding a label), Pop (popping up
o
ti
a label), Swap (switching label), and Null (without changing labels).
a
ic
Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC): A classification and forwarding technology
if


r t
that classifies packets with the same forwarding processing mode into one
category. Packets of the same FEC are processed in the same way in the MPLS
Ce
network. The division methods of FEC is very flexible and can be any combination

&
of source addresses, destination addresses, source ports, destination ports,

g
protocol types, and VPN, etc.
n(FTN): The FEC is mapped to the corresponding NHLFE. Only the
FEC to NHLFEi
in supports this operation.

ingress node
a
r Label Map (ILM): Map the MPLS label to the corresponding NHLFE. Only
T
Incoming
ei and egress nodes support this operation.

transit

a wThe process of forwarding MPLS packets on NE A is as follows:

Hu


Receives the packet, and finding the corresponding LSP ID (101) according to


the FEC to which the packet belongs.

 Searches for the corresponding NHLFE entry based on the LSP ID to obtain
the outbound interface (Port1), next hop (Port2), outgoing label (20), and
label operation type (Push). The label operation type of the ingress node is
Push.
 Adds an MPLS label to the packet, and then sends the encapsulated MPLS
packet to the next hop.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NG WDM equipment supports the Martini MPLS packet encapsulation format.

Hu address is the MAC address of the



Destination address: The destination MAC



peer interface obtained through n the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). The
MAC address changes in eachio
t hop.
aMAC address is the MAC address of the local
ic
tiinf each hop.
Source address: The source


r
interface and changes

CeWDM equipment determines whether the Ethernet frame

802.1q header: NG
at the egress&


port carries the 802.1q header according to the TAG attribute of

g
n not carry the 802.1q header. When the port attribute is Tag
i
the Ethernet port. When the port attribute is set to Access, the Ethernet

a in
frame does

T r the VLAN ID in the 802.1q header carried in the MPLS packet is the
aware,

ei Tunnel VLAN ID configured on the NMS. If the Tunnel VLAN ID is not set, the
a w VLAN ID in the 802.1q header is the default VLAN ID of the NNI port that

Hu
sends the MPLS packet (the default value is 1).

 Length/Type: The value is fixed to 0x8847. When detecting that the

Length/Type of an Ethernet frame is this value, the NG WDM equipment
considers that the packet is an Ethernet frame that carries an MPLS packet.
The NE does not check the MPLS packets on the ingress port according to
the TAG attribute and the VLAN ID of the LSP.

 MPLS packet: Consists of MPLS labels and Layer 3 user packets.

 Frame Check Sequence (FCS): It is used to check the correctness of the

Ethernet frame.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A label is a short and fixed-length identifier that uniquely identifies the FEC to

Hu


which a packet belongs. In some cases, for example, to perform load balancing,

n
one FEC may have multiple labels, but one label on a router can represent only
o
ti
one FEC. The label is similar to the VPI/VCI of ATM and the DLCI of Frame Relay,

c a
and is a connection identifier. The length of the label is 4 bytes, 32 bits.
i
The label has four domains:if
rt


C e
Label: 20 bits, indicating the label value.


& for extended purposes. EXP is used to classify MPLS packets

EXP: 3 bits, used
g


i n802.1q protocol.
on the NG WDM equipment, which is similar to the VLAN priority specified in
n
theiIEEE
a
r 1 bit, stack bottom flag. MPLS supports multi-layer labels, that is, label
T S:
ei nesting. If the value of S is 1, it indicates that the label is the bottom label.


a w TTL: 8 bits, which is the same as the Time To Live (TTL) in IP packets.
Hu


 Labels are encapsulated between the link layer and the network layer. Therefore,
labels can be supported by any link layer.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A label stack refers to an ordered set of labels. The label next to the Layer 2 header

Hu


is called the top label or outer label, and the label next to the IP header is called

n
the bottom label or inner label. Theoretically, an unlimited number of MPLS labels
o
ti
can be stacked. The label stack organizes labels in Last In First Out mode and

c a
processes labels from the top of the stack.
i
Label space: The value range

r t iffor label distribution is called a label space. Two types
e
of label space are available:
C
&
Per-Platform Label Space


n g
i
An LSR uses one label space; that is, the labels are unique per LSR.


a in
Per-Interface Label Space
r


i T Each interface on an LSR uses a label space; that is, the labels are unique
e


w per interface, but can be repeated on different interfaces.

a The equipment supports only the per-platform label space. Ingress labels and
H u 

egress labels must be unique per NE.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: LSRs on an LSP can be classified into the following types:

Hu


 Ingress

o n
An LSP ingress node pushes a label onto the packet for MPLS packet
ti


ic a
encapsulation and forwarding. One LSP has only one ingress node.

 Transit
rt if

Ce
An LSP transit node swaps labels and forwards MPLS packets according

&
to the label forwarding table. One LSP may have one or more transits

ng
nodes.

n i
ai
 Egress

T r An LSP egress node pops the label and recovers the packet for
i


e forwarding. One LSP has only one egress node.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
PWE3 (Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge) is one of the solutions proposed to

Hu


combine traditional communication networks with existing packet networks. PWE3

n
is a Layer 2 service bearer technology that simulates the basic behaviors and
o
ti
characteristics of ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuits, and SONET/SDH

c a
services on a PSN. That is, PWE3, as an end-to-end Layer 2 service bearer
i
rt if
technology, provides a point-to-point L2VPN service on a public network, and

Ce
transmits various services (FR, ATM, Ethernet, and TDM SONET/SDH) through a
PSN, end-to-end virtual link emulation is provided at the PSN boundary. Therefore,
&
a traditional network can be interconnected with a packet switching network by

i ng
using the PWE3 technology, so as to implement resource sharing and network
n
ai
expansion.

T r
The concepts in PWE3 are as follows:
i


e
a w  Attachment Circuit (AC)

Hu
 A link or virtual link between the Customer Edge (CE) and the Provider
Edge (PE).

 Pseudo Wire (PW)

 A virtual connection between two PEs, which transmits frames between

two PEs. The PE uses signaling to establish and maintain the PW, and
the PW status information is maintained by the two endpoint PEs of the
PW.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
PWE3 is a processing mechanism that emulates the key attributes of a service and

Hu


transmits the service through a tunnel (IP/MPLS) on the PSN network.

o n
The internal data service carried by the PW is invisible to the core network, in other

ti
words, the core network is transparent to the CE data flow. That is, the PW
a
ic
emulation process must ensure the original attributes of the service as much as
possible.
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Ethernet service forwarding process on the local PE (PE1) is as follows:
u


Extracts local Ethernet service packetsH

 transmitted from department A and
department B from the AC.
o n
a ti before PWE3 emulation.
Pre-processes the service payloads
c payloads to the corresponding PWs.


i f iservice
rt
The forwarder maps the


Encapsulates datae

C transmitted on PWs into PWE3 packets in standard format,

&
including generating control words and adding PW label and Tunnel label to
data.
n g
Maps iPWs to a tunnel for transmission.


a in
T r
The Ethernet
 service forwarding process on the remote PE (PE2) is as follows:

ei Demultiplexes the PW from the tunnel.

w Decapsulates the PW, and removes the Tunnel label, PW label, and control


a
Hu


word.

 Extracts service payloads from PWs.

 Restores the service payload to the local Ethernet service packet.

 The forwarder selects the AC that forwards the packet and forwards the
packet to department A and department B.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The specific PWE3 encapsulation format varies slightly according to the type of

Hu


emulated service, but a generic encapsulation format is also available.

o n
A PWE3 packet contains the MPLS label, control word (Optional), and payload.

MPLS Label
ati
c


if i


rt
The MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels, which are used to

Ce
identify tunnels and PWs respectively. The format of the tunnel label is the
same as that of the PW label.
&
ng
 Control Word

n i
ai
 The 4-byte control word is a header used to carry packet information over an

T r MPLS PSN.

e i The control word is used to check the packet sequence, to fragment packets,


a w and to restructure packets.

Hu Payload


 Payload indicates the payload of a service in a PWE3 packet.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Layer 2 virtual private network (L2VPN) defined by IETF includes the virtual private

Hu


wire service (VPWS) and virtual private LAN service (VPLS). VPWS is used to

n
provide point-to-point service at Layer 2 and VPLS is used to simulate a local area
o
ti
network (LAN) in a wide area network (WAN).

ic a
VPWS is a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) technology for point-to-point
if


t
transmission. It performs one-to-one mapping between a received attachment
r
e
circuit (AC) and a pseudo wire (PW). By binding ACs and PWs in the <AC, PW, AC>
C
format to form a virtual circuit, VPWS achieves transparent transmission of Layer 2
&
ng
services between users

ni
VPLS is a Layer 2 VPN technology for simulating LANs. Using VPLS, each L2VPN
ai


r
considers an NE as a virtual switching instance (VSI), and this VSI is used to achieve
T
i
mapping between multiple ACs and PWs, and connect multiple Ethernet LANs so
e
a w that the LANs work as if they are one LAN.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: PWE3 is a Layer 2 service bearer technology that emulates the basic

Hu


behaviors and characteristics of services such as Ethernet on a packet switched

n
network (PSN). Aided by the PWE3 technology, conventional networks can be
o
ti
connected by a PSN. Therefore, resource sharing and network scaling can be
achieved.
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
MPLS-TP is an extension of MPLS and meets transport network requirements,

Hu


especially OAM and protection switching.

o n
MPLS-TP has become a mainstream technology in the process of moving mobile
bearer networks to all-IP networks.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The formula is described as follows: MPLS-TP is a subset of MPLS. It removes

Hu


connectionless IP-based forwarding and adds end-to-end OAM functions.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The MPLS-TP packet transport network uses the ASON (automatic switching

Hu


optical network) architecture. Therefore, the MPLS-TP packet transport network

n
still consists of the transport plane (user/data plane), management plane, and
o
ti
control plane, the three planes are independent of each other.

ic a
The transport plane adapts and forwards customer data and signaling data
if


rt
based on MPLS-TP labels, and provides connection-oriented O&M
e
management (OAM) and protection restoration functions.
C

& the signaling mechanism, and distribute labels.
The main function of the control plane is to establish a label forwarding
g
channel through

Thein
in
management plane implements the management functions of the
a


T r
transport plane, control plane, and entire system, and provides collaborative

e i operations between these planes.

w
a redefine the functions provided by IP/MPLS, but uses the data plane data
In the MPLS-TP packet transport network architecture, MPLS-TP does not need to
u


H processing process defined by IETF for MPLS and PWE3, therefore, the MPLS-TP
transport plane is based on MPLS and PWE3, but its OAM capability needs to be
enhanced.

 The MPLS-TP control plane uses the generalized multiprotocol label switching
(GMPLS) protocol of the IETF to implement its functions. Its control and data
transmission are more coupled.

 Separating the data transport plane from network resource management enables
the MPLS-TP transport plane to be independent of its service network and related
control network (management plane and control plane), facilitating network
construction and capacity expansion.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the MPLS-TP OAM protocol model, a network is divided into three layers:

Hu


section layer, tunnel layer, and PW layer. Each layer is described as follows:

n
The section layer serves the tunnel layer.
o
i section layer and serves the PW layer.


The tunnel layer is a client oftthe


a
icthe tunnel layer and serves services.
i f
rt
The PW layer is a client
 of

C e
Fault management includes:


& (CC)
Continuity Check


g Indication (RDI)
RemotenDefect
i
in Indication Signal (AIS)


r a
Alarm


T
ei Loopback (LB)
Fault
 locating includes:

a w 

Hu Link Trace (LT)



 Performance monitoring includes:

 Loss Measurement (LM)

 Delay Measurement (DM)

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Tunnel APS is a function that protects tunnels using the APS protocol. In a tunnel

Hu

APS protection group, when the working tunnel is faulty, the service can be
switched to the preconfigured protection tunnel, improving the reliability of
transmitting services over tunnels.
o n

a ti
Tunnel APS has the following characteristics:

f
Tunnel APS is a tunnel-level


i ic end-to-end protection.
r
Tunnel APS can determinet whether to perform switching based on physical
e


C
layer detection and link layer detection.

&
Physical layer detection: Detect signal loss at the microsecond level.


g
Faults at the physical layer will cause link layer faults.
n layer detection: MPLS-TP OAM is used for detection. After
i
indetecting a fault, the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol
Link


a
r packets to implement protection switching.
T
i APS is a function that protects PWs . In a PW APS protection group, when the
eworking
PW
w


a PW is faulty, the service can be switched to the preconfigured protection

Hu
PW, improving the reliability of transmitting services over PWs.
 PW APS has the following characteristics:
 PW APS is a PW-level end-to-end protection.
 PW APS can determine whether to perform switching based on physical layer
detection and link layer detection.
 Physical layer detection: Detect signal loss at the microsecond level.
Faults at the physical layer will cause link layer faults.
 Link layer detection: MPLS-TP OAM is used for detection. After
detecting a fault, the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol
packets to implement protection switching.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
u


The IETF and ITU-T define a protocol H

 set, that is, Multiprotocol Label
n
Switching Transport Profile (MPLS-TP), for transmitting packet services by
using the MPLS technology on
t iothe existing transport network. MPLS-TP is
compatible with existing c
i a standards and extends to transport networks.
MPLS

The protection typercantif be tunnel APS or PW APS.

e


Tunnel APSCincludes MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 protection and MPLS Tunnel
APS 1:1&


protection.
g
n APS includes PW APS 1+1 protection and PW APS 1:1 protection.
i
PW
in


r a
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The L2 layer implements Ethernet/MPLS-TP switching, the L1 layer implements

Hu


ODUk/VC switching, and the L0 layer implements λ switching, which is Huawei's

n
next-generation intelligent optical transport platform.
o


ati
The OTN packet equipment integrates the L0/L1/L2 technology plane and

ic
modular design. The equipment can be combined into a single OTN

rt if
equipment, a single packet equipment, and a hybrid equipment to flexibly
e
meet the actual service bearing requirements.
C
& infinitely to meet the bandwidth increase requirement.
The OTN packet equipment supports WDM and 40G/100G. The bandwidth


g
can be expanded

Thein
in
OTN packet equipment supports the SDH plane, which meets the
a evolution of the SDH network on the live network. The live network


r
i Tgradually transits from the SDH network to the OTN network to protect the
smooth

e
a w investment.

Hu  The OTN packet equipment is ONE-BOX equipment provides L0/L1/L2 to

construct a simpler and more reliable network.

 The OTN packet equipment can select L2 packet convergence to meet high
bandwidth utilization requirement, select L1 fixed pipes to meet high security
requirement, select the L0 wavelength to meet the high bandwidth
requirement according to the service traffic characteristics. Flexible selection
to build a sustainable and efficient bearer (transport) network.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Comprehensive bearer for large bandwidth and multiple services:

Hutechnology provides large bandwidth.



Large bandwidth: The OTN optical path



Multi-service: The MPLS-TP PWE3

o nemulation technology implements unified
ti integrated bearing of mobile, broadband,


a
bearing of multiple services and
and private line services.ic
r t if
Celine services are transported by OTN.
Large bandwidth and coarse-grained services, such as PON, SAN, and


enterprise private
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
MS-OTN equipment makes network construction flexible and easy to expand.

Hu


 Provide full-granularity pipes:

L0: Wavelength λ 10G/40G/100G

o n
ti


L1 pipe: VC-n/ODUk
ic a
tif PW/LSP pipe


r
L2 pipe: Any bandwidth

Ce pipes:


Provide rigid and flexible



Rigid pipe (λ& +ODU+VC): High reliability and high security.

g


i npipe PW/LSP: The bandwidth can be configured and dynamically

in Flexible planning and low cost.
Flexible

r a
adjusted.
T
eandi adjustable. The network service topology supports P2P, P2MP, and MP2MP.
Flexible
 network planning: The bandwidth of the packet L2 pipe can be configured

a w
Hu
Easy network expansion: Modular design + centralized scheduling, non-blocking


service direction, and arbitrary scheduling

 Efficient service transmission: Low-rate services, such as E1/FE/GE are integrated

and multiple services share a pipe to improve bandwidth utilization. 10G/100G
high-speed services use L0 to implement efficient forwarding, low latency, and
highly reliable transmission

 SDH smooth evolution: Smooth inheritance of traditional SDH services

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
Hu


 Unlimited bandwidth expansion

Flexible service adaptation

o n
ti


Simple and reliable network

ic a
if


rt
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
E-Line: It refers to any Ethernet service based on the point-to-point Ethernet
u

Virtual Connection (EVC).
H
The above figure shows the networking of the E-Line services carried by the
n

Pseudo Wire (PW).
o
tiin both places. The branches of each company
Companies A and B have branches
a
fic you

need to communicate with each other. The services between the two companies
i
need to be isolated. In thistcase,
r communication
can configure the UNI-NNI E-Line services
carried by PWs to meetethe requirements between branches of
Company A and Company C B. In addition, because different services are carried by
different PWs, so & the services between the two companies can be isolated.

n
The servicesg accessed by the client side are encapsulated into the PW and
i


inprivate line services of different companies are carried by different PWs

then carried by the tunnel.
a
T r
The


ei ports on the network side are saved and the bandwidth utilization is
and are transmitted to the same port on the network side. In this way, the

a w improved. In the upstream direction of the client side, hierarchical QoS can
Hu
be configured for data packets.
 Advantages:
 Services can be isolated by PWs and MPLS tunnels.
 Supports various QoS policies.
 Services can support MPLS tunnel APS protection.
 Disadvantages:
 All the NEs on the PSN must support MPLS.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
E-LAN: It refers to any Ethernet service based on the multiple point- multiple point

Hu


Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC).

o n
The three branches of a company are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3. The branches

ti
need to share information with each other. In this case, the E-LAN services carried
a
by PWs can be configured.
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Ethernet services Service1 and Service2 that do not carry the VLAN ID or carry

Hu


the unknown VLAN ID are accessed to NE1 through Port1 and Port2 respectively.

n
Port 1 and port 2 transparently transmit Service1 and Service2 to Port3 and Port4
o
ti
respectively. Port3 and Port4 transmit Service1 and Service2 to NE2. NE2 processes
services in the same way as NE1.
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Company A and Company B have branches in both places. The branches of each

Hu


company need to communicate with each other. In this case, you can configure the

n
UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by ports to meet the communication requirements
o
ti
between branches of Company A and Company B.

ic a
In this case, each branch of company A and company B can exclusively occupy a
if


t
client side port. Each physical port on the network that the private line passes
r
e
through is shared by the services with different VLANs. For a single station,
C
complex traffic classification can be performed on data packets in the upstream
&
ng
direction of the client side, and different QoS policies can be used based on traffic
i
classification.
n
a i

r
The advantages of E-Line services carried by ports are as follows:
TThe working mechanism is simple.
e i 

a w Services are isolated by VLAN in network side.

Hu Disadvantages:


 A maximum of 4096 VLAN IDs are supported. The range is 1-4095.

 QoS policies can be applied only to a single service flow.

 Services are not protected.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Companies A and B have branches in both places. The branches of each company

Hu


need to communicate with each other. The services between the two companies

n
need to be isolated. The internal VLANs of Company A are from 1 to 100, and the
o
ti
internal VLANs of Company B are from 1 to 200. In this case, you can configure the

c a
UNI-NNI Ethernet services carried by QinQ links to meet the communication
i
rt if
requirements between branches of Company A and Company B. Different services

Ce
are carried by QinQ links with different SVLAN values. In this manner, services are
isolated from each other and VLAN resources on the packet switching network are
saved. &
g
n from different companies connected to the client side are
In this case,ipackets
in different SVLANs, and then are carried by the same link on the network


a
added with
r line services of different companies are added with an S-VLAN tag
T
side. Private
ei sent to the same port on the network side. This saves network-side ports and
and

a wimproves bandwidth utilization. In addition, only a small number of VLANs are

Hu occupied on the packet switching network, which saves VLAN resources on the
network. You can configure QinQ policies to implement QoS for services carried by
QinQ links.

 Advantages:

 The working mechanism is simple.

 Multiple QoS policies can be used.

 Services can be isolated by service VLAN, S-VLAN, and port.

 Disadvantages:

 No protection.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The above figure shows the typical application scenario of the service model. The

Hu


transmission network needs to carry the A service that is accessed by NE2 and NE3,

n
and the A service is converged and interacted on the convergence node NE1.
o
ti
Because service isolation is not required, the IEEE 802.1d bridge is used at the

c a
convergence node NE1 to implement service grooming.
i
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The above figure shows the typical application scenario of the service model. The

Hu


transmission network needs to carry the G and H services accessed by NE2 and

n
NE3. The two services are converged and interacted on the convergence node NE1.
o
ti
The G and H services use different VLAN planning. Therefore, the 802.1q bridge is

c a
used on each node and the sub-switching domain is divided according to the
i
rt if
VLAN. In this way, the two services are differentiated and isolated.


Ce
You can also configure VLAN-based E-Line services on NE2 and NE3 to access
services.
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The above figure shows the typical application scenario of the service model. The

Hu


transmission network needs to carry the G and H services accessed by NE2 and

n
NE3. The services are converged and interacted on the convergence node NE1. The
o
ti
G and H services use the same C-VLAN planning. Therefore, you need to add S-

c a
VLAN tags to the two types of services to differentiate and isolate services.
i

r t if
You can also configure QinQ-based E-Line services on NE2 and NE3 to access

Ce
services.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
1. Answer: Supports E-Line and E-LAN services.a w
Hu


 2. Answer:

E-LAN services carried by PWs

o n
ti


c a
IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services
i
tif E-LAN services


r
IEEE 802.1q bridge-based

Ce


 IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services

&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Tunnel APS is a function that protects tunnels using the APS protocol. In a tunnel

Hu


APS protection group, when the working tunnel is faulty, the service can be

n
switched to the preconfigured protection tunnel, improving the reliability of
o
ti
transmitting services over tunnels.

ic a
Tunnel APS has the following characteristics:
if


e rt
Tunnel APS is a tunnel-level end-to-end protection.

Tunnel APS can C determine whether to perform switching based on physical

& and link layer detection.


layer detection
g
n layer detection: Detect signal loss at the microsecond level.
i
Physical
inFaults at the physical layer may cause link layer faults.


a
Tr Link layer detection: MPLS-TP OAM is used for detection. After
ei


a w detecting a fault, the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol

Hu
packets to implement protection switching.

 The link layer detection mode of tunnel APS is implemented through MPLS-TP
OAM. Before creating APS protection, you need to enable MPLS-TP OAM for the
tunnel. The packet detection period of MPLS-TP OAM is usually set to 3.3 ms. The
APS protocol can be enabled only after the tunnel APS protection group is
configured at both ends. Otherwise, the MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL alarm is
generated.

 Tunnel APS cannot be used with PW APS at the same time. That is, if Tunnel APS is
configured for the tunnel to which a PW belongs, PW APS cannot be configured
for the PW. If PW APS is configured for a PW, Tunnel APS cannot be configured for
the tunnel to which the PW belongs.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In Tunnel APS 1+1 protection, services are dually fed to the working and

Hu


protection channels at the transmit end, and are selectively received at the receive

n
end. When the device detects that the working channel fails, the receive end
o
ti
selects the protection channel to receive services.

ic a
MPLS-TP OAM is used for detection. After detecting a fault, the ingress and egress
if


rt
nodes exchange APS protocol packets to implement protection switching.


C e
The APS protocol is transmitted through the protection channel and transmits the

&
protocol status and switching status to each other. After detecting a fault at the

n g
service detection point, the equipment at both ends performs service switching

ni receiving according to the protocol status and switching status.

and selective
i
r a modes of the Tunnel APS 1+1 protection are as follows: Single-


i T switching and dual-ended switching.

The switching

e
ended

a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Although Tunnel APS 1:1 Protection is also the working channel and the protection

Hu


channel correspond to each other and protects each other, but the services are not

n
transmitted on the two channels at the same time. 1:1 protection is a special case
o
ti
of 1:N protection. 1:N means that one protection channel protects N working
channels at the same time.
ic a
t if There are two MPLS tunnels in the figure. The
As shown in the preceding figure:

r
C e
solid line indicates the working tunnel, and the dashed line indicates the
protection tunnel. In normal cases, services are transmitted through the working
&
g
tunnel, while the protection tunnel is used to transmit the APS protocol.
n tests the connectivity of each unidirectional MPLS tunnel. The
i
insends connectivity test frames intermittently. When receiving test
MPLS-TP OAM


source a
T r the sink site verifies the connectivity and checks whether the tunnel is
site

ei
frames,

a wconnected.

Hu
The Tunnel APS 1:1 switching mode supports only dual-ended switching.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
PW APS is a function of protecting PWs based on the APS protocol. When the

Hu


working PW is faulty, services can be switched to the preset protection PW. In this

n
manner, important services are protected and the reliability of the PW
o
ti
transmission service is improved.

ic a
PW APS has the following characteristics:
if


e rt
PW APS is a PW level end-to-end protection.

C whether to perform switching based on physical layer

PW APS can determine
&link layer detection.


detection and
g
n layer detection: Detect signal loss at the microsecond level.
i
Physical
inFaults at the physical layer may cause link layer faults.


a
Tr Link layer detection: MPLS-TP OAM is used for detection. After
ei


a w detecting a fault, the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol

Hu
packets to implement protection switching.

 MPLS-TP PW OAM must be enabled for both the working and protection PWs of a
PW APS protection group, and the detection packet period must be set to 3.33ms.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In PW APS 1+1 protection, one protection PW is used to protect the working PW.

Hu


The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. The

n
service is switched to the protection PW only when the working PW fails.
o


ati
MPLS-TP OAM is used to detect MPLS-TP OAM. After detecting a fault, the ingress

ic
and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to implement protection
switching.
rt if
Ce
The PW APS 1+1 protection switching modes are as follows: Single-ended


&
switching and dual-ended switching

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In PW APS 1:1 protection, one protection PW is used to protect the working PW. In

Hu


normal case, The service is transmitted only on the working PW. The service is

n
switched to the protection PW only when the working PW fails.
o


ati
As shown in the preceding figure, the solid line indicates the working PW, and the

ic
dashed line indicates the protection PW. In normal case, The service is transmitted

rt if
only on the working PW, and the protection PW is used to transmit the APS
protocol.
C e
&
MPLS-TP OAM is used for detection. After detecting a fault, the ingress and egress


nodes exchange
n g APS protocol packets to implement protection switching.
i

a in
PW APS 1:1 protection switching mode: Dual-ended switching

T r means that the service transmitted to the working PW in the normal state
Bridging
eiswitched to the protection PW.


is

a wSwitching means that the service received from the working PW in the normal
Hu state is switched to receive from the protection PW.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
With the wide application of Ethernet technologies in metropolitan area networks

Hu


(MANs) and wide area networks (WANs), carriers raise higher requirements on the

n
bandwidth and reliability of backbone links that use Ethernet technologies. In
o
ti
traditional technologies, upgrading hardware is often used to increase the

c a
bandwidth of Ethernet links. However, this solution requires high costs and is not
i
rt if
flexible enough. The link aggregation technology solves these problems.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A logical link formed after bundling of multiple physical links is called a Link

Hu


Aggregation Group (LAG).

o n
In an Ethernet network, a link corresponds to a port. Therefore, link aggregation is
also called port aggregation.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) based on the IEEE 802.1ax standard

Hu


provides a standard negotiation mode for the equipment that exchanges data. The

n
system automatically generates an aggregated link based on the configuration
o
ti
and starts the aggregated link to transmit and receive data. After the aggregation

c a
link is formed, the link status is maintained. When the aggregation condition
i
if
changes, the link aggregation is automatically adjusted or disbanded.
rt

C e
LAG is classified into the following types:


&
Manual aggregation
g
n the LACP protocol is not used. A port can be in the Up or Down

i
A user manually creates a LAG. When a member port is added or

a indeleted,

T r state. You can determine whether to perform aggregation based on the

e i physical status (Up or Down) of the interface.

a w Compared with static aggregation, aggregation control is not accurate

Hu


and effective.

 Static aggregation

 A user creates a LAG. When a member port is added or deleted, the

LACP protocol is used. A port can be in the selected (active), Unselected
(inactive), or Standby (backup) state. The LACP protocol is used to
exchange aggregation information between devices to reach an
agreement on the aggregation information.

 Compared with manual aggregation, aggregation control is more

 accurate and effective.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Load Sharing mode (increasing the link capacity)a w
Humethod to increase the link capacity.


LAG provides users with an economical



By binding multiple physical links, n users can obtain more bandwidth data
links without upgrading existing
t io devices. The capacity of a data link is equal
ic a links. The aggregation module allocates
to the total capacity of physical

t if members based on the load balancing algorithm to

service traffic to different
r
implement link-level
C e load balancing.
&
All member links in a LAG share traffic and share load.


g


The hashin
in
To ensure load balancing over member links in a LAG, hash algorithms are used.
algorithms allocate traffic based on:
r a addresses, including source MAC addresses, destination MAC addresses,
i TMAC


e and source MAC addresses plus destination MAC addresses

a w IP addresses, including source IP addresses, destination IP addresses, and
Hu


source IP addresses plus destination IP addresses

 MPLS labels

 When a LAG member changes or some links are faulty, the system automatically
reallocates traffic.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a
Non-Load Sharing mode (improving link availability) w
u


In a LAG, members dynamically back H

 up each other. When a link is
disconnected, other members can n quickly take over the work of the faulty
link. The backup process of link
t ioaggregation is only related to the links in the
i a
aggregation group and iscirrelevant to the links outside the aggregation
group.
r tif
C
The LAG has only one member
 e link as the active link that carries traffic. The other

&
member link does not have traffic and is in the ready state.
g
nlink to recover the link failure.
i
When an active link in a LAG fails, the system takes the member link in ready state


in
as the active
a
WhenT rthe LAG is configured to work in non-load sharing mode, the revertive mode
ei be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive.


can

a w When this parameter is set to Revertive, services are automatically switched

Hu


back to the working link after the working link recovers.

 When this parameter is set to Non-RevertiveIn, after the working link

recovers, the LAG remains unchanged and services are still transmitted over
the protection link.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
MC-LAG uses the MC-LAG control protocol to aggregate multiple inter-chassis

Hu

data links that connect to the same device to provide a more reliable connection.
MC-LAG is an extension of single-chassis LAGs. MC-LAG allows links of multiple
n
NEs to be aggregated to form a link aggregation group (LAG). When a link or an
o
ati
NE fails, MC-LAG automatically switches services to another available link in the
same LAG, in this way, link reliability is enhanced.
ic


r t if
As shown in the figure, services from the DSLAM are transmitted to the Router
over the PSN; NE1 and NE2 work with the Router to provide MC-LAG protection
for services.
Ce

&
An MC-LAG protection scheme in dual-homing protection consists of the

ng
following parts:
i
nSingle-chassis
i
 (SC) LAGs on NE1 and NE2, that is, LAG1 and LAG2
a An MC-LAG between NE1 and NE2
T r 

e i  A LAG on the Router, that is, LAG3

a w  NE1 and NE2 communicate with each other by means of the inter-chassis

Hu
synchronous communication tunnel. Specifically, the two NEs periodically
exchange information about the status of LAG1 and LAG2 and negotiate the
active/standby status of LAG1 and LAG2 based on fault conditions.
 The configuration requirements for the LAG on the equipment are as follows:
 The intra-device LAG supports two working modes: Non-load sharing and
Load sharing. The working modes of the LAG1 LAG2 must be the same.
 The intra-device LAG supports two aggregation methods: Manual
aggregation and Static aggregation. The aggregation methods of LAG1,
LAG2 and the LAG3 on the interconnected equipment must be the same.
 The configuration requirements for MC-LAG are as follows: The MC-LAG supports
the revertive mode and non-revertive mode after the primary link recovers from a
fault. The revertive mode of the MC-LAG must be the same as that of the
 interconnected LAG3.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The MC-LAG protocol channel can be a DCN channel or an MPLS channel.

Humode.


MC-LAG can only be set to non-load sharing



LAG1 and LAG2 can be configured to n


i o load sharing mode or non-load sharing
t different NEs must be the same.
mode. However, the LAG modes on
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: NG WDM equipment provides a series of packet-based network-level

Hu


Ethernet protections, including PW APS, Tunnel APS, LAG, and MC-LAG.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Company A and company B have two branches in the City 1 and City 2 respectively.

Hu


Each braches need to communicate with another, the service of branch A and

n
branch B need to be separated with each other. In this case, we use two PWs to
o
ti
meet the requirement.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The EM20 board is a packet board. Receives a maximum of 8 x 10GE and 12 x GE

Hu


or 20 x GE/FE services, processes the packet services, and transmits the packet

n
data packets to the cross-connect board for centralized grooming at the
o
ti
equipment level.

ic a
The HUNQ2 board supports hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services.
if


t
Supports Layer 2 switching, OTN interfaces, and SDH overhead processing. The
r
e
board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e,
C
STM-16, and packet service signals whose total bandwidth does not exceed
&
ng
40Gbit/s. One optical port supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex,
i
and STM-16 signals.
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For the OSN 1800V packet configuration, when the universal line board HUNQ2 is

Hu


used as the NNI port, you need to configure the mapping between the virtual port
and ODUk timeslot.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
IP address planning principles: The ports at both ends of a link must belong to the

Hu


same subnet. The port IP addresses of different links cannot be in the same subnet.

n
In addition, the IP address must be different from the LSR ID.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the navigation tree, click an NE and choose Configuration > Group

Hu


Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration. The LSR ID

configuration page is displayed.
o n


ati
Set the basic information about the LSR ID according to the network planning
information:
ic
rt if
NE13 LSR ID: 172.16.0.13.
e


C
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the universal line board HUNQ2 is used as the NNI port, set the virtual port

Hu


to the ETH type and then set the ODUk timeslot mapping.

o n
Choose HUNQ2 from the main menu. Choose Configuration > Virtual Port

ti
Mapping Management from the main menu. On the Virtual Port Mapping
a
ic
Management Configuration page, perform the following operations:

Port type: ETH. rt if

e


The bandwidth isCthe client-side service bandwidth. In this example, GE is

&


used.

n g
i
Click Add.
in the 40001 port mapping: Set this parameter to HUNQ2-IN1/OUT1-


r a
Select
T


e i OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 according to the planning.

a w  Select the 40002 port mapping: Set this parameter to HUNQ2-IN2/OUT2-

Hu
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 according to the planning.

 Click Apply.

 After the setting, search for optical-layer OCh trails as the physical layer for
carrying Ethernet services. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search WDM Trail
from the main menu.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
UNI ports are UNI-NNI ports. For different client-side signals, UNI ports must be

Hu


configured with corresponding attributes. For UNI ports, basic attributes and Layer
2 attributes must be configured.
o n


ati
In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >

ic
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can

rt if
configure basic attributes, traffic control, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, and
e
advanced attributes for the Ethernet port.
C

&
Click Basic Attributes to find the corresponding UNI port.

n g

i
Enable port: Enable.

Portin


r a mode: Layer 2.
i TEncapsulation type: 802.1Q.
e Laser status: Enabled.


a w 

H u Click Apply.

 Click Layer 2 Attributes.

 Tag: Tag Aware.

 Click Apply.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NNI is a network-side port at the network layer and corresponds to a port on

Hu


the transmission network.

o n
For an ETH PWE3 service, pay attention to the basic attributes and Layer 3
attributes of the port.
ati
ic


rt if
In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Click Basic Attributes C


e
to find the corresponding NNI port.
&

g
Port Mode: Layer 3.
n Enabled.
i


a in
Laser Status:

T r Apply.
Click

ei Layer 3 Attributes.


Click
w Enable Tunnel: Enabled.


a
Hu


 Specify IP: Manually.

 IP address: 4001-10.0.0.5; 4002-10.0.0.9.

 IP mask: 30bits.

 Click Apply.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Tunnels can be configured in two modes: Per-NE configuration and end-to-end

Hu


configuration. This section describes the end-to-end configuration.

o n
Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the main menu. The Create Tunnel
window is displayed.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a
Configure the basic information about MPLS Tunnel.w
Hu


 Tunnel Name: Any.

Protocol Type: MPLS.

o n
ti


Signaling Type: Static CR.

ic a
tif


e r
Service Direction: Bidirectional.

 Protection Type:CProtection-Free.
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Configure parameters for configuring a static tunnel.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the dialog box that is displayed, click Browse Service to view the configured

Hu


tunnel or choose Service > Tunnel > Tunnel Management from the main menu.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.

Hu


 Service Type: ETH.

o n
Service ID: manual setting/automatic allocation.
ti


ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Click Configure Source and Sink Node. The dialog box for configuring the source

Hu


and sink of the PWE3 service is displayed.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configure PW basic attributes. a w
Hu


 Set source/sink IP.

o n
If a forward tunnel is selected, the reverse tunnel is automatically associated.
ti


Set PW label.
ic a
if


r t
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the dialog box that is displayed, click Browse Service to view the configured E-

Hu


Line services or choose Service >PWE3 Service > PWE3 Service Management from
the main menu.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Before configuring the multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN service, ensure that the

Hu


tunnels between nodes are normal.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS Service from the main menu.

Hu


 Service name: Any.

Signal Type: LDP/Static.

o n
ti



c a
Networking Mode: Full-Mesh VPLS.
i
Service Type: Service VPLS.tif


e r
VSI Name/VSI ID: TheCvalue can be automatically allocated or manually specified.


Click Add > NPE. & The Configure VSI Service Node dialog box is displayed.
g


i n
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Set NE13-N15 to a VSI node. a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configure Tag and MAC address learning method. a w
Hu


 Configure split horizon group.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the dialog box that is displayed, click Browse Service to view the configured

Hu


VPLS service or choose Service > VPLS Service > VPLS Service Management from
the main menu.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
1+1 protection: a w
Hu services to the working tunnel


In normal cases, the transmit end transmits



n
and protection tunnel, and the receive end receives services from the

t
working tunnel. When the workingio tunnel is faulty, the receive end receives
ic
services from the protection a tunnel.
1:1 protection: r tif
e


In normal cases,Cservices are transmitted in the working tunnel. The

& is idle. When the working tunnel is faulty, services are


protection tunnel

n g
i
transmitted in the protection tunnel.

a in switching:
Single-ended
r


T
ei or reverse working tunnel is faulty, only the service in the direction where the
Single-ended switching is unidirectional switching. That is, when the forward


a w fault occurs is switched to the protection tunnel.

Hu  Dual-ended switching:

 Dual-ended switching is bidirectional switching. That is, when the forward or

reverse working tunnel is faulty, the services in both directions are switched
to the protection tunnel.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When creating a tunnel trail, you can set Protection Type to 1:1 to configure a

Hu


tunnel APS protection group in an end-to-end manner.

o n
When configuring a protection group, you also need to enable the OAM status of
the tunnel.
ati
ic


r if
You can right-click an NE and choose from the shortcut menu to set the explicit
t
node of the working or protection trail.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the working and protection tunnels are available, you can configure tunnel APS

Hu


protection groups in end-to-end mode.

o n
Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Protection Group from the main menu. In the

ti
Protection Group Configuration window, configure tunnel APS protection.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
1+1 protection: a w
u


Normally, the transmit end transmits H

 services to the working PW and
protection PW, and the receive endn receives services from the working PW.
When the working PW is faulty,
t iothe receive end receives services from the
protection PW.
ic a
1:1 protection: r tif
Ceare transmitted in the working PW. The protection PW is


Normally, services
& working PW is faulty, services are transmitted in the


idle. When the

n g
i
protection PW.

a in switching:
Single-ended
r


T
ei or reverse working PW is faulty, only the service in the direction where the
Single-ended switching is unidirectional switching. That is, when the forward


a w fault occurs is switched to the protection PW.

Hu  Dual-ended switching:

 Dual-ended switching is bidirectional switching. That is, when the forward or

reverse working PW is faulty, the service in both directions is switched to the
protection PW.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When creating an Ethernet PWE3 service in trail mode, you can set Protection Type

Hu


to PW APS Protection.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Higher order modulation means high spectral efficiency. However, due to

Hu


Shannon's law, the transmission distance is shortened. Therefore, we must find a

balance in the middle.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Key technologies of Multi-carrier: a w
Hu improves spectral efficiency and


Nyquist spectrum compression technology

reduces the complexity of DSP. n
o
The photoelectric integrationtitechnology reduces the footprint, power


consumption, and costs.ic

a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Huawei provides two 400G WDM-side solutions: a w
Hu 2SC-PDM-16QAM. Generally, this


The first solution is 2*200G, which is called



solution is used in the area/MANnnetwork and the transmission distance is

t o
about 800 km. For each 400Gichannel, when the traditional fixed DWDM

ic a supports the 100Ghz spacing. If the

solution is used, the wavelength
spectrum compressionifand flex grid technologies are used, the channel
spacing of the 75Ghze rtcan be supported.
C
&
The second solution is 4*100G, which is called 4SC-PDM-QPSK. Generally, this


g
solution is used for long-distance transmission of backbone networks. The
n distance can reach 1200 km. For each 400G channel, when the
i
in fixed DWDM solution is used, the wavelength supports the
transmission

r a
traditional

i T200Ghz spacing. If the spectrum compression and flex grid technologies are
e
a w used, the channel spacing of the 150Ghz can be supported.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Huawei also provides two solutions for 1T: a w
Hu 5SC-PDM-16QAM. Generally, this


The first solution is 5*200G, which is called

solution is used in the area/MANnnetwork and the transmission distance is

t
about 800 km. For each 1T channel,io when the traditional fixed DWDM
ic a supports the 250Ghz spacing. If the
solution is used, the wavelength
spectrum compressionifand flex grid technologies are used, the 187.5Ghz
rt
channel spacing isesupported.
C

&is used for long-distance transmission of backbone networks.
The second solution is 10*100G, which is called 10SC-PDM-QPSK. Generally,
g
this solution
n
n i
The transmission distance can reach 1200 km. For each 1T channel, when the
a i
r
traditional fixed DWDM solution is used, the wavelength supports 500Ghz

e i Tspacing. If the spectrum compression and flex grid technologies are used, the
a w channel spacing of 375Ghz can be supported.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For a typical fixed WDM system, the channel spacing is N*50 Ghz. For a WDM

Hu


system based on the flex grid optical platform, the channel spacing is N*12.5Ghz.

o n
In addition, the Flex Grid supports hybrid transmission of wavelengths of different

ti
rates, including 10G/40G/100G/400G/1T…. Different rates occupy different channel
a
ic
spacing and support the optimal network capacity.

rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The evolution of the 400G/1T solution is divided into three phases. The first phase

Hu


is the existing fixed WDM system, which is based on the 50Ghz spacing. In the

n
second phase, the Flexible DWDM system uses the flex grid technology to support
o
ti
the N*12.5Ghz channel spacing. Therefore, the spectrum efficiency is higher. Take

c a
the 400G 2SC-PDM-16QAM solution as an example. If the existing fixed
i
rt if
wavelength system is used, the 400G channel spacing needs to be 100Ghz. If the

Ce
Flexible DWDM is used, the 400G channel spacing can support 75Ghz, and the
spectral efficiency is effectively improved. In the third phase of the future, the
&
spectral efficiency will be further improved and the transmission distance can be

i ng
further extended.
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Noise Figure (NF) of the amplifier affects the receive OSNR of the system. The

Hu


NF of the Raman amplifier is far lower than that of the traditional EDFA. Therefore,

n
for a common fiber network, the Raman amplifier can significantly improve the
o
ti
system OSNR and meet the requirements of a super 100G system.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the coherent network, the dispersion of the WDM transmission system is solved.

Hu


The key to restrict the transmission rate and distance is fiber attenuation and non-

n
linear. The transmission loss of each fiber span can be reduced by increasing the
o
ti
effective cross-sectional area of the optical fiber and reducing the fiber

c a
attenuation coefficient. In this context, G.654E optical fiber standards emerge.
i
rt if
Compared with the original G.654 optical fiber, the G.654E optical fiber standard

Ce
further standardizes the optical fiber performance specifications of high-speed
signals in terrestrial transmission.
&
ng
 According to the test results of G.654E fibers from multiple vendors in the lab, the
i
transmission performance of G.654E fibers from all vendors are better than that of
n
ai
G.652 fibers. For 400G services, the transmission distance of the G.654E is better
r
T
than that of the G.652 fiber.
i
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Huawei Super oDSP chip can not only compensate for large CD/PMD, but also

Hu


track the high-speed rSOP. It also adopts three leading technologies to improve
the transmission performance.
o n


ati
On the transmit side, Huawei Super oDSP performs pre-shaping on high-

ic
speed signals to reduce the transmission filtering penalty and increase the

rt
transmission distance.if

C e
The non-linear feature of the component causes signal degradation. Huawei

&
Super oDSP uses the adaptive correction algorithm to compensate for
component
n g damage and improve signal quality.

Thein
i
receive end uses the advanced BICC FEC algorithm for error correction.
a


T r
Compared with the traditional algorithm, the BICC FEC algorithm increases
i the coding net gain to 11.8dB based on the collaborative analysis of multiple
e adjacent data blocks to obtain a stronger error correction capability.
w
a Based on the Super oDSP chip, Huawei 100G can achieve 6000KM ultra-long haul
H u 

transmission. The 200G can achieve 1500KM long-distance transmission, and the
system capacity can reach 20T+.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Different vendors use different FEC encoding and decoding modes. Therefore, the

Hu


FEC processing modes of different vendors cannot be interconnected. (Only

n
standard FEC in different vendors can interconnect with each other, which is also
o
ti
called GFEC.)

c a
Huawei 100G SD-FEC soft decision algorithm has the following features:
i

r t if
The innovative full-soft-decision FEC can achieve higher gain, higher
e power consumption.
integration, and lower
C

&
The 100% soft decision is used, and the HD-FEC code is not cascaded. As a

g
result, the delay is greatly reduced.
n cascade pipeline architecture greatly reduces the implementation
i
in of soft decision decoding.
 The unique
a
Tr
complexity

ei
 The innovative soft decision architecture can be used to implement flexible

a w solutions with different power consumption and performance.

Hu
 The soft-decision FEC uses the overhead of 20% or higher. In combination
with the spectrum compression technology at the transmit end, the
transmission cost of rate increase can be reduced while the transmission
bandwidth increases. In this way, the gain performance brought by the high
overhead soft decision FEC can be ensured.
 The soft decision FEC is combined with the unique DSP algorithm to provide
differentiated application scenarios.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The goal of SDN is to separate the control layer from the forwarding layer,

Hu


enabling network openness, programmability, virtualization, and automation.

o n
SDN does not refer to a device or software, but a new network architecture or
network solution.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Characteristics: Control and forwarding separation, centralized controller, network

Hu


openness and programmability, and forwarding plane abstraction.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The SDN centralized management system virtualizes network bandwidth and

Hu


provides various differentiated bandwidth services (VTS) to improve VIP user

n
experience, increase customer loyalty, and bring value-added service revenue.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The NCE can manage the physical and virtual network devices of routers, switches,

Hu


WDM, microwave, SDH, and access networks sold by the network product line.

n
However, the NCE does not manage the devices related to the wireless and cloud
o
ti
core networks such as vEPC and vIMS, in addition, the NCE can interconnect with

c a
third-party IP and optical domain controllers through the Super cross-domain
i
management and control module.
rt if

Ce
In terms of functions, the NCE is positioned as the automation platform of the
cloud-based network. It needs to interconnect with the customer's service
&
ng
orchestrator or OSS to streamline the process from the customer CRM/BSS to the
i
OSS and to the network.
n
i
a module is cloudified by the Agile Controller.

r
NCE control
Tmanagement unit is evolved from the U2000, but the NCE has a larger scope.
e
NCE
 i
w
a and analysis.
NCE analysis unit is an integrated system that integrates management, control,
u


H
 Supports the connection to a third-party domain controller (Domain or Local
Controller).
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Although the NCE implements the function convergence of “management-

Hu


control-analysis” and cloudification, the reliability requirements of the

n
management and analysis modules are different from that of the control module,
o
ti
sub-second level response is required for “control” module, second-level

c a
response is required for “management” module. Therefore, control module can
i
if
be deployed nearby, the management module can be deployed nearby or
rt
e
remotely based on the carrier's organization or network scale.
C factors, when the network scale is small, the NCE can be
Considering the preceding
& in a data center that is close to the managed network. When


the networkin
g
deployed as a whole
scale is large and the physical coverage distance exceeds 200 km (10
n delay between the control module and the controlled device is longer
ms), and ithe
a
r ms, different software modules of the NCE need to be deployed
T
than 10
ei
hierarchically, the control module must be close to the network, and the

a wmanagement and analysis modules can be deployed remotely in a centralized

Hu manner. In addition, even if the network scale does not exceed the limit of the NCE,
the hierarchical operation mode of the group + subnet and national center +
provincial center may be adopted due to the organization and process design of
the Carriers. In this case, the NCE must be deployed at different levels of data
centers to meet the requirements of different organizations for use and
maintenance.

 When the NCE control module is faulty, similar to the traditional graceful restart
(GR) solution is used, the forwarding plane and control plane of the device can
keep the current control behavior and forwarding behavior unchanged. After the
control module recovers, the management and data synchronization are
performed again, restore the data based on the control module.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Data of a large network: a w
u


It takes about three months to collectH and analyze data for about 2300 NEs

o n
on the entire network. Five engineers are required.

The optimization workload istiheavy. Therefore, the analysis and optimization



ic a only once a year. In other time, network

if handled in time.
operations can be performed
deterioration cannotrtbe

Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The OSNR detection based on the OD has the following features:
u


Simple and convenient operation: TheHOSNR detection function is deeply



integrated with the NMS. The OSNR n detection can be realized through the
operation of the NMS software.
t ioThe virtual instrument graphical interface
ic
displays the detection result a without other auxiliary equipment or other
complicated operations.
r tif
Ce The detection precision is better than the
High detection precision:


&
traditional 10G OSNR detection.

n g
i
Wide detection range: All site types, all wavelength rates including


a in
10G/40G/100G, can achieve online detection of OSNR.

T r
Optical-layer performance O&M of WDM networks based on the OD:
i


e Centralized configuration of network-wide monitoring: Supports centralized

a w 

H u configuration of network optical-layer performance monitoring parameters,

greatly saving manpower.

 Automatic monitoring of optical-layer performance: No meter is required to

monitor the optical-layer performance of the entire network and
automatically detect the optical channel with abnormal performance.

 Automatic optimization of optical-layer performance: Based on the

performance data of each optical channel, the system intelligently adjusts the
channel power to ensure that each channel works in the optimal state and
ensures the optimal performance of the system.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
By evaluating the optical layer indicators such as the OTU BER/OTU input optical

Hu


power/OMS segment optical power flatness/single-wavelength nominal optical

n
power of the OA/OTS section EVOA rationality/Gain rationality, and fiber loss, you
o
ti
can clearly identify the optical-layer problems on the network, prevent potential
service risks on the network.
ic a
By evaluating the protectionifcapability and protection risks, you can intuitively
rt


C e
display the protection configuration and the risks of working and protection routes
in the same subrack, co-board, and co-fiber.
&
g
Provides special analysis on reliability problems, such as co-fiber, co-board, and
n provide information support for special rectification of reliability
co-subrack,ito


a in
Tr
problems.

Byi analyzing port traffic, you can display the historical trend of port traffic and the

e
wmaximum, minimum, average, and current traffic usage of service ports in the
a receive and transmit directions. This helps monitor the actual usage of port traffic
H u
and optimize internal resources.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the reference clock source or the clock link fails, devices can select a new

Hu


clock source to trace if clock protection is configured. This ensures that the entire

n
network continues tracing the same reference clock. Clock protection can be
o
ti
implemented in three ways: by disabling the SSM protocol, by enabling the

c a
standard SSM protocol, and by enabling the extended SSM protocol.
i

r tif
Definition of clock synchronization:

C e
SDH clock synchronization
 is a physical-layer frequency synchronization

&from SDH signals and send the clock signals to each board to
technology that can be supported by all line boards. The system can extract
g
clock signals
nclock information.
i
in
transmit
a
r of Clock Synchronization:
T
Purpose


ei Clock synchronization ensures that all digital devices in the same

w communication network work at the same nominal frequency and minimizes


a
Hu the damage caused by slip, burst bit error, phase jump, jitter, and drift, in
addition, the pointer justification of SDH equipment can be minimized, which
is the prerequisite and basis for normal network operation.

 PRC: Primary Reference Clock.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The synchronization status information uses 4-bit encoding and 16 types of signals,

Hu


which are used to transmit the timing signal level on the synchronous timing link.

n
In this way, the clocks of the NEs in the synchronization network can obtain the
o
ti
clock synchronization status information of the upstream NE by SSM, perform

c a
operations (tracing, switching, or holding) on the clock of the NE according to the
i
if
information, and transmit the clock synchronization status information of the NE
rt
to the downstream NE.
e
Huawei transmission C equipment supports two types of SSM protocols: Extended
&


nasg follows:
SSM protocol and standard SSM protocol. The differences between the two
protocols are i
a instandard SSM does not support the clock source ID.
T r
The


ei The
 extended SSM supports the setting of the clock source ID.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Extended SSM Protocol a w
Husource is transmitted together with


The clock source ID of a synchronization



SSM bytes. The clock source IDs n and SSM bytes together determine

t io source ID identifies whether the clock is

automatic clock switching. A clock

ic a is from the local NE, the clock source is

from the local NE. If the clock

t if timing loops. The extended SSM protocol is

considered invalid to prevent
r
Ce
mainly used for interconnection of Huawei transmission devices.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In an SDH network, the external clock node extracts the reference timing from the

Hu


BITS device, writes the SSM into the 5~8 bit of the S1 byte, and then transmits the

n
S1 byte to the downstream node to complete the SSM output. After extracting
o
ti
timing signals from the line signals, the downstream node obtains the

c a
synchronization quality level from the 5~8 bit of the S1 byte. In this way, the
i
r t if
downstream node determines whether the current clock source is valid in real time

Ce
and returns the 0xf bit 0xf of the S1 byte of the upstream node, indicates that the
returned clock source is unavailable. this prevents synchronization between two
nodes. &
To set clockin
g
protection, you need to enable the SSM protocol for all NEs in the
nthe SSM protocol is not enabled, the NE cannot extract clock quality


network.iIf
a
r and cannot determine whether the quality of the current clock source
T
information
ei
changes. In this way, the NE determines whether to switch to another clock source

a wto implement clock protection.

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For the last four bits of the S1 byte, there are 0x00~0x0f 16 values. The SSM

Hu


requires only six quality levels, and other values are reserved for future

n
applications. The smaller the SSM value, the higher the quality of the clock source.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
ITU-T only defines the last four bits of S1 byte, and Huawei deploys the first four

Hu


bits of the S1 bytes, hence, the extended SSM comes. While enabling the clock

n
source ID, it means the extended SSM is used. The extended SSM is only
o
ti
supported by Huawei, when connected with other vender’s equipment, only the
standard SSM can be involved.
ic a
t f
Since the equipment has toiprocess all bits in the S1 byte to judge whether to
r


C e
implement the clock protection, software processing in the SDH equipment is a bit
complex. Most of the venders prefer to divide the network into parts, and
introduce the fake&
g tracing phenomena. The synchronization problem will be
npointer justification and hold-over mode of the NEs.
i
settled by the

a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer 1: a w
u


The extended SSM can support clock H

 source ID setting.

o n the clock information between local

A clock source ID is used to distinguish
tinode from tracing the clock signal that is


and other nodes to prevent a

a
ic from the negative direction. Hence, a timing
i f
locally transmitted and comes
loop is prevented. rt

Answer 2: Ce
&

g
After the SSM protocol is enabled, the SDH equipment automatically
n the quality level of each clock source and selects the clock source
i
determines
within
r a the best quality to trace the clock source. In this manner, the clock

i Tprotection switching is performed when a fault occurs on the network.

e The S1 byte can transmit the SSM information on the SDH network so that
a w 

H u each NE can receive the clock quality level information.

 The clock source ID can prevent clock loops.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The node that extracts the timing signals of the upstream station from the line

Hu


returns the 0f information at the same time. Each node extracts timing information

n
from the configured clock source and obtains the synchronization quality
o
ti
information. The synchronization source with higher quality is preferentially traced.

c a
The synchronization source with the highest priority is traced by the
i
if
synchronization source with the same quality.
rt

C e
The meanings of the numbers in the figure are as follows:


&
02: 2 indicates the clock quality level. In this case, the clock is G.811 level.
When thegstandard SSM protocol is used, the first four bits of the S1 byte are
Ox0. in
a in

T r clock signals are unavailable.
0f: the

e i
NE1 is connected to the external clock equipment (BITS), and BITS provides the
w


ua SSM information and trace the clock. NE1 transmits the corresponding clock
G.811 clock. If the BITS outputs 2Mbit/s clock signals, NE1 can directly extract the

H information (02) to the downstream through the S1 byte. NE2 traces the clock
signals from NE1, sends the quality level of the clock source to the downstream
station, and returns a 0f message to NE1. The processing methods for other NEs
are the same.

 BITS：Building Integrated Timing System.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
NE 1: External clock source/Internal clock source a w
Huclock source.


External clock source is the highest level



o
Internal clock source is the secondary n level clock source.
i
tthe


In normal status, NE 1 traces

c a External clock source. When the external
fi NE 1 will trace the Internal clock source.


t i
clock source is unavailable,
r
West clock source/East e

C clock source corresponds to west line board/east line
board.
&
When setting the
n g priority of the clock source, consider the impact of the length of
i


n less than six nodes, you can trace the timing signals from one
iwith
the SDH clock tracing reference chain on the clock deterioration. For a ring
a
r on the entire network. If there are many nodes on the ring network, you
network
T
ei advised to set two clock tracing chains to achieve network-wide
direction

a wsynchronization.
are

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The fiber is cut between NE 3 and NE 4. NE4 cannot receive the timing signals

Hu


from NE3 and transiently becomes unavailable (ff). Then, NE4 enters the holdover

n
mode and inserts the S1 byte to the downstream node as 0b. In the west direction
o
ti
of NE5, the value of S1 is 0b, and the value of east is 0f. Therefore, NE5 traces the

c a
west clock source and sends the S1 byte with the value of 0b to the downstream
i
station.
rt if

Ce
In this case, NE6 determines that the clock tracing is switched to the east clock
source. The S1 byte inserted in the west line is 02 and continues to be transmitted
&
ng
to NE4. The entire network enters the synchronous state again.

ni
0b: Synchronous equipment timing source (SETS).
ai


T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a
In this case, the clock tracing is in two directions:w
Hu


 NE1→NE2→NE3

NE1→NE6→NE5→NE4
o n
ti


ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the BITS fails, NE1 inserts the S1 byte 0b to each downstream node. Then,

Hu


each node on the network traces the S1 byte.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NE 1: External clock source/East clock source/Internal clock source.

Hu


NE 2/NE 3: West clock source/East clock source/Internal

 clock source.

o
NE 4/NE 5: East clock source/West clock n source/Internal clock source.
ti


NE 6: External clock source/Westaclock source/Internal clock source.

ic


ofifNE1/NE2/NE3 is from BITS (1), and the clock of

In normal cases, the clock t


e r (2).
C
NE4/NE5/NE6 is from BITS

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When a fiber cut occurs between NE2 and NE3, NE3 cannot receive clock signals

Hu


from NE2 and enters the holdover mode. In addition, NE3 inserts the S1 byte to
the downstream node as 0b.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NE3 undergoes a switching and receives clock signals from BITS (2).

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When BITS (1) fails, the clock tracing relationship of each NE is shown in the figure.

Hu


NE1 and NE2 receive clock signals from the east.

o n
In the case of a ring topology, can the standard SSM protocol be used for the
dual-BITS configuration mode?
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The external clock connected to NE1 is G.811 and works as the working one. And

Hu


the external clock connected to NE4 is SSU-A, and works as the standby one.

 All NEs enable the standard SSM protocol.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The external BITS of NE1 is G.811 clock, and the external clock of NE4 is SSU-A.

Hu


 All the nodes start S1 byte.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the main BITS fails, NE1 enters the holdover state and sends the 0b clock

Hu


information. NE2 and NE3 trace the clock signals, but there are residual 0b on the

n
line between NE4 and NE5. Therefore, NE1 traces the timing signals sent by NE6.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After the main BITS clock is lost, NE1 traces the clock signals from NE6. Finally, the

Hu


timing network is in the interlock state. To solve the clock interlock problem, you
can enable the extended SSM protocol.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Two methods to solve the clock loop problem of the standard SSM:

Huallocate clock source IDs to the clock



Enable the extended SSM protocol and



n
source to solve the clock loop problem.
o
a ti
Avoid loops during manual configuration.
ic


i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The meanings of the numbers in the figure are as follows:

Hu the clock quality level. In this



12: 1 indicates the clock source ID. 2 indicates



case, the clock is G.811 level. When n the standard SSM protocol is used, the
first four bits of the S1 byte are
t ioOx0.
ic a


r t if
0f: the clock signals are unavailable.

Ceoutputs 2Mbit/s clock signals, NE1 can directly extract the

NE1 is connected to the external clock equipment (BITS), and BITS provides the


G.811 clock. If the BITS

SSM information & and trace the clock. NE1 transmits the corresponding clock
g
nNE1, sends the quality level of the clock source to the downstream
i
information (12) to the downstream through the S1 byte. NE2 traces the clock
in
signals from
a
T r returns a 0f message to NE1. The processing methods for other NEs
station, and

ei the same.
are

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the fiber between NE3 and NE4 is cut, NE4 cannot receive the timing signals

Hu


from NE3. As a result, NE4 enters the holdover mode and inserts the S1 byte 0b to

n
the downstream node. In the west direction of NE5, the S1 value is 0b and the east
o
ti
value is 0f. Therefore, NE5 also changes to the holdover mode and sends the S1

c a
byte 0b to the downstream station.
i
In this case, NE6 determinesifthat the clock tracing is switched to the east clock
rt in the west line is 12 and continues to be transmitted


e
source. The S1 byte inserted
C enters the synchronous state again.
to NE4. The entire network
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the switching state is stable, there are 2 clock links:

Hu


 NE1→NE2→NE3.

NE1→NE6→NE5→NE4.
o n
ti


ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the BITS fails, NE1 enters the holdover state and sends the S1 byte with the

Hu


value of 2b (b is the quality level of the internal clock source). Other NEs select the

n
clock source for tracing. Then, the network enters the stable state.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Normally, the entire network trace the clock signals from the main BITS.

Hu (12) to the downstream



NE1 transmits the corresponding clock information



through the S1 byte.

o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The external BITS of NE1 is G.811. The external clock source ID of NE1 is 1, and the

Hu


internal clock source ID of NE1 is 3.

o n
The external BITS of NE4 is SSU-A. The external clock source ID of NE1 is 2, and the
internal clock source ID of NE1 is 4.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the main BITS fails, NE1 enters the holdover state and sends 3b clock

Hu


information. NE2 and NE3 trace the clock signals, but there are still 12 clock

n
information between NE4 and NE5. Because now the clock source ID is 1, the
o
ti
signal cannot be received from NE5 to NE6 and from NE6 to NE1. So, a timing
loop is not formed.
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In this case, NE4 determines the clock source. According to the previous slide, the

Hu


S1 byte from west to NE4 is 3b and the east clock is 0f. According to the clock

n
protection switching principle, NE4 compares the quality level of each clock source,
o
ti
the quality level of the standby BITS connected to the is SSU-A higher than that of

c a
the line clock from the west. Therefore, NE4 switches to trace the clock signals of
i
rt if
the standby BITS and sends the S1 byte with the value of 24.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Comparing with other clock sources’ quality, all the NEs will trace the clock signal

Hu


from standby BITS.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Assume that the external clocks of NE1 and NE4 are G.811. The SSM protocol is

Hu

enabled on all nodes on the network. The clock source ID of the main BITS is 1, the
clock source ID of standby BITS is 2, the internal clock source ID of NE1 is 3, and
n
the internal clock source ID of NE4 is 4. Set the tracing level of the clock source as
o
follows:
ati
ic
NE1: External clock source/West clock source/East clock source/Internal clock
if


source.
r t


source. Ce
NE4: West clock source/East clock source/External clock source/Internal clock

&
Other NEs: West clock source/East clock source/Internal clock source.
g


When a fiber
receivingin

incut occurs, NE3 enters the holdover state and outputs 0b. After
the S1 byte from NE3, NE4 determines the clock quality. The west is 0b,
r
the east ais 0f, and the standby BITS clock source ID is 2. The clock quality level of
the T
i standby BITS is the highest, therefore, NE4 traces the standby BITS and sends
e 22 to the downstream. NE5 and NE6 trace the clock signals from NE4 in
S1 byte
a wsequence. However, the clock signals are not traced by NE1 because the clock
Hu source according to the priority of the clock source. The priority of the main BITS is
quality levels of the active and standby BITSs are the same. NE1 selects the clock

higher than that of the west clock source. Therefore, NE1 traces the main BITS, in
addition, NE2 traces the clock signals from NE1. In this case, NE1 and NE2 trace
the active BITS, and NE4, NE5, and NE6 trace the standby BITS. The entire network
is in the pseudo synchronization state.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Normally, NE5 and NE6 send S1 byte 12 to the west from the east and west clock

Hu


sources. When a fiber cut occurs, the S1 byte from the east to NE4 is 12 and the 0b

n
from the west to NE4. Although the level of the standby BITS is 2, NE4 traces the
o
ti
clock signals from the east because the east clock source has a higher priority, and

c a
send S1 byte 12 to the downstream, so that NE3 traces it. Finally, the entire
i
network traces the main BITS.
rt if

Ce
The second solution: The clock priority table is not changed, but the S1 byte of the
standby BITS is manually set on NE4 to reduce the quality level.
&
ng
You can manually set the clock source level on the U2000. Therefore, you can
i


n
change the priority of the standby BITS to be lower than that of the master

r ai
BITS. When a fiber cut occurs, NE6 traces the east clock source because the

i Tquality level of the main BITS is high, forward the S1 byte 12 to the
e
a w downstream station. NE5 and NE4 trace the east clock source in sequence,

Hu
and then all the NEs will trace the clock signals of the main BITS.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
NE1: External clock source/Internal clock source.

Hu clock source.


NE2: West clock source/East clock source/Internal



o n
NE3: West clock source/East clock source/Internal clock source.
it


NE4: West clock source/Internala



fic clock source.

r t i
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Allocate a Clock Source ID to the line clock source of the node that enters into

Hu


another ring network from one chain or ring network when the line clock source
exists.
o n


ati
NE1: West clock source/East clock source/Internal clock source.

ic


rt if
NE2: West clock source/East clock source/Internal clock source.

C e
NE3: West clock source/Internal clock source.

&
NE4: External clock source/Internal clock source.


n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The external BITS of NE1 is G.811 clock, the external clock source ID is 1, and the

Hu


internal clock source ID is 2.

o n
The external BITS of NE4 is SSU-A, the external clock source ID is 3, and the
internal clock source ID is 4.
ati
ic


rt if
The W1 clock source ID of NE3 is 5, and the internal clock source ID is 6.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the main BITS fails, NE1 enters the holdover state and sends S1 byte 2b. NE2

Hu


and NE3 trace the clock signals in sequence. NE3 traces the clock signals and

n
sends 2b to NE4. NE4 determines that the quality level of the standby BITS clock is
o
ti
higher, therefore, NE4 switches to the standby BITS for tracing and outputs the S1

c a
byte 34. Then, NE3 selects the clock source to trace and outputs the S1 byte 54
i
rt if
(the W1 clock source ID is 5. NE3 modifies the clock source ID of the received clock

Ce
source and continues to send the next node), NE1 and NE2 choose to trace the
clock signals of the standby BITS and synchronize the clock signals on the entire
network. &
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The clock source ID of the west clock source 2 of NE3 is set. As a result, a timing

Hu


loop is not formed.

o n
When both the master and standby BITSs fail, NE4 enters the holdover state and

ti
sends S1 byte 4b. NE3 traces the clock signals and sends S1 byte 5b to other NEs.
a
ic
Other NEs trace the clock signals, the entire network is synchronized.

rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the clock source ID of the west line clock source 2 of NE3 is not set, a timing

Hu


loop occurs.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If main BITS and standby BITS are the same quality level, clock tracing link need to

Hu


trace main BITS from two direction. The principle of setting the clock priority table

n
is that the standby BITS must be the last node in a chain. To prevent partial links
o
ti
from being interrupted, pseudo synchronization occurs on the entire network.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
For various networking modes of the transmission equipment, the OptiX

Hu


transmission equipment of Huawei provides multiple DCN solutions. In this course,

we mainly introduce HWECC solution.
o n
 HWECC solution:
ati
ic


r if
In this solution, NEs transmit the data that supports the HWECC protocol
t
through DCCs. The solution features easy configuration and convenient

Ce
application. As the HWECC protocol is a proprietary protocol, the

&
management problems cannot be solved when the networking is comprised

ng
of both the OptiX equipment and the third-party equipment.

ni
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The HWECC protocol stack is a proprietary protocol stack of Huawei. It is the most

Hu


applicable and advanced ECC communication solution for Huawei transmission

n
equipment. The HWECC protocol stack identifies NEs by IDs and creates routes
o
ti
automatically, which is easy to use.

ic a
ITU-T G.784 defines the architecture of the ECC protocol stack based on the OSI
if


rt
seven-layer reference model. The HWECC protocol stack is based on the ECC
protocol stack.
C e


NE. The NE ID g
&
In the HWECC protocol stack, the NE address used by each layer is the ID of the
has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the
i nand the lowest 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID
iisn0x090001, the subnet ID of the NE is 9 and the basic ID is 1.
extended ID)

r
of an NE a
i T
elayer
The
 main function of the physical layer is to control physical channels. The physical

a w performs the following functions:

H u Receives and sends data over the physical channels, including receiving data
from physical channels and transferring the data to the upper layer.

 Receives the data frames transferred from the upper layer and sends them to
physical channels.

 The channels at the physical layer include DCC channels and extended ECC
channels. The physical layer can process the data frame with a maximum of
1024 bytes.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The physical layer of the ECC is DCC, whose data is transmitted based on the fiber.

Hu


In certain cases, the network or NE may be independent and there is no DCC

n
channel to the gateway NE (no fiber connection). The extended ECC refers to the
o
ti
ECC protocol stack that is loaded on the TCP/IP protocol stack. That is, the HWECC

c a
protocol stack is carried through the extended channel (such as Ethernet) instead
i
r t if
of the DCC channel to meet the requirements of special scenarios. The difference

Ce
between the extended ECC and the ECC is that the physical layer of the ECC is the
DCC channel and that of the extended ECC is an extended channel (such as
&
Ethernet channel).
g
nthe D1-D3 bytes as the physical transmission path. The D4-D12 or
HWECC uses i
in can also be used.


a
D1-D12 bytes
r supports the communication by using fibers or Ethernet cables. When no
T
ei path is available between nodes, set the extended ECC by using Ethernet
HWECC


a wcables.
optical

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The HWECC solution adopts the shortest path first algorithm to establish ECC

Hu

routes. In this context, the shortest path refers to the path with minimum number
of stations.

o n
The following describes how an NE establishes ECC routes:
ti


ic a
The physical layer of an NE maintains the status information of the DCC to

i f
which each line port corresponds.
tNE establishes the MAC connection between the NE
The MAC layer of the
e r
C
and the adjacent NE.

&
The NE broadcasts the connection request frame (MAC_REQ) to the adjacent
g
NE in a periodical manner.
n
i
n framethe
After receiving MAC_REQ, the adjacent NE returns the connection
i


r a
response (MAC_RSP).

e i TIf the MAC_RSP is received within the specified time, the NE establishes a


MAC connection between itself and the adjacent NE.

a w The NET layer of the NE establishes the NET layer routing table.

Hu


 According to the status of the MAC connection, the NE establishes an initial

NET layer routing table.
 The NE broadcasts its routing table to the adjacent NE in a periodical manner
through the routing response message.
 The adjacent NE updates its NET layer routing table according to the received
routing response message and the shortest path first algorithm.
 At the next route broadcasting time, the NE broadcasts its current NET layer
routing table to the adjacent NE.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The implementation principle is as follows: a w
u


 The U2000 transfers application layerH messages to the gateway NE through

the TCP connection between them.
o n
i
The gateway NE extracts thetmessages


reports the messages toithe

a from the TCP/IP protocol stack and
c application layer.
i f
e
The application layerrtof the gateway NE queries the address of the
Cthe messages. If the address of the destination NE is not


destination NE in
the same as& the address of the local station, the gateway NE queries the core
g
n the corresponding route and the communication protocol stack
n
NE ito
i
routing table of the network layer according to the address of the destination
obtain
a
Tr transfer NE.
of the

ei After receiving the packet that encapsulates the messages, the network layer
w


a of the transfer NE queries the address of the destination NE of the packet. If

Hu the address of the destination NE is not the same as the address of the local
station, the transfer NE queries the network layer routing table according to
the address of the destination NE to obtain the corresponding route and
then transfers the packet.

 After receiving the packet, the network layer of the destination NE reports
the packet to the application layer through the Layer 4 because the address
of the destination NE of the packet is the same as the address of the local
station.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Here the shortest path means minimum hops, it isn’t the physical distance.

Huit doesn’t need to add any manual



ECC routing can be discovered automatically,



route in normal conditions.

o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The networking capability restriction refers to the restriction on the number of the

Hu


NEs that are interconnected through the DCC (or extended ECC). That is, the ECC

n
networking restriction is actually the number of NEs that are managed by a
o
ti
gateway NE.

ic a
Considering various factors above, combining the network experience and
if


t
referring to the industrial handling method, the OptiX should and must properly
r
e
plan the ECC networking, thus avoiding the great impacts of the over huge
C
network on the normal maintenance and secure running of the network.
&
ng
The method for checking whether the ECC between the ECC subnets is closed: Log
i


n
in to the gateway NE. Use U2000 to query the routing table and check whether any

rai
NE of other subnet exists. Instead, use the NM system to query it.

i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
Hupossible causes are as follows:


If the ECC network planning is improper, the



The NE becomes unreachable ton



t i o the NMS, affecting monitoring, maintenance,

and management.
a
ic a result, alarms are lost or delayed, and service
i f
rt uploading and downloading are affected.
The channel is blocked.
 As

e
configuration and data
C
&
The host may reset abnormally, affecting services.


g
n loading efficiency is affected.
The software
i


a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Auto extended ECC a w
Huthe ECC can be connected by


Under the mode of auto extended ECC,



connecting Ethernet interface of n two NE with crossover cable (or straight

t
through cable via HUB), and without io necessary to designate Server or Client.
ic a
Manual extended ECC
r t if


Server (Generally
e nearest NE to gateway NE), the other NE are set to
Under the mode of manual extended ECC, it is necessary to set one NE as
Cthe
Client. &
g
nare only two NEs, we can use the crossover cable to connect them. If
i
If there
inare many NEs, it is suggested to connect all of NEs to HUB by straight


a
there
r
i Tthrough cable.
e and Client
a w
Server

H u Actually, the connection established by Extended ECC is a TCP connection.



Once Server IP of Client is set, a connection request will be sent to Server.

When Server receives a request, it will establish a connection with Client.
Therefore, the concepts of Server and Client are similar to that of common
TCP/IP Server and Client.

 Maybe some new product can be set as both Server and Client, in this case,
the ports of Client and Server are different.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configure the extended ECC of auto mode. a w
Hu


Right click on the NE. Choose NE Explorer.



o n then choose ECC Management.

Click the Communication in NE Explorer
ti


Choose the Auto Mode foraECC Extended Mode and Apply it.
f ic


rt i
C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Under the mode of manual extended ECC, it is necessary to set one NE as Server

Hu


(Generally the nearest NE to gateway NE), the other NE are set to Client.

o n
Configuration of manual extended ECC mode:
i window then input the port number of
Choose Specified mode in tthe


server and apply it. ic

a
r t if
Ce to the server.
 The range of port number is from 1601 to 1699 and the port number of
client should match
&


n g
NE can only be set to client or server.
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Under the mode of manual extended ECC, it is necessary to set one NE as Server

Hu


(Generally the nearest NE to gateway NE), the other NE are set to Client.

 Configuration of manual extended ECC mode:

o n
Choose Specified mode in tthei window then input the IP address and port


number of server and iapply

a
c it.
t i f
The IP address of r


C e the client is as same IP address of the NE.


&
The range of port number is from 1601 to 1699 and the port number of

g
client should match to the server.
n
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
DCC communication function can be enabled or disabled on U2000 based on

Hu


configuration requirement.

o n
This function should be used carefully because it maybe affects the normal ECC
communication.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose DCC management in communication menu of NE explorer.

Htou be disabled and then disable it.



Select the specific DCC channel which needs



Note:
o n
ti all of DCC channels including D1-D3 and D4-


a
ic will disable D4-D12 automatically when you just
Disable here that means disable
f


rt i
D12, for instance, system
disable D1-D3.
C e
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Right click on the specific DCC channel that you want to delete and then select

Hu


disable to delete it.

o n
This operation doesn’t affect other DCC path, for instance, the system doesn’t

ti
delete the D4-D12 channel when you just deletes the D1-D12 channel of a SDH
a
interface.
ic
rt if
The DCC channel can be recovered by creating a new one after deleting.
e


C
&
ing
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
An SDH network may consist of equipment from different vendors. As a result,

Hu


other vendors’ equipment may be separated from each other by the equipment

n
from Huawei. As the SDH equipment supplied by Huawei use a different ECC path
o
ti
or ECC protocol than that used by other vendors’ equipment, other vendors’

c a
equipment will fail to communicate with each other over the ECCs.
i

r tif the same D bytes on two boards:
Transparent transmission between


C e
This function transparently passes the designated overhead bytes from an

&
optical board to the same overhead bytes of another optical board.

n g

i
Transparent transmission between different D bytes of two boards (cross-connect):

a in function cross-connects the designated overhead bytes on one optical

This
r board with other overhead bytes on another optical board.


T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Before configuring transparent transmission, you can delete the DCC channel (D1 –

Hu


D3) in the NE Explorer to release DCC resources.

n
The default DCC bytes are sent to the control board through the backplane
o
ti


bus for interpretation and termination. In this step, the D1-D3 bytes are not

ic a
terminated on the control board. After the transparent transmission is

t if
configured, pass-through is performed directly.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose DCC Transparent Transmission Management.

Hu


Click New. The Create DCC Transparent Transmission

 Byte dialog box is displayed.
n
(Only one byte can be transparently transmitted between two ports at a time.)

t io transmission of overhead bytes, as



ic a
Set the parameters related to transparent
shown in the slide.
r t if
Ce
Click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.


&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the case of a third-party network, if the third-party network does not support

Hu


the DCC transparent transmission function, the external clock interface can be

n
used to transparently transmit the DCC function so that the NMS can manage the
o
ti
network of Huawei equipment in a unified manner.

ic a
If the third-party transmission network does not exist, you can use cables to
if


t
directly connect the external clock ports of NE1 and NE2 to transparently transmit
r
the DCC information.
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Configure transparent transmission of DCC bytes on the external clock interface of

Hu


NE1.

n
In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > DCC Management from the
o
ti


Function Tree.

ic a


r if
Click DCC Rate Configuration and set Enable Status of the external clock port
t
to Enabled. Then, click Apply.

Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Normally OptiX equipment uses D1~D3 bytes for ECC, DCC expansion increases

Hu


DCC rates from 192kb/s to 576kb/s, this can solve the problem of ECC

n
communication bandwidth bottle neck in certain span of network.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Configuration procedure: a w
u


Select the corresponding NE. In the NE

 HExplorer, choose DCC Resource
Allocation from the DCC Managementn drop-down list. Check whether the

t io set the corresponding byte mode.

D4-D12 mode is allocated. If not,

In the DCC Managementic

a


r t if area, select DCC Rate Configuration.

Ce
In the Rate Type column, change the rates of D1-D3 to D4-D12. Click Apply.


&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Function: a w
Hu the pointer is used to perform


When the network is in synchronous mode,

n
phase calibration between synchronization signals.

t io


ic a
When the network loses synchronization (that is, in quasi-synchronous mode),

i f
the pointer is used for frequency and phase calibration. When the network is
in asynchronous mode,
e rt the pointer is used for frequency tracking calibration.
The pointer canC also be used to accommodate the frequency jitter and drift
&


in the network.

n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Row 4 of columns 1 to 9 x N in the STM-N frame is available for AU-PTR. It is to

Hu


specify the location of the J1, the first byte of VC4 in the AU-4 frame, so that the

n
receiver end conveniently separate each VC4.
o


ati
The AU-PTR is composed of 9 bytes H1YYH2FFH3H3H3, The pointer is contained

ic
in H1 and H2, in which the last 10 bits designates the location of the byte where

rt if
the VC4 begins. Three H3 bytes stand for one pointer justification opportunity unit
- cargo units.
C e
& with a location value in the location of AU-4 payload, as
For the convenience of locating each byte in VC4 (actually, each cargo unit), each


g
cargo unit is granted
nFigure. The location value sets the three-byte unit following the H3
i
in 0, and so on. Thus an AU-4 payload area has 261* 9/3 = 783
shown in the
byte toaLocation
T r Admittedly, the AU-PTR shall be in the range of 0 to 782, otherwise it is
ei invalid pointer value.
locations.

a wan

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the frame rate of the VC4 is faster than that of the AU-4, i.e. the package rate of

Hu


AU-4 is lower than the loading rate of the VC4, then the time for loading a VC4

n
(cargo) is less than 125us (the stopping time of the truck). The VC4 will be
o
ti
continuously loaded before the truck leaves. However, the cargo box of the truck

c a
(the information payload area of AU-4) is already full and unable to accommodate
i
rt if
more cargoes. At that time, the three H3 bytes (one justification opportunity) are

Ce
used to accommodate the cargoes. These three H3 bytes are like a backup space
temporarily added to the truck. Then the location of the all cargoes will be
&
displaced forward by one unit (three bytes), so that more cargoes [one VC4 plus 3

i ng
bytes] can be added into the AU-4. Thus the location of each cargo unit (one unit
n
ai
includes 3 bytes) will be changed.

T r
This justification method is called negative justification. In this case the AUPTR
i


e
value is 521. The three H3 bytes are called negative justification opportunity. At

a w that time, the three H3 bytes are filled with VC4 payload. Via this justification

Hu method, the first three bytes of the VC4 of the next truck are loaded on current
truck.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the frame rate of the VC4 is lower than that of the AU-4, i.e. a VC4 can't be

Hu


completely loaded during the stopping time of the AU-4 "truck", then the last

n
three bytes ---- cargo unit of the VC4 shall be transported by the next truck. Since
o
ti
the AU-4 hasn't been filled with a complete VC4 (lack of a 3-byte unit), the cargo

c a
box has an empty space of 3 bytes. To prevent the cargoes from straggle during
i
r t if
transmission due to the empty space within the cargo box, three stuffing bytes are

Ce
required to be inserted immediately after the three H3 bytes. Then all the 3-byte
units within the VC4 are required to displace afterward by one unit (3 bytes). Thus
&
the position of these cargo units will be changed.
g
n method is called positive justification. The corresponding position
i
This justification
in inserted H3 bytes is called positive justification opportunity. If the rate


a
of the three
of therVC4 is much lower than that of the AU-4, more than one positive
i T
e
justification unit (3 bytes) will be required to insert into the AU-4 payload area.

a wNote that there is only one negative justification opportunity (3 H3 bytes). And the
Hu negative justification opportunity is located within the AU-PTR while the positive
justification opportunity is located within the payload area of the AU-4.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
From the perspective of the entire network, because the clocks of A and B are not

Hu


synchronized, the west line board of A generates a positive AU pointer justification.

n
In addition, because the 2 Mbit/s services on A are lower order cross-connections,
o
ti
the AU pointer justification is converted into the TU pointer justification, the

c a
justification is reported by the tributary board. The west line board of NE B
i
r t if
generates a negative AU pointer justification event. Because the service on NE B is

Ce
a VC-4 higher-order pass-through service, the AU pointer negative adjustment
indication signal is generated by the east line board and transmitted to NE C. The
&
west line board on NE C reports a negative AU pointer justification event. Because

ng
ni
the 2 Mbit/s service on NE C is a lower order cross-connection, the positive

i
adjustment of the AU pointer is converted into a positive TU pointer justification,
aTU pointer justification is reported by the tributary board.
and the
T r
e i
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As can be seen from the above analysis, NE1 and NE2 are asynchronous; NE2 will

Hu


generate TU pointer justification, instead of AU pointer justification.

o n
The services of slots 33~63 will be pass-through to NE3 along with the information

ti
of TU pointer justification. At this time, NE3 will report the TU pointer justification.
a
ic


rt if
Is there any AU pointer justification reported?

Ce
No. The AU pointer justifications have already transformed to TU pointer
justifications, they have been terminated.
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the service configuration is completely pass-through in VC12 level, the

Hu


service transmission is shown in the figure.

o n
If NE1 and NE2 are asynchronous, NE2 will not generate either AU pointer

ti
justification or TU pointer justification because there is no add/drop at NE2.
a
ic


be auto-reported. r if
Only when the service reaches the destination NE3, the TU pointer justification will
t
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Currently, the SDH equipment adopts the remote detection method.

Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the pointer justification events occur, the system is not affected.

Hu you need to find out the causes



If the pointer justification event occurs frequently,



and take proper measures to ensure that n the system runs stably.

t io
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Provide clock compensation for long clock chain: the number of G.812 slave clocks

Hu


in a transmission link should not be more than 10; the number of G.813 clocks

n
between two G.812 slave clocks should not be more than 20; the number of G.813
o
ti
clocks between the G.811 and G.812 slave clocks should not be more than 20; the

c a
number of G.813 slave clocks should not be more than 60.
i
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Alarms on the U2000: TEMP_ALARM, TEMP_OVER. a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The SDH device has high requirements on the external clock source, the external

Hu


clock source must meet at least the requirements in the G.813 of SDH

n
synchronization quality level. If the precision of the external clock source is over-
o
ti
low or the clock quality deteriorates, pointer justification occurs on the entire
network.
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
According to the pointer justification concepts described previously, it is found

Hu


that in two ideal networking and configuration conditions, sites where the AU

n
pointer justification is generated can be located directly according to the reported
o
ti
pointer justification performance events.

Case 1:
ic a
if


r t
As shown in the figure, Site 1 is the central service site that has 2M services
e


C
with other sites. There is no service between the other sites. The clock of site

&
1 is in the free run mode, while other sites trace the clock of site 1 westward.
g
nsite reporting TU pointer justification event is the site generating AU


n i
In this case, it is found from the analysis that along the clock trace direction,
theifirst
a
Tr
pointer justification (i.e., the site where the clock is not synchronized),

ei regardless of the central service site. Based on this, it can be judged that the

a w fault occurs to this site or the previous site. Please further locate and remove

Hu
the fault by card interchanging or configuration modification.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
Case 2: a w
u direction, there is a 2M service


 As shown in the figure, along the clock Htrace

between the source clock reference n site and the end clock trace site. The VC4

t io passes through other intermediate sites

timeslot where the service is located

ic
in the VC4 level. In this case, a along the clock trace direction, observe the
service from the source
r t ifclock reference site to the end clock trace site. If the
ethe first one to report the AU pointer justification
line card at a site is
C
performance event (not considering the source clock reference site), it
&the pointer justification has occurred to the previous site.
g
indicates that
n optical card at Site 4 is the first one to report the AU pointer
i
in performance event, it can be judged that the pointer justification
 If the west
a
r occurred to Site 3 (i.e., the clocks between Site 2 and Site 3 are not
justification
Thas
ei
a w synchronized), possibly some fault has occurred to the west line card, clock

Hu
card and cross-connect of Site 3 or the west line card of Site 2.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
SETS is the short of Synchronous Equipment Timing Source.
u


“W/E/SETS” here refers to the priority ofH

 clock source form the West line unit is
higher than that of East; the priority ofnthe clock source from the East line unit is
higher than SETS.
t io
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As shown in the following figure, In the whole network there are big amount of

Hu


pointer justifications. site 1 has big amount of TU negative justifications. site 2, 3

n
and 4 have amount of positive and negative AU and TU pointer justifications.
o
 Case processing steps:
ati
ic


rt if
Check the fiber connection of site, no problem.

C e
Check the clock configuration on the NMS, no problem.

&
For the anti-clockwise direction, AUPJCHIGH reported in the west of site 3


g
and site 4 indicates the clock of site 2 is faster than that of site 1.
n
For thei clockwise direction, AUPJCHIGH reported in the east of site 3 and site
4a

in
T r indicates the clock of site4 is also faster than that site 1.

e i Because site 3 and site 4 are both tracing from their west LU, that is from site


a w 2, we can conclude site 2 doesn’t synchronize with site 1 probably. Maybe

Hu
the east optical card of site 1, clock unit or west optical card of site 2 are
faulty.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Switch the clock tracing direction of site 2, 3 and 4 to eastward; we found that only

Hu


site 2 and 1 had TU pointers, showing that site 2 cannot synchronize with site 1
and site 3 and 4 synchronize with site 1.
o n


ati
No matter which direction to trace, site 2 cannot synchronize with site 1. Most

ic
probably the clock card of site 2 is faulty.

r tif
While replacing the CXL board of site 2, we found the handle bar is hot. Checking
e


C
the fan, and clean the filter after a while the pointers disappeared.

&
The AU pointer justifications are all caused by the faulty clock card of site 2.
g


i n to clean the fan filter during routine maintenance is very important.

It also indicates
in


r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: C. a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
atio
f i c
r ti
Ce
&
MSTP Technology Topicai - ni
ng
r
PCM Technology i T
e
aw
Hu
n
atio
i c
rtif www.huawei.com

C e
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
u aw
H
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
 Objectives atio
n
f i c
r ti
 Upon completion of this course, you will be able to: Ce
&
 Describe the basic principles of PCM
i ng
a in
 Understand different PCM application scenarios T r
ei
 Describes the functions and features of the a w PCM board
Hu
n
it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 2
 Contents atio
n
f i c
r ti
1. PCM Technology Introduction Ce
&
2. PCM Principles and Application ng
i ni
a
3. PCM Boards Tr
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
i c
rtif
C e
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 3
PCM Technology Introduction (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Before the telephone was invented, people passedCethe r message through
the postman. &
i ng
a in
 In the middle of the 19th century, afterTrtelephone generation, people
ei
realized the transmission of information a w by using metal wires to transmit
Hu
analog signals. n
it o
a
 After the middle of the 20thificcentury, with the maturity of optical fiber
ert
technology, people realized C the transmission of information by using
&
optical fiber to transmit g
n in digital signals.
a i
Tr
 How can digital esignals
i be generated?
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 4
PCM Technology Introduction (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
A new signal generated by sampling, quantizing e r and encoding a

C
continuously changing analog signal is a digital signal. &
i ng
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
Analog Signal &Sampling Quantizing Encoding
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 5
PCM Technology Introduction (3) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Concept: Pulse Code Modulation r

Ce
&
 Principle: In an optical fiber communication system, i ng a binary optical pulse
a in
"0" code and a "1" code are transmitted in Tan r optical fiber, and the optical
ei
signal is modulated by using a binary pulse a w code modulation digital signal
Hu
to perform connectivity modulation n on the light source. Digital signals are
t i o
generated by sampling, quantizing, i c a and encoding continuous analog
i f
ert
signals, that is, PCM. C
&
The current digital transmission g system uses the pulse code modulation

n in
a i
technology. Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 6
PCM Solutions in the Industry tio
n
i c a
ti f
PCM devices are separated from SDH devices. r

Ce
Telephone
&
Telephone
n g
i ni
a
Fax machine SDH Network

Tr
Fax machine

ei
Computer
a w
Hu
Computer

PCM device SDH device

o n SDH device PCM device
Switch
t i
a Switch

tific
Existing problems: r
Ce


&

ng
A large quantity of devices occupies much space of an equipment room.
i
n
ai
Tr
Network connections are complex. Devices are difficult to uniformly maintain
ei


and manage.aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 7
Huawei Embedded PCM Solution tio
n
i c a
ti f
 The MSTP equipment and the PCM equipment areCecombined r into one to
solve the multi-service access requirement of enterprise & communication.
n g
n i
i
Telephone
T ra
e i Telephone

Fax machine a w
Hu Fax machine
SDH Network
o n
t i
Computer
i c a Computer

r t if
OptiXeOSN OptiX OSN
C
Equipment Equipment
Switch
& Switch
g
n in
a i
T r
ei OptiX OSN equipments with PCM boards

a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 8
 Contents atio
n
f i c
r ti
1. PCM Technology Introduction Ce
&
2. PCM Principles and Application ng
i ni
a
3. PCM Boards Tr
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
i c
rtif
C e
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 9
FXS and FXO tio
n
i c a
ti f
 FXS and FXO ports are used for analog telephoneClines. er They are usually
used in pairs, similar to the relationship between &a plug and a socket. An
i ng
FXO port receives the dial tone voltage fromraan in FXS port.
i T
e
 If a PBX is not used, the telephone's FXO w
a port is directly connected to the
Hu
FXS port provided by the telephone n company.
t i o
i c a
r tif
FXS
C e FXO

&
g
n in
i
Telephoneracompany Telephone
i T
e
a w
H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 10
Call Process between FXS and FXO Ports
it o
n
i c a
ti f
Initiating a Call r
Ce


&
A user picks up telephone A. The FXS-A port on the PBXgenters the off-hook state.
in


n
 The user dials a number on telephone A. The number
r ai is converted into DTMF or pulse
i T
digital signals and is transmitted to the FXS-A port e of the PBX.
a w
Hu
 Answering a Call
o n
 The FXS-B port of the PBX acknowledges t i the call and provides ringing voltage for
i c a
i f
telephone B.
ert
 Telephone B rings.
C FXS-A FXS-B
& FXO FXO

n g
 Another user picks upn
i
telephone B to answer.
a i
Tr Telephone A PBX Telephone B
 Ending a Call ei
a w
Hu
 The call ends when telephone A or B is hung up.

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 11
BROSCHT tio
n
i c a
ti f
A FXS port provides BROSCHT functions. r

Ce
&
B: Battery feeding ng
ni


ai
R: Ringing Tr
ei


O: Over voltage/current protection a w

Hu


S: Supervision n
tio


i c a
 C: Codec/Decode
rtif
C e
 H: Hybrid circuit &
ing
T: Test in
a


Tr
e i
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 12
FXS/FXO Application (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Z interface extension services r

Ce
&
g
An FXS port and an FXO port are used in pairs to ntransparently transmit
ni


i
telephone data. In private network applications,
T ra an analog telephone connected
e i
to a PBX sometimes needs to be extended w to another place. This requirement
a
can be well addressed by Z interface extension Hu services.
o n
t i
FXO
ic
FXO a FXS
FXO
FXS
i f STM-N
64kbit/s
ert /E1/E3/E4 64kbit/s
64kbit/s C
& 64kbit/s

n gPBX
FXOni OptiX OSN OptiX OSN FXO
a i Equipment Equipment
T r
ei PCM board
a w
H u SDH line board/PDH tributary board

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 13
FXS/FXO Application (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Hotline services r

Ce
&

ng
FXS ports are used in pairs to transmit private telephone data.
i
n
ai
Hotline services, also called driving telephoneTrservices between stations, are
ei


aw between adjacent stations and

used for point-to-point voice communication
u
can be connected upon off-hook without dialing. H
o n
i
t STM-N
FXS
i c a FXS
FXO
t i f /E1/E3/E4 FXO
64kbit/s
er 64kbit/s
C
&
g
n OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
i
a in Equipment Equipment
Tr
ei
PCM board
a w
Hu
SDH line board/PDH tributary board

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 14
E&M tio
n
i c a
ti f
E&M is a trunk and signaling technology commonly e r used on PBXs. E&M

C
separates the signaling and voice trunks. E&M isgalso & metaphorically called
n in
Ear and Mouth, or RecEive and TransMit. AnraE&M i port is usually connected
i T
to a PBX, which outputs signals through e
a w the M line and receives signals
Hu
from the E line.
n
it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 15
2/4-Wire Audio and E&M Application t(1)
io
n
i c a
ti f
2/4-wire audio and E&M trunk r

Ce
&
OptiX OSN equipment is connected to PBXs usingng2/4-wire audio and E&M
ni


ports. E&M channels transmit signaling, whiler2/4-wire a i audio channels transmit

i T
audio services. OptiX OSN equipment functions e as a trunk for the signaling and
a w
audio services. Hu
n
2/4-wire tio 2/4-wire
audio E&M
i c a STM-N audio E&M
64kbit/s r tif /E1/E3/E4 64kbit/s
64kbit/s C e 64kbit/s
PBX &
g PBX
（with E&M
n in trunk） OptiX OSN OptiX OSN（with E&M trunk）
a i Equipment Equipment
Tr
ei PCM board
a w
H u SDH line board/PDH tributary board

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 16
2/4-Wire Audio and E&M Application t(2)
io
n
i c a
ti f
Point-to-point control signal transmission r

Ce
&
ng transmits only one
If only an E&M channel is available, the E&M channel
ni


i
channel of connectivity signals. It applies to scenarios
T ra where control signals are
e i
remotely transmitted to implement remote w control.
a
Hu
E&M
o nSTM-N E&M
t i /E1/E3/E4
Control i c a Control
center t i f center
r
Ce
& OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
g
n in Equipment Equipment
a i
Tr
ei PCM board
a w
H u SDH line board/PDH tributary board

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 17
2/4-Wire Audio and E&M Application t(3)
io
n
i c a
ti f
2/4-wire audio signal transmission r

Ce
&

i ng
If a 2/4-wire audio line is used independently, it transmits only one channel of
a in
audio signals. It is usually used on an audio terminal to transmit audio signals.
r T
e i
a w
Hu
2/4-wire audio 2/4-wire audio
STM-N
n
/E1/E3/E4
Audio
it o Audio
terminal
i c a terminal

r tif
C e OSN
OptiX OptiX OSN
& Equipment Equipment

ing
in PCM board
r a
i T SDH line board/PDH tributary board
e
a w
H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 18
G.703 64 kbit/s Codirectional Service tio
n
i c a
ti f
 In 64 kbit/s codirectional services, information (64Cekbit/s r service signals)
and related timing signals (64 KHz and 8 gKHz & timing signals) are
n
i ni
transmitted through a port in the same direction.
T ra One balanced cable pair
e i
is used for each pair of transmission directions. a w The three types of signals
H u
are transmitted as the same channel of signals.
n
it o
c a
G.703 64kbit/s codirectional
i service port

r tif
TerminalCe
&
g
n in OptiX OSN Equipment
i
aPCM board
Tr 64kbit/s service signals
ei SDH line board/PDH tributary board
a w Timing signals

Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 19
G.703 64 kbit/s Codirectional Service Application
it o
n
i c a
ti f
G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional services transmit baseband e r digital services

C
over PCM channels by fully utilizing standard g64 & kbit/s speech channel
n in
resources. This type of service is commonly r ai used in the dedicated
i T
communication networks for electricity aand e
w railway transportation.
Hu
G.703 64kbit/s n
t i
codirectional service
o G.703 64kbit/s
codirectional service
a
ic /E1/E3/E4
STM-N Relay
Relay
protection 64kbit/s rt i f protection
64kbit/s
and
C e and
control
control
& device
device
n g
i OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

a in Equipment Equipment

Tr
ei PCM board 64kbit/s service signals
a w
H u SDH line board/PDH tributary board Timing signals

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 20
Boolean Value Remote Access tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Multiple Boolean value signals are input using Cethe r PCM board that
supports the Boolean value remote access function. & The combiner inside
n g
i ni
the PCM board aggregates the Boolean value
T ra signals into one signal, and
e i
the signal is transmitted to the sink end a w through the SDH line board/PDH
Hu
tributary board.
n
it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 21
Boolean Value Remote Access Application
it o
n (1)
i c a
ti f
Local dry contact signal termination r

Ce
&
ng
NE4
i ni
a
Tr
ei
Dry contact a w
Environment
signal Hu
on
monitoring STM-N/E1
Port1
unit
t i
NE1
ca NE3

r it fi
C e
& NE2

ing
PCM board with dry contact signal function OSN Equipment
in
r a
SDH line board/PDH tributary board Dry contact signal flow
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 22
Boolean Value Remote Access Application
it o
n (2)
i c a
ti f
Dry contact signal transmission r

Ce
&
ng
NE4 i ni
a
Tr
ei
Dry contact
a w Dry contact
Environment signal
H u signal
Alarm/Monitoring
monitoring STM-N/E1
unit Port1 n platform
it o Port11

if ca
NE1 NE3

r ti
Ce
& NE2

ing
PCM board with dry contact signal function OSN Equipment
in
a
SDH line board/PDH tributary board
r
Dry contact signal flow

i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 23
Boolean Value Remote Access Application
it o
n (3)
i c a
ti f
Dry contact signal combination r

Ce
&
ng
ni
NE4
ai
Tr
Environment Dry contact ei
monitoring signal A
a w Dry contact

Hu
unit signal
Port1 Alarm/Monitoring
Port2 STM-N/E1 Port11
Environment platform
n
monitoring
Dry contact NE1
it o NE2 NE3
unit
signal B
i c a
rtif
e
CEnvironment Port1
& monitoring Dry contact signal C
ng
unit

n i
a i
PCM board with dry contact signal function OSN Equipment
r
SDH lineTboard/PDH tributary board
ei
Dry contact signal flow

a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 24
Sub-rate Application (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
X.50 D3-based encapsulation r

Ce
&
 Sub-rate (X.50 D3-based encapsulation) services are
i ng used for synchronization
n
iof
between narrowband devices and transmission r a asynchronous data services,
i T
at a rate ranging from 2.4 kbit/s to 48 kbit/s. e
w a
Hu
X.50 D3-based X.50 D3-based
encapsulation
Sub-rate port t ion Sub-rate port
encapsulation

ic a STM-N
i f
rt
Sub-rate /E1/E3/E4 Sub-rate
Device A
C e Device B

&
ng OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

n i Equipment Equipment
a i
Tr
e i PCM board

aw SDH line board/PDH tributary board

Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 25
Sub-rate Application (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
V.110-based encapsulation r

Ce
&
Sub-rate (V.110-based encapsulation) services areng
used for synchronization
ni


i
between narrowband devices and transmission
T ra of asynchronous data services,
e i
at a rate ranging from 0.6 kbit/s to 56 kbit/s. w
u a
H
V.110-based encapsulation
Sub-rate
o n
Sub-rate i
t STM-N
Sub-rate Sub-rate
Device A
port
c a
i /E1/E3/E4
port Device A

i f
ert
C 64kbit/s
Sub-rate & timeslot
Sub-rate
Device B g OptiX OSN OptiX OSN Device B

n in Equipment shared
Equipment
a i
Tr
e i PCM board

a w SDH line board/PDH tributary board

H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 26
VF-Meeting Signaling Scheme tio
n
i c a
ti f
 VF-Meeting groups are managed through signaling Cinteraction. er
&
 Basic state: when the input signaling of all members in agVF-Meeting group is idle, the

n in
output signaling of all the members is also idle.
r ai
i T
 Calling state: when a first member receives busy e signaling, the VF-Meeting group
a w
broadcasts busy signaling to all the other members. Hu
 Traffic state: when a second member ireceives o n busy signaling, the VF-Meeting group
a t
transmits busy signaling only to the i c
f members that have received busy signaling and
r t i
transmits idle signaling to other e
C members. When the VF-Meeting group is in the traffic
&
state, if a third member receives
n g busy signaling, the VF-Meeting group also transmits
n i
i
busy signaling to thisa member.
Tr
 Termination state: ei if the last member receives busy signaling, the VF-Meeting group
a w
Hu signaling to all members.
transmits idle

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 27
Conference Application tio
n
i c a
ti f
Implement communication between the master and e r slave devices and

C
protection between slave devices. &
i ng
a
Active network in
T r
ei
Slave-1(active)

2Ma
w
H u 2.4kbit/s～48kbit/s

2.4kbit/s～ Slave-2(standby)
48kbit/s OptiX OSN n3500
OptiX OSN
Master STM-N it o 3500

i c a
i f Slave-3(standby)

rt
OptiX OSN

e
1500
2.4kbit/s～48kbit/s
C
2M

& Slave-4(standby)
g
in
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500

i n
r a Standby network

T
ei DX1 board Valid service signals on the Slave->Master path

a w PDH tributary board Invalid service signals on the Slave->Master path

Hu SDH line board Valid service signals on the Master->Slave path

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 28
Multiplexer Group Application (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Data-P2MP Scenario r

Ce
&
ng
ni
Slave-1

a i
Tr
Slave-1
Master
ei Slave-2

a w
Hu
Slave-3
Master Slave-2 Multiplexer
Group
n Slave-1
OptiX OSN
Equipment a tio Master
i c AND Slave-2

tif
rSlave-3 Slave-3
C e
&
g
n in Valid service signals from a salve device to the master device
i
DX1 board
a
Tr Invalid service signals from a salve device to the master device

ei line board
SDH Valid service signals from a master device to a slave device

aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 29
Multiplexer Group Application (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Data-Meeting Scenario r

Ce
&
Multiplexer group
OptiX OSN
ng
ni
Member-2
Equipment

ai
Tr
Member-1 AND Member-3
Member-1 Member-4

ei Member-4

a w Member-1
u
HMember-2 AND Member-3

Member-2 Member-3 n
tio
Member-4

if ca
Member-1

r ti Member-3 AND Member-2

Ce Member-4

& Member-1

ing Member-4 AND Member-2

in
r a Member-3

i T
e DX1 board Transmit data signals

a w SDH line board Receive data signals

H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 30
Multiplexer Group Application (3) tio
n
i c a
ti f
VF-P2MP Scenario r

Ce
&
ng
ni
Slave-1
ai
Tr
Slave-1
MAX(Slave-1, ei
Master
aw
Slave-2
Slave-2,Slave-3)
Hu Slave-3
Master Slave-2 n
tio
Multiplexer
Slave-1
i c a group

tif
OptiX OSN Master MAX(Slave-1,
Equipment
er Slave-2,Slave-3)
Slave-2
C
& Slave-3

ng
Slave-3
n i
a i
PCM boardTr Valid services from a slave device to the master device
eiboard
a w
SDH line Valid services from the master device to a slave device

Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 31
Multiplexer Group Application (4) tio
n
i c a
ti f
VF-Meeting Scenario r

Ce
&
g
OptiX OSN Multiplexer group
n
ni
Equipment
Member-2

ai
Tr
Member-1 Member-4 Aaudio
Member-1 Member-3

ei
mixing
Member-4

uaw Member-1

HMember-2 Aaudio Member-3

Member-2 Member-3
n mixing

atio Member-4

i c Member-1

rtif Member-3
Aaudio Member-2

C e mixing
Member-4
&
ng
Member-1

n i Aaudio
ai
Member-4 Member-2
mixing

Tr Member-3
e i
aw PCM board Transmit audio signals

Hu SDH line board Receive audio signals

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 32
64K SNCP (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 64K SNCP is a protection scheme that provides dual feederand selective receiving
C
and improves service reliability. &
i ng
 The source ports transmit a service on both the working a in channel and the protection
T r
channel. The sink port receives the service only eon i the working channel.
a w
Hu
 When the working channel becomes unavailable, protection switching occurs on the sink

port and the sink port receives the service n

it o on the protection channel.
i c a
 In the 64K SNCP scheme, thetifsource working, source protection, and source
er
timeslots must be configured C on the same DXM board, and send services to
&
g
different boards through
n in VC12 cross-connections based on 64K timeslots.
a i
The DXM board can Tr provide 64K timeslot protection for services on FXSO12 and
ei


AT8 boards. uaw

H
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 33
64K SNCP (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
64K SNCP specifications r

Ce
&
Item ng
Specifications
i
n
Maximum Number of OptiX OSN 550：256 rai
Protection Groups on an NE OptiX OSN 580：1024 i T
e
Service Level 64K aw
Revertive Mode Non-revertive Hu
n
Switching Time ≤50ms
a tio
i c
r t if
Trigger conditions of automatic switching:
eLFA/LMFA
C Channel associated signaling (CAS, F.E1 timeslot 16) failure

Switching Condition (Any of & indication switching: Switching is triggered if the received CAS
g
the Conditions Triggers
n in value is the same as the configured CAS value.
Switching) i
a Trigger conditions of external switching:
Tr
e i  Trigger forced switching to the protection channel.
a w  Trigger forced switching to the working channel.
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 34
 Quiz tio
n
a
f i c
ti
r Telephone B.
1. Please describe the call process between Telephone A and e
C
&
i ng
a in
r
FXS-A FXS-B i T
FXO e FXO
a w
Hu
n
it o
Telephone A i c a
PBX Telephone B
i f
ert
C
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 35
 Contents atio
n
f i c
r ti
1. PCM Technology Introduction Ce
&
2. PCM Principles and Application ng
i ni
a
3. PCM Boards Tr
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
i c
rtif
C e
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 36
FXSO12 (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Functions and features supported by an FXSO12 board e r

C
&
Function and Feature ng
Description
i
Provides 12 FXS/FXO ports, whichrcan a in be configured on the NMS.
Basic Functions T
Supports the BROSCHT function.
e i
Service Processing Transmits/Receives and processes a w 12-channel 64 kbit/s signals.
u
Overhead Processing Supports the setting andHquery of the V5 and J2 bytes.
n
Supports warm and it ocold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Maintenance Features Supports the query i c a of the manufacturing information of the board.
r tif
Hot board swapping.
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 37
FXSO12 (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Application 1: FXS and FXO ports are configured inCpairs, er providing the Z-
interface extension function. &
i ng
a in
NE1 NE2
T r
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
i c a
64kbit/s Cross- r tif
SDH/ SDH/ Cross- 64kbit/s
FXSO12 e
Connect C PDH PDH Connect FXSO12
64kbit/s & Boards Boards
Boards Boards 64kbit/s

ing
a in
Tr PBX(Private Branch Exchange)

ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 38
FXSO12 (3) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Application 2: FXS and FXS ports are configured Cin er pairs, providing the
hotline function. &
i ng
a in
T r
NE1 ei NE2
a w
Hu
n
it o
i c a
r tif
C e
64kbit/s Cross- SDH/ SDH/ Cross- 64kbit/s
FXSO12 & PDH PDH
g
Connect Connect FXSO12
64kbit/s
n in Boards Boards Boards Boards 64kbit/s
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 39
FXSO12 (4) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the e r board
C
&
Parameter FXS
i ng FXO
RJ-11 (OSN1500/OSN3500) rai
n
Type of Interface
DB44 (OSN550/OSN580) i T
e
Channel Bandwidth (Hz) 300～3400 a w
u
Port Impedance (Ω) Default value：600H
-12.0 to 0.0, tini onsteps of 0.5 -16.5 to 13.5, in steps of 0.5
TX Gain (dB)
i
Default value:c a -7.0 Default value: 0.0
i f
-6.0 to
e rt5.0, in steps of 0.5 -16.5 to 11.0, in steps of 0.5
RX Gain (dB) C value: 0.0
Default Default value: -3.5
&
Maximum Loop Impedance (Ω) ng1800 -
i
Ring Flow AC Amplitude (Vrms) a in Support: 45/50/65 -
Tr
e i
Specifications of the Interface Complies with ITU-T G.711, G.712, Q.552.
a w
H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 40
AT6 (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Functions and features supported by an AT6 board Ce r
&
Function and Feature i
Descriptionng
a in
Supports the E&M trunk functions.
T r
Basic Functions
Supports 2/4-wire audio signals. ei
E&M signaling a w
N2AT6 supports the association Hu of signaling and services.
Service Processing Transmits/Receives and n processes six-channel 64 kbit/s signals.
it o
Overhead Processing Supports the setting
i c a and query of the V5 and J2 bytes.
Supports warm r tif and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
e
Maintenance Features SupportsCthe query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Hot board & swapping.
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 41
AT6 (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Application 1: PBXs are connected to OptiX OSN equipment e r through 2/4-

C
wire and E&M ports. Signaling is transmitted gover & E&M port and voice
n in
services are transmitted over the 2/4-wire. r ai OptiX OSN equipment is
i T
equivalent to a signaling and voice relay. e
a w
NE1
u
H NE2
n
it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
&
64kbit/s g
AT6 in Connect
Cross- SDH/
PDH
SDH/
PDH
Cross- 64kbit/s

in Boards Boards Boards Boards

Connect AT6
64kbit/s
r a 64kbit/s
T
ei
a w
H u PBX(Private Branch Exchange)

Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 42
AT6 (3) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Application 2: A single E&M port transmits only one e r
channel of availability

C
signals, generally remotely transferring enabling/disabling & signals to
n g
i ni
achieve remote control.
T ra
ei
a w
Hu NE2
NE1

Control
n Controller
center it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n Cross-
64kbit/s
i
AT6 in Connect
SDH/
PDH
SDH/
PDH
Cross-
Connect AT6
64kbit/s

r a Boards Boards Boards Boards

64kbit/s
T 64kbit/s
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 43
AT6 (4) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the e r board - Anea 96
C
&
Parameter Value in
g
a in
Type of Interface Anea 96
T r
Channel Bandwidth (Hz) 300～3400 ei
a w
Port Impedance (Ω) 600 Hu
2/4 wire
TX Gain (dB) on to 1.5, in steps of 0.5 Default value: -18.0
it -20
RX Gain (dB) i c a -7.0 to 14.0, in steps of 0.5 Default value: -5.0
r tif Supports Bell I to V and SSDC5 types. Each type supports
C e
Type the configuration of Signaling unit and Trunk circuit
&
E&M n g modes.
i ni
Voltage -48V、-12V
r a
T
ei 2E2M Support
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 44
DX1&DM12 (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Functions and features supported by an N1DX1 board e r

C
&
 Works with the interface board to receive, process,gand transmit 8 channels of
n in
Nx64 kbit/s services (1≤N≤31) and 8 channelsraof i framed E1 services.
i T
e
w
 Works with the interface board to receive and process 8 channels of sub-rate
a
u
H kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s
services. Synchronous/Asynchronous (2.4
o n
and 48 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated t i in X.50 D3 mode.
i c a
i f
rt
 Cross-connects 48 channelse of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system
C
side. &
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 45
DX1&DM12 (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
Functions and features supported by an N3DX1 board e r

C
&
 Works with the interface board to receive, process,gand transmit 8 channels of
n in
sub-rate services or 8 channels of Nx64 kbit/s rservices ai (1≤N≤31), 8 channels of
i T
framed E1 services, and 8 channels of G.703 e
a w 64 kbit/s codirectional services.
Hu
 Receives and processes 8 channels of PCM services through ports on its front

o n
panel, including the following services: t i
i c a
i f
 2 channels of RS-232 sub-rate
ert services and 2 channels of RS-485 sub-rate services.
C
&
 2 channels of analog voice signals at the FXS/FXO port
g
n in
a i
 2 channels of 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals, N3DX1 board supports the setting of
Tr
i
e modes by both setting DIP switches manually on the board and using
2/4-wire audio
w
a N3DX1 supports the Bell type V and SSDC5 E&M signaling.
the NMS,uand
H
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 46
DX1&DM12 (3) tio
n
i c a
ti f
r
Ce
N3DX1 Processing Board
DM12 Interface board External ports &
Internal ports
(smaller slot)
n g
Framed E1 E1 DDN1~8
nii
DDN1 DDN9
r a
DDN2 DDN10 TTU1-DDN65
ei
N×64kbit/s
or sub-rate DDN3 DDN11 TU2-DDN66
aw
DDN4 DDN12

Hu
TU3-DDN67
DM12 Interface board TU4-DDN68
(bigger slot) n
it oDDN17~24
G.703 64kbit/s 64K TU5-DDN69
..
E1/Co64K .
Codirectional
DDN1
i c a DDN13 XC TU59-DDN123

tif
N×64kbit/s DDN2 DDN14
or sub-rate DDN3
er DDN15 TU60-DDN124
DDN4
C DDN16
TU61-DDN125
& Panel

ng
RS-485 RS485 DDN25~26 TU62-DDN126

n i RS232
ai
RS-232 DDN27~28 TU63-DDN127

TrFXS/ FXSO1
FXSO2
DDN29
DDN30
e i FXO
EM1 DDN31

aw
E&M and 2/4-wire DDN32
EM2

Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 47
PFL1 (1) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Functions and features supported by an PFL1 board Ce r
&
Function and Feature Description
i ng
Basic Functions Processes 8xE1 optical signals. a in
T r
Receives/Transmits and processesei8 x E1 optical signals.
Supports transparent transmission a w in compliance with IEEE C37.94 to meet the
Service Processing
transmission requirements H
u
of relay protection equipment in the electric power
industry.
o n
t i
Overhead Processing Processes path overheads
i c a at the VC-12 level, such as J2 bytes.
Supports inloops r tifand outloops at optical ports.
Supports warm Ce and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect ongoing services.
Supports & the query of board manufacturer information.
Maintenance Features
Supports g
n in-service FPGA loading.
i
in board software upgrades without affecting ongoing services.
Supports
a
Tr
Supports the PRBS function. Hot board swapping.
e i
a w
H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 48
PFL1 (2) tio
n
i c a
ti f
 The PFL1 is a PDH processing board. The PFL1 canCebe r used on the OptiX
OSN equipment series to receive/transmit and process & 8xE1 optical signals.
n g
i ni
T ra
2M optical ei 2M optical
signals a w signals
compliance
Hu compliance
with IEEE with IEEE
n
C37.94
t io C37.94
i c a
r tif
C e
Relay OptiX OSN OptiX OSN Relay
protection & protection
g
equipment
n in equipment
a i
Tr
e i
a w
H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 49
PF4E8 tio
n
i c a
ti f
Functions and features supported by an PF4E8 board r

Ce
&
Function and Feature Description
i ng
n optical signals and 8 channels of
i2M
Receives and processes 4 channels of r a
E1/T1 electrical signals. i T
e
Service Processing Supports transparent transmission
a w in compliance with IEEE C37.94 to meet
the transmission requirements
H u of relay protection equipment in the electric
power industry.
n
Overhead Processing Processes path overheads it o (such as J2 and V5 bytes) at the VC-12 level.
i c a
i f
External ports supports
t Inloops and Outloops at optical and electrical ports
Warm resetseand r cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services)
Maintenance Features C
Board manufacturer information query
&
External
n g ports supports PRBS function
i ni
r a
i T
e
a w
H u
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 50
DIO tio
n
i c a
ti f
 Functions and features supported by an DIO board Ce r
&
Function and Feature ng
Description
i
Supports 10-channel input dry contact a in signals and 4-channel output dry
Service Processing r
contact signals, or four channelsi Tof cabinet lightening output signals.
e
Overhead Processing Processes path overheads at w
a the VC-12 level, such as J2 and V5 bytes.
u
Alarms and Performance Provides various alarms H and performance events, facilitating equipment
Events management and maintenance.n
it o
a
Supports warmicresets and cold resets. Warm resets do not adversely affect
services. r t if
Maintenance Features e
Supports Cquerying board manufacturer information.
Supports & hot board swapping.
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 51
 Quiz tio
n
a
f i c
r ti
1. Which of the following equipment does not support the PCM e feature?( ）
C
A. OSN 550 &
i ng
B. OSN 2500 a in
T r
e i
C. OSN 3500 w
u a
D. OSN 7500 H
n
it o
i c a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 52
 Conclusion atio
n
f i c
r ti
 PCM Technology Introduction Ce
&
PCM Principles and Application ng
ni


ai
PCM Boards Tr
ei


a w
Hu
n
atio
i c
rtif
C e
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 53
 Recommendation atio
n
f i c
r ti
 Huawei Learning Website Ce
&

ng
http://support.huawei.com/learning/en/newindex.html
i
n
rai
 Huawei Support Case Library i T
e
 http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/servicecenter?lang=en
u aw
H
n
atio
i c
rtif
C e
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 54
 n
atio
f i c
r ti
Ce
&
ng
i ni
a
Tr
Thank uYou！
aw
ei
H
www.huawei.com
n
t io
ic a
i f
ert
C
&
ing
in
r a
i T
e
aw
Hu
Copyright © 2018 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page 55
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Replacing a board may interrupt services. Therefore, exercise caution when

Hu


performing this operation. If you have any questions, contact Huawei.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During the board replacement, the protection switching time meets the

Hu


requirements of the telecom industry.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The general principles for preventing static electricity are as follows:

Hu to the grounding requirements of



 Correctly ground the equipment according

the equipment.
o n
Wear an ESD wrist strap during
a ti the operation.
icboards, and IC chips, wear an ESD wrist strap and


t
Before touching devices,i f
insert the other endrof the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack on the subrack.


C e

&
If there is no ESD wrist strap, wear ESD gloves.

n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Removing a board that carries services may interrupt services. You are advised to

Hu


perform hot swap for boards during off-peak hours.

 Note:
o n
i inserting the board. Otherwise, the pins on
Do not exert excessive forcetwhen


ic a
i f
the backplane may be bent.

e rt the anti-misinsertion guide slot of each board slot to

Insert the board along
C


prevent the components on the board from contacting each other and
&circuit.
causing short
g
n a board, do not touch the electrical appliances, components,
When iholding
inconnectors, or cable troughs on the board.


a
cable
r
i TAfter the board is inserted into the backplane, it takes about several minutes
e to start the board.


w
a If a board is connected to a cable or fiber on the front panel, remove them first,
H u 

then remove and insert the board.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Here, we use the N4GSCC board of Optix OSN 3500 as an example to describe the

Hu


mapping between the input voltage of the equipment and the setting of the

n
power jumper of the GSCC board. The jumper settings of the MSTP equipment and
o
ti
the control board are slightly different, therefore, you need to set the setting of

c a
the jumper cap according to the type of the on-site equipment and the type of the
i
rt if
board to be configured. Set the power input of the jumper cap on the spare board

e
to be the same as that of the board to be replaced.
C
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: Ensure that the software versions of the active and standby SCC boards are

Hu


the same. Otherwise, data cannot be synchronized between the active and standby

n
SCC boards, and the NE reports the MSSW_DIFFERENT alarm.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Operation Procedure a w
HuMain Topology icon to enter the


In the workbench view, double-click the



main topology view.

o n
a ti the NE whose current alarms need to be
In the Main Topology, right-click
ic Current Alarms from the shortcut menu.


i f
queried and choose Browse

e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Step 3: Upload the configuration data of the GSCC board.

Hu Data Management from the main



Choose Configuration > NE Configuration

menu.
o n
In the left pane, select the NE
a tiwhose board needs to be replaced and
ic


click
i f
. The NE is displayed
t
in the Configuration Data Management List.

Right-click the NE inr the Configuration Data Management List and choose

e
Upload from theCshortcut menu.
&

g
A progress bar is displayed, indicating the upload progress. Close the
n Result dialog box after the upload is complete.
i
Operation

a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Step 4: Check the data consistency between the U2000 and NEs. If the verification

Hu


is successful, perform the subsequent operations.

n
Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the main
o
ti


menu.

ic a


rt if
Select an NE from the Object Tree on the left and click .

C e
Click Check Consistency.


&
In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK. A progress bar is displayed

g
indicating the operation progress.
n
In the iOperation Result dialog box, click Close.


a in
Whenrthe data on the U2000 is inconsistent with that on the NE, you need to


i T the data on the U2000 to ensure that the data on the U2000 is consistent
e
upload

a wwith that on the NE.

H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Perform an active/standby switching on the faulty board.
u


 Right-click on the NE icon and chooseHNE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

o
Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 n Protection from the Function Tree.
ti List, if the values of Current Board and


a
ic no active/standby switching occurs. If the
In the 1+1 Protection Relationship
Working Board are theifsame,


e rt and Working Board are different, the active/standby

values of Current Board
C After confirming that the faulty board is the
switching has occurred.
& proceed with the following steps.
protection board,

n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After the new control board starts working, generally, the system automatically

Hu


synchronizes data, including NE IDs and IP addresses. In addition, it takes a long

n
time to back up data in batches. Therefore, pay special attention to this.
o
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the case of configuring only one control board, if the control board is faulty, the

Hu


U2000 cannot log in to the NE.

o n
After the new control board is replaced, you can download data from the U2000
for restoration.
ati
ic


rt if
Before downloading data, ensure that the IP address and NE ID of the control
board are correctly set. In this case, the U2000 can log in to the NE.

Step 10: Download the


e
C original configuration data.
&
menu.in

g
Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the main

in
Inathe left pane, select the NE whose board needs to be replaced and click
T r

ei Right-click the NE in the Configuration Data Management List and choose

the button. The NE is displayed in the Configuration Data Management List.

a w 

Hu
Download from the shortcut menu.

 A progress bar is displayed, indicating the download progress. Close the

Operation Result dialog box after the download is complete.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Step 11: Configure the user of the NE. a w
Hu manually add the user of the


 After logging in to the NE as user “root”,

original control board.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When the cross-connect and timing board is faulty, you need to replace the faulty

Hu


board as soon as possible to restore services.

o n
When the board works in 1+1 hot backup mode, replacing the cross-connect and

ti
timing board does not affect services, but the packet services are interrupted.
a
ic


r if
If a single cross-connect board is configured and the board is faulty, services may
t
be interrupted. In this case, you can directly replace the cross-connect board and

Ce
ensure that the software versions of the old and new cross-connect boards are the
same.
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Impact on the System a w
Hu replacing the board interrupts


If the board is not configured with protection,



the services carried on the board.n

t ionetwork protection, replacing the board does



c
not affect services whenithe
a switching is normal.
If the board is configured with

r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
PDH boards are classified into interface boards and processing boards. When

Hu


different types of boards are replaced, the impact on services are as follows:

n
If the interface board is replaced, the services on the replaced interface board
o
ti


are interrupted.

ic a


r if
If the processing board to be replaced is configured with TPS protection,
t
services are protected. If the processing board to be replaced is not

Ce
configured with TPS protection, services are interrupted.

&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
From V200R013C00 of MSTP equipment onwards, the equipment supports the

Hu


PCM board. When the PCM board is faulty, you need to replace the faulty board to
ensure the normal running of services.
o n


ati
Removing a board that carries services interrupts services. Therefore, you are

ic
advised to replace the PCM board during off-peak hours.

rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
As the MSTP products enter the mature stage, some early boards (old boards for

Hu


short) are out of production due to manufacture discontinuation of key

n
components or marketing strategies. However, these old boards have some
o
ti
inventory on the live network, the spare parts of these boards must be provided

c a
for the customer. In this regard, the newly developed boards of the MSTP product
i
rt if
must be able to work with the NE of the old version to function as the spare part

Ce
of the old board. In addition, the new board can work with the NE of the new
version to implement the new functions. The board version replacement function
&
solves the compatibility problem between the board version and the NE software

i ng
version, implements smooth replacement, expansion, and maintenance between
n
ai
the old and new boards, and reduces the O&M cost.

T r
The multi-IDs board indicates a new ID board that has multiple board IDs. After
i


e
the new ID board replaces the old ID board, the new board works normally with

a w the board ID of the old board. In this case, the new board can also work properly

Hu by using the new board ID if the new board is not used to replace an old board.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Board Replacement: In the case of a board fault or a replacement requirement due

Hu


to other reasons, you need to replace the old ID board with new ID board.

o n
Board Capacity Expansion: Add new boards in the idle slots for capacity expansion.

ti
In this case, the corresponding logical board is not configured on the NE on the
a
ic
U2000. You need to first add a logical board supported by the NE software and
then insert a new board.
rt if

C e
Board ID Modification: A multi-ID board can work normally as the old ID board or

&
the new ID board. If the ID of the running multi-ID board does not match the NE
software due tog the configuration causes, you need to change the board ID. In this
n original logical board and then add the logical board that is
case, deleteithe
a inby the NE software.
r
supported
T
ei board
In the case of some data boards such as the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4 boards, the

a w IDs of the data boards matches the NE software automatically. In this

H u manner, the data boards work normally with the newly configured logical
boards.

 In the case of other boards, perform a cold reset on the boards manually.
Wait for some time and then the boards work normally with the newly
configured logical boards.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The cross-connect capacity of the MSTP system is determined by the cross-

Hu


connect board. Therefore, the cross-connect capacity is upgraded by replacing the

cross-connect board.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following uses the upgrade from GXCSA to UXCSB as an example to describe

Hu


how to upgrade the capacity of the cross-connect board.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Replace the standby cross-connect board a w
u NE to be upgraded, delete the


On the U2000, double-click the icon of

 Hthe
n
logical board of the standby cross-connect board SSN1GXCSA and add it as
SSN1UXCSB.
t io
ic a
i f
Remove the standby cross-connect board SSN1GXCSA from the equipment
rt SSN1UXCSB.


and insert the prepared

After the standby

e
C board SSN1UXCSB goes online, the SRV indicator on the
board turns &


on. Wait for about 15 minutes, and then check the NE alarms,

n g
i
ensure that the HSC_UNIVAIL alarm is cleared.

a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Switching between the active and standby cross-connect boards: Right-click the

Hu


cross-connect slot and choose Configure Active/Standby Switchover from the

n
shortcut menu. The 1+1 protection group list is displayed. The first protection
o
ti
group is the protection group of the cross-connect board. Right-click the first

c a
protection group and choose Perform the active/standby switchover to perform
i
rt if
the active/standby switching of the cross-connect boards.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Consistency check a w
u up, query the physical board. If


 After the standby cross-connect boardHstarts

n
the active and standby cross-connect boards are normal, wait for 5 minutes.

t io If the verification is successful, the

The U2000 verifies the consistency.

ic
upgrade is successful. Afterathe upgrade is complete, check the version
tif board and the alarms on the NE.
number of the cross-connect
r
Consistency check:eChoose Configuration > Configuration Data Management

C
&Data Management List window, click and choose the NE to
from the main menu. In the left pane, select the NE to be verified. In the
g
Configuration
nConsistency Check.
i
in
perform
a
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Note: a w
u


The SCC board is directly replaced byH the GSCC board. Therefore, do not

n
perform any upgrade on the SCC board in case of rollback.
o
The SCC and GSCC of the same
a ti software version can be synchronized on the
same NE. However, afteric
f a period of time, the standby SCC will be reset.
ti the GSCC and SCC of the same software version on
r
Therefore, do not place
esame time. If the SCC and GSCC of different software
the same NE at the
C
&
versions are placed on the same NE. The data cannot be synchronized

g
because the software versions are different.
napplies only to the scenario where the ID, IP address, and software
i


a inthe control board before and after the replacement are consistent and
This method

Tr is available in the GSCC to be replaced.

version of
noi data
e
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In this moment, the NE is temporarily unreachable. After the NE can log in to the

Hu


NE again, delete the active SCC board on the NE and add the GSCC logical board

n
in the corresponding slot. In addition, the GSCC logical board is added to the
o
ti
physical slot of the first GSCC board. After the GSCC board is added, the board

c a
should be displayed as online on the U2000.
i
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Deliver the data from the NMS to the NE. The procedure is as follows:
u


Before the download, check whether H there is a shared ring MSP (one optical
port is configured with two ring n MSP groups). If yes, delete a protection
group from the shared ring MSP
t io before downloading. Note down the
ic
attributes of the related NEs, a boards, and protection groups before the
deletion.
r tif
After the download
C e is successful, run the command :cfg-set-multimsp:bid,
&
pid, 2 on the Navigator to enable the multiplex section sharing function on
the optical g port. Then, use the NMS to configure the ring MSP group that is
nbefore.
i
in
deleted

r a
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Precautions: Smooth upgrade is not supported. This operation will interrupt

Hu


Ethernet services.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: ABCD a w
Hu


o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Choose Service > SDH Trail > Search for SDH Trail from the main menu of the

Hu


U2000.

o n
In the Search Policy area, select Discrete cross-connections that have not formed

ti
trails and click Next. The U2000 starts to search for trails. The U2000 deletes the
a
ic
trail that is not set with the management flag at the network layer. In this case, you

t if
can view all the discrete services on the network.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: If a service is searched as a discrete service, it does not indicate that the

Hu


service cannot run normally on the NE side.

 The trail configuration is affected.

o n
During E2E service configuration
a ti (trail configuration) on the U2000, the
ic occupied by discrete services as idle timeslots


i f
U2000 considers the timeslots
rt and sink of a trail, calculating routes, and
when selecting the source
e
C
determining timeslots. During trail configuration, the source and sink

&
timeslots occupied by discrete services may be used repeatedly. As a result,
the entiregtrail fails to be created. In this case, the U2000 displays a message
i n that service timeslots conflict.
in
indicating
a
r trail resources are incomplete.
T
The queried


ei When you query the related trails of a tributary board, if not all trails are
w searched out before, the query result may be incomplete. Trail resources


a
Hu cannot be queried correctly by using the trail management function.

 The timeslot allocation diagram is incorrect.

 The timeslot allocation diagram report function of the U2000 is based on

trails. The timeslots are displayed only when the corresponding node of the
protection subnet has trails. The timeslots occupied by discrete services
cannot be displayed in the timeslot allocation diagram.

 The resource statistics report is inaccurate. Circuit data is incomplete and cannot
be used as data sources of other systems (such as NMS, Resource System,
 Performance Analysis System, and Network Evaluation System) and affect the
effective use of other systems.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Unidirectional trail: it consists of working path and protection path. The protection path is
determined by self-healing network’s structure.

o n
Bidirectional trail: If the source and sink of a trail are the sink and source of

ti
another trail in the same level, then these two unidirectional trails could be considered
a
as bidirectional trail.
ic
r t if
Ce
&
ing
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer to question 1: a w
Hu (X=4, 8, 16, and 64), VC4 server


The trail levels on the U2000 include VC4-XC



trail, VC4, VC3, and VC12.

o n
The server trail is on the U2000
a ti side, while the client trail is on the NE side.
ic


i f
rtclassified into the following types: VC4_64C, VC4_16C,
Answer to question 2:


C e
Discrete services are


&
VC4_8C, VC4_4C, VC4, VC3, and VC12

n g
For a cross-connection, after trail search, it is either a discrete service or a
i


in services and to form trails with other cross-connections.

trail formed with other cross-connections. It is impossible to belong to
a
T r
discrete

ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Prerequisites for Trail Search a w
Hu group" authority or higher.


You must be an NM user with "maintainer



The U2000 License supports the n

it o
 end-to-end SDH management function.

NE data has been uploaded

c a to the U2000.
fi


The fiber connectionstibetween


r NEs are correctly set up.
e per-NE basis must be correctly configured.
The services on C
 the
& configuration on the NE is incomplete or the configuration is
The cross-connection
g


incorrect: n
n i
i
a occurs in the SNCP protection subnet.
r
The service timeslots of the protection route are not configured. This


i Tsituation
e The service timeslots of the protection route are incorrectly configured.
a w 

H u The SNCP service is incorrectly configured. As a result, the protection route is



incomplete.

 The service configuration is incomplete. Check whether incomplete services

are configured on a per-NE basis (for example, no pass-through service is
configured at the pass-through site). Complete the service configuration and
search for trails again.

 If the source or sink port of a service is not within the management scope of the
NMS or the source and sink ports are not managed by the NMS, the service is
 called an outgoing service.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If you are concerned about the analysis and judgment result, deactivate the service

Hu


and then wait for one minute. Then, check whether new alarms such as PS and TU-

n
AIS are generated. If not, delete them. If yes, it means the analysis result is
o
ti
incorrect, you should activate the service immediately.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Handling Method a w
u


S1: On NE2, create a outgoing opticalH

 port for the outgoing service, and then
search for trails. In this case, the n
cross-connections between NE1 and NE2

t io NE1 and NE2.

can be searched as the path between

ic a NE or a virtual NE of platform 5.0, create a



fiber between T1 and r if and create a protection subnet consisting of T1

S2: Create T1 as a preconfigured
tNE2,
and NE2. Configure
C e a single station service corresponding to NE2 on T1.
&
Search for trails. The trail between NE2 and T1 can be searched out.
g
n between T2, T3, and NE4, and create a protection subnet
i
S3: Create T2 and T3 as preconfigured NEs or virtual NEs on platform 5.0,


a in
create fibers

T r
consisting of T2, NE4, and T3. Configure single-station services on T2 and T3.

ei Search for trails. The trails between T2 and T3 can be searched out.
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Check whether the data on the U2000 is consistent with that on the NE side. If not,

Hu


upload the configuration data on the NMS.

o n
Make sure that the fiber connection created on the U2000 is consistent with the

ti
actual fiber connection of the equipment.
a
ic


r if
Search for protection subnets and ensure that all protection subnets have been
t
searched out, and the optical ports and virtual NEs have been created (if

Ce
necessary). If the search result is not found, analyze and handle the problem first.

&
Search for trails on the NMS.
g


Back up user i nNMS data. Back up the MO data, back up the database, and export
the scriptin


r a file.
i T
e
a w
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Tips for clearing discrete services: Handling the discrete services of the add/drop

Hu


tributary and the outgoing discrete services, and then handle the pass-through
discrete services.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Answer: a w
Huring is tangent to the bidirectional


 Cause analysis: The unidirectional SNCP

n
MSP ring. In the trail resource report, there is an E1 bidirectional trail

t io cannot be searched out, check the service

between NE1 and NE4. If the trail
a node, for NE3, there should be two dual-fed
configuration integrity ofceach
i
tif receiving service.
services and one selective
r
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
After clearing discrete services, guide users to use the trail function to configure

Hu


services.

o n
To avoid a large number of discrete services, you are advised to read the U2000

ti
online help or operation guide before configuring services.
a
ic


r if
When discovering discrete services, handle the discrete services as soon as
t
possible to avoid affecting subsequent service configuration.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The causes of discrete services are as follows: a w
u


The data on the U2000 is inconsistentH

 with that on the NE, or the fiber
connection is inconsistent with the n actual fiber connection on the equipment.

The configuration data doestnot io meet the requirements. As a result, the

U2000 cannot search foric

a
r t if trails.

C e
The service configuration is incomplete and the trail cannot be formed.

&
Outgoing services are not configured with Outgoing optical ports, virtual NEs,


g
or preconfigured NEs.
n restriction.
i


a in
NMS search

T r services are not in use (or the services reserved by the customer are not
The
i used for circuits) and junk services.


e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The following describes the fields in an Ethernet frame:

Huis 7 bytes long. The bit pattern of



Preamble: Indicates the preamble, which

each byte is 10101010, which is used n for timing synchronization between the

t
transmit end and the receive end. io
ic aThe bit pattern is 10101011, which is used to
tifthat the next byte is the beginning of the frame.
SFD: Start Frame Delimiter.
r
inform the receive end
e
DMAC: IndicatesCthe destination MAC address. The length is 6 bytes.
&



g
SMAC: Indicates the source MAC address. The length is 6 bytes.
n The length is 2 bytes. The meaning varies according to the
i


a in
Length/Type:

T r
value.

e i  If Length/Type > 1500, it indicates the type of the data frame (upper-

a w layer protocol type. For example, 0x0800 indicates that the L3 data is an

Hu
IP packet).

 If Length/Type <= 1500, it indicates the length of the data and the
padding field in the data frame.

 Data: The length is 46 ~ 1500 bytes. If the length of the Data field is less than
46 bytes, padding bytes must be filled to ensure that the length of the entire
frame is at least 64 bytes.

 FCS: Frame check sequence. The length is 4 bytes.

  The frame length range is 64 ~ 1518 bytes.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Due to the limitation of the CSMA/CD algorithm, the standard Ethernet frame

Hu


length should not be less than 64 bytes, which is determined by the maximum

n
transmission distance and conflict detection mechanism.
o


ati
The minimum frame length is specified to avoid this situation: A site has sent the

ic
last bit of a data packet, but the first bit of the packet is not transmitted to the

rt if
remote site. In this case, the remote site considers that the line is idle and sends
e
data. As a result, a conflict occurs.
C
&is 46 bytes. If the length is less than 46 bytes, the upper layer
The upper layer protocol must ensure that the minimum length of the Data field in


g
an Ethernet frame
n fill redundant bits to make the length of the Data field reach 46
i
in data field, a 14-byte Ethernet frame header, and a 4-byte
protocol must
bytes. Aa
r code form a 64-byte minimum Ethernet frame.
46-byte
T
eian Ethernet frame, the maximum length of the Data field is 1500 bytes.
verification

a wIn


Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Network Device Performance Verification Test a w
Hu data cache capability, and


The test results show the forwarding capability,



burst data processing capability n of a single device. The test indicators include

t
throughput, latency, frame loss iorate, and back-to-back.
Network Performance Test ic
a


r t if
Cethe entire network. Generally, the test indicators include
The test results show the bandwidth, forwarding capability, and end-to-end


service latency of
throughput & and latency.

Customizedin
g
Test
in on actual service requirements and distribution, test methods


r a
Based
T


ei mainly for large-scale network tests.

customized by testers may be the combination of the first two test methods,

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
During the test of a single device, there are two physical links between the tested

Hu


device (DUT-Device Under Test) and the Data Analyzer (Tester). The connected

n
ports can be an optical interface or an electrical interface according to the actual
o
ti
service requirements, select the port rate according to the actual service

c a
requirements. During the test, use the two ports of the Data Analyzer and the two
i
ports of the tested device.
rt if

Ce
After the physical connection is complete, the Data Analyzer sends data streams to
the tested device through a port. After the data flows pass through the tested
&
ng
device, the data streams are sent back to the other port of the Data Analyzer, in
i
this case, the Data Analyzer can calculate the throughput, forwarding latency,
n
ai
frame loss rate, and back-to-back of the tested device through the transmitted
r
T
and received data streams.
i
e the test, if only one port is used to transmit data and the other port is used
wDuring


a to receive data, the performance data is the unidirectional performance data of the
u
H tested device.
 If the two ports of the data analyzer transmit and receive data streams at the same
time, the obtained performance data is the bidirectional performance data of the
tested device.

 Finally, the performance data of the tested device is compared with the data
provided by the vendor to verify and confirm the performance of the tested device.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the network performance test, there are two physical links between the tested

Hu


system (SUT-System Under Test) and the Data Analyzer (Tester). The port can be

n
an optical interface or an electrical port according to the actual service
o
ti
requirements. The port rate can be selected according to the actual service

c a
requirements, during the test, use the two ports of the Data Analyzer and the two
i
ports of the tested system.
rt if

Ce
You can select two ports at the same site or select one port at each site (because
only one Data Analyzer is used. When the distance between sites exceeds the
&
ng
maximum distance of signals sent by the Data Analyzer, different SUT ports cannot
i
be selected as access ports). The tested data streams sent from the Data Analyzer
n
ai
must traverse the entire system or traverse the paths of actual data flows. Note
r
T
that the two physical links between the tested system (SUT-System Under Test)
i
e and the Data Analyzer (tester) cannot be transferred through other DCN networks.

a w Otherwise, the accurate test result cannot be obtained.

u
H After the physical connection is complete, the Data Analyzer sends the data flow to


the tested system through a port. The data flow is forwarded by the tested system
and then returned to the other port of the Data Analyzer, in this case, the data
analyzer can calculate the system latency and QoS of the tested system through
the transmitted and received data streams.

 During the test, if only one port is used to transmit data and the other port is used
to receive data, the performance data is the unidirectional performance data of the
tested system.
  If the two ports of the Data Analyzer transmit and receive data streams at the
same time, the obtained performance data is the bidirectional performance
data of the tested system.

 Finally, the performance data of the tested device is compared with the data
provided by the vendor to verify and confirm the performance of the tested
system.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The device test and network test are more common tests. The customized test is

Hu


more specific. It can be used to perform customized tests on certain services and

n
links in the tested system. The Data Analyzer can be two or more data analyzers,
o
ti
these testers communicate with each other through the DCN and implement

c a
synchronization through the GPS satellite. In this way, the system latency,
i
rt if
throughput, and packet loss rate can be tested.


Ce
As shown in the slide, the tested system forwards the tested data flow as a specific
service (such as private line service and VIP customer service). The two data
&
ng
analyzers belong to different places and are synchronized through the GPS, one is
i
used to send data streams, and the other is used to receive data streams
n
ai
forwarded by the tested system. In the result test, the system latency, throughput,
r
T
and packet loss rate of the service can be obtained.
i
e
a w
Note:

H u The Data Analyzer can communicate with each other through the DCN


network. However, the physical link between the data analyzer and the tested
system cannot contain the DCN network or other data communication
equipment. Otherwise, the accurate test result cannot be obtained. Because
the network includes the tested system, DCN network, and other data
communication devices, the test scope is expanded.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The test of the MSTP Ethernet feature mainly focuses on the Throughput and

Hu


Latency.

o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Because the standard Ethernet frame length Hu(Ethernet II) is not fixed, the
Ethernet frame length is: 64, 128, i256, o n 1024, 1280, and 1518 Bytes. Throughput
length of the frame is specified before the throughput is tested (the typical

a t frame length and the test duration must be

ic
tests must be performed for each
i f
rt rate actually transmitted by the Data Analyzer is the
at least 60 seconds.

 When Y=Xmax, the frame

C e
&
maximum frame rate supported by the device.

n g
If the number of transmitted frames and the number of received frames
i


of n
i the data analyzer are the same, it indicates that the throughput of the
adevice in the framing length is equal to the maximum frame rate. That is,
r
T the maximum frame forwarding rate in the case of no packet loss is equal
i
e to the maximum frame rate supported by the device (in normal cases).
a w
Hu
 If the number of packets sent by the data analyzer is less than the
number of received frames, frame loss occurs on the device. For MSTP,
the number of virtual paths bound to the SDH path may not be sufficient
to carry the services accessed by the port, that is, the bandwidth is
insufficient. for example: The access rate of the physical FE port on the
Ethernet board is the line rate, that is, 100Mbit/s. Actually, the virtual path
bound to the SDH side is at the VC-12 level and the number is 10.
Therefore, the Ethernet board cannot bear all the data accessed from the
external port, frame loss occurs.

 Maximum rate of the media: Indicates the maximum rate supported by

the device when the IFG is 12 Bytes (minimum inter-frame gap). The unit
 is bit/s, that is, the line rate. For example: The line rate of the FE interface
is 100Mbit/s. The minimum inter-frame gap is a limit. It indicates that the
device is in full load state and the interval between frames reaches the
minimum. In this case, the line rate can be reached.

 Maximum frame rate: Indicates the fixed frame rate supported by the
physical port of the device at the line rate. The unit is frame/s.

Based on the line rate, frame length, and minimum inter-frame gap (IFG),
n


it o
you can calculate the maximum line-rate frame rate in the case of a
specific frame length.
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The throughput test process is as follows: a w
Huto one destination port on the tester.


 A single data flow from one source port

Set the initial load to the maximum

o n rate (maximum frame rate) used by the
ti


tested system interface.

a
c are sent from all source ports to the
ilength
i f
rt the completion, measure the number of packets sent
 Packets with a specified

and received onC

e
destination port. After
all data streams.
&

g
If packet loss occurs, reduce the load and repeat the test.
ndichotomy to increase or decrease the load in subsequent repeated
i


a inuntil the load difference between success and failure is less than the
Use the

T r
tests

e i resolution of the test. This is zero loss throughput.

w
a it indicates that the maximum frame forwarding rate is 90% of the maximum frame
The throughput is expressed in percentage. For example, if the throughput is 90%,


H u
rate supported by the device in the case of no packet loss. Sometimes the
throughput is indicated by packet/s or frame/s.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The IFG, Preamble, and SFD are removed from the Ethernet board. If the tag (4

Hu


Bytes VLAN label) is added to the board, the frame structure is as follows:

n
<DA><SA> <VLAN> <TYPE><Data+PAD><FCS>. In this case, the frame length is
o
ti
L+4.

ic a
Note that the VLAN tag of the 4 Bytes is added to the Ethernet standard frame by
if


t
the Ethernet board. For the pure transparent transmission board such as the EFT,
r
e
the VLAN tag does not need to be added. The signals with tags can be directly
C
accessed.
&
ng
If MPLS or QinQ is not enabled, the GFP header can be directly added to the SDH,
i


n
as shown in the following figure.
ai
Tr
Ethernet MAC Frame GFP Frame

ei
Octets
2 PLI

w
2 cHEC

a Octets 2 Type

Hu
7 Preamble 2 tHEC
1 Start of Frame Delimiter 0 - 60 GFP Extension Hdr
6 Destination Address (DA)
6 Source Address (SA)
2 Length/Type GFP
MAC client data Payload
Pad
4 Frame Check Sequence (FCS)

Bit # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

 In this case, the frame structure is <GFP Core Header><GFP Playload Header>
<DA><SA><VLAN><TYPE><Data+PAD><FCS><GFP FCS>, and the frame length
is: L+4 (VLAN)+4 (GFP Core Header)+4 (GFP Playload Header)+4 (GFP FCS)
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Example: a w
Hu and the first and last bytes are


The structure of C12 is 9 rows and 4 columns,



missing. The structure is as follows:

o n
a ti
1
ic 4

r tif
Ce
& C-12

i ng
a in
T r 9

ei
a w  Capacity of the C12 container = (9×4－2)×8×8000＝2176kbit/s

Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In more cases, the throughput is tested by the Data Analyzer. The theoretical value

Hu


is only for reference. The throughput theoretical calculation formula is used in the

n
scenario where the throughput requirement is 100%, the container bandwidth and
o
ti
the frame length are known, and the number of virtual tunnels to be bound is
calculated. For example:
ic a

t
The line rate of the port
r if on the EFS4 board is 100Mbit/s. When the
e length of the EPL service is 1518 Bytes, if the
transmit/receive frame
C
throughput reaches 100%, what is the number of VC-12 virtual channels to
be bound? &
n g
i
nMaximum line-rate frame rate N= 100Mbps/ ((1518+8+12) ×8)
i


r a =8127.44. The rounded number is 8128 frame/s.

T
ei  The actual frame length of the board is 1518+4+12=1534 Bytes.

a w The C12 container bandwidth is 2176kbps.

Hu


 Number of VC-12 virtual paths = (Frame length of the board ×8×

Maximum frame rate) / Container bandwidth = (1534 ×8× 8128)
/2176000=45.8. The rounded number is 46.

 It can be seen that 46 VC-12 virtual paths are required for transparent
transmission of 100% throughput.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
If the formula on the previous page is used for calculation, it can be concluded the

Hu


throughput of the following situation is 50.8%: EFS4 board bound with one VC-3,

n
and the EPL service with the frame length of 64 Bytes (the port rate is 100 Mbit/s) ,
o
ti
which is very near the actual test value. If the difference is too large, check whether

c a
the entire test system exists some problems, for example: Bit errors occur on the
i
if
SDH side, the data analyzer is set incorrectly, or the Ethernet board is faulty. The
rt
e
theoretical throughput is calculated as follows:
C
C3 container bandwidth =9×84×8×8000=48384Kbps.
&


Maximum
n gline-rate frame rate N= 100Mbps/ ((64+8+12) ×8) =148809.52.
ni


The rounded number is 148810 frame/s.

i
a Frame length L=64+4 (VLAN tag) +12 (GFP header) =80 Bytes.

T r
EFS4

ei Final throughput = (48384Kbps/ (148810 frame/s×80 Bytes×8 bit)) ×100%=

w 50.8%.


a
Hu All the test results in this document and the test result of the SmartApplication are


tested by Smartbits600.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Throughput and latency are two important indicators in Ethernet performance. The

Hu


throughput reflects the forwarding capability of the system based on the number

n
of forwarded frames, and the latency reflects the forwarding speed of the system,
o
ti
therefore, even if the throughput is 100%, the performance of the device cannot
be asserted blindly.
ic a
t if a throughput test ensure that the transmit rate of
During the latency test, perform

r
the data analyzer is lessethan or equal to the throughput. This ensures that no
C frame transmission. It is recommended that the test rate
frame loss occurs during
&
measured. in
g
be equal to the throughput. In this way, the latency in the worst case can be

a in is too long, the service quality of the Ethernet is reduced and the


T r of the upper layer services is degraded. For example: The voice quality of
If the latency

ei VoIP service decreases, and the Internet access speed decreases.

quality

a wthe

Hu
The latency can also be used to measure the time when an Ethernet frame passes


through a network to determine whether the network supports services.

 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
For the latency of storage and forwarding device: a w
u


 Start time: Last bit of the frame entersHthe device.

o
End time: First bit of the frame exits n the device.
ti


a
ic (packet forwarding speed) of a network device.
Latency= End time- Start time.
f


rt
Indicates the performancei
Generally, it is notecompared with the bit forwarding device.


C
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
For the latency of the bit forwarding device: a w
u device.


 Start time: First bit of the frame enters Hthe

o
End time: First bit of the frame exits n the device.
ti


a
ic (packet forwarding speed) of a network device.
Latency= End time -Start time.
f


rt
Indicates the performancei
Generally, it is notecompared with the storage forwarding device.


C
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the above table, CT is the test value under Cut-Through, and S&F is the test

Hu


value under Store Forward.

o n
Generally, latency test is used to test the latency of the network.
i
During the latency test, the framettransmission


ic a rate should be smaller than the

throughput.
t i f
The working mode of therData Analyzer can be configured. Huawei OptiX MSTP

e
Cand forwarding devices. Therefore, we only need to pay
devices are all storage
& of the S&F latency test.
attention to the result

n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The frame loss rate test is used to measure the response of a device or network in

Hu


the case of overload. In real-time applications, a large number of frame losses can

n
quickly reduce the service quality and network efficiency.
o


ati
In the formula, Xmax is the maximum line-rate frame rate of the device interface,
and Y is the actual frame rate.
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Back-to-Back can be used to evaluate the cache capability of a device.

Hupacket interval and a fixed length



 First, send a data frame with a minimum

(line rate frame rate) to the tested n device.

t ioburst size of the data frame (the burst size

 If any frame is lost, reduce the
c
refers to the number of iEthernet
a frames) and repeat the test.
r t if


tested device is C
e
Finally, the maximum burst size (quantity) that can be processed by the
obtained.
&

g
The Data Analyzer always transmits data frames in the minimum packet
nwith the fixed length. Therefore, the Data Analyzer controls the burst
intervali
sizein
r a of the data frame by prolonging or shortening the sending time of the

iT
data frame.
e testing Back-to-Back, the test is valid only when the throughput is lower
wWhen
a than the line rate of the interface. when the throughput is equal to the line rate of


u
H the interface, all data frames can pass through the tested device. The burst length
is not limited on the network, as a result, packet loss cannot be displayed, and the
buffer function cannot be reflected. Therefore, when testing the Back-to-Back, you
need to set the throughput to a smaller value. In this way, the result is more
accurate.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Can this table be used to calculate the maximum duration of no frame loss for

Hu


each typical packet length in the case of the EFS4 board in this configuration?

o n
The 64 Bytes frame length is used as an example to calculate the maximum
duration of no packet loss.
ati
ic


r if
The Data Analyzer controls the burst size of the data frame by prolonging or
t
shortening the data frame sending time. The table in the slide shows that the

Ce
device can receive 4333 Ethernet frames of 64 Bytes length without packet

&
loss, at the line speed, the interface can receive 148810 frames every second

ng
(the rate of the EFS4 interface is 100Mbit/s). therefore, 1/148810 is the time

n i
required for receiving one frame. therefore, the time required for receiving

r ai
4333 Ethernet frames is calculated as follows: 4333× (1/148810) seconds.

i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Answer: According to the formula: N=Rate/ ((L+7+1+12) ×8, the maximum frame

Hu


rate is 84460 frame/s. After QinQ is enabled, the formula is as follows: L+4 (C-

n
VLAN) +4 (S-VLAN) +12 (GFP-F encapsulation byte). The actual frame length of the
o
ti
signal on the board is 148 Bytes.

ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Test Preparations a w
Huthe data analyzer according to


Select ports with different functions on

o n
different test requirements. For example: FE electrical port, FE optical port, GE
optical port, and GE electrical iport.
t
aMSTP equipment are finally carried by the SDH
c
The Ethernet services of ithe
tifperformance of all the SDH networks directly affects


network. Therefore, rthe

the test results of e
C the Ethernet services. Therefore, before the test, ensure

&
that no abnormal alarms and events are reported on the SDH network.
g
nand equipment are consistent. If the working modes are inconsistent,

i
Check whether the working modes of the ports interconnected by the data
in
analyzer
a
T r loss may occur.
packet

e i For the Ethernet service test, the Ethernet frames sent by the data analyzer
w


a are standard Ethernet frames, that is, frames without VLAN tags.

Hu  Finally, disable the flow control function of all ports to eliminate the impact
of the flow control function on the indicator test.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Test Environment Introduction a w
Hu bandwidth between the two tested


Configure two EPL services with the same



sites (port 1 at one end corresponds n to port 1 at the other end and port 2

t
corresponds to port 2 at the other io end). The bandwidth and channel level at
the SDH side are allocated
ic aaccording to requirements.
r
After the configuration tifis complete, connect the data analyzer to ports 1 and
Ce loopback on port 1 and port 2 of the other site.


2 of a site, and perform

& sends data frames (standard Ethernet frames) to port 1 of

The data analyzer
g


thisin
in
the connected site. The data frames are recycled through port 2 of the site. In
way, the unidirectional system throughput, frame loss rate, and latency
r a tested.
iT
are

e Generally, the test duration is 60 seconds, and the number of test times is 1.
w


a You can set the test duration to 10 seconds or 3 seconds according to the

Hu actual situation. In addition, you only need to test the value of the typical
packet length.

 Compare the obtained values with the technical specifications provided by

the vendor to check whether the Ethernet performance meets the
requirements.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
Test Environment Introduction a w
Hu1 of the Ethernet boards at the two


Use two data analyzers to connect port

sites.
o n
Configure an EPL service thattiuses port 1 at two sites as the source and sink.


ic a
t i
Use the two data analyzers f to send data frames at the same rate. Observe the
transmit and receiver status of the two analyzers.


C e

&
If the number of frames received at one end is equal to the number of

g
frames sent by the other end, no frame is lost.
n
Ifi the number of frames received at one end is not equal to the number
a inof frames sent by the other end, frame loss occurs in the system. In this


T r case, find out the cause.

e i
a w  In this test method, you do not need to synchronize two data analyzers, you

Hu
can still test whether packet loss occurs.

 The test of Ethernet services is flexible. After learning the basic knowledge and test
methods in this document, you need to creatively study in the work and apply
them to daily work.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The optical transport network consists of optical transmission equipment and

Hu


optical fibers. Most of the faults on the network are caused by the faults of certain

n
NEs or fibers on the network. Therefore, how to locate to a single NE in a specific
o
ti
area is the key to locating the fault, that is, locate the fault accurately to a single
site.
ic a
t if sites is generally dozens or even hundreds of
In addition, the distance between

r
e a fault to a single site, it is meaningless to suspect one
kilometers. Before locating
C
site is faulty. This wastes precious time.
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The general principles for locating faults are as follows:
u


Locate the external first, and then theH transmission.

When locating a fault, you n



i o need to clear the external factors, such as the

t device fault, or the power supply fault.
a
fiber cut, the interconnected
c then the NE.
iand
i f
rat fault, you need to locate the site where the fault occurs.
Locate the network first,


C
When locating e
Exclude the &high-speed part first, and then the low-speed part.

i ng to the alarm signal flow, the alarm of the high-speed signal

According
inoften causes the alarm of the low-speed signal. Therefore, when


a
r locating a fault, you need to rectify the fault of the high-speed part first.
i T
e Analyze high-level alarms first, and then low-level alarms.
w


a
Hu
 When analyzing alarms, analyze the alarms of higher severity, such as
critical alarms and major alarms. Then, analyze low-level alarms, such as
minor alarms and warning alarms. This principle can be used together
with the “high-speed part first and then the low-speed part”. During
troubleshooting, handle the high-level alarms of the line first, then the
low-level alarms of the line, and then check whether alarms are
reported on the tributary, if the alarm persists, analyze the tributary
alarms according to this principle.

 The principles for handling faults are not invariable in the order of use. They can
be flexibly applied according to the live network.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The common methods for locating faults are summarized as follows: First Analysis,

Hu


Second Loopback, Third Replace Boards.

o n
When a fault occurs, first analyze the alarm, performance event, and service flow to

ti
determine the fault scope. Then, you can perform a segment-by-segment
a
ic
loopback to rectify the external fault or locate the fault to a single NE or board. At

t if
last, replace the faulty board and rectify the fault.
r
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Alarm masking: This command is used toH
u
mask all alarms of an NE or a board

n
of an NE. If an alarm is masked, the corresponding NE or board does not
o
monitor the alarm.
a ti
f
Automatic alarm reporting: After
ic automatic alarm reporting is set, when an
tidevice side, the alarm is reported to the NMS


alarm is generated on the

r
e board is displayed on the NMS. You can view the alarm
immediately. The alarm
C
&
information on the alarm board. You do not need to query the alarm

g
information. The unnecessary alarms can be set to not automatically reported.
n It is implemented on NMS and does not affect NE alarms.
i


a inor discard the reported alarms based on the alarm filtering

Alarm filtering:
r
Receive
T
i
configuration.
estatus
Alarm filtering is configured for an NE. If the alarm filtering

a w is Enabled, the NMS discards the alarm and does not record it in the

Hu
NMS database. If the alarm is disabled, the alarm is received and recorded in
the NMS alarm database.

 Alarm suppression: The root alarms that are directly triggered by abnormal
events or faults often generate low-level alarms, which interfere with the
locating and handling of alarms. You can mask non-root alarms by setting
alarm correlation rules in advance.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The frame structure of SDH signals defines rich overhead bytes that contain

Hu


system alarms and performance information. Therefore, when a fault occurs in the

n
SDH system, a large number of alarms and performance events are generated. By
o
ti
analyzing the information, you can determine the type and location of the fault.

ic a
You can obtain alarm and performance event information in either of the following
if


rt
ways:

C e
You can query the current or historical alarms and performance events of the


&
transmission system through the NMS.
g
n indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet and boards.
i
You can learn about the running status of the device by observing the status


a in
of the running

T r of Alarm and Performance Analysis

Limitations
ei When the networking, services, and fault information is complex, a large


a w number of alarms and performance events may occur when faults occur.


Hu There are too many alarms and performance events, which makes it difficult
for maintenance personnel to analyze.

 When certain faults occur, there may be no obvious alarms or performance

events. Sometimes, no alarms or performance events can be found. In this
case, the alarm and performance event analysis method is helpless.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When obtaining the alarm or performance information through the NMS, make

Hu


sure that the current running time of all NEs on the network are set correctly. If the

n
NE time is set incorrectly, the alarm or performance information may be reported
o
ti
incorrectly or not reported at all. During maintenance, set the NE time to the

c a
current time after you redeliver the configuration to the NE. Otherwise, the NE will
i
rt if
work in the default time rather than the current time.

Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In this example, many alarms are reported on the entire network. It is difficult for

Hu


beginners to analyze the alarms. However, as long as we grasp the key and basic

n
principles of troubleshooting, it is not difficult to analyze the root alarms.
o


ati
It can be seen that R_LOS, MS_RDI, and HP_RDI are line alarms, while LP_RDI and

ic
TU_AIS are tributary alarms. According to the principle that “Exclude the high-

t if
speed part first, and then the low-speed part”, the line alarm is analyzed first. The
r
e
RDI alarm is a secondary alarm and a minor alarm. The R_LOS alarm is a critical
C
alarm. According to the principle that “Analyze high-level alarms first, and then
&
ng
low-level alarms”, the root alarm of the entire network is R_LOS, it indicates that
i
the optical path from A to B is interrupted.
n
i
a of handling transmission faults, there are multiple fault points.

r
In the process
T it is not determined that the faults on the network are caused by an
i
Therefore,
e As shown in the example, R_LOS is the root alarm. After the R_LOS alarm is
walarm.
a cleared, if other alarms persist, further analysis is required.
H u
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The detection mechanism of B2_SD/B3_SD/BIP_SD is the same as that of B1_SD.

Hu


The only difference is that the detected byte changes to B2/B3/V5 bytes.

o n
The detection mechanism of B2_EXC/BIP_EXC is the same as that of B1_EXC. The

ti
only difference is that the detected byte changes to B2/V5 bytes.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The function of LP_RDI/MS_RDI is similar to that of HP_RDI. The only difference is

Hu


that the monitoring levels are different.

o n
The IN_PWR_LOW is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is too low.

ti
This alarm is reported when the board detects that the actual input optical power
a
ic
is lower than the lower threshold of the input reference value.

rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The configuration data includes the following items:

Hu


Node parameters of the multiplex section



Path loopback setting for the line

o nand tributary boards
ti


ic a
Tributary path protection attributes
f


Path trace byte

rt i
e


C protection of a certain tributary board does not work,

For example, if the SNCP


query whether the &path attribute of the tributary board is set to "protection".
g operation log on the NM to check whether any improper
You can viewnthe
i
inon the NM is performed.


operation

ThisT
a
r is applicable to further analysis of a known faulty NE and helps to find
ei root cause of a fault. This method, however, takes a long time and requires
 method
the
a wexpertise in the field of optical transmission and essential product knowledge.
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The path trace byte J1 and the signal label byte C2 belong to the higher order path

Hu

overhead. If the received bytes and to be received bytes are inconsistent, the
HP_TIM (J1 byte mismatch) and HP_SLM (C2 byte mismatch) alarms are reported
n
at the receive end, although two alarms are minor alarms for Huawei equipment,
o
ati
this alarm does not affect services but affects the judgment of network faults.
Therefore, you need to handle the alarm in a timely manner.
ic


rt if
For HP_TIM (J1 byte mismatch) and HP_SLM (C2 byte mismatch) alarms, exclude
the cause that the receive end cannot receive normal J1 and C2 values due to bit
Ce
errors. Most of the causes are that the to be received and to be transmitted

&
contents of the equipment at both ends are inconsistent. In this example, set the

ng
contents to be transmitted on NE1 as the contents to be received on NE3, and set

i
the contents to be transmitted on NE3 as the contents to be received on NE1.
n
ai
For MSTP equipment, the pass-through mode is used for VC-4 level services
r


by default, and the termination mode is used for VC12/VC3 level services by
i T default.
e
a w  Overhead detection: The overhead is generated at the transmit end, and the

Hu
overhead detection is completed at the receive end. The line board extracts
the overhead bytes and performs related processing or reports related
alarms according to the extracted values.
 Overhead termination: When the transmission equipment detects the
overhead, it marks the overhead as its default value for transmission. The
overhead that is sent to the peer device is regenerated (or default).
 Overhead pass-through: After detecting the received overhead, the
transmission equipment directly forwards the received overhead to the
opposite station without changing its value.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Use this method to modify the timeslot configuration, slot configuration, and

Hu


board parameter configuration. This method also removes problems caused by

n
configuration errors in a known faulty NE. In addition, this method is used to
o
ti
troubleshoot pointer justifications.

Application
ic a
if


r t
If some path of a tributary board or some tributary board is suspected to be
e


C
faulty, modify the timeslot configuration to shift the payload to other path or

&
tributary board.

n g

i
If a certain slot is suspected to be faulty, change the slot configuration.
n is suspected to be faulty, shift the traffic to another VC-4.
If a iVC-4


r a
i TDuring the upgrade or expansion, if you are unsure about the new
e


a w configuration, you can re-load the original configuration for confirmation.

Hu
 Modifying the timeslot configuration, however, does not help to locate the
faulty point or faulty board, for example, a line board, tributary board, cross-
connect board or backplane.

 In this case, use the replacement method or the loopback method to further
locate the fault. This method is applicable in the preliminary process of
locating faults when spare boards are not available. Other service channels or
slots are used to resume the service temporarily.

 To modify the configuration in case of pointer justification, modify the

tracing direction and the reference source of the clock.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
When using this method, you need to analyze the current alarm information first

Hu


to confirm the affected service channels. Therefore, these methods of

n
troubleshooting are not independent of each other but can be flexibly used in the
o
ti
specific fault environment.

ic a
In this example, according to the analysis of alarms and service configurations,
if


t
only the services from NE1 to NE3 are affected. No alarm is reported on the line.
r
e
The TU_AIS and LP_RDI alarms are reported on the tributary. This indicates that the
C
services from NE1 to NE3 are faulty, therefore, the fault may be caused by the PQ1
&
ng
board in slot 3 of NE1 or the PQ1 board of NE3 corresponding to NE1 (the line and
i
cross-connection of NE1, NE2, and NE3 cannot be excluded), the most probable
n
ai
cause is the tributary boards at both ends of the service.
r
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
The process is as follows: a w
Huchannels in slot 3 of NE1 and


Select a 2 Mbit/s channel from the faulty

configure a service from this channeln to NE2. The second VC-4 is used on the
line. (You do not need to modify
t io the cross-connection of NE1, but delete the
pass-through service on c
i a set up the cross-connection to add/drop
NE2,
services).
r tif

Ce of the new service.
Check the alarm status

& is reported, locate the fault on NE3. You can further locate
If no alarm
g


i n active and standby cross-connect boards.

the faulty board by performing TPS switching and switching between

a in the

T r If the TU_AIS alarm is generated on NE2, locate the fault on NE1. You
i


e can further determine the fault point through loopback.

a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Loopback is the most popular and effective method to locate faults on OptiX

Hu


series equipment. The most significant feature of this method is that there is no

n
need of thorough data and performance analysis. Hence, the equipment
o
ti
maintenance personnel are expected to be familiar with this method. However, the

c a
loopback method may cause temporary interruption of normal services in the
i
rt if
loopback channel. This is the biggest disadvantage of this method. Therefore, you

Ce
can use the loopback method to rectify the fault only when a major fault, such as
service interruption occurs.
&
ng
 Loopback can be classified into the following types:

n i
According to the signal flow direction, there are two types of loopback:
ai


T r Inloop and outloop. When the inloop is performed on the local NE, the

e i signals are transmitted to the NE. When the outloop is performed, the signals

a w are transmitted from the local NE to the external NE. It can be said that the

Hu
inloop is oriented to the local NE, while the outloop is oriented to the
opposite end. For example, to test whether the interface module and external
cable of the board are normal, you need to set outloop. To test whether the
cross-connect unit and service path of the equipment are normal, you need
to set the inloop.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
In the preceding figure, W2:17 indicates that the west optical port uses the

Hu


seventeenth VC-12 of the second VC-4. t2:1 indicates that port 1 on the second
tributary board is used.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Perform loopbacks segment by segment to locate the faulty site. The detailed
u

operations are as follows:
H
In the direction of the BER tester, perform the software outloop on the e2 of
n


the east side line board of NE2. o

NE2. If the BER tester displays interruption, the fault is located on NE3 and
ti If the BER tester is normal, go to the next
step. a
ic a software inloop on the w2 of NE2. If the
i f
Remove the loopback.

rt Perform
BER tester displayseinterruption, the fault occurs on NE2, including the east
side and west sideC boards of NE2. If the BER tester is normal, the fault occurs
on NE1 and & the west side line board of NE2.
Remove the


i ng loopback.
Generally,i nservices with problems are associated with each other. Therefore, if one
a

of therservices is restored, other services can be automatically restored. In addition,
the T
i simplified sampling method often makes fault analysis and processing more
e and simple. Especially when the faulty services are complex, the sampling
clear
a wsimplification method is more effective, or even the starting point or breakthrough
Hu
point of fault locating.
 You can perform loopback to quickly locate a fault to a station or even to a board
without spending excessive time on analyzing the alarm or performance events.
The operations are simple and can be easily mastered by the maintenance
personnel.
 If any other services are normal in the loopback path, however, the loopback
method may cause transient service interruption. You can adopt the loopback
method to handle a fault only in the case of a critical accident. For example, the
services are interrupted.
 n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Replacement is applicable when you handle problems of the external equipment,

Hu


such as an optical fiber, trunk cable, switch, and power supply equipment. In

n
addition, the replacement method is also used to remove the problem in the
o
ti
board at a single NE.

ic a
This method is practical and is easy for the maintenance personnel to understand.
if


t
This method, however, requires spare parts. Extra care is required during its
r
e
application. Improper handling of the board or component during the replacement
C
may cause damage and even result in a new fault.
&
ng
Notice: The replacement method is not a narrow concept. In the case of an NE
i


n
configured with TPS protection, active/standby 1+1 cross-connection protection,

rai
and a network with self-healing protection, switching can be considered as a

i T
replacement method.
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
According to the fault description, loopback is performed on the 40th 2 Mbit/s

Hu


channel through the NMS. The loopback is performed on the 2M processing board.

n
The interface board and PDH interface unit on the processing board are not
o
ti
included, therefore, the fault location cannot be further determined. After the DDF

ca
is looped back to the transmission side, the fault persists. Therefore, it can be
i
rt if
determined that the fault occurs between the DDF and the 2M processing board.

C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
This method is used to clear the external faults or to locate the problem related to

Hu


interconnection.

 Application
o n
To check whether the voltage
a tiof the power supply is too high or too low, use
a multimeter to measureic


i f the input voltage.

To check whether the

e rtpoor interconnection between the equipment and
Cis due to the grounding, use a multimeter to measure the


other equipment
& the shielding layer of the coaxial ports of the transmitter
voltage between
g
n that the grounding is improper.
i
and receiver of the interconnecting path. If the voltage is more than 0.5 V, it
in
indicates
a
T r check whether the poor interconnection is caused by a wrong signal, use
To
i


e proper analyzers to check whether the frame signals and the overhead bytes

a w are normal, and whether there are any abnormal alarms.

Hu This method provides accurate results, but it depends on the accuracy of the


meters and the professional knowledge of the personnel.

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
It can be seen from this example that, for transmission faults, alarms generated at

Hu


a certain point cannot be limited to only one site. Instead, they need to be

n
analyzed and handled at the network layer based on upstream and downstream
o
ti
sites, this requires the maintenance personnel to have an overall concept of the
network they maintain.
i ca
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The PRBS test for lower order services, conducted by tributary boards, is used to

Hu


monitor the lower order service channels of all the boards in a system. The PRBS

n
test for higher order services, performed by cross-connect or line boards, can only
o
ti
monitor STM-1 channels.

i ca
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The RMON feature defines Ethernet performance management methods based on

Hu


the management information base (MIB) in the simple network management

n
protocol (SNMP) architecture. By using the RMON function, you can monitor the
o
ti
performance of Ethernet ports in the same manner as you monitor the

ca
performance of SDH or PDH ports.
i
The RMON function definesifa serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the
rt control stations and detection sites that comply with


data exchange betweenethe

the RMON standards.CTo meet the requirements of different networks, the RMON
function provides&
g flexible detection modes and control mechanism. In addition,
n provides error diagnosis, and planning and information
i
the RMON function
receivingin
r a of the performance events of the entire network.

T
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Sometimes, a running board enters the abnormal state due to transient power

Hu


supply behavior, low voltage or strong external electromagnetic interference.

n
Service interruption and ECC communication interruption may or may not be
o
ti
accompanied with corresponding alarms. The configuration data may also be

ca
correct. In this case, the fault can be cleared and the normal service can be
i
rt if
resumed in time by resetting the board, restarting the site, re-sending the

e
configuration or switching the service to the standby path.
C
The major disadvantage of this method is the uncertainty involved, because the
&


ng
problem is not completely known and the alarm may persist after the board or
i
power is reset. It is recommended that you do not use this method. Commonly,
n
ai
you can apply the previous methods to locate faults or obtain technical support
r
T
through the authorized channels.
i
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The common methods used in fault locating have different features. The above

Hu


table lists the mapping between fault locating methods.

o n
In actual applications, maintenance personnel need to use various methods to
locate and rectify faults.
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Answer: a w
Huis used to locate the fault to the


The configuration data analysis method



board and find out the cause of n the fault. It takes a long time to locate the
fault.
t io
i ca event analysis method is universal and can be
tif to foresee potential equipment risks. Services are
The alarm and performance


r
used on the entire network
not affected.
Ce
& modification method is used to locate the fault to the
The configuration
g


i n
board, rectify the pointer justification problem. It is complex.

Thein
r

a PRBS test method is used to locate the fault to the board or cross-

iT
connect chip. Meter-free test is performed to monitor all the lower order
e paths.

a w
Hu
 The meter test method is used to separate external faults and solve
interconnection problems, which is persuasive. There is a requirement for the
meter.

 The RMON performance analysis method is used to locate the fault to the
network segment. In this way, the Ethernet port can be managed, the
detection mechanism is flexible, and the network-wide error diagnosis is
provided.

 The loopback method is used to locate a fault to a single site or to separate

an external fault, it doesn’t depend on the analysis of alarm or performance
 event. ECC and normal services may be affected.

 The replacement method is used to locate a fault to a board or to

separate an external fault. Spare parts are required.

 The experience processing method is used in some special cases and is

not used as much as possible.

n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
r ai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Other fault types of the MSTP equipment: NEs are unreachable, communication

Hu


between boards fails, services are transiently interrupted, and pointer justification
occurs.
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
For the troubleshooting of the transmission equipment, the handling process is

Hu


similar regardless of the type of the fault. That is, exclude external faults first, then

n
locate the fault to a single site, and then locate the board fault, finally, the fault is
o
ti
rectified.

i ca
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
For service interruption faults, external causes must be excluded first. For example:

Hu


The subrack is powered off due to short circuit, overvoltage, under voltage, power

n
connector loosening, PIU board failure, or misoperation, abnormal joint grounding,
o
ti
abnormal ambient temperature and humidity, external strong interference source,

ca
mouse, optical cable interruption or splicing error, and the attenuation of optical
i
rt if
cable or the flange is too large, the cable connector is loose, or the interface board
is in poor contact.
C e
After the external causes are excluded, check whether the current configuration
&


ng
data is correct and whether misoperations are performed, including:

n i
The cross-connection is incorrect.
ai


T r enabled services are configured with hardware or software loopback or

The


e i the services are not loaded. If a loopback is configured on the tributary or

a w line, services will be interrupted. In this case, you need to remove the

Hu
software or hardware loopback on the NMS or the device.

 If the service is not loaded on the NMS, the service will also be unavailable. In
this case, you need to change Service Unload to Service Load on the NMS.

 If there is no external or manual fault, you can infer that the fault is caused by the
device itself. In this case, you can locate the fault to a single site or board and
rectify the fault according to the methods described in chapter 2.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
To locate service interruption faults, perform the following steps:

Hu


 Alarm analysis

o n
When a service interruption occurs, the device usually reports some
ti


i ca
alarms. By analyzing these alarms, you can locate the fault in a fine and

if
accurate degree.
rt


C e
Segment-by-segment loopback


&
If the fault point cannot be located by observing the alarm and

g
performance event, you can use the loopback method to rectify the
n During the loopback, the faulty channel needs to be sampled. The
i
fault.

ainmaintenance personnel must be familiar with the service distribution on

T r the network.
ei
a w  Replacement method and Configuration Modification method

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Case Introduction: a w
u


NE1 is the central node. That is, otherH

 NEs have services with NE1, and other
NEs do not have services for each
o n other.

Observe the entire network. tIti is found that there are only two alarms (TU_AIS
a
alarm is reported on NE4icand the LP_RDI alarm is reported on NE1).


r tif of alarms and service configurations, the services

According to the analysis

C
sent from NE1 to NE4e are faulty. As a maintenance engineer, it is suspected
&
that the fault occurs on the entire link from NE1 to NE4, but the fault cannot
be locatedg immediately. You can perform a loopback to locate the fault.
n according to the experience, since only the services from NE1 to
i


a in
In addition,

T r are faulty, the services between NE1, NE2, and NE3 are normal.
NE4

e i Therefore, it is suspected that the optical line and the interconnected optical
a w board from NE3 to NE4 are faulty.

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The procedures for analyzing alarms are as follows:

HItuis found that the TU_AIS report time



Query the alarm time of NE1 and NE4.



of NE4 is earlier than that of the n LP_RDI of NE1. In this case,

________________________.
t io
i caand NE4 are transmitted through different VC-4s,
tif method to locate the fault.
If the services of NE2, NE3,


r
you can use the __________
e
If the services ofCNE2, NE3, and NE4 are transmitted through same VC-4, the
& be performed on NE2 and NE3. In this case, you need to use


loopback cannot

n g
i
the ______________ method to locate the fault.

Answer: in

r a
i TThe alarm on NE1 is caused by NE4
e Loopback


a w 

H u Configuration Modification

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
To locate the fault, use the loopback method first. On NE1, use the BER tester to

Hu


test the faulty channel. Because the services between NE1 and NE2 and between

n
NE1 and NE3 are normal, perform loopbacks segment by segment on NE3 and
o
ti
NE4, locate the fault to a single site. Pay attention to the following points when
performing a loopback:
i ca

t if instead of the optical/electrical port loopback
Try to use the VC-4 loopback
r
e of the loopback on normal services.
to minimize the impact
C

&
If the services from NE1 to NE4 use the same VC-4, you are advised to
modify the g service configuration and then perform the loopback. If you do
n the service configuration, you can only perform a loopback on
i
n optical board of NE3. Then, you can determine whether the fault is
not modify
a ieast
T r
the

e i caused NE3 or NE4.

a w  In the case of segment-by-segment loopback, only one loopback can be

Hu
performed at a time, and multiple loopbacks cannot be performed at the
same time. After the loopback is performed, you need to cancel the loopback
operation to reduce misoperations.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The principle of configuring the VC-12 loopback service is similar to that of the

Hu


VC-4 loopback service.

n
Select a 2M service from the interrupted services as the observation object.
o
ti


Connect the BER tester to the 2M channel of NE1.

i ca
if
On the NMS, delete the 2M service from NE1, and then configure a VC-12
t


r
loopback service. Note that the source and sink timeslots of the service are
e
C
the same, as shown in the table.

&
Check whether the TU_AIS alarm is generated on the BER tester. If yes, it
g


i n on the downstream sites such as NE2.

indicates that the problem occurs on NE1. If not, perform the same
in
configuration
a
T r
Restore the deleted services on NE1, and configure a VC-12 loopback service
i


e on NE3. The source and sink timeslots are shown in the above table. Observe

a w the alarm indication on the BER tester.

Hu  In this way, the fault can also be located to achieve the effect similar with the
VC-4 loopback. Meanwhile, the entire VC-4 loopback is avoided and other
normal services are not affected.

 After the fault is rectified, delete the VC-12 loopback services and restore the
original services in time. Otherwise, the timeslots may be occupied.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Assume that according to the analysis, NE4 is faulty. Although the alarm is

Hu

reported by the tributary board, the fault may be caused by the tributary board,
line board, or cross-connect board. Therefore, how to locate the fault to the board
is the key point.
o n
After locating the fault to the NE, tyou i need to further locate the faulty board. The
a

procedure are as follows:
f c
iactive
r
First, check whether the
 i
t to switch and standby boards are faulty. If yes, use the

Observe the alarm.C e

TPS protection switching
If the alarm is
the services to the protection board.
cleared, the tributary board is faulty.
Replace the & tributary board according to the operation specifications. If the

ngobserve the alarm. If the alarm is cleared, the cross-connect board

alarm persists, perform the active/standby switching on the cross-connect
board iand
in Replace the cross-connect board according to the operation
is faulty.
a
T r
specifications.

ei After
 the fault of the tributary board and the cross-connect board is excluded,

a w hardware-level backup relationship. Therefore, you can only replace the

only the line board left. In addition, the line board does not have the

Hu hardware to locate the fault. When inserting or removing a line board, do not
insert or remove the board with fibers. Otherwise, the optical fiber may be
stretched or even broken.
 Restore the environment and record the handling result.
 After the fault point is located to the NE, if the NE does not have the TPS or the
active/standby cross-connect configuration, you can replace the faulty board only
with the standby board, the replace order is the tributary board first, then the line
board, and then the cross-connect board.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Case introduction: The MSP is mainly used at the convergence layer and core layer

Hu


of the network. The convergence layer and core layer have high service

n
requirements and high security requirements. Therefore, when a fault occurs, how
o
ti
to quickly locate and rectify the fault is the most important concern of

ca
maintenance personnel. This case describes how to troubleshoot the fault that
i
rt if
services are unavailable after the MSP switching.

C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
To rectify this type of fault, perform the following steps:

Hu network, use these principles



When an alarm is generated on the entire

“Exclude the high-speed part first, n and then the low-speed part; Analyze the
high-level alarm first, and then
t iothe low-level alarm” to find out the most
probable root alarms. In this
i ca case, NE2 and NE3 report the R_LOS alarm
t
triggers the MSP switching.
r if The switching only affects the services between
NE1 and NE3. Thee tributaries of NE1 and NE3 report the TU_AIS alarm,
C
indicating that the switching fails and the services are interrupted,
&
Query thegenabling status of the APS protocol on the entire network. If the
i n is not enabled for some NEs, enable the APS protocol first. If


inprotocols of all NEs are enabled, query the switching status of all NEs.
APS protocol

r
APSa
i TThe west optical board of NE3 and the east optical board of NE2 should be in
e
a w the switching state. The east optical board of NE3 and the west optical board

Hu
of NE2 should be in the normal state. Other NEs must be in the pass-through
state. If the status is abnormal, you can restart the APS protocol on the entire
network and re-deliver the MSP node parameters. After the protocol on the
entire network is started, query the switching status and network-wide alarms
again. In this example, assume that the switching is normal, however, the
alarm persists.

 After confirming that the switching status of the entire network is normal, it
can be determined that the fault is caused by the equipment. Analyze the
path of the faulty channel after the switching and perform the loopback by
segment. Then, locate the fault to the single site and even board according to
the principle “single site first, and then board”.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
To perform a loopback on a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, perform the

Hu


following steps:

n
Step 1: Sampling of interrupted service channels.
o
i


Select the first 2 Mbit/stchannel


a of the second tributary board of NE1,
ic And the first 2 Mbit/s channel of the second
i f
that is, the t2:1 of NE1.
tributary boardrtof NE3, that is, the t2:1 of NE3.
e
Step 2: Draw theCpath diagram of the interrupted service.
&


n g
The following figure shows the paths before and after protection
i
switching. Note that the ring rate is STM-16. Therefore, services in the

a inthird VC-4 are bridged to the eleventh VC-4 in the other direction after
T r the switching.
e i
a w  Step 3: Perform loopbacks segment by segment to locate the faulty site.

Hu
 Connect a meter to the first 2M channel of the second tributary board
of NE1 (You can also check whether the TU_AIS alarm of the 2M channel
of the second tributary board of NE1 is cleared through the NMS), then
configure a VC-4 loopback service segment by segment on the NMS to
locate the fault.

 After locating the fault to a single site, use the method described previously to
locate the fault to the board.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
For bit error faults, the external causes must be excluded first.

Huthe transmit optical power of the



Optical power problem: Check whether

n
upstream site is normal. Check whether the ports on the ODF, attenuator,

t io are tightly connected. Check whether the

flange, and optical interface board

i
ports on the ODF, attenuator,ca flange, and optical interface board are clean.
t
Check whether the optical
r if fiber is squeezed. Check whether the bending
e fiber is too small. Check whether the type of the optical
radius of the optical
C
interface board is consistent.
&
Grounding g problems: The PGND and BGND are not properly grounded. The
n resistance is greater than 2 Ω. The potential difference between
i


in and PGND is greater than 0.5V. The PGND, BGND, and AC neutral wire
grounding

r a
BGND

i Tshare the ground. The PGND cables of the two interconnected devices are
e
a w not jointly grounded.

Hu
 Ambient temperature: The fan in the subrack is faulty. The air filter of the
subrack has excessive dust, and the ventilation of the equipment is poor. The
air conditioner in the equipment room is faulty. Check whether the
interconnected devices share the same ground.

 Long-term operation: 0°C~45°C

 Short-term operation (no more than 96 hours for continuous working

and no more than 15 days for each year): -5°C~55°C
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
B1, B2, B3, and V5 bit errors are monitored separately in the RST (Regenerator

Hu


Section Termination), MST (Multiplex Section Termination), HPT (Higher Order

n
Path Termination), and LPT (Lower Order Path Termination). If only the lower order
o
ti
path has bit errors, the higher order path, multiplex section, and regenerator

ca
section cannot detect the bit error. If there are bit errors in the regenerator section,
i
rt if
bit errors will also occur in the multiplex section, higher order path, and lower

C e
order path. Generally speaking, there are lower order bit errors if there are higher
order bit errors. For example, if there are B1 bit errors, there are B2, B3, and V5 bit
&
errors. If there are lower order bit errors, there may be no higher order bit errors. If

ng
ni
there are V5 bit errors, B3, B2, and B1 bit errors may not occur. When the local end

i
of the optical synchronization transmission system detects bit errors, the local end
athe opposite end of the bit error detection through the overhead byte
r
notifies
T the alarm or performance event reported by the local end.
e i
except

w
a When the optical power is too high or too small, the receive optical module cannot
The abnormal optical power of the line board is a common cause of bit errors.
u


H receive optical signals normally, the B1, B2, B3, and V5 bit errors occur. Therefore,
when the equipment reports a large number of bit errors, check whether the
receive and transmit optical power is normal.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The processing of bit errors can also be performed according to the principle that

Hu


“exclude the high-speed part first, and then the low-speed part”. The bit errors

n
of the line often cause the tributary to report the bit errors. The difference is that
o
ti
the bit error alarm is not analyzed, it is the analysis of the bit error performance

ca
events. For bit error performance events, you need not only pay attention to the
i
rt if
location where they are reported, but also pay attention to the specific values of
performance events.
C e
If the local end reports the BBE performance event, it indicates that the local
&


ng
receive end detects bit errors and the channel between the remote end and
i
the local end is faulty.
n
If a i
r the local end reports the FEBBE performance event, it indicates that the

i Tremote receive end detects bit errors and the channel between the local end


e and the remote end is faulty.

w
a In this example, although a large number of performance events are reported on
H u 

the entire network, all the performance events are aggregated on the service
channels between NE1 and NE4. According to the principle that “exclude the
high-speed part first, and then the low-speed part“, the bit error performance
events between NE3 and NE4 need to be processed first, in addition, the FEBBE
alarm is reported with the occurrence of the BBE alarm. Therefore, it can be
determined that the east optical board of NE3 detects the bit error block and
reports the RS_BBE, MS_BBE, and HP_BBE alarms, and cause other NEs report bit
error performance events.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The analysis contents of the Alarm and Performance Event Analysis includes:

Hu events through the NMS, such



 Query the alarm information and performance

as BBE, FEBBE, B1_OVER, B2_OVER, n B3_OVER, BIP-EXC, SD, and SF. Whether

t io between the alarm and the performance

there is a notification relationship
event.
i ca
Check the NEs, boards,r tifand channels where the alarm or performance event
e


C
occurs. It is recommended that you provide the path diagram of the service

& occurs.
channel affected by bit errors, especially the service path diagram where
g
service interruption
nalarm/performance events reported by the NMS, you need to query
n
Forithe
i
a


Tr
the time when the alarms are reported, especially the transient service

ei interruption caused by excessive transient bit errors. In this case, you need to

a w query the generation time of the alarms/performance events to determine

Hu
whether the transient service interruption is caused by the temperature
change.

 During the actual operation of the device, a small number of bit errors are
generated due to various factors, but services are not affected. Services are
affected only when the number of reported bit error blocks reaches a certain
value. For example, the correlation between the number of bit error blocks
and the TU_AIS alarm, when the number of bit errors reaches the threshold, a
TU_AIS transient interruption is reported. Compare the number of bit error
blocks reported by different service channels, analyze the paths of different
service channels, and then analyze all the sites in the path.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Check whether the transmit optical power of NE4 is normal. If not, replace

Hu


the board. Note that bit error performance events do not interrupt services.

n
Therefore, do not replace boards during peak hours.
o


ati
If the transmit optical power of NE4 is normal, check whether the receive

i c
optical power of NE3 is within the acceptable range. If not, replace the flange,

rtif
patch cord, and ODF ports of NE3 and NE4 to exclude possible problems.


C e
After the external fault is rectified, perform loopbacks segment by segment

&
to locate the fault to the NE and then to the board. Then, the fault is rectified.

n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Answer: Query the enabling status of the APS protocol on the entire network. If

Hu


the APS protocol is not enabled for some NEs, enable the APS protocol first. If all

n
protocols are enabled, query the switching status of all NEs, including the
o
ti
switching state, normal state, and pass-through state. If the APS protocol status is

ca
abnormal, restart the APS protocol on the entire network and re-deliver the MSP
i
rt if
node parameters. After the protocol on the entire network is started, query the

C e
switching status and network-wide alarms again. After confirming that the
switching status of the entire network is normal, it can be determined that the
&
equipment is faulty. Analyze the path of the faulty channel after the switching and

i ng
perform a loopback test segment by segment, locate the fault to a single site and
n
ai
then locate to the board.

T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Service configuration a w
u


The traditional transmission network H

 adopts the chain topology and ring
n
topology. During service configuration, services need to be configured one

t io and the network structure becomes

by one. As the network scale expands
more and more complex,cthis
i a service configuration mode cannot meet the
tif users.
requirements of fast growing
r
Bandwidth utilization e

C
& optical transmission networks have a large amount of
Traditional SDH
g


i nfunctions.
resources reserved and lack advanced service protection, and the restore and
in
routing
a
T r scheme
Protection
ei In the traditional SDH network, the main topologies are ring and chain, and


a w the main service protection scheme include SNCP and MSP. However, there


Hu is no proper protection scheme for mesh network.

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
With the emergence of ASON, the optical network has taken a solid step towards

Hu


the development of intelligent and fast development, which lays a solid foundation

n
for the continuous development of the entire communication network. The feature
o
ti
of ASON is that it introduces the concept of signaling in the transmission network

ca
for the first time, and integrates the advantages of data network and transmission
i
rt if
network management to realize real-time dynamic network management.

C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Service Configuration a w
Hu by end-to-end service


The ASON successfully solves this problem



configuration. To configure a service,n you only need to specify its source

t io
node, sink node, bandwidth requirement and protection type; the network
automatically performs the
i carequired operations.
Bandwidth Utilization r tif
e


Traditional SDHC optical transmission networks have a large amount of

& and lack advanced service protection, and the restore and


resources reserved
g
nprotection by reserving fewer resources, therefore increasing
i
routing functions. In contrast, with the routing function the ASON can
in
provide
a
T r
network resource utilization.

ei
Protection and Restoration
w Chain and ring are the main topologies used in a traditional SDH network.


a
Hu


MSP and SNCP are the main protection schemes for the services. In ASON,
mesh is the main topology. Besides MSP and SNCP protections, the dynamic
restoring function is available to restore the services dynamically. In addition,
when there are multiple failures in a network, the services can be restored as
many as possible.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
ASON NE a w
u



H
An ASON NE is one of the topology components in the ASON. Compared
with a traditional NE, an ASON NE has the functions of link management,
signaling and routing.
o n
TE Link
a ti
ic link. The ASON NE sends its bandwidth



i f
TE link is a traffic engineering
information to otherrtASON NEs through the TE link to provide data for route
computation.
C e
ASON Domain

&
An ASONgdomain is a subset of a network, which is classified by function for


i n of route selection and management. An ASON domain consists

in ASON NEs and TE links. One ASON NE belongs to one ASON
the purpose
a
of several
r
T domain.

ei
SPC
w In the case of soft permanent connection (SPC), the connection between the


a
Hu


user and the transmission network is configured directly by the NM. The
connection within the transmission network, however, is requested by the
NM and then created by the NE's control plane through signaling. When
ASON service is mentioned, it usually refers to SPC. In an ASON, to create
ASON services is to create SPCs.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ASON has three planes: the control plane, the transport plane, and the

Hu

management plane.
Control Plane
n


ti o
The control plane consists of a group of communication entities. It is

i ca
responsible for the calling control and connection control.


r if
The control plane dynamically controls the transport plane through signaling
t
exchange. It sets up, releases, monitors, and maintains connections. In cases
C e
of faults, the control plane restores the failed connections automatically
through signaling exchange.
&
ng
 Transport Plane


i ni
The traditional SDH network is the transport plane. It transmits optical signals.
It a
r transmits and multiplexes optical signals, configures cross-connection and
i Tprotection switching for optical signals, and guarantees the reliability of all


e optical signals. The switching operations on the transport plane are

a w performed under the control of the management plane and control plane.

Hu Management Plane


 The management plane is a complement to the control plane. It maintains

the transport plane, the control plane and the whole system. It can configure
end-to-end services.
 Its functions include performance management, fault management,
configuration management and security management. The functions of the
management plane are coordinated with the functions of the control plane
and transport plane.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Three interfaces: CCI interface between the control plane and service plane, NMI-T

Hu


interface between the management plane and service plane, and NMI-A interface

n
between the management plane and control plane.
o


ati
Generally, NMI-T and NMI-A are called NMI interfaces.

i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
SC: a w
u initiated by a terminal user to



H
A switching connection is a service connection
a control plane of an ASON network, and the control plane establishes a

o n For example, when a router device is

service connection by using signaling.
ti device, the router device initiates a
interconnected with a transmission
service request, the ASON a
i f ic through signaling, which is a switching
network responds to the request, and establishes

rt
a required cross connection
connection.
PC:
 C e
A permanent &connection is a service connection that is set up by the NMS
g


n
after the NMS calculates the cross-connection status and sends a command
to the idevice. For example, traditional SDH services are permanent
a in
SPC:T
r
connections.

ei The function is similar with the first two connection. In the case of soft


a w permanent connection (SPC), the connection between the user and the


Hu transmission network is configured directly by the NM. The connection within

the transmission network, however, is requested by the NM and then created
by the NE's control plane through signaling. When ASON service is
mentioned, it usually refers to SPC. In an ASON, to create ASON services is to
create SPCs.
 The current ASON version does not support SCs.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
ASON Software a w
u


The ASON software and NE software H

 run on the SCC board, whereas the

n implement corresponding functions.

board software and network management (NM) software run on the boards
o
and NM computer respectively,
a ti on the control plane, using Link Management
to

icand RSVP-TE.
ASON software is used mainly
i
Protocol (LMP), OSPF-TE, f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
GMPLS developed from MPLS: a w
Hu The object of label mapping is data


 MPLS is mainly used in Datacom network.

packet. GMPLS provides generalized n label mapping. Besides data packet,
GMPLS also can map TDM timeslot,
t io wavelength etc. as labels. Hence GMPLS
i
can be used in SDH to realizeca ASON function.
r tif the uniform signaling is used to manage uplink
Bidirectional transportation:
and downlink LSP e


C (Label Switching Path) to reduce the service creation time

&
and signaling overhead.
g
n (RSVP-TE)

i
Enhanced signaling ability: the cross-connection is established by signaling
in
protocol.
a
r
TIntegrated routing ability to provide topology and resource discovery
ei


function. (OSPF-TE)

a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
LMP is used as the link management protocol to discover neighbors, locate faults,

Hu


and manage link resources.

o n
OSPF is used as a routing protocol to spread, collect, and calculate route resources.

ti
The control plane generates control link LSA information by sending Hello packets
a
i c
between neighbors and floods the information to the entire network to generate

t if
control plane topology information. The service plane generates TE LSA based on
r
e
TE link information provided by LMP, and floods the information to the entire
C
network to generate the service plane topology information.
&
ng
RSVP-TE is used as the signaling protocol to automatically establish and delete
i


n
service LSPs, modify LSP attributes, reroute, and optimize paths. After the NMS

rai
delivers a service calculation request, RSVP-TE initiates a service calculation

i T
request to OSPF and obtains service path information. LMP provides control link
e
a w information and error location information for RSVP-TE.

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
LMP provides the following functions: a w
u


Creating and maintaining the control H channels between adjacent nodes.

o n control channels between adjacent

It is used to set up and maintain
ti maintained by LMP is used only for link


nodes. The control channel

ica
i f
verification. The connectivity check and attribute consistency check
between adjacent
e rt nodes can be performed only after an available
C
control channel is available.

Verifying TE& link attribute consistency.

g


Itin
refers to a process in which LMP integrates multiple data links into
inone traffic engineering (TE) link and synchronizes the attributes of this


a
r TE link to ensure the consistency between the TE link attribute
i T
e configurations of the nodes at the two ends of the link.

a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Control Channels a w
Hu channel between NEs. The control


The LMP creates and maintains the control

channel then provides a physicaln channel for the LMP packets. The control

t io and out-fiber control channels. The in-

channels are classified into in-fiber

i ca
fiber control channels automatically find and use the D4-D12 bytes of DCC.

t if uses the Ethernet links, which should be

The out-fiber control channel
r
manually configured.
C e
TE Links
&
g
n to other ASON NEs through the TE link to provide data for route

i
TE link is a traffic engineering link. The ASON NE sends its bandwidth
in
information
a
T r
computation. As a kind of resources, TE links can be regarded as fibers that

ei have bandwidth information and protection attributes. However, the TE link

a w does not correspond to a fiber respectively, because each fiber may

H u correspond to many TE links. Currently, a fiber can be configured with one TE

link.

 The resources of a TE link can be classified into three types: non-protection

resources, working resources, and protection resources.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The creating and management functions of the control channel negotiate and

Hu

maintain the control channel between adjacent nodes by exchanging Config
messages and executing the fast keep-alive mechanism (Hello protocol).

o n
The Config message contains the following information: Local ccid, sending
ti

NodeId, message ID, and parameters negotiated with the control channel

i ca
(HelloInterval and HelloDeadInterval).
Control channel management:
r t if When the control channel parameters are received
by two adjacent nodes,e the control channel enters the Up state by sending Hello
messages at intervalsC of HelloInterval. The Hello protocol is enabled to maintain
the failure of the &
control channel and monitoring control channel. If no Hello
g within HelloDeadInterval, the control channel is considered
message is received
n
invalid.
n i
i
a shows the discovery process of the control channel:

r
The figure
TThe Node A sends a Config message to the NodeB;
i
e If the Node A receives the ConfigAck message from the Node B, the control


a w 

H u 
channel is successfully established;
If the Node A receives the ConfigNAck message from the NodeB, the
negotiation fails and the control channel fails to be set up;
 If the Node A does not receive the response message from the Node B, the
Node A sends the Config message to node B (dotted line in the figure),
occupying the control channel check resources.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
A data link is a pair of interfaces that can be used to transmit user data.

Huof verified data links, interval for



The BeginVerify message includes the number



sending test messages, supported coding n mode and transmission mechanism, and
rate of test messages.
t io
i ca
if
The Test message contains the Verify_Id and the local Interface_Id.
t


e r
The data link connectivity verification process is as follows:


C
&
When the verification starts, the active party sends a BeginVerify message to


g
the passive party. The message contains the following information: Number
n data links, interval for sending test messages, supported encoding
i
of verified

a
modein and transmission mechanism, and rate of test messages.
T r
ei byte or DCC) to confirm the physical connectivity of the link and dynamically
The data link connectivity check sends a test message on each data link (J0


a w obtain the data link ID and TE link ID of the peer end.

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
The verification process is as follows: a w
Huto node B. The message contains the


Node A sends a LinkSummary message

link status information of the data n link in the TE link on the local node,

t
including the local link ID, peer iolink ID, encoding type, maximum and
minimum bandwidth, used
i cawavelength, and specific data link information.
f port mapping and link features brought by the
tithe
When node B accepts r
e node B sends a LinkSummaryAck message to node A.
C
LinkSummary message,

&
Otherwise, node B must send a LinkSummaryNack message. If the
parameters
n g are negotiable, the LinkSummaryNack message also needs to

n
contain i the parameters recommended to the peer, so that the peer can
i
a the LinkSummaryNack message containing the new parameters. After
r
resend

e i Tthis step, the adjacent nodes obtain the same link attributes. This interaction
a w is required for each TE link.

Hu
 In the preceding figure, the dotted line indicates that node A keeps sending
linkSummary packets to node B if the response message from node B is not
received.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The routing protocol of Huawei OptiX GCP control plane uses the OSPF extended

Hu

protocol OSPF-TE. The main functions are as follows:
Establish a neighbor relationship.
n


ti o
Create and maintain control links.

ca
Flooding and collecting control link information of the control plane, and
i
if


generating routing information of the control plane, so as to provide a route

rt
for forwarding message packets of the control plane.
e
 C TE link information of the transport plane, and provides
Floods and collects
&
network service topology information for computing service paths.
An ASONgNE establishes a neighbor relationship with an adjacent NE through


i n protocol and transmits routing information between adjacent NEs.

Thein
the OSPF

r a process of neighbor discovery is also the process of establishing a

Tcontrol link. ASON NEs also use OSPF to flood control links and TE links on
i the entire network and create a routing table to support route calculation.
eWhen
a w establishing the neighbor relationship, NEs transmit Hello messages and

Hu to the entire network to generate the control plane topology information. The
construct control links. The Link Status Advertisement (LSA) information is flooded

service plane generates the TE LSA based on the TE link information provided by
the LMP, and floods the information to the entire network to generate the service
plane topology information. CSPF is used to calculate routes. Each NE has a same
Link Status Database (LSDB) to store the LSA information collected from all NEs on
the network.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Control Plane: a w
u to discover neighbors and obtains


The control interface sends Hello packets



the local control link status.

H
o n obtain the topology information of the
ti
Flood Router-LSA packets. All NEs


a
control plane on the entire network.
ic route calculation is performed on the entire
i
After network convergence, f
t the route to another node based on the algorithm,
r


network. Each NE obtains

e
Csends the control packet.
that is, the routing table. Then, the NE queries the routing table to determine
the interface that
&

g
Traditional Plane:
n information, Hello packets do not need to be sent. Instead, the
Unlikeicontrol
inTE link status information is obtained according to the TE link obtained


a
local
r LMP.
T by

ei Flood TE-LSA packets to obtain the network-wide transport plane topology,

w


a which serves as the basis for subsequent service route calculation.

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The Label Switching Path (LSP) is an end-to-end optical switching service path.

Hu reservation protocol based on IP.



Resource Reserved Protocol (RSVP) is a resource



n
A user uses the RSVP protocol to request the network for the buffer and
bandwidth that meet the special QoS
t io requirements. The intermediate node uses
the RSVP protocol to set up a c
i a reservation and maintain the channel on
resource

tif achieve the corresponding QoS.

the data transmission path to
r
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Process of establishing an LSP from node A to node C:
urequest and calculates the optimal



H
The first node receives the service setup
service path based on the topology of the entire network.

o n to complete service establishment.

ti request to the intermediate node, and
The first node drives the host software

ica
Sending a service establishment
f


protocol interactionrt
i
completing service establishment of another node by means of signaling

 C e to establish a reverse cross-connection according to

Node A requests
&
the path information calculated by the LSP, or establishes a forward and
g
reverse cross-connection at the same time, and then sends a Path
n to node B.
i
message

a inAfter receiving the Path message from upstream node B, node B sends
r an acknowledgment Ack message to node A, requesting to set up a


i T
e reverse cross-connection (or establishing a forward and reverse cross

a w connection at the same time), and then sends a Path message to node C.

Hu
 After receiving the Resv message from downstream node C, node B
sends an ACK message to node C, requesting to set up a forward cross-
connection. Then, node B sends a Resv message to node A.
 After receiving the Resv message from downstream node B, node A
sends an acknowledgment Ack message to node B and requests to set
up a forward cross-connection.
 Node A requests to enable alarm monitoring and sends an alarm Path
message to node B. The subsequent process is similar to that of the
Path message.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The process of deleting an LSP from node A to node C is as follows:

Hu switch corresponding to the LSP,



Node A shuts down the alarm monitoring

and then sends a Path message to n node B.

t io from upstream node B, node B sends an



i ca to node A, disables the alarm monitoring

After receiving the Path message

titof the LSP, and then sends a Path message to node C.

acknowledgment Ack message
switch corresponding r
CePath message from upstream node C, node C sends an
After receiving the
&to node B and disables the alarm monitoring function for the


ACK message

n g
LSP.
i
a
Node inC deletes the cross-connection corresponding to the LSP and sends a
r


i TPathErr message to upstream B.

e
a w  After receiving the PathErr message from downstream C, node B sends an

Hu
ACK message to node C, deletes the cross-connection corresponding to the
LSP, and then sends a PathErr message to node A.

 After receiving the PathErr message from downstream B, node A sends an

acknowledgment Ack message to node B and deletes the cross-connection
corresponding to the LSP.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
SLA for ASON services: diamond service, gold service, silver service, copper service,

Hu


and iron service.

o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by

Hu


sending the protocol packets.

o n
After discovering the neighbor NEs, the OSPF protocol floods the information

ti
about the neighbor NEs to other NEs. In the end, every ASON NE in the domain
a
i c
has the information about all ASON NEs in the entire network.

rt if
When an ASON NE is added to an ASON network, other NEs are able to
e


C
automatically discover the new NE by using the OSPF protocol.

&
When an ASON NE is removed from an ASON network (for example, power
g


i n other NEs are able to automatically detect the missing of this NE.
off the NE, remove the system control board, or shut down the physical
in
channel),
a
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ASON supports both traditional SDH services and end-to-end ASON services.

Hu


To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node,

n
bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection
o
ti
at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the network. You can

ca
also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link to constrain
i
the service routing.
rt if

C e
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the
routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to
&
ng
configure services.

ni
The automatically switched optical network (ASON) supports the routing
ai


r
computation policies based on the factors, such as bandwidth, distance, hop count,
T
i
and customized link cost. The user can select different routing computation
e
a w policies based on the service.

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
A shared risk link group (SRLG) is used to improve reliability and speed of service

Hu


rerouting. In an ASON network, SRLG can be configured if some optical fibers are
contained in the same optical cable.
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability

Hu


and network security.

o n
The mesh networking, one of the major networking modes of an ASON system,
provides the following benefits:
ati
i c
if
Flexibility and scalability.
t


e r
Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking
C


does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth
&
resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand.

n g
i
This networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each
in so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network


a
service
r
i Tsecurity.
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Difference between protection and restoration: a w
u capacity pre-allocated among NEs.


Generally, network protection involves Hthe

For example, 1+1 protection is an simple protection scheme, whereas MSP is a
complicated protection scheme.
t io ASON protection is automatically detected
and triggered by NEs andcdoes
i a not involve the management system. The
t
protection switching time
r if is short and is not more than 50 ms. The backup
resources, however,
C e cannot be shared in the network.

&Even the extra capacity of low priority can be used for
Generally, network restoration involves the usage of any usable capacity
among NEs.g
n When a service trail fails, the network automatically searches for
i
in route and switches the services from the faulty route. The algorithm
restoration.
aa
T r new

e i that restores is the same as the algorithm that selects the trail. Restoration

a w requires spare resources in the network for service rerouting. Service

Hu
rerouting involves the computation of routes. The service restoration takes a
relatively long time, which is always in seconds.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough

Hu

resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection.
Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such
as banking, security aviation.
o n
A diamond service is a service with
sink node. It is also called a 1+1a

ti1+1 protection from the source node to the
i f ic the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs
service. For a diamond service, there are two

t
different LSPs available between
should be as separate as rpossible. One is the working LSP and the other is the
C e
protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the

&from the working LSP; otherwise, the sink node receives the
protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node

g
receives the service
n
working andi protection LSPs.
service from the protection LSP. A diamond service supports sharing of the

a in for creation:

T r
Requirements

ei Sufficient
 non-protection resources are available between the source node

a w and the sink node.

Hu
Protection and restoration:


 If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a permanent
1+1 diamond service. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection
LSP.
 If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a
permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability.
 Whenever a fiber cut occurs and no free resources are available, the shared
LSP can be used for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to reroute the service
successfully.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Protection and restoration: a w
u not switched. Rerouting is not


When the protection LSP fails, services Hare

triggered.
o n
When the working LSP fails, t i

a services are switched to the protection LSP for
transmission. Rerouting iiscnot triggered.
r t if
Ctoe restore services.
When both the working and protection LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered to
create a new LSP
&

g
When both the working and protection LSPs fail and no resources are
n the shared LSP can be used for a rerouting 1+1 diamond service to
i
available,

a in the service successfully.

reroute
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Protection and restoration: a w
Huswitched to the protection LSP for


When the working LSP fails, services are

n
transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
o
a
When the protection LSP fails,ti services are not switched. Rerouting is not
ic


triggered.
i f
e rt and protection LSPs fail, rerouting is not triggered.
When both the working
C


&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with
u

diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
H
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links
or non-protection resource of TE links.nWhen a fiber on the path of a gold service


t
is cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching io to protect the service at first. If the
i
multiplex section protection fails,
ca the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the
service.
r t if
Requirements for creation


C e
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available
between the&


source node and the sink node.

g
n protection
i
Multiplex section
in using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section


r a
Supports
Tprotection chain to create gold services.

ei Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear multiplex section

w


a protection chain to create gold services.

Hu Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear multiplex section



protection chain to create gold services.

 Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex
section protection ring to create gold services.
 Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex
section protection ring to create gold services.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds.

Hu

The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low
real-time requirement.

o n
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON
ti

triggers rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service
may be interrupted.
i c a
Requirements for creation:tif


e r resources are available between the source node


C
Sufficient non-protection
and the sink node.
&

g
Service restoration:
n original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to
When ithe
in services.


a
restore
r
T
ei Supports rerouting lockout.
Rerouting:


a w Supports rerouting priority.



Hu


 Supports four rerouting policies:

 Use existing trails whenever possible.
 Do not use existing trails whenever possible.
 No rerouting constraint.
 Use simulated section restoration.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the

Hu


abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.

o n
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do
not reroute and are interrupted.
ati
i c
if
Requirements for creation:
t


e r
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
C


and the sink node.

&
ng
 Service restoration:

ni
ai
 Does not support rerouting.

T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are

Hu

configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during
holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth
resources.
o n

a tiresourcesservice.
An iron service is also called a preemptable Iron services apply non-
protection resources or protection
i f ic and rerouting is not triggered.
of the TE link to create LSPs. When an

rt uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS

LSP fails, services are interrupted
When the iron service


switching occurs,
e
Cthe iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted.
After the MS& is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption,
preemption
n g restoration of the iron service are all reported to the NMS.
and
When ithe iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network


a in are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted

T r service or diamond service. Therefore, the service is interrupted.
resources
silver
ei
Requirements for creation:
w Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available


a
Hu


between the source node and the sink node.

 To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
 Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP.
 Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP.
 Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP.
 Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the

Hu


service protection.

o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as

Hu


ASON server trails.

o n
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The

ti
protection level for the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use
a
i c
the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service.

rt if
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service
e


C
types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be

&
configured manually. There is a tunnel between NEs which can be a diamond

ng
ASON server trail, gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON

ni
server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line

rai
boards and the timeslots of the line boards.

i T

e
After tunnels are created, you can create VC-12, VC-4, or VC-3 lower order services.

a w During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at

Hu
the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.

 Tunnel level: VC-4.

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
The following alarms trigger the LSP rerouting:a w
HuB2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI.


Port-level alarm: R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC,

o
Channel-level alarm: AU_AIS, AU_LOP, n B3_EXC (Optional), and B3_SD
ti


(Optional).
ica
i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory

Hu


routes and therefore requires service optimization. Service optimization involves

n
creating an LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the
o
ti
original LSP to change and optimize the service without interrupting the service.

ca
The service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
i

r tif features:
LSP optimization has the following


Ce
Only manual optimization is supported.

& does not change the protection level of the optimized

The optimization
g


i
service.
n
a in optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations
During
r not allowed.


T are
ei During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting
a w operations, optimization is not allowed.


Hu  The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver,

copper, iron and tunnel services.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from

Hu


different points into the ASON network.

o n
An association service involves associating two ASON services that have different

ti
routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service
a
i c
avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for

rt if
services (dual-source) accessed from two points.


C e
When the resources are not sufficient, the associated trail sharing function is

&
automatically used for the associated services and thus improves the survivability
of the services.gPay attention to the following points:
i n associated trail sharing function is used for the associated services,
When
a in the

T r association of the services cannot be cancelled, or the associated services

the

ei cannot be migrated to non-ASON services. Therefore, you need to optimize

a w the route for the services before cancelling the association and migrating the

H u associated services to non-ASON services.

 Tunnel services do not support the associated trail sharing function.

 Service creation:

 Supports the creation of associated services on the same ingress node or

different ingress nodes.

 Service optimization:

 Supports optimization of associated services.

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Support 4 rerouting polices: a w
u


Use existing trails whenever possible:H

During rerouting, the routenof the new LSP overlaps the original route
t iooriginal route whenever possible. This policy is


and use resources on the

i ca network resource utilization on a network with
if
applicable to improving
insufficient linkrtresources.

Ce trails whenever possible:

Do not use existing
&



g
During rerouting, the route of the new LSP is separated from the
n route whenever possible. This policy is applicable to avoiding
i
original

a inthe service restoration path from original faulty route whenever

T r possible on a network with sufficient link resources.
e i
a w  No rerouting constraint:

Hu
 During rerouting, do not consider the impact of the original LSP and
whether the new path overlaps the original path, and select the current
optimal path based on the traffic engineering policy.

 Use simulated section restoration:

 During rerouting, use the original route whenever possible to compute

a new path in the span where the services are interrupted. If restoration
path computation fails, the policy "Use existing trails whenever
possible" is used instead for rerouting computation.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Do not use the original trail resources. When ASON services are rerouted, do not

Hu


use the original trail resources to create new LSPs, thus improving the service
security.
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
To optimize the network planning, the ASON provides the restoration trail

Hu


presetting function so that the rerouting can be performed according to the

n
requirement of the user when the current service trail fails. In this manner, the
o
ti
controllability of service rerouting is improved.

i ca
The ASON supports presetting of the restoration trail for the diamond, gold, and
if


t
silver ASON services. When an ASON service is rerouted, it is switched to the
r
e
preset trail if the preset trail is available.
C

&
The ASON periodically checks whether the restoration trail is available and the

ng
check interval is 60 minutes by default. If the restoration trail is not available, the

n i
ASON automatically computes a new restoration trail to replace the current

r ai
restoration trail.

i T
e After the replacement, the ASON reports the performance event related to

a w the change of the preset restoration trail.

Hu  When the original restoration trail is not available and there is no substitute
for it, the ASON reports the performance event related to the unavailability
of the preset restoration trail.

 Preset restoration trails do not occupy actual resources.

 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Before service creation and optimization, you can run the pre-computation

Hu


command to query the service path selected by the control plane based on the

n
current routing policy and constraints. In this way, you can select the most
o
ti
appropriate path to create or optimize services.

i ca
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the

Hu

original routes. ASON allows a service to return to its original path after faults on
the original path are rectified.

o n
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the
ti

ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON service,

i ca
the service can be adjusted to the original route automatically or manually.

r t
ASON trails are classified into
 if non-revertive ASON trails, automatically revertive
ASON trails and schedulede revertive ASON trails.
C ASON trails, the resources on the original path are not
For non-revertive
&an ASON service is routed to a new trail. After the fault on the


retained after
g
n whether to revert the service to the original timeslot or port.
original trail is rectified, the service is not reverted to the original trail. You
n i
iautomatically
can specify
a
T r
For
 revertive ASON trails, if the fault on the original trail is

ei automatically reverted to the original trail after the specified WTR time. You
rectified after an ASON service is routed to a new trail, the service is

a w can manually revert the service to the original trail.

Hu For scheduled revertive ASON trails, a fault of the original route is cleared


after the rerouting of a service in the scheduled reversion mode, you can set
scheduled revertive time to enable the service to revert at a specified time.
 Services configured on revertive ASON trails (including automatically
revertive ASON trails and scheduled revertive ASON trails) can be forcibly
reverted to the original trail no matter whether the original trail has
recovered.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the

Hu


service uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared

n
mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration.
o
ti
If only partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these

ca
resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other
i
rt if
resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.


C e
The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features:


&
Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh

ng
restoration trail.

n i
ai
 A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at

T r different levels.

e i For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the
w


a revertive attribute cannot be changed.

Hu  The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected
resources of TE links.

 For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not
set the preset restoration trail.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
The ASON software supports the conversion between ASON services, and between

Hu


ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service

n
conversion, which would not interrupt the services.
o


ati
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections.

i c
if
Currently, ASON software supports:
t


e r
Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections.
C



&
Migration between gold services and permanent connections.

ing
Migration between silver services and permanent connections.

i nMigration between copper services and permanent connections.

r a


i T  Migration between iron services and permanent connections.

e
a w  Migration between tunnel services and server trail.

Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Currently, Huawei's ASON software supports: a w
u


Migration between a diamond, gold, H

 silver, copper service.

Migration between a diamond, gold,

o n silver, copper tunnels.
ti


ica
i f
e rt
C
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Merging an ASON network with a traditional SDH network:
u network to form a hybrid


An ASON network can be used with an

 HSDH
n
network. In this case, an end-to-end service can be managed and created in a
centralized manner.
t io
You can also create a PCic
a
if
service type on an ASON network. After the service
tresources


type is created, some

e r are reserved by the PC service and are no

C
longer allocated by the ASON software.

&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
1. Reference answer: diamond, gold, sliver, copper, iron.

Hu multiple service types of



2. Reference answer: the ASON network supports



different levels and different protection n types. The traditional network has a single
service and protection.
t io
i ca
r tif
Ce
&
n g
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
If multiple 2 Mbit/s services share distributed VC-4 trails, the services cannot be

Hu


protected against node failures.

o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
2M ASON services emerge to address the previously mentioned disadvantages of

Hu


traditional ASON services. With 2M ASON services deployed, multiple 2 Mbit/s

n
services can share VC-4 and be protected against node failures, implementing 2
o
ti
Mbit/s service-based protection as well as increasing the bandwidth usage.

i ca
2M ASON services support ASON rerouting. After an intermediate node fails, 2M
if


t
ASON services can automatically select a proper VC-12 virtual TE link, and
r
e
therefore are protected against a node failure.
C
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Normal: a w
Hu


 Service 1: NE1–>NE2–>NE3

Service 2: NE1–>NE2–>NE6
o n
ti


Service 3: NE4–>NE2–>NE3
i ca
if


 Fault 1:
e rt

C
Service 1: NE1–>NE5–>NE2–>NE3
&
Service 2: NE1–>NE5–>NE2–>NE6
g


Servicein


i n 3: NE4–>NE2–>NE3
r
Fault 2:a
TService 1: NE1–>NE5–>NE3


e i

a w Service 2: NE1–>NE5–>NE6
u


H  Service 3: NE4–>NE5–>NE3

 Fault 3:

 Service 1: NE1–>NE2–>NE5–>NE3

 Service 2: NE1–>NE2–>NE6

 Service 3: NE4–>NE2–>NE6–>NE3
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
ASON networks can provide reliable transmission planes for differential protection

Hu

services because the networks meet the requirements on transmission paths and
delays and protect the services against multiple fiber breaks.

o n
The forward and backward paths are consistent.
ti determine the current sampling interval based



a
Differential protection devices
ic If the
on the transmission delay.
i f forward and backward paths are inconsistent,

data errors. Whenethe rt calculated current

the calculated unidirectional channel delay is incorrect, resulting in sampled
difference exceeds the threshold,
C
the differential protection devices automatically shut down the transmission
& causing blackouts.
line for protection,

i ng
The service interruption time in the case of trail changes is longer than 100 ms.
When i n detecting an exception on the working trail, differential protection
r a


devices switch services to the protection trail. If the service trail change time
T
ei change and still sample data at the interval before the change. As a result,
is less than 100 ms, the differential protection devices cannot detect the

a w the sampled data is incorrect. When the current difference exceeds the
Hu
threshold, the differential protection devices automatically shut down the
transmission line for protection, causing blackouts.
 The unidirectional transmission delay is shorter than 10 ms.
 In order to meet the buffer limit requirements for differential protection
devices.
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Normal: NE1<->NE4. a w
Hu


 Fault 1: NE1<->NE2<->NE5<->NE4.

o
Fault 2: NE1<->NE2<->NE3<->NE6<->NE5<->NE4.n
ti



ca
Fault 3: NE1<->NE2<->NE3<->NE6<->NE8<->NE7<->NE4.
i
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
Answer: a w
u


 The forward and backward paths are H consistent.

o
The service interruption time in the n case of trail changes is longer than 100
ti


ms.
a
ic delay is shorter than 10 ms.
i f
rt
 The unidirectional transmission

C e
&
n g
i
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 n
tio
ic a
i f
rt
Ce
&
ing
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
i c
rt if
C e
&
i ng
n
rai
i T
e
a w
Hu
 Recommendations
 Huawei Learning Website
 http://learning.huawei.com/en

 Huawei e-Learning
https://ilearningx.huawei.com/portal/#/portal/ebg/51

n
tio
c a
Huawei Certification t i fi


e r
C
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_31
&


ng
&lang=en
n i
 Find Training
rai
T

ei
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_trai
a w
Hu
ningsearch&lang=en

More Informationn
it o
i c a
tif
 er
Huawei learning APP
C
&
n g
ini
a
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

版权所有© 2018 华为技术有限公司